JP2024052893A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To appropriately detect and notify abnormalities. [Solution] When the power is turned on with the medal count clear button operated, the number of medals played is cleared and the medal count clear timer is set to an initial value, and if a RAM abnormality is determined when the power is turned on, the number of medals played is cleared and the power recovery abnormality timer is set to an initial value, and if a power outage occurs while the power recovery abnormality timer is timing and then the power is restored, the power recovery abnormality timer is reset to its initial value. [Selected Figure] Fig. 80

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a slot machine, a game starts when a start command device (start lever) is operated after a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and multiple rows of reels with multiple symbols arranged on the outer periphery rotate. When the reels are stopped by using a reel stop device (stop button) to stop the rotation, and a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up on an active line, the machine generally transitions to a special game state (a game state in which the probability of winning a small prize or the like is higher than usual) that is more profitable for the player than the normal game state. Here, in a slot machine, images for presentation to increase the interest of the game may be displayed on a display such as an LCD in sync with the rotation and stopping of the reels, and many of these machines are configured so that when the reel stop device is operated, the player can enjoy predicting the outcome of the game by comparing the symbols displayed on the reels with the presentation images displayed on the display.

JP 2020-039492 A JP 2020-018631 A

There is a demand for gaming machines that can transmit appropriate information to outside the gaming machine or receive information from outside the gaming machine, and this type of gaming machine is required to properly detect and report various abnormalities, including abnormalities related to the transmission and reception of information from outside the gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A predetermined operating member;
and an internal drawing means;
The total gaming value number can be stored,
When the power supply is newly turned on while the predetermined operation member is being operated, the total game value number is cleared and the first timer is set to an initial value.
a power-off process is executed by detecting an event in which the supply of power is cut off while the first timer is timing, and then, when the power is newly turned on in a state in which the predetermined operating member is not operated, the first timer is cleared;
When it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred in the RAM after the power is newly turned on, the total game value number is cleared and the second timer is set to an initial value.
This gaming machine is characterized by being configured to detect an event in which the power supply is cut off while the second timer is timing, execute power-off processing, and then, when the power is turned on again, set an initial value to the second timer.

The gaming machine according to this aspect can properly detect and report abnormalities.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the door open. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of a medal insertion slot in a slot machine. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of a medal payout device in a reel type gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications for a slot machine. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in a slot machine. FIG. 7 shows a list 1 of symbol combinations for a slot machine. FIG. 8 is a list 2 of symbol combinations in a slot machine. FIG. 9 is a list 3 of symbol combinations in a slot machine. FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in a slot machine. FIG. 11 is a list of the appearance rates of small winning combinations, replay winning combinations, and bonus winning combinations in a slot machine. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the overall electrical configuration of the slot machine. FIG. 13 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing how an unrecoverable error is processed on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 16 is a flowchart (first page) of the game progress control process on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 17 is a flowchart (second page) of the game progress control process on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 18 is a flowchart (third page) of the game progress control process on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the process of adding game numbers on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing (first page) on the main control board side in a slot machine. Figure 22 is a flowchart (second page) of the AT state transition control processing on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third page) of the AT state transition control processing on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 28 is a RT state transition diagram in a slot machine. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control processing on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in a slot machine. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game zone transition control process on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the reel drive control processing on the main control board side in a reel type gaming machine. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel drive control processing on the main control board side in a reel type gaming machine. FIG. 35 is an image diagram showing the rotational movement of reels in a slot machine. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the main control board when the power is turned off in a slot machine. FIG. 37 is an image diagram showing the push order display in a slot machine. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the sub-side program start processing on the sub-control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the sub-control board side when the sub-side power supply is cut off in a slot machine. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing one command processing on the sub-control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the process of determining the presentation related information when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the process of determining whether or not to execute a battle effect on the sub-control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the AT performance determination process on the sub-control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the process of determining whether or not a revival is to be performed on the sub-control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the sub-control board when the start lever is operated in a slot machine. Figure 48 is a flowchart of processing during AT when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of specialized premonition processing on the sub-control board side when the start lever is operated in a slot machine. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the special processing for adding extra jackpots when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in a reel-type gaming machine. Figure 51 is a flowchart of the internal processing of the advantageous BB when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in a reel-type gaming machine. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the sub-control board when a first drum stop is accepted in a reel-type gaming machine. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the processing performed when the second reel stop is accepted on the sub-control board side in a reel-type gaming machine. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the process for determining the effects related to the third drum stop on the sub-control board side in a reel-type gaming machine. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the sub-control board when a third drum stop is accepted in a reel-type gaming machine. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process on the sub-control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process on the sub-control board side in a slot machine. FIG. 58 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to a slot machine. FIG. 59 shows an example of a display of a performance display device applicable to a slot machine. FIG. 60 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to a slot machine. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side that can be applied to a slot machine. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the ratio calculation process in the second ROM/RAM area applicable to a slot machine. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the ratio display process in the second ROM/RAM area applicable to a slot machine. FIG. 64 shows an example of a display of a performance display device applicable to a slot machine. FIG. 65 is a functional block diagram of the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 66 shows an example of the connection cable communication content for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 67 is an example of a gaming machine information notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 68 is an example of a counting notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 69 is an example of a lending notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine of this embodiment. Figure 70 is an example of a loan receipt result response command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 71 shows a flow of a gaming machine information notification command for a medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 72 shows a flow of a lending notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 73 shows a flow of a lending notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 74 shows a flow of a lending notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 75 shows a flow of the counting notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 76 shows a flow regarding a rental communication abnormality in this embodiment. FIG. 77 shows a flow regarding a rental communication abnormality in this embodiment. FIG. 78 shows a flow regarding a rental communication abnormality in this embodiment. Figure 79 is a main flowchart on the payout control board side in the medal-less gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 80 is a main flowchart on the payout control board side in the medal-less gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 81 is a flowchart of the processing when power is turned off on the payout control board side in the medalless gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 82 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the payout control board side in the medalless gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 83 is a flowchart of the game medal count check process on the payout control board side in the medalless gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 84 is a flowchart of the gaming machine information management process on the payout control board side in the medalless gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 85 is a flowchart of the HC/fraud monitoring information setting process on the payout control board side in the medalless gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 86 is a flowchart of the counting control process on the payout control board in the medal-less gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 87 is a flowchart of the counting button check process on the payout control board in the medalless gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 88 is a flowchart of the loan notification receiving process on the payout control board side in the medalless gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 89 is a flowchart of the communication abnormality check process on the payout control board side in the medalless gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 90 is a flowchart of the lending control process on the payout control board side in the medalless gaming machine of the second embodiment.

The medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "medal-less gaming machine" or simply the "gaming machine") generally does not use gaming medals (including physical medals or metal pieces for detection by a sensor), but instead uses points. For the sake of convenience in explaining this medal-less gaming machine, we will first explain the reel-type gaming machine P (hereinafter simply referred to as the "reel-type gaming machine P") that uses gaming medals, and then explain the medal-less reel-type gaming machine by citing the configuration of this reel-type gaming machine P.

First, the meaning of each term in the slot machine P in this specification will be explained. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by electronic computer, sometimes called a lottery) to determine the content of a game in the slot machine P, and includes pseudo-random numbers in addition to random numbers in the narrow sense (for example, random numbers include hard random numbers, built-in random numbers generated by a main control chip including a CPU, and pseudo-random numbers include software random numbers). For example, so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the results of a game, specifically, "winning random numbers" related to special roles and winning roles (small roles, replay roles) for transitioning to special games, etc. can be mentioned. A "CPU" is synonymous with a well-known term in the industry, and is not limited in any way to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) or processing performance used. "Power interruption (power cut)" refers to the power supply voltage supplied to the reel type gaming machine P dropping below a certain level, regardless of whether the power switch provided on the reel type gaming machine P is operated or not, and includes the cutoff of the power supply due to an unforeseen event such as damage to the power supply unit or a power outage. "ROM" is synonymous with what is well known in the industry, and stores information physically (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, if the element configuration is conductive, it becomes "1", and if the element configuration is not conductive, it becomes "0"). "RAM" is synonymous with what is well known in the industry, and stores information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, if the charge is stored, it becomes "1", and if the charge is not stored, it becomes "0". Note that it is generally configured so that a backup power source is supplied to some or all of the data stored in the RAM in the event of a power cut). Examples of "game states" include special game states (so-called big win games, which include bonus games, first-class BB, second-class BB, etc.) in which game medals are easy to obtain and are advantageous to players, replay probability variable game states (RT states) in which the winning rate of replay roles is higher (or lower) than in normal game states in which the winning rate of replay roles is a predetermined value, AT (assist time) states in which the reel stopping order and stopping positions for winning roles can be notified, and ART (assist replay time) states in which the RT state and the AT state are combined. In addition, even in normal game states, there are high probability normal game states, low probability normal game states, etc. (referred to as lottery states in this example) in which the lottery probability for transition to the RT state, AT state, and ART state is different. In addition, there is no problem if the game state is combined {Furthermore, there is no problem if these game states and functions (for example, the lottery for transition to the AT state and the output of the notification instruction related to the reel stop order, etc.) are all implemented on the main control board side that controls the game progress}. In addition, in this example, the state related to the AT and the RT state are described separately, and the RT state is called "RT1" and the state related to the AT is called "normal game state", etc., but the RT state and the state related to the AT may be collectively called the state related to the ART, and the state related to the ART may be called "normal game state", etc. "Winning role" is the type of condition device (or condition device number) that has been won by internal lottery (sometimes called internal lottery). "Notification state" is the state related to the AT that can execute the push order navigation described later, and even in a game in which a condition device in which the push order navigation is not executed because the winning role does not differ depending on the reel stop order is won, if the state related to the AT is in a state in which the push order navigation can be executed, it is configured to be "notification state". The "counter value" is also called the "number of possible notification games" and is the number of remaining AT games or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the "number of possible notification games" is 1 or more (including the game that has become "0"), the push order navigation, which will be described later, can be executed. In addition, as the "number of possible notification games", the difference in the number of game media (the number of paid out minus the number of inserted) obtained based on the winning of a small role (mainly, the push order bell role) or the number of times the push order bell role is won may be adopted. In addition, the "special notification state" is the state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to the AT, and is called the "addition special state" in this example. In addition, the "specific condition" is a condition that can subtract the AT counter value, and for example, the specific condition is that one game is finished, a predetermined role (for example, the push order bell role) is won, etc. A "first-class special device" is a device that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability of the condition device related to winning for each specified number activating, and is activated in a predetermined case and can continue to operate until the result of the game is obtained not more than 12 times, and is sometimes called RB (regular bonus). A "first-class special device continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the first-class special device, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and ends its operation in a predetermined case, and is sometimes called BB (big bonus) or first-class BB. A "second-class special device" is a device that activates the condition device related to winning regardless of the result of the lottery, and is activated in a predetermined case and ends its operation when the result of one game is obtained, and is sometimes called CB (challenge bonus). The "second-class special consecutive operation device" is a device that can operate the second-class special device consecutively, and operates when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and ends its operation when a predetermined event occurs. It is sometimes called MB (middle bonus) or second-class BB. The "normal device" is a device that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning every specified number, or increases the probability that a condition device related to winning every specified number will operate. It operates when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and ends its operation when the result of one game is obtained. It is sometimes called SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is a configuration in which a first-class BB role is considered to have JACINed when it wins, and the first-class BB is always in RB during its execution. The "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which non-RB and RB are repeatedly executed during the execution of the first-class BB. Additionally, an "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in a state in which reel-in control that may be performed after a stop operation is performed is not performed, and the reel stops at the closest possible reel position from the reel position where the stop operation was received. An "all CB type" is a configuration in which the reel is always in CB when the second type BB is executed. A "CB transition lottery type" is a configuration in which the reel alternates between non-CB and CB when the second type BB is executed.

The following embodiment is merely an example, and is not limited to the following aspects in terms of the location and function of each means, the order of each step in various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the names of means responsible for the processing of each step, etc. Furthermore, the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples should not be interpreted as being limited to being applied to a specific thing, and any combination is acceptable. For example, a modified example of one embodiment should be understood to be a modified example of another embodiment, and even if one modified example and another modified example are described independently, it should be understood that a combination of the one modified example and the other modified example is also described.

Before explaining each component, we will first provide an overview of the slot machine P. Each component will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the reel type gaming machine P will be described with reference to Figure 1 (and Figure 2 for a portion of the configuration). The reel type gaming machine P is mainly composed of a front door, a rear box (also called a cabinet or base), and a reel unit, hopper device, power supply unit E, main control board M (a board on which a main control chip C including a CPUMC is mounted), and sub-control board S (a board on which a sub-control chip SC including a CPUSC is mounted). Each of these will be described in order below.

<Front Door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for making the game state visible, a mechanism for making the game medium input possible, a mechanism for operating the reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, as mechanisms for making the game state visible, a reel window D160, an insertion number indicator D210, a start lamp D180, a replay lamp D290, an insertion possible lamp D300, a special game state indicator D250, a credit number indicator D200, a payout number indicator (push sequence indicator) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push sequence indicator D270), an AT counter value indicator D280, a favorable zone indicator YH, and the like are attached. In addition, as mechanisms for making it possible to insert game media and input the number of bets (number of bets), a medal insertion slot D170 and a bet button D220 are attached, and as a mechanism for making it possible to pay out the inserted game media, a settlement button D60 is attached. And, as mechanisms for operating the reels, a start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached. The slot machine P is provided with an operation console that protrudes toward the player and on which a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub-input button SB, a cross key SB2, etc. are attached. Each element will be described in detail below.

<Mechanism for visually checking the game status>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for making the game status visible will be described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member made of synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be seen through the reel window D160. The insertion number indicator D210 is composed of three LEDs, and is configured so that the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (the number of medals required to start one game) are lit. Specifically, the insertion number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs (lamps), namely, a 1 bet lamp D211, a 2 bet lamp D212, and a 3 bet lamp D213. When one game medal is bet, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off, and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned off. When two game medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit, and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned off. When three game medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit, and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on (this is not the case in the next game in which the replay is stopped, and details will be described later). The start lamp D180 is composed of an LED, and is configured to be lit when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is accepted), and to be turned off when the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (operation is not accepted). The replay lamp D290 is made of an LED and is turned on when the replay is stopped and turned off when the next game after the replay is stopped is completed. The insertion possible lamp D300 is turned on (or may be blinking) when the insertion of the game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 is valid or the operation of the bet button D220 is valid, and is turned off when the insertion of the game medal is invalid or the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. The special game state display device D250 is made of a 7-segment display and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. The special game state display device D250 may be omitted. In this case, the total number of payouts is displayed on the performance display device S40 (sometimes referred to as the second information display unit) described later, so that the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, and the reel type gaming machine P is user-friendly. The credit number display device D200 is configured with a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (credit number) stored in the gaming machine as the medals held by the player. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is configured with a 7-segment display, and is configured to notify the player of the most advantageous reel stop order in a game in which a condition device in which the winning combination can differ depending on the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (the stop order of the left stop button D41, the center stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) is established (a so-called push order role (sometimes called a role with a push order), but when the winning combination or the symbol combination displayed is different, the profit rate (the number of payouts, the RT state thereafter, etc.) given to the player is generally configured to differ) (the notification is sometimes called push order navigation). In this way, the payout number display device (push sequence display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays: the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop sequence that will be the most profitable for the player, and the display mode is such that the player does not mistake which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. In addition, the AT counter value display device D280 is configured to be able to display the number of games that can stay in the AT-related state (in this example, it may also be called the push sequence navigation state or the notification game, and the details will be described later) that is advantageous for the player and is guaranteed when the game progresses according to the push sequence navigation display displayed on the push sequence display device D270 (sometimes called the first information display unit) among the states related to the AT (details will be described later). In addition, the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided, and in such a configuration, the number of games that can stay in the AT state can be displayed on the performance display device S40, so that the player can recognize the number of games in which the advantageous AT-related state is guaranteed, and the reel type gaming machine P can be made user-friendly. Furthermore, the payout number display device (push sequence display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices: a payout number display device and a push sequence display device.

The advantageous zone indicator YH is composed of an LED, and is configured to light up when it is in the "advantageous zone" and to turn off when it is not in the "advantageous zone" (the timing of lighting and turning off will be described later). Here, in the reel type gaming machine P, as in the conventional reel type gaming machine, it is possible to adopt a special gaming state (a so-called jackpot game, which corresponds to what are called bonus games, first type BB, second type BB, etc.) in which it is easy to obtain gaming medals and is advantageous for the player, a replay probability variable gaming state (RT state) in which the winning rate of the replay role is higher (or lower) than in the normal gaming state in which the winning rate of the replay role is a predetermined value, an AT (assist time) state in which the stopping order and stopping position of the reels for winning the winning role can be notified, an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined, etc., but in addition to these "game states", it is possible to set one of three "game zones", namely, a "normal zone", a "standby zone", and a "advantageous zone". In this example, a "standby section" is not set, and either a "normal section" or an "advantageous section" is set as a game section. Among these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than other "game sections", and for example, the "game state" being in an AT state or an ART state is associated with the "advantageous section". That is, when the "game state" is in an AT state or an ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. As described later, the setting control of the "game section" is also performed on the main control board side that controls the game progress, similar to the setting control of the "game state", so that whether the game progress is relatively advantageous to the player or not can be conveyed to the player without any lies by the lighting/unlighting status of the advantageous section indicator YH. As described below, if the "advantageous zone" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit game number (for example, 1500 games), the "normal zone" is forcibly set, but at that time, the remaining AT-related state is also forcibly terminated (information for maintaining the AT state is cleared and initialized), so that the change in the set "game zone" can also affect the transition of the "game state", and this automatically prevents the "game state" such as the AT state or ART state, which have a relatively high degree of design freedom, from significantly increasing gambling. As described above, if the "advantageous zone" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit game number (for example, 1500 games), the "normal zone" is forcibly set, that is, the "advantageous zone" ends, but the end condition of the "advantageous zone" is not limited to this. The end conditions for the "favorable zone" in the slot machine P are "execution of one push order navigation that can obtain the minor role with the largest payout number among the minor roles that make up the push order role (role with push order) (for example, if the minor roles that make up the push order role are 7, 3, and 1, the push order navigation that can obtain the largest payout number of 7 is the push order navigation that can obtain the push order role with 7 or 1 coins depending on the push order, and if there is a push order role that can obtain 3 coins depending on the push order, the push order navigation that can obtain 3 coins does not fall under the push order navigation referred to here)" or "winning either BB, RB, or MB" and "any end condition (non-winning in a 40G 1-set loop lottery (AT), fixed 32G has elapsed (false premonition), etc.)" or "1500G of the favorable zone" is satisfied. In addition, in the case of specifications where there is no push order bell role (for example, specifications where there is a replay push order to transition to the RT state, but there is no minor role with a different payout amount depending on the push order), the condition for ending the advantageous zone of "one push order navigation that can obtain the minor role with the largest payout amount" is excluded. In addition, since the minor roles that make up the push order role are composed of minor roles including minor roles corresponding to 11 coin roles and minor roles corresponding to 1 coin roles, "one push order navigation that can obtain the minor role with the largest payout amount" refers to announcing a push order that can obtain 11 medals (11 coin roles can be won).

<Mechanism for enabling input of gaming media>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for enabling input of the game medium will be described. The medal insertion port D170 is an insertion port for game medals, and when the medals are in a medal receiving state, the game medals inserted into the insertion port are guided into the game machine. In addition, the game machine is provided with an insertion reception sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, and is configured to detect the inserted medals as bet medals when it is determined that the game medals guided into the game machine have been inserted normally. In addition, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to bet the stored medals (credit medals) by operation. In addition, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to pay off the stored medals (credit medals) and/or bet medals to the player by operation. In addition, the game medals paid off by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and configured to be able to start the operation of the reels by the operation. Also, the stop button D40 is provided with a left stop button D41, a center stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and configured to be able to stop the operation of the reels sequentially by operating each stop button.

<Other mechanisms installed in the front door DU>
Next, the main parts of the other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to the perspective view of the inside of the reel type gaming machine P with the front door DU open in Fig. 2. The front door DU is provided with a mechanism for increasing the interest of the game, such as a performance display device S40 for displaying performances such as advance notice performances and background performances, a game effect lamp D26 (not shown) that can be lit in various lighting modes, a door board D for relaying signals, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, a speaker S20 for outputting sound, a middle panel (middle decorative panel), an upper panel D130, and a lower panel D140, which are members formed of synthetic resin, etc. The performance display device S40 is attached to the upper part of the back side of the front door DU so that the display unit that displays the performances, etc. can be seen through the see-through area formed in the upper panel. The decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have light sources that emit light according to the progress of the game on the reel type gaming machine P, and the decorative lamp unit D150 is provided on each of the right and left sides of the lower panel D140, and the LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right and left sides of the upper panel D130 (the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 are sometimes collectively referred to as the lamp unit). In addition, a door board D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back of the front door DU, and this door board D has the function of a relay board that receives input signals such as the stop button D40, start lever D50, and settlement button D60, and outputs the input signals directly or after processing them to the main control board M described later. In addition, a medal selector DS, which corresponds to the medal insertion port D170 and is provided near the door board D on the back side of the front door DU, detects medals inserted from the medal insertion port D170 and performs simple authenticity checks, guides proper medals to a hopper H40 described later, and returns improper medals to a medal tray D230 described later. Furthermore, a speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right sides below the door board D. The middle panel is the upper side of the operation table and the lower side of the upper panel D130, and is a panel portion including the reel window described above. In addition, the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB2 attached to the operation table D190 described above are members used for operations on the menu screen described later, button rapid-fire performance on the sub-control board S side (by rapid-fire operation of the sub-input button SB, a performance regarding whether or not a bonus has been won) and mini-games (for example, a performance of the success or failure of entering the "AT state"), etc. In addition, the front door DU of the reel type gaming machine P is provided with a medal tray D230 that receives the game medals (or may be simply called medals) discharged from the discharge port D240, and a door switch D80 that can detect the open/closed state of the front door DU. In addition, the front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and is configured to be able to open the front door DU by inserting a key (door key) that matches the shape of the keyhole D260 into the keyhole D260 {and twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}. Furthermore, it is configured to be able to release an error state (door opening error, etc.) by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 {and twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}. In addition, a bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220, and the bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 lights up (or flashes), allowing the player to perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is valid. In addition, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (provided for each of the three stop buttons, the left stop button D41, the center stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). The stop button lamp S60 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the player can recognize that the operation of the stop button D40 is valid by the presence or absence of lighting (or blinking) and/or the lighting color of the stop button lamp S60. Note that since only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the valid stop button D40 is lit in the lighting color corresponding to the valid stop button D40, for example, when the left stop button D41 is invalid, the center stop button D42 is valid, and the right stop button D43 is valid, the lighting state of the three stop button lamps S60 can be different from each other, such as the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 being turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the center stop button D42 being turned on, and the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the right stop button D43 being turned on. In addition, by varying the lighting color or lighting pattern of the stop button lamp S60 (such as lighting/flashing, or slow/fast flashing), it may be possible to configure it so that it is easier for the player to determine which stop button should currently be operated to stop a game in which push order navigation is executed. For example, when all reels are spinning and a push order bell has been hit in which the push order of "left → middle → right" is the correct answer (maximum payout number), the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button may be made to flash in white, and the stop button lamps corresponding to the middle stop button and the right stop button may be made to light up in blue, and if the player then operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button may be made to turn off, the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button may be made to flash in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button may be made to light up in blue.

Next, the rear box (also called the cabinet or base) and each device installed in the rear box will be described. A reel unit is attached in the approximate center of the rear box so that a part of it can be seen through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source for the reel M50 (such as a stepping motor). The reel M50 also includes a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel section is formed from a synthetic resin or the like, and multiple patterns are drawn on the outer circumference of the reel section (on the reel band MO). Each reel section is configured to be able to rotate and stop based on the operation of each stop button in the start lever D50 and the stop button D40. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53, and when the LEDs are lit, the light that passes through the outer periphery of the reel section makes it appear as if the outer periphery of the reel section is lit. Also, above the reel M50, a reel board K (described later) for driving each reel (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53) is stored.

Above the reels M50, a main control board M, which controls the entire game, is stored, and to the left of the reels M50, a sub-control board S, which controls various effects using the effect display device S40, LED lamp unit S10, speaker S20, etc., shown in FIG. 1, is stored. The main control board M is connected to a setting key switch M20, which is used to execute the setting change device control process (to change the settings), and a setting/reset button M30, which can change the setting value and reset errors. Although the setting key switch M20 and the setting/reset button M30 are not shown in FIG. 2, they may be provided in an appropriate position on the board of the main control board M (i.e., they may be provided in a position that is difficult to access manually without opening the front door DU).

Below the reel M50 are a hopper H40 that collects inserted game medals, a medal payout device H that pays out the game medals, and a power supply board E that supplies power to the entire reel type game machine P. Game medals paid out from the medal payout device H pass through a coin shooter D90 and are paid out from a discharge port D240. In addition, a power switch E10 for turning on the power to the reel type game machine P is also provided on the front of the power supply board E (sometimes referred to as a power supply unit E). Details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a perspective view showing the path (selector) of the game medal inserted into the medal insertion port D170 inside the reel type game machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion acceptance sensor D10s near the door board D, which serves as a passage for the game medal inserted from the medal insertion port D170, and a coin shooter D90 for guiding the game medal to the discharge port D240 is provided below the insertion acceptance sensor D10s. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s has a function of sorting the game medal inserted from the medal insertion port D170 mainly based on the size, and has a function of accepting only the game medal that meets the standard size, and the medal (or other foreign object) that is determined not to meet the standard size by this function is configured to be paid back to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. When a player inserts a medal before operating the start lever D50 (when medal insertion is enabled), the medal is selected by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, and only medals that meet the standard are inserted into the hopper H40, while medals that do not meet the standard are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, when a medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (when medal insertion is not enabled), the inserted medal is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 regardless of whether it meets the standard. In addition, a sensor related to medal insertion, which will be described later in detail, is provided inside the insertion acceptance sensor D10s (at the back of the flow path), and when a medal that meets the dimensional standard passes through, it is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M, which will be described later.

Next, the sensor related to medal insertion will be described in detail. A game medal inserted into the medal insertion port D170 first passes through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when a game medal passes through, two protruding mechanisms are pressed down, turning on, and the game medal can pass through the passage normally. In addition, with this configuration, when a foreign object that is not a game medal (a foreign object that does not meet the standards, for example, an object with a smaller diameter than a game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are not pressed down. Such a medal cannot maintain an upright state, so it cannot pass through the passage (the medal falls down), and as described above, it is paid out to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. In addition, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine that an error has occurred (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off) even if the on time continues for a predetermined time or more.

When a gaming medal passes through the blocker D100 normally, it passes the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s immediately after passing through. This insertion sensor (the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s) is composed of two sensors (placed adjacent to each other with a distance smaller than the standard diameter of the gaming medal), and is configured to be able to detect various errors by monitoring the on/off status of each sensor (such as the order in which the on/off combinations of the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s change) and the time they are on/off.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail using the front view and top view of the medal payout device H in Fig. 4. The medal payout device H operates when the settlement button is operated or the game medals are paid out due to winning in a state where there are credits (game medals electronically stored inside the gaming machine) or bet medals (medals inserted to start a game). When operating, the hopper motor H80 is first driven to rotate the disk H50 around the disk rotation axis H50a. The rotation causes the game medals in the medal payout device H to displace the discharge urging means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 to the discharge port D240. Furthermore, the dispensing sensor (first dispensing sensor H10s and second dispensing sensor H20s) is composed of two sensors, and is configured to be able to detect various errors by monitoring the on/off status of each sensor (such as the order in which the on/off combinations of the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s transition) and the time they are on/off. More specifically, for example, when passing through the game medal outlet H60 normally, the displacement of the release biasing means H70 causes a sensor state transition from a state where the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off to a state where the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off → a state where the first payout sensor H10s = on and the second payout sensor H20s = off → a state where the first payout sensor H10s = on and the second payout sensor H20s = on → a state where the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = on → a state where the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = on → a state where the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = on → a state where the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off is detected. Therefore, an example can be given of a configuration in which an error is generated if a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected.

Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the slot machine P. The slot machine P has a prescribed number (maximum number of game medals that can be bet in one game) of 3, the number of frames on the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20 frames each, and the effective line for winning is one line of "the upper left reel M51, the middle middle reel M52, and the lower right reel M53". The maximum number of payouts is 11, and the minimum number of payouts is 1 (the correspondence between winning combinations and payout numbers will be described later). In addition, the priority order of winning (priority order of drawing) is "replay combination → small combination (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus", and for example, if a replay combination and a bonus are established at the same time, the symbol combination that becomes the replay combination is displayed and the bonus cannot be won. Also, when bells and watermelons are formed, if the stop button is pressed at a position where both can be drawn in (a position within four frames from the winning stop position), the small winning combination with the larger number of coins is drawn in first. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the number of frames on each reel is changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of the effective lines is changed (for example, changed to 5 lines with 3 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines, or changed to 1 line on the bottom of the left reel M51, the middle of the center reel M52, and the top of the right reel M53). In addition, when a push order minor prize that gives different benefits to the player depending on the push order is won, the pull-in control is such that when the predetermined correct push order is used, priority is given to pulling in minor prizes with a large payout number (number priority control), and when the push order is used incorrectly that differs from the correct push order, control is performed to pull in symbols that have the highest chance of winning (symbols with the highest chance of winning among multiple symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed) (positioned within four frames from the stop operation) (number priority control).

Next, FIG. 6 shows a list of reel arrangements of the slot machine P. As shown in the figure, the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53 each have 20 frames (numbers 0 to 19), and there are 10 types of symbols: "Black Seven", "White Seven", "Sheep", "Blank", "Bell", "Replay A", "Replay B", "Watermelon A", "Watermelon B", and "Cherry". Here, "blank" is a symbol included in a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination, just like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute a winning combination. For example, a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination that includes "blank" is "Watermelon B, Replay A, Blank", which is Replay 02. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem if the types of symbols are increased, decreased, or changed.

Next, Figures 7 to 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 for the slot machine P. There are multiple symbol combinations for each condition device, and as described below, one of the symbol combinations is displayed stopped on an active line (the one line mentioned above) depending on the stopping order and stopping positions of the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53. Even if the same type of symbol is not lined up on an active line, it is configured so that the same symbols are likely to line up in a row on a line other than the active line as seen by the player (in the case of watermelon, it is configured so that three watermelon symbols line up in a straight line somewhere on the reel, such as lined up in a horizontal line in the middle row). In addition, there are three symbol combinations that result in a Type 1 BB role (a role continuous operation device related to the so-called Type 1 special role, but hereinafter may be simply referred to as a BB role): "Sheep, Sheep, Sheep", which is Type 1 BB-A (RB-A is continuously operated and ends with the payout of more than 264 coins), "Black Seven, Black Seven, Black Seven", which is Type 1 BB-B (RB-B is continuously operated and ends with the payout of more than 132 coins), and "White Seven, White Seven, White Seven", which is Type 1 BB-C (RB-B is continuously operated and ends with the payout of more than 132 coins). In addition, when the first type BB role is won and BB is executed (the role is activated), during the execution of the BB, one lottery table is referred to in all games during the BB to draw winning roles (small roles, replay roles) other than the role (this is a method in which the table referred to when drawing roles during one BB is not switched, and may be referred to as an all-JACIN type hereinafter). In addition, the format of the first type BB role is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be possible to switch the table referred to when drawing roles during one BB. In addition, when the RT state is "RT1", if a symbol combination that becomes replay 04 corresponding to numbers 14 to 16 is stopped and displayed, it is configured to transition to RT0 (the details of the RT state will be described later). In addition, since "RT0" is a more disadvantageous RT state to the player than "RT1", the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" is sometimes referred to as falling. In addition, when a symbol combination resulting in replay 05 corresponding to the number 17 is displayed in a stopped state, a "black seven" may be displayed in the lower rows of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53, and when a symbol combination resulting in replay 05 corresponding to the number 18 is displayed in a stopped state, a "white seven" may be displayed in the lower rows of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53 (details will be described later). In addition, when the push order bell, which is the condition device for "Winning-A1" to "Winning-A6" described later, is won, if the reels are stopped in the push order that is most advantageous to the player, the symbol combinations "Winning 01" to "Winning 03" corresponding to the numbers 21 to 27 will be displayed and 11 game medals will be paid out, while if the reels are stopped in a push order different from the most advantageous push order for the player, the symbol combinations "Winning 08" to "Winning 11" corresponding to the numbers 39 to 56 will be displayed and 1 game medal will be paid out. Note that "-" in the figure indicates that any symbol may be displayed. For example, if "Bell - Bell" corresponding to the number 23 is displayed as a bell on the active line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53, 11 game medals can be won regardless of which symbol is displayed on the active line of the center reel M52.

Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in a reel type gaming machine P. In the same figure, the condition device number is referred to as the winning number, and the condition device number may also be referred to as the winning number hereinafter. In the reel type gaming machine P, replay roles are provided from replay-A to replay-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and the replay role displayed in a stopped state can be different depending on the stopping order and stopping position of the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53. Here, as shown in the "Condition Device" item in the rightmost column in FIG. 10, multiple types of condition devices can be displayed in a stopped state depending on the stopping order and stopping position of the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53, and among the multiple types of condition devices, condition devices that have the same winning number are grouped together and illustrated in the "Condition Device (Name)" item in the third column from the right. Specifically, for example, in the "replay-A" condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, three types of condition devices, "replay 01", "replay 02" and "replay 03", can be displayed in a stopped state depending on the stopping order and stopping positions of the left reel M51, the center reel M52 and the right reel M53. Note that the "condition device (name)" may be simply referred to as the condition device. In addition, a condition device related to replay such as "replay 01" may be referred to as a replay role, a condition device that pays out game medals by winning such as "winner 01" may be referred to as a minor role, and a condition device that starts BB by being displayed in a stopped state such as "1st type BB-A" may be referred to as a BB role. In addition, when the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB role and the small role are won in overlapping fashion, and in such a case, when the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the symbol corresponding to the winning small role can be stopped and displayed, the symbol corresponding to the BB role is not stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small role is stopped and displayed, while when the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the symbol corresponding to the small role is not stopped and displayed (cannot be pulled in), the symbol corresponding to the BB role is not stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small role is stopped and displayed. Specifically, for example, when the condition device "1 type BB-B + winning-C" of the winning number 21 is won, either the cherry which is "winning 12" or "winning 13" or the black seven which is "1 type BB-B" can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, in the case where the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51→middle reel M52→right reel M53, (1) if the left stop button D41 is operated at a timing when the symbol numbers 0 to 4 (see the reel arrangement in FIG. 6) are located on the top of the left reel M51 at the first stop, the symbol number 4 corresponding to "prize winning 12" is stopped on the top of the left reel M51, and "prize winning 12" is displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (2) If the left stop button D41 is operated at a timing when the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located on the top of the left reel M51 at the first stop, the symbol numbers 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to "prize winning 13" are stopped on the top of the left reel M51, and "prize winning 13" is displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located on the top of the left reel M51 at the first stop, the symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "1 type BB-B" stops on the top of the left reel M51. (3-2) When the center stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located on the middle of the center reel M52 at the second stop, the symbol number 18 corresponding to "1 type BB-B" stops on the middle of the center reel M52, and then, when the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located on the bottom of the right reel M53 at the third stop, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "1 type BB-B" stops on the bottom of the right reel M53, and the BB role is stopped and displayed. (3-3) If the center stop button D42 is operated at the time when symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle of the center reel M52 during the second stop, symbol number 18, which corresponds to "Type 1 BB-B," cannot be stopped in the middle of the center reel M52, and none of the condition devices will be displayed as stopped.

Next, in the "role" section, the role of the "condition device (name)" is illustrated. The "normal replay" corresponding to winning number 1 is a condition device related to replay in which a replay role is stopped and displayed without transitioning to the RT state, regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. The "reverse push white 7 replay" corresponding to winning number 2 is a condition device related to replay in which a replay role is stopped and displayed without transitioning to the RT state, regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. In this case, the reels are stopped in the order of the right reel M53, the center reel M52, and the left reel M51, and the reels are stopped in the order of the left reel M51, the right reel M53, the center reel M52, and the left reel M51. By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the symbol numbers in the range of 18 to 2, the symbol numbers in the range of 9 to 13, and the symbol numbers in the range of 5 to 10 on the left reel M51 are located on the lower row of each reel, "white sevens" are displayed stopped on the lower rows of the right reel M53, the center reel M52, and the left reel M51, so that the white sevens appear to be lined up on the lower rows from the player's perspective. In addition, in a game in which the replay-B is won and the AT addition lottery is won, the player is informed that the AT addition lottery has been won by executing a performance instructing the player to aim for "white sevens" by pushing backwards (details will be described later). The "Sequential Push Black Sevens Replay" corresponding to winning number 3 is a condition device for replay in which a replay symbol that does not transition to RT state is displayed regardless of the order in which the stop button is pressed. By pressing the reels in order (stopping the reels in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53) and operating the stop button at a timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 19 on the left reel M51, the symbol numbers 14 to 18 on the middle reel M52, and the symbol numbers 13 to 17 on the right reel M53 are located at the bottom of each reel, "black sevens" are displayed stopped at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, so that from the player's perspective, it appears that the black sevens are lined up in the bottom rows. Furthermore, in a game in which the player wins Replay-C and the AT addition lottery, the game is configured to inform the player that they have won the AT addition lottery by executing a presentation (details of which will be described later) that instructs the player to aim for the "black seven" by pressing the buttons in order.

In addition, the "RT Maintenance RP1** (3 options)" corresponding to winning number 4 is a condition device in which the re-play role that is stopped and displayed can differ depending on whether the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53 (which stop button is operated); if the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, then Re-play 01, Re-play 02, or Re-play 03, which do not result in a transition to the RT state, are displayed as stopped roles, and if the first stopped reel is the middle reel M52 or right reel M53, then Re-play 04, which may result in a transition from the RT state "RT1" to "RT0", is displayed as stopped roles. In addition, the "RT Maintenance RP*1* (3 options)" corresponding to the winning number 5 is a condition device in which the re-play role that is stopped and displayed can differ depending on whether the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (which stop button is operated); when the first stopped reel is the middle reel M52, re-play 03, which does not result in a transition to the RT state, is displayed as a stopped role, and when the first stopped reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, re-play 04, which may result in a transition from the RT state "RT1" to "RT0", is displayed as a stopped role. Additionally, the "RT Maintenance RP**1 (3 options)" corresponding to winning number 6 is a condition device in which the replay role that is stopped can differ depending on whether the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (which stop button is operated); if the first stopped reel is the right reel M53, replay 01 or replay 03, which do not transition to the RT state, are stopped and displayed, and if the first stopped reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, replay 04, which can transition the RT state from "RT1" to "RT0", is displayed.

In addition, "Push Order Bell 123" to "Push Order Bell 321", which correspond to winning numbers 7 to 12, are condition devices that can change the winning minor role depending on which of the six reel stopping orders is selected. For example, "left reel M51:1, middle reel M52:2, right reel M53:3", and in the case of "123", it means that the reels are pressed in the order "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53". For example, in the case of "Winning A-1" (winning number 7), if the reels are pressed in the order "123" = "left → middle → right" (the correct push order), the symbol combination "Winning 01", which can win the maximum number of 11 game medals, will be displayed. Note that the "123" in "Push Order Bell 123" indicates the push order (reel stopping order) that can win the maximum number of medals for that winning number. Furthermore, if the reels are stopped in a push sequence other than the one that allows the maximum number of coins to be won, i.e. if the push sequence is not correct, one coin will be paid out. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create multiple game states with different profit rates for the player, such as navigating the push sequence for a replay role or the push sequence for a bell in an AT-related state such as an "AT in progress state" (displaying the push sequence that will result in the highest profit on the push sequence display device D270), and not navigating the push sequence in an AT-related state such as a "normal game state." The AT-related states will be described later.

The "common bell" corresponding to winning number 13 can win 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of medals, regardless of which of winning numbers 04 to 07 stops. In other words, it is a condition device that can win the maximum profit regardless of the order of pressing, and is sometimes called the "order-independent bell". The "watermelon A" corresponding to winning number 15 is configured to make it easy to line up three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) in parallel lines. For example, the winning number 14 of number 60 in Figure 9 is three watermelons A lined up in the middle of each reel. The "watermelon B" corresponding to winning number 16 is configured to make it easy to line up three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) in a diagonal line. For example, the winning number 16 of number 66 in Figure 9 is three watermelons lined up diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B in the top row of the left reel M51, watermelon B in the middle row of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A in the bottom row of the right reel M53. In addition, the "BB medium weak rare minor symbol (diagonal bell alignment)" corresponding to winning number 17 is a condition device that can cause three bells to line up on an active line, and although details will be described later, this is a condition device that executes an AT addition lottery when it is won during BB. In addition, the "BB medium strong rare minor symbol (V-shaped bell alignment)" corresponding to winning number 18 is a condition device that can cause bells to stop and be displayed on the top row of the left reel M51, the middle row of the middle reel M52, and the top row of the right reel M53, and although details will be described later, this is a condition device that executes an AT addition lottery when it is won during BB.

Next, in the "bonus winning information" field, a numerical value between 0 and 3 is assigned to each winning number. Winning numbers that do not include a bonus (BB role) have a bonus winning information of 0, while for winning numbers that include a bonus (BB role), the bonus winning information for winning numbers (19) that include a type BB-A is 1, the bonus winning information for winning numbers (20-23) that include a type BB-B is 2, and the bonus winning information for winning numbers (24-27) that include a type BB-C is 3. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding whether or not a BB has been established and which BB role has been won. Details of the bonus winning information will be given later.

Next, in the "prize winning/replay winning information" field, a numerical value from 0 to 18 is assigned to each winning number. For winning numbers that do not include a replay role or a small role (winning number 0 corresponding to a miss and winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 corresponding to a bonus), the prize winning/replay winning information is set to 0, and for winning numbers that include a replay role or a small role, prize winning/replay winning information from 1 to 18 is assigned to each condition device. By storing the prize winning/replay winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which replay role or small role has been won. Details of the prize winning/replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the "Performance Group Number" field, a numerical value between 0 and 11 is assigned to each winning number. By transmitting the performance group number from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S is configured to be able to determine the performance to be executed. Details of the performance group number will be given later.

Next, in the "ball output group number" field, a number between 0 and 13 is assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the ball output group number, and the stored ball output group number is used when executing a lottery related to the AT (for example, an AT lottery, an AT additional lottery), thereby reducing the program and data capacity for executing the lottery process related to the AT. In addition, even if a condition device with a ball output group number of 0 wins, the AT lottery and the AT additional lottery are not executed. On the other hand, if a condition device with a ball output group number other than 0 wins, the AT lottery or the AT additional lottery can be executed. In addition, details of the ball output group number will be described later. In addition, even if a condition device with a ball output group number of 0 wins, it may be configured so that the AT lottery or the AT additional lottery can be executed. In such a case, it is preferable to configure the lottery result to be a miss (non-winning) when a condition device with a ball output group number of 0 wins and an AT lottery or an AT additional lottery is executed.

Next, FIG. 11 is a list showing the lottery probabilities (also called winning rates) for the winning numbers (also called condition device numbers or winning roles) and bonuses (BB or BB roles) for the small roles and replay roles in the reel-type gaming machine P, which are determined by the role selection means. In the figure, the winning rates for the winning numbers are illustrated.

First, the selection probability in "RT0", "RT1" and "RT2" when the BB is not activated will be described in detail. In the reel type gaming machine P, the appearance rate (selection probability) of winning roles (especially replay roles) can differ depending on the RT state, and the appearance rate of "replay roles" (the total appearance rate of all replay roles) is higher in "RT1" than in other RT states. In addition, "replay 04" (a so-called falling replay role, which is a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role that is displayed when the game is in "RT1" and the bonus has not been won, and the game will move to "RT0") that can be displayed as a stop at winning numbers 4 to 6 is mainly won in "RT1" and almost never appears in "RT0". In addition, in "RT2", "replay 04" that can be displayed as a stop at winning numbers 4 to 6 can appear, but even if "replay 04" is displayed as a stop, the RT state does not move. In addition, when "replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", a fall effect (for example, "unfortunate" is displayed on the effect display device S40) which is an effect that notifies that the replay has transitioned to "RT0", that is, that the RT state has fallen, may be executed, and when "replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT0", the fall effect may not be executed. By configuring in this way, even though "replay 04" is stopped and displayed, the player can recognize that he has won the BB because the fall effect was not executed, and the interest of the game can be increased. In addition, in such a case, the sound effect output by "replay 04" being stopped and displayed and the sound effect output by a replay role other than "replay 04" (for example, "replay 01" which does not transition to the RT state) being stopped and displayed may be configured to be different, and by configuring in this way, the player can easily recognize that "replay 04" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the player may stay in "RT1" in both cases of an AT-related state where push order navigation does not occur (for example, "normal game state" which may be referred to as a non-AT game state) and an AT-related state where push order navigation may occur (for example, "AT in-state" which may be referred to as an AT game state). At this time, when a winning number that may transition (fall) from "RT1" to "RT0" is won, in the non-AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall may not be output based on the operation of the start lever D50. This makes it possible to transition the game state without making the player aware that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT game state. On the other hand, in the AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall may be output based on the operation of the start lever (and a push order navigation in which a replay role in which the RT state does not fall is stopped and displayed is notified). This allows the player to be careful not to fall out of the RT state and to operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is announced. In addition, "replay 05" (a replay role that can inform the player of the fact that the AT-addition lottery has been won when stopped and displayed in the AT state) that can be displayed as a stop with the winning number 2 or 3 mainly appears in "RT1" and is almost never displayed in other RT states. The transition of the state regarding the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination that becomes the replay role will be described later. In addition, as described later, in the reel type gaming machine P, the push order navigation that informs the player of the most advantageous reel stop order is configured to be executed by the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40. In addition, there is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. In addition, the bonus is configured to overlap with the small role, and overlaps with a part of the watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, winning numbers 21-23 and winning numbers 25-27 are condition devices that combine bonuses and small prizes.

In addition, in a situation where the player is in "RT2", BB has been won and BB has not yet been activated, so if the player wins the BB role with winning numbers 20 and 24 (a single BB role that does not overlap with the small role and is sometimes referred to as a single BB role or a single BB), the new win of the BB role will be invalid and only the win of the small role will be valid. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the player is in "RT2" and has won (carried over) Type 1 BB-A, if the player wins Type 1 BB-C with winning number 24, the Type 1 BB-C with said winning number 24 will be invalid. In other words, the situation is the same as if the player had won the "miss" with winning number 0. The carried over Type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. In addition, in the "RT2" situation, since BB has been won and BB has not yet been activated, if the condition device in which the small role of winning numbers 21 to 23 and winning numbers 25 to 27 overlaps with the BB role is won, the new win of the BB role is invalid, and only the win of the small role is valid. Specifically, for example, in the "RT2" situation, and in the "1st type BB-A" is won (carried over), if the "1st type BB-B + winning-C" of winning number 21 is won, the 1st type BB-B related to the winning number 21 is invalid, and only the winning-C is valid. That is, the situation is the same as when the "winning-C" of winning number 14 is won. The carried-over 1st type BB-A continues to be won. The overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small role, and may overlap with a part of the replay role. For example, a part of the replay role of winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus role. In this way, by overlapping the bonus with a condition device including an RT transition replay (a replay role that can transition to an RT state), there is a possibility that a bonus will be won even when the condition device including the RT transition replay is won, and the bonus is not denied even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, so it is possible to give the player hope. In addition, when configured in this way, the RT state is controlled not to transition even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible for the player to increase his or her interest in the game by thinking that there is a high possibility that the bonus may have been won, since the replay probability has not become low (replays are frequently won) even though the RT state should have transitioned (transitioned to an RT state with a relatively low replay probability).

Next, the lottery probability for "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" when the BB is activated will be described in detail. When the BB is activated, three small prizes can be won: the "common bell" of winning number 13, the "BB medium weak rare small prize (diagonal bells)" of winning number 17, and the "BB medium strong rare small prize (V-shaped bells)" of winning number 18. When the "BB medium weak rare small prize (diagonal bells)" or the "BB medium strong rare small prize (V-shaped bells)" is won during the operation of a BB that has been won in the "AT in progress state", an AT addition lottery is executed (details will be provided later).

In addition, the upper part of the figure shows an example of the appearance rate of minor prizes when the setting value is 1, and the appearance rate of the common bell (winning number 13) is uniform regardless of the RT state, but as shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the setting value (6 levels in this example). Specifically, the number of balls placed in setting 1 is 3204, the number of balls placed in setting 2 is 3404, the number of balls placed in setting 3 is 3604, the number of balls placed in setting 4 is 3904, the number of balls placed in setting 5 is 4204, and the number of balls placed in setting 6 is 4504, and the appearance rate is configured to increase as the setting value increases. By configuring in this way, for example, if a player plays a game while measuring the number of times the common bell appears (the number of times it wins), he or she can play the game while hoping that the setting value related to the reel type gaming machine P being played is a relatively high setting value by frequently winning the common bell. Also, the higher the setting value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the setting value, the higher the ball payout rate. The appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the setting value, but if the common bell is won, the AT lottery, AT top-up lottery, and high probability state transition lottery described below will not be executed, so it is configured not to affect the AT-related state transition lottery (also called the AT-related lottery).

The middle part of the figure is a list of expected values when push order navigation is present. In the figure, when push order navigation is performed in a state where push order navigation can be performed by the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40, such as in the "AT state," the average payout number per game (the average number of medals paid out by winning minor roles, also referred to as the expected number of gaming media obtained in one game) and the expected medal increase/decrease value per game (the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted when playing with a three-coin bet; if the expected value is greater than 1, the expected value is positive and medals will increase, whereas if the expected value is less than 1, the expected value is negative and medals will decrease) are shown. The average payout number per game can be calculated as follows: "total number of replay roles (total number of roles for winning numbers 1 to 6) x number of payouts for replay roles (3) + total number of roles for minor roles (11 roles) (total number of roles for winning numbers 7 to 16) x number of payouts for minor roles (11 roles) (11) / total number of roles (65536)". The expected value of medal increase or decrease per game can be calculated as follows: "average number of payouts per game / number of medals inserted per game (3)". The number of medals inserted per game (number of game media inserted when playing one game) is 3, and the expected value of medal increase or decrease per game is configured to be greater than 1 when the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3. As shown in the figure, "RT1" has the largest expected value of medal increase or decrease per game. The numerical values in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease of medals due to bonuses. That is, when the game progresses in a situation where push order navigation occurs (also referred to as a case where the game is operated in an optimal operation mode or an advantageous operation mode), medals will increase in "RT1". In "RT0" and "RT2", although not shown, in a situation where push order navigation does not occur, the medal increase or decrease expectation value per game is smaller than 1, and the medals will decrease. In "RT0" or "RT2", when push order navigation is present, the medal increase or decrease expectation value per game is larger than 1, but this is not limited to this, and the medal increase or decrease expectation value per game when push order navigation is present in "RT0" or "RT2" may be configured to be smaller than 1. In addition, when a symbol combination that is a replay role is stopped and displayed, the bet number (3 medals) in the previous game is actually automatically bet, but the calculation of the medal increase or decrease expectation value is performed assuming that 3 medals are paid out. Furthermore, one play may be referred to as one game.

In addition, the average payout number per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is "RT0", 4.737915039 when the RT state is "RT1", and 3.67137146 when the RT state is "RT2". In addition, the expected medal increase/decrease value per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0", 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1", and 1.223790487 when the RT state is "RT2". When push order navigation is available, the RT state "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for the player. Note that these values are for setting 1. The winning numbers and the probability of winning bonuses for the above-mentioned small roles and replay roles are merely examples, and for example, the expected medal increase/decrease value per game in "RT2" where BB is internally established (expected medal increase/decrease value when push order navigation is present) may be configured to be less than 1. By configuring in this way, even if a bonus is not lined up in a game in which a bonus can be lined up in a situation where push order navigation occurs and it is "RT2" (when BB is internally established), the number of medals held will gradually decrease, and it is possible to prevent an attack that increases the number of medals held by intentionally not lined up in a game in which a bonus can be lined up in a situation where push order navigation occurs and it is "RT2" (when BB is internally established). Specifically, it is preferable to design the probability of a miss in "RT2" to be higher than the probability of all the small roles (Win-A1 to Win-I) that are won in "RT2", and it is preferable to determine the probability of a replay role so that it is designed in this way (if the winning probability of a replay role is designed to be high, the probability of a miss will be lowered accordingly, so it is preferable to design the winning probability of a replay role so that it is not too high). In addition, in "RT2" of this example, the winning probability of all the small roles combined is 18784/65536, the winning probability of all the replays combined is 12501/65536, and the probability of a miss is 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and it is designed so that the probability of a miss is higher than the winning probability of all the small roles combined.

As shown in FIG. 11, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-A is assigned the same number of 40 for all settings 1 to 6. The appearance rate of Type 1 BB-C is assigned the same number of 160 for all settings 1 to 6. In contrast, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B is assigned 160 for setting 1, 180 for setting 2, 200 for setting 3, 220 for setting 4, 240 for setting 5, and 270 for setting 6. In other words, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B is assigned different numbers of 100 depending on the setting value. In this way, Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C function as BBs with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C may be referred to as BBs with no setting difference or bonuses with no setting difference), and Type 1 BB-B functions as BBs with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B may be referred to as BBs with a setting difference or bonuses with a setting difference). Additionally, the appearance rates of Type 1 BB-A, Type 1 BB-B, and Type 1 BB-C are uniform regardless of the RT state (between "RT0" and "RT1"). Note that the appearance rates of Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C (combined) are the same regardless of the set value, but the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B (combined) differs depending on the set value. Note that the combined appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B is the same even if the set value is different, but the appearance rate of each winning number may be configured to differ depending on the set value, and even in such a case, Type 1 BB-B may be referred to as BB with setting difference.

Next, the electrical configuration of the reel type gaming machine P will be described with reference to the block diagram in FIG. 12. First, the reel type gaming machine P is configured with a main control board M that controls the progress of the game at the center, and a sub-control board S, door board D, reel board K, power board E, relay board IN, setting key switch M20, set/reset button M30, etc., all connected so that data can be exchanged. Note that the solid lines in the figure indicate the movement related to data exchange, and the dashed lines in the figure indicate the power supply route. Note that the power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power board E to the relay board IN or door board D without passing through the main control board.

The main control board M (sometimes called the main control means, main board, main control means, main board, or main game section) is a board that controls the overall progress of the game played on the reel-type gaming machine P. The main control board M is equipped with a main control chip C, which is equipped with a CPUC100 (sometimes called CPUMC), built-in ROMC110, built-in RAMC120, etc., which are connected to each other via a bus so that data can be exchanged between them. The main control board M receives signals indicating that the start lever D50, etc. has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and outputs control commands (or control signals) to the sub-control board S, the door board D, the reel board K, etc., thereby controlling the operation of these various boards {for example, by outputting an instruction number (also called a push order number, instruction information, or operation information) to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S can execute push order navigation on the performance display device S40}.

In addition, the sub-control board S (sometimes called sub-control means, sub-board, sub-control means, sub-board, or sub-game section) is also equipped with a sub-control chip SC, similar to the main control board M described above, and the sub-control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC100, a ROM, a RAM, etc., and is configured to be connected to each other so that data can be exchanged by a bus. In addition, various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, a performance display device S40, a reel backlight (also called a back lamp) S30, etc. are connected to the sub-control board S. Here, the reel backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53, which illuminates the patterns drawn on the surface of the reel from the back. The sub-control board S analyzes the control command received from the main control board M and outputs drive signals to various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the performance display device S40, the reel backlight S30, etc., to perform various performances. In the reel type gaming machine P, a plurality of LEDs are provided as the reel backlight S30 so that the player can individually identify nine ranges, namely, the upper, middle, and lower rows of the left reel, the upper, middle, and lower rows of the middle reel, and the upper, middle, and lower rows of the right reel. As an example, the LED corresponding to the upper row of the left reel is lit and all other LEDs are turned off, so that the player can identify that the upper row of the left reel is lit. In addition, the reel type gaming machine P is configured to be able to execute a back lamp performance (sometimes called a backlight performance) that indicates to the player that the predetermined pattern combination has been stopped by changing the lighting state of the reel backlight S30 when the predetermined pattern combination is stopped.

The door board D is connected to the aforementioned insertion acceptance sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, second insertion sensor D30s, a stop button D40 for stopping the spinning reel M50, a start lever D50 for starting the spinning of the reel M50, a settlement button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals and ending the game, various display panels D70 for displaying the status of the game (not shown, but the aforementioned insertion number indicator light D210, start lamp D180, replay lamp D290, insertion possible lamp D300, special game status display device D250, payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is a collection of display devices such as the credit number display device D200 and advantageous zone display device YH), a door switch D80 for determining whether the front door is open or closed, for clearing errors, and for changing settings, and a blocker D100 for paying out game medals (or other foreign objects) that are determined to be incompatible after being inserted to the release port D240. This door board D is also connected to the main control board M described above so that data can be exchanged. Therefore, when the start lever D50, stop button D40, settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. In addition, a signal when the insertion reception sensor D10s detects the passage of a gaming medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

The reel board K is connected to a reel motor K10 for rotating the reel M50 and a reel sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50. The reel board K is capable of stopping the reel M50 at a determined stop position by driving the reel motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 using the reel sensor K20. In addition, in the reel type gaming machine P, a so-called step motor (sometimes called a stepping motor) is used for the reel motor K10. Note that the step motor is set to 480 steps as the number of steps for one rotation of the reel M50. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 20 pieces) of patterns of approximately uniform size are set on each reel (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53), and the number of steps corresponding to one pattern is set to 24 steps (= 480/20). Furthermore, there is no problem with changing the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel revolution.

The medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number of game medals (for example, 10 medals) based on a control signal from the main control board M. The medal payout device H is connected to a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s that determine whether the medals have been paid out normally and measure the number of game medals paid out, as well as a hopper motor H80 that rotates the disk H50.

The power consumed by these various control boards and boards is supplied from a power supply board E (a board that controls whether or not power is supplied by a power switch E10). In Figure 12, the dashed arrows show how power is supplied from the power supply board E. As shown, power is supplied directly to the main control board M and sub-control board S from the power supply board E, and power is supplied to the various boards (door board D, reel board K, relay board IN) via the main control board M. A predetermined amount of AC voltage (e.g., 100V) is supplied to the power supply board E, which is converted to a specified DC voltage and then supplied to each control board and board.

The main control board M is also connected to a setting key switch M20 used to execute the setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting/reset button M30 that can change settings and reset errors. The main control board M also has a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stopping of the reels M50 (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53), an AT selection means for executing an AT transition selection to transition to an "AT in progress" state, which is an AT-related state that is advantageous to the player, and an AT addition selection means for executing an AT addition selection to increase the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can be played in the "AT in progress" state.

Next, Figures 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing the general processing flow performed by the main control board M in a slot machine P.

The flowchart is mainly composed of processing steps (shown as rectangles), decisions (shown as diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (shown as rounded rectangles) that indicate start, end, return, etc. Furthermore, when the details of a processing step are shown in another flowchart, those that refer to that flowchart are shown as subroutines (shown as rectangles with double lines on the left and right). Here, during the development stage of the reel type gaming machine P, reel type gaming machines P with different specifications are also developed at the same time, but in this example, the main processing is configured so that subroutines to be executed in gaming machines with different specifications (subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed is prevented from being executed due to noise or fraudulent behavior.

First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing executed for the first time by the CPUC100 of the main control board M after the power of the reel type gaming machine P is turned on (or at the time of system reset or user reset). First, in step 1000, after the power of the reel type gaming machine P is turned on, in step 1002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the initial setting of the timer interrupt (sometimes called "timer interrupt"). (Here, the timer interrupt is not started, but only the type of timer interrupt is set, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described later is executed periodically.) Next, in step 1004, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the setting of serial communication (setting of speed, data length, data transmission method) etc. as the function setting of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the top address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data stored in the checksum area, checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC120 is correctly stored after the power is turned off and back on) and generates power off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 is off.

If the answer is Yes in step 1014, then in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the on/off status of the power-off processing (sometimes referred to as power-off processing) completion flag in the RAM (which is turned on in step 1904) and the checksum status of the entire RAM (the check result in step 1006), and determines whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If the answer is Yes in step 1016, then in step 1020, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the power-off processing (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the RAM area, and determines whether the data related to the setting value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If the answer is Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M reads the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt that was set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completion flag and returns to processing at the time of power-off according to the restored stack pointer.

Also, if the answer is No in step 1016, in step 1024, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the unrecoverable error processing described below.

Also, if the answer is No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets (for example, in the register area) a setting value error display (for example, to be displayed on the payout number display device D270). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the unrecoverable error processing described below.

If the answer is No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the on/off state of the power-off processing completed flag in the RAM (which is turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of the entire RAM (the check result in step 1006) to determine whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If the answer is Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines and sets (for example, in the register area) the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding the memory area in the RAM that stores the setting value (setting value data), and proceeds to step 1034. The range that is not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to only the memory area that stores the setting value (setting value data), and also includes the total cumulative number of games in the "favorable zone", the total cumulative number of games in the play zone (favorable zone + normal zone), the result of calculating the stay ratio in the "favorable zone", etc. By configuring in this way, it is possible to calculate and display the ratio of staying in the "advantageous zone" in the game (advantageous zone ratio). The calculation process of the advantageous zone ratio is configured to calculate at the timing when the unit game ends. The advantageous zone ratio is displayed when the power of the reel type gaming machine P is turned on (for example, it is displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, "advantageous zone ratio → consecutive feature ratio per 6000 games → feature ratio per 6000 games → cumulative consecutive feature ratio → cumulative feature ratio" is displayed repeatedly at 5-second intervals. The consecutive feature ratio is "the number of payouts when the RB is operating/the total number of payouts", and the feature ratio is "the number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is operating/the total number of payouts". On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines and sets (e.g., sets in the register area) the initialization range of the RAM to a specific range including the memory area in the RAM that stores the setting value (setting value data), and proceeds to step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area in the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the setting change device control process described below.

Although not shown, it is preferable to configure the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary memory area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M so that it is not a value that will result in the special game being executed (to prevent the special game from being executed by mistake if the process for determining whether or not to execute the special game is executed due to noise or fraudulent behavior immediately after the program processing starts). Also, although not shown, when storing random numbers such as winning random numbers in the RAM area of the main control board M, it is preferable to secure a dedicated memory area and configure the byte that stores information related to the random number to store only information related to the random number (not to store other information such as various timer values) (to prevent information related to the random number from being overwritten by noise, etc. when operating on other data stored in the same byte).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process related to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, also referred to as the setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializing it with the starting address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting value (setting value data) in the RAM area is not within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). Note that if the setting value (setting value data) is managed as 1 to 6, it is necessary to initialize the RAM and return the setting value to "1" when it becomes "0". Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the setting value (setting value data) as 0 to 5, it is possible to eliminate the need for correction processing of the setting value (setting value data) after executing RAM initialization (processing of steps 1106 and 1108), and it is possible to shorten the processing time and reduce the processing capacity. If the answer is Yes at step 1106, then at step 1108 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the setting value (setting value data) to a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the value most disadvantageous to the player) and proceeds to step 1110. On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 1106, it also proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, "88" which lights up all segments), displays the setting value on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the setting value is a value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) held in the RAM), and proceeds to step 1112. As mentioned above, the payout number display device D270 is also used to notify the push order. Because of this configuration, for example, when a malfunction occurs in a part of the 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be lit), it is possible that erroneous information is notified when notifying the push order. In order to prevent such a situation, by having the payout number display device D270 light up all 7 segments "88" while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to check whether the 7-segment is malfunctioning or not, and to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage. Also, as a configuration for displaying the setting value (setting value data), a RAM memory area for displaying the setting value may be provided, which stores data obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) in the memory area that stores the setting value, and the setting value may be displayed by referring to this memory area. Although not shown, after the process of step 1110 is executed, a process is executed to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode.

Next, in step 1112, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the set/reset button M30 has switched from off to on. If the answer is Yes in step 1112, then in step 1114, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current setting value (setting value data) (if the setting value (setting value data) exceeds 5 as a result of the addition, the setting value (setting value data) becomes 0) and proceeds to step 1116. Note that if the answer is No in step 1112, then the CPU C100 of the main control board M also proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the start lever D50 has switched from off to on. If the answer is No in step 1116, then the CPU C100 proceeds to step 1112 and loops the processing of steps 1112 to 1116. If the answer is Yes in step 1116, then in step 1118 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 has switched from on to off. If the answer is No in step 1118, then the CPUC 100 of the main control board M loops through the process of step 1118. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 1118, then in step 1120 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has ended, erases the display of the setting value (setting value data) on the setting display LED (not shown), and proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process is executed to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the setting change mode is to be ended.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the unrecoverable error processing related to the subroutine of step 1300 (and called in other flowcharts) in FIG. 13. First, in step 1302, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits interrupts (the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described below is not executed thereafter). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (0 to 6 in this example, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (this is repeated to sequentially stop display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the output to each output port has ended. If the answer is Yes in step 1310, then in step 1312, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some kind of error occurred when executing this process), repeats execution of the process, and when the power supply voltage drops, a reset signal is input and the process ends. (That is, an infinite loop is entered, and no operation to prompt a return is accepted.) If the answer is No in step 1310, then the process proceeds to step 1306. The processes in steps 1306 to 1310 are processes to clear the output to the LED and motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, it is possible to output information regarding the error and the game progress at the time the error occurred to the hall computer).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 14. First, in step 1202, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initialized with the top address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the data in the RAM area required for the game (e.g., the upper limit number of bets, the effective line for winning, etc.). Note that step 1203 also includes a process of setting data ("0" data for clearing the RAM address) to clear the data used in the previous game (e.g., the condition device number (winning number), the performance group number, the instruction information) in the RAM. Note that the condition device number, the performance group number, the instruction information, etc. may not be cleared, and the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, "RT0") in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (a command to the sub side) related to the RT state set in step 1204. The process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. 27. Also, a command (a command to the sub side) related to the RT state may be set in step 1704. Also, when transmitting the RT state to the sub side, it is not necessary to transmit it all the time, and it may be configured to transmit the RT state to the sub side only when the game zone is a "favorable zone". Next, in step 1206, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the state of the AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress state" etc.) (step 1420, step 1429 of FIG. 21, step 1435, step 1439, step 1443 of FIG. 22, step 1444-3, step 1444-4 of FIG. 23 are set). Next, in step 1207, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (a command to the sub side) regarding the state of the AT set in step 1206. In addition, the process of setting the state of the AT may be executed in step 1416, step 1428 of FIG. 21, step 1438 of FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 of FIG. 23. In addition, when transmitting the state of the AT to the sub side, it is not necessary to transmit it all the time, and it may be configured to transmit the state of the AT to the sub side only when the game zone is the "advantageous zone". Next, in step 1208, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the game zone (for example, "advantage zone" or the like) in the game (sets the game zone determined in step 3510, step 3516, and step 3520 in FIG. 31). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (a command to the sub side) related to the game zone set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, it is equipped with a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) that stores medals that have overflowed from the medal payout device H, and judges whether the medal payout device H is full of game medals by the conduction/non-conduction of current by two fullness detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can enter the medal auxiliary tank HS (if current is conducted through the medals, it is judged to be full). If the answer is Yes in step 1209, proceed to step 1218.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to ON). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error on a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal full error has been released (for example, whether the current is not conducted by the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS and the set/reset button M30 has been pressed). If the answer is Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to OFF) and proceeds to step 1218. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC100 of the main control board M permits the insertion of a medal (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the replay role), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1220). Here, in step 1218, the on process of the blocker D100 (the process formed by the medal flow path) is performed. Specifically, if the replay role was established in the previous game, the on process of the blocker D100 is executed on the condition that the current number of accumulated credits is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). In other words, if the current number of accumulated credits is a predetermined value, the on process of the blocker D100 is not executed. On the other hand, if the replay role was not established in the previous game, the on process of the blocker D100 is executed uniformly. By configuring it in this way, even if a replay role is established, if the number of accumulated credits (credits) has not reached a predetermined value, game medals can be inserted, and the player can play rhythmically (without feeling uncomfortable) even when the player is in an RT state (for example, "RT1") in which the probability of winning a replay role is higher than in RT states such as "RT1", or when a replay role that is not easily recognizable from the outside (a replay disguised as a minor role: a symbol combination such as bell-bell-bell on an invalid line or a cherry on the left reel) stops.

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16. First, in step 1220, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not game medals have not been bet or saved (no credits exist). If the answer is Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting value display condition is satisfied (for example, the condition is satisfied when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on). If the answer is Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays the setting value on the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout number display device D270, the credit number display device D200, and the input number display light D210) (transitions to the setting confirmation mode), and transitions to step 1221 on the condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition conditions for the setting change mode are met, a process is executed to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the setting change mode is to be started, and when the termination conditions for the setting change mode are met, a process is executed to send a command to terminate the setting change mode. If the answer is No in step 1220 or step 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on or not. If the answer is Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (there are two insertion sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on, it is judged that one game medal has been accepted). If the answer is Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are off (when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on and then the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are off, it is judged that one accepted game medal has passed through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s). If the answer is Yes in step 1230, then in step 1231 the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that one normal game medal has been inserted. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the credits are at the upper limit (50 in this example) and the number of bets is at the maximum (3 in this example), and if the answer is Yes, it controls the blocker D100 to be OFF (a state in which a medal flow path is not formed). If the answer is No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and if the answer is No in step 1226 or step 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the settlement button D60 has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether there are any remaining credits or bets of game medals. If the answer is Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven) and executes the payout of one game medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (there are two payout sensors for detecting the payout of medals, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is judged that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If the answer is Yes in step 1236, proceed to step 1247. Although this is not specified in the flowchart, if the previous game was a replay role, only the remaining number of credits will be subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). Specifically, it judges whether the situation in which it is judged that no medals have been dispensed has continued for a predetermined time even though the hopper drive signal is sent to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). If the answer is Yes in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (e.g., updates the medal empty error flag area with a value equivalent to ON). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the medal empty error has been released (e.g., whether the set/reset button M30 has been pressed). If the answer is Yes in step 1245, then in step 1246, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to OFF) and proceeds to step 1247. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1245, then proceeds to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (if the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s turns on and then the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s turn off, it is determined that the payout operation of the one game medal that was being paid out has been completed). If the answer is Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If the answer is No in step 1241 or step 1247, the CPUC100 proceeds to step 1236.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1232 or step 1233, in step 1251, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the start lever D50 is valid (for example, the specified number of game medals to start the game have been inserted, etc.) and whether the start lever D50 has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If the answer is Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPU C100 of the main control board M obtains a random number and executes a process to turn off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3600). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing. If the answer is No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16. First, in step 3600, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the internal lottery execution process described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state of the AT is a state in which the AT addition lottery can be performed. Here, in this example, the states of the AT in which the AT addition lottery can be performed are "AT state", "addition special state", "specialized premonition state", and "advantageous BB state", and in "advantageous BB internal play", the AT counter value can be greater than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from being advantageous in "advantageous BB internal play" by deliberately not matching the BB pattern combination. Furthermore, the system may be configured so that an AT addition lottery can be executed during "play within advantageous BB". In such a case, even if the AT addition lottery is won during "play within advantageous BB", it may not be notified immediately, but rather, when the BB ends, the fact that the AT addition lottery has been won, or the number of remaining AT games after the number of AT games has been added, may be notified.

If the answer is Yes in step 1259, then in step 1500 the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game number addition execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1259, then proceeds to step 1400 as well. This game number addition execution process can also execute the lottery using different lottery tables depending on the state related to the AT, but it is preferable that the lottery probability does not differ depending on the setting value (the lottery is executed using the same lottery table). Next, in step 1400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the condition device number management process, which will be described later.

Here, the states related to the AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram in Figure 30). (1) "Low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to move to the "AT state" has not been acquired) and the bonus role has not been won. In addition, since the "low probability state" is the so-called "normal state", it is also called the "normal state". (2) "Normal BB internal play" is a state in which the BB role has been won in the "low probability state", the BB role has not been awarded, and the AT lottery has not been won. (3) "Normal BB state" is a state that is executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in a situation in which the BB role has been won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery has not been won, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "normal BB internal play". (4) "High probability state" is a state in which the AT lottery has not been won (the right to move to the "AT state" has not been acquired) and the bonus role has not been won, and is a state in which it is easier to win the AT than the above-mentioned "low probability state". In addition, as described later, when a new "high probability state" is entered, it is configured not to enter the "low probability state" until the high securing obstacle game number has passed. (5) "AT state" is a state in which the AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. In addition, even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if the continuation lottery described later is won, a predetermined value is set in the AT counter and the "AT state" continues. (6) "Specialized premonition state" is a state in which the right to move to the "addition specialized state" in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than in the "AT state" is acquired. (7) "Addition specialized state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than in the "AT state". (8) "Game during advantageous BB" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT state", "specialized premonition state" or "addition specialization state", and the BB role is not a winning combination. (9) "Game during waiting BB" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "low probability state", and the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role is not a winning combination. (10) "Advantageous BB state" refers to a state executed when the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT state", "specialized premonition state" or "addition specialized state" and a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or when a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "advantageous BB internal play", or when the BB role is won in the "low probability state", and the AT lottery is won by the BB role and a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or when a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal play". (12) "Revival possibility performance state" refers to a state related to the AT to which the AT counter value becomes 0 and the continuation lottery described later is not won. In the "revival possibility performance state", the revival lottery described later is executed, and if the revival lottery is won, the "AT state" is entered (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and if the revival lottery is not won, the "low probability state" is entered.

Next, in step 1550, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of all reels, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there has been a request to create a pull-in point (requested to determine the stop positions of the spinning left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53, and requested as appropriate depending on the stop order and the stop positions of other reels). If the answer is Yes in step 1261-1, then in step 1262, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1261-1, then the CPUC100 also proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the "BB internal game", even if the stop buttons are not stopped in the correct order to pay out 11 coins in a game in which the push order bell is won (for example, in the case of winning-A1, the stop buttons are not stopped in the order of "left → center → right") (when the reels are stopped in an incorrect push order), the reel stop control is configured to win a symbol combination that will pay out 11 coins. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance check. Next, in step 1264, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, center stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1264, the process also proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether all reels (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. If the answer is Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stop possible position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (if it does not match the combination that can win a prize determined by the internal lottery, it is judged to be abnormal). In addition, the judgment of whether the combination of the displayed symbols in step 1269 is normal or not is made by judging whether the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is completed normally or not. In a game in which a winning combination is won, when the operation of the stop button is executed in an operation mode in which the winning combination can be won, even if the reel position that actually stopped is not normal (the winning combination determined by the internal lottery is not displayed as stopped from the player's perspective), if the reel stop control is completed normally by the processing inside the gaming machine, the game medals based on the winning of the winning combination are paid out. If the answer is Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display judgment error display (for example, sets it in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an irrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 1267, proceed to step 1261-1.

Next, in step 1274, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a payout process of the game medals due to winning. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether or not there has been a winning to pay out the game medals {if the game medals acquired by winning exceed the maximum number of credits (50 in this example), the game medals are paid out}. If the answer is Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven) and executes the payout of one game medal. Next, in step 1277, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (if the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on, it is judged that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If the answer is Yes at step 1277, proceed to step 1286.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1277, then in step 1279, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of processing step 1276). If the answer is Yes in step 1279, then in step 1280, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (e.g., updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to ON). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display on the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal empty error has been released (e.g., whether the set/reset button M30 has been pressed). If the answer is Yes in step 1282, then in step 1283, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to OFF) and proceeds to step 1286. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1282, then proceeds to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s turns on and then the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s turn off, it is determined that the payout operation of the one game medal that was being paid out has been completed). If the answer is Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If the answer is No in step 1279 or step 1286, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning for which the answer is Yes in step 1275) has been completed. If the answer is Yes at step 1290, proceed to step 3400. If the answer is No at step 1286, proceed to step 1277, if the answer is No at step 1275, proceed to step 3400, and if the answer is No at step 1290, proceed to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the RT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state start control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game end process (e.g., clearing the number of bets, transitioning the game state, etc.), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1202).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process related to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. 18 in the reel-type gaming machine P. First, in step 3602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the internal lottery table (a table used when executing the internal lottery, in which the winning number and the number of pieces to be compared with the acquired random number are stored) and proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. It is possible to generate winning information for winning and replay from the winning number. In addition, when a bonus and a small role are won in overlapping, or a bonus and a replay role are won in overlapping, it is possible to generate winning information for both winning and replay winning information and bonus winning information from the winning number. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers that have the same payout group number and the same number of places to compare with the acquired random number, and is stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board M. For example, payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers 4 to 12, and the number of places is the same for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 that are push order replay roles, and the number of places is the same for six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12 that are push order bell roles, so the number of repetitions related to the push order replay role is 3, and the number of repetitions related to the push order bell role is 6. The lottery table used when the winning numbers 4 to 6 that are push order replay roles are obtained and the lottery table used when the winning numbers 7 to 12 that are push order bell roles are obtained are configured as a single lottery table. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M obtains the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the setting value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). If the answer is Yes in step 3614, it has been judged that the internal lottery has been won, so the CPUC100 does not perform a judgment (lottery) for the subsequent internal lottery table address and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1259). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether or not there are any remaining repetitions. If the answer is Yes in step 3618, proceed to step 3610, and repeat the processing of steps 3610 to 3618 until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If the answer is No in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates it to the address related to the next payout group number), proceeds to step 3604, and executes the processing from step 3604 onwards. The specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process related to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 18 in the reel type gaming machine P. First, in step 1502, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to the AT is "AT in progress", "specialized precursor state", or "addition specialized state". If the answer is Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the ball output group number related to the game is the ball output group number (in this example, 1, 3) related to the AT in progress add-on role (a winning number that can add the remaining AT game number in the "AT in progress state", which in this example is replay-B, replay-C, and winning-D). If the answer is Yes in step 1504, proceed to step 1514. Also, if the answer is No in step 1502, in other words, if the state regarding the AT is a favorable BB state, in step 1512, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M determines whether the ball payout group number for the game is a ball payout group number (in this example, 5, 6) for a BB add-on role (a winning number that can add to the remaining AT game number in an "favorable BB state", in this example, winning-H, winning-I). If the answer is Yes in step 1512, proceed to step 1514, and if the answer is No in step 1512, proceed to step 1518. Also, if the answer is No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding the AT is an "add-on specialized state". If the answer is Yes in step 1506, then in step 1508, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the payout group number for the game is the payout group number (in this example, 2, 13) for the special add-on role (a winning number that can add to the number of remaining AT games in the "specialized add-on state" and does not add to the number of remaining AT games in the "AT state", which in this example are Replay-A, Replay-D1 to D3, and Winning-A1 to A6). If the answer is Yes in step 1508, then proceed to step 1514. If the answer is No in step 1506 or step 1508, then proceed to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the winning-time additional game number lottery table and determines the number of AT additional games based on the payout group number related to the game (for example, in the lottery table shown in the margin, it is determined whether the latched random number value falls within any range). In addition, determining the number of AT additional games is also referred to as executing an AT additional lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition to the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the determined number of AT additional games (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S can recognize whether the AT game number addition has been executed and how many games the additional number is by receiving the command), and proceeds to step 1518. In addition, in the case of payout group numbers 7 to 11, which are payout group numbers related to winning numbers that include a bonus (winning numbers 19 to 27), a lottery for the AT (AT lottery, AT addition lottery) may also be held.

The lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of a lottery table for the number of games to be added when a win is won, and in the reel-type gaming machine P, when a role for adding on when a win is won in some of the states related to the AT in which the push order navigation is executed (in this example, "AT in progress state", "specialized precursor state", "specialized addition state", "advantageous BB state"), the number of games to be added to the AT is determined by lottery from "0" to "300" based on the payout group number related to that game, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. Note that if "0" is determined, the number of games remaining in the AT will not increase (if "0" is determined, it may be referred to as a non-win in the AT addition lottery).

The average number of AT added games (expected value) when an additional role is won at the time of winning is the value shown in the figure, and a specific calculation method, when the winning role is watermelon A, can be calculated as follows: {number of places (600) x number of AT added games (0) + number of places (100) x number of AT added games (10) + number of places (300) x number of AT added games (30) + number of places (24) x number of AT added games (100)} / total number of places (1024) = 12.1 (games).

Next, if the winning role is Replay-B or Replay-C, it can be calculated as follows: {Number of places (500) x Number of games added to the AT (0) + Number of places (200) x Number of games added to the AT (50) + Number of places (300) x Number of games added to the AT (100) + Number of places (24) x Number of games added to the AT (300)} / Total number of places (1024) = 46.1 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is Replay-A or Replay-D1 to D3, or Winning-A1 to A6, the calculation can be made as follows: {Number of placements (300) x Number of AT-added games (10) + Number of placements (600) x Number of AT-added games (30) + Number of placements (124) x Number of AT-added games (50)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 26.61 (games). Note that if the winning combination is Replay-A or Replay-D1 to D3, or Winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games is added only if the AT status is "specialized addition status".

Next, if the winning combination is a weak rare combination in the BB, it can be calculated as follows: {Number of combinations placed (800) x Number of games added to the AT (0) + Number of combinations placed (100) x Number of games added to the AT (10) + Number of combinations placed (100) x Number of games added to the AT (30) + Number of combinations placed (24) x Number of games added to the AT (100)} / Total number of combinations placed (1024) = 6.3 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is a strong rare combination in the BB, it can be calculated as follows: {number of places (300) x number of games added to the AT (0) + number of places (300) x number of games added to the AT (30) + number of places (400) x number of games added to the AT (50) + number of places (24) x number of games added to the AT (300)} / total number of places (1024) = 35.4 (games).

In addition, in the reel type gaming machine P, when an AT addition lottery is executed, the average number of AT addition games can differ depending on the type of winning role, but the average number of AT addition games is configured not to differ depending on the setting value. Here, when the AT addition lottery is configured to be executed based on the winning number, for example, when the same process is executed as an AT addition lottery for winning numbers 7 and 8, a process must be executed to determine whether the winning number is 7 or 8. However, as described above, by configuring the AT addition lottery to be executed based on the ball output group number, when the same process is executed as an AT addition lottery for winning numbers 7 and 8, it is possible to execute the process related to the AT addition lottery for either winning number 7 or winning number 8 simply by determining whether the ball output group number is 2.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the winning number for the game (or winning information for winning the prize/replay, or the ball group number, etc.) is the winning number for replay-B (reverse push white 7 replay, which is a replay in which the white seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping it with reverse push). If the answer is Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the number of AT games was added by replay-B, in other words, whether the number of AT games added by winning replay-B was not 0. If the answer is Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which executes an effect instructing the white seven to be aligned with the invalid line by reverse push ("right → center → left")) and proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1520, then in step 1524, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a reverse push avoidance command (a command to the sub-control board S, which instructs a push order other than reverse push ("right → center → left") and executes an effect to prevent the white sevens from lining up on the invalid line), and proceeds to step 1526. Note that if the answer is No in step 1518, then the CPU C100 of the main control board M also proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the winning number for the game (or winning information for prize-winning/replay, or ball group number, etc., may be used to determine this) is a replay-C (a forward push black 7 replay, which is a replay in which the black sevens can be aligned in a straight line on the invalid line by stopping the buttons in the forward push order). If the answer is Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether or not the number of AT games was added by the replay-C, in other words, whether or not the number of AT games added by winning the replay-C was not 0. If the answer is Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a push-in command command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which executes an effect of instructing the player to align black sevens on an invalid line by pushing in order ("left → center → right")) and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a push-in avoidance command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which instructs a push order other than the push order ("left → center → right") and executes an effect of preventing the player from aligning black sevens on an invalid line) and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). In addition, even if the answer is No in step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). In the above description, the reverse push instruction command, reverse push avoidance command, forward push instruction command, and forward push avoidance command are sent to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives these commands, so that the sub-control board S can execute the performance related to the push order navigation, but this is not limited to this. When the AT addition lottery is won, a command related to the fact that the AT addition lottery has been won and the number of AT addition games (for example, a command related to the number of AT addition games related to the process of step 1517) is sent to the sub-control board S, and when the sub-control board S receives the command, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the execution timing and the performance mode of the performance related to the push order navigation. As one example, in a game in which Replay-B is won, the sub-control board S may be configured to select and execute a presentation mode instructing reverse push in the game in which the command is received (a game in which the AT game number is added), or the sub-control board S may be configured not to execute a presentation instructing reverse push in the game in which the command is received, but to execute a presentation instructing a push order that can result in a 7 on an invalid line in a game in which a specified condition is subsequently satisfied (for example, a specific replay role (for example, Replay-B or C) is won). Alternatively, in a game in which Replay-B is won and the sub-control board S receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing a reverse push may not be executed, and an AT game number addition effect (an effect in which the display relating to the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 increases, for example, displaying "+30G") may be executed in a game that satisfies a predetermined condition thereafter (for example, after a predetermined number of games (continuous effects may be executed at the same time, in which case the final game of the continuous effects)). Note that in this example, the effect display device S40 is also configured to be able to display a display relating to the number of remaining AT games, and the display and the main It may be the same as the number of remaining AT games stored on the control board side, or it may be different. Note that, in a game in which Replay-B is won and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), an example of a case in which the effect of instructing reverse push is not executed and the effect of adding the number of AT games is executed in a game that satisfies a predetermined condition thereafter is when the sub-control board S side executes a special effect (for example, a predetermined consecutive effect) that encourages the winning of a bonus (since the probability of winning Replay-B within the bonus is low (including 0%), if the push order that allows for a 7-line is announced, the player will know that he or she has not won the bonus). Examples of such cases include when the sub-control board S side is executing a special effect, such as when the main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery and the number of remaining AT games is added. The information by which the sub-control board S side determines that the main control board M side has won the AT addition lottery and the number of remaining AT games has been added is (1) information regarding the number of remaining AT games is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side after the AT addition lottery. After that, the sub-control board S side calculates the difference between the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time and the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time, and determines the number of additional AT games won in the AT addition lottery, and (2) the number of additional AT games obtained as a result of the AT addition lottery on the main control board M side. A command related to the number is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In addition, if the AT addition lottery is not won, a command related to the fact that the AT addition lottery was not won is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and when the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the presentation mode of the presentation related to the push order navigation. As an example, in a game in which the replay-B is won, and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the AT game number was not added), a presentation mode instructing a middle push (operating the middle stop button as the first stop, and a push order that avoids 7-matching) may be selected and executed. Note that the AT addition lottery was executed on the main control board M side, but the information by which the sub-control board S side determines that the AT remaining game number was not added is (1) information related to the AT remaining game number is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side after the AT addition lottery. After that, the sub-control board S calculates the difference between the information on the number of remaining AT games sent last time and the information on the number of remaining AT games sent this time, and determines the number of AT addition games won in the AT addition lottery (if the value obtained by subtracting the information on the number of remaining AT games sent this time from the information on the number of remaining AT games sent last time is 1, it is determined that the AT addition lottery was not won), and (2) sends a command to the sub-control board S to the effect that the number of added AT games is 0 as a result of the AT addition lottery on the main control board M side.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18. First, in step 1402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is an AT state in which an AT lottery can be executed. In the reel-type gaming machine P, the AT state in which an AT lottery can be executed is only the "high probability state", and by winning BB in the "high probability state", it transitions to "advantageous BB internal game", and then by winning the BB role, it transitions to the "advantageous BB state", and by ending the executed BB, it transitions to the "AT state", and the AT counter is set to 50 times, which is the initial value of the number of AT games. In addition, even if BB is won in the "low probability state", it transitions to "normal BB internal game", and does not transition to the "AT state". In addition, it is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that when BB is won in the "normal game state", the BB role can be used as a trigger to win the AT lottery. In such a configuration, if the player wins BB in the "normal game state" and then wins the AT lottery due to the BB role, the game will move to the "advantageous BB internal game", and then move to the "advantageous BB state" by lining up the BB. In addition, in the "normal game state" where the player wins BB and is in the internal state where the BB is not lined up, the game section may be the "advantageous section" or the "standby section". If the answer is Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery role (in this example, the first type BB-A or the first type BB-C, which is a BB role without a setting difference). In addition, in the reel type game machine P, both the winning number of the BB without a setting difference alone (winning numbers 19 and 24) and the winning numbers where the BB without a setting difference and the small role overlap (winning numbers 25, 26, and 27) are AT lottery roles. If the answer is Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT for the next game onwards to be "Playing in advantageous BB" and proceeds to step 1410. Also, if the answer is No in step 1402 or step 1404, proceeds to step 1410. Note that the slot machine P is configured so that the AT winning rate (whether or not you can win) for the AT lottery differs when the state of the AT differs, but when the state of the AT is the same, the AT winning rate for the AT lottery is the same even if the setting value differs (if you win the BB in the "high probability state", you will always win the AT regardless of the setting value = then proceed to the "AT state").

Next, in step 1410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the state of the AT for the next game onwards has not been determined. If the answer is Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the current state of the AT is a "low probability state". If the answer is Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the condition device related to the game is a state promotion role (a small role that can transition from a "low probability state" to a "high probability state" by winning, in this example, a cherry). If the answer is Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a high probability state transition lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2, and it can be changed as long as it is not different depending on the set value). Next, in step 1418, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the executed high probability state transition lottery was won. If the answer is Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT from the next game onwards to be a "high probability state" and proceeds to step 1430.

Also, if the answer is No at step 1412, then at step 1424 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is a "high probability state". If the answer is Yes at step 1424, then at step 1426 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the high probability obstacle counter KHc is 1 (the final game of the high probability obstacle state, and the 10th game since the "high probability state" was entered). If the answer is Yes at step 1426, then at step 1428 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the low probability transition condition is met. Here, in the reel-type gaming machine P, when the state regarding the AT is a "high probability state", the game zone is a "favorable zone", and when the game zone is a "favorable zone", the push order navigation is executed once or more, or the "favorable zone" continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example), the "favorable zone" is configured not to end (that is, even if the low probability state transition lottery is won, if the low probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation is not executed once or more, the "high probability state" is configured not to end). In addition, when the BB role is won during the "favorable zone" and the BB is executed, the "favorable zone" may be configured to end at any timing even if the push order navigation is not executed even once in the "favorable zone". If the answer is Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT from the next game onwards to be a "low probability state", and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low probability transition condition is satisfied by the push order navigation being executed once. In addition, when a role with a maximum payout of 8 coins and a role with a maximum payout of 11 coins are set as push order roles (winning roles that differ depending on the reel stop order and the player's profit rate differs), the low probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation for the role with a maximum payout of 11 coins, which has the larger maximum payout amount, is executed once. In addition, if the answer is No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426, or step 1428, the game also transitions to step 1430. In this way, in the reel type gaming machine P, when the game newly transitions to the "high probability state", the high probability state is set to 10 games, which are high probability state games, in the high probability state counter KHc, and the game is not transitioned to the "low probability state" until the counter value becomes 0. Note that this type of lottery method is merely one example, and for example, the low probability state transition lottery may not be executed for 10 games after transitioning to the "high probability state" (staying in the "high probability state" is guaranteed), and after those 10 games have elapsed, a lottery to transition from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" may be executed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 1/20) for each game. Note that the AT lottery role (low probability AT lottery role, high probability AT lottery role) and state promotion role have the same probability of winning for all setting values.

Next, Figure 22 is a flowchart (second page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in Figure 18. First, in step 1430, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is "AT in progress". If the answer is Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (4 in this example). Here, in the reel-type gaming machine P, when the state relating to the AT is the "AT in progress state," if the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, if the number of games remaining in the AT is 4 or more, there is a 1/2 probability when the watermelon B is won that the player will acquire the right to transition to the "add-on specialized state," and the player may transition to the "specialized premonition state." Meanwhile, when the state relating to the AT is the "AT in progress state," if the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, if the number of games remaining in the AT is 3 or less, even if the watermelon B is won, no lottery is held to acquire the right to transition to the "add-on specialized state" (sometimes called a specialized state transition lottery), and the player will not transition to the "specialized premonition state" or the "add-on specialized state." However, without being limited to this, even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery (sometimes called a specialized state transition lottery) may be held in which a player wins watermelon B and gains the right to transition to an "add-on specialized state". If the lottery is thus executed in a situation in which the AT counter value is 3 or less and a player wins a lottery in which a player wins watermelon B and gains the right to transition to an "add-on specialized state", the system may be configured so that the player may enter (or transition to) a "specialized premonition state" or "add-on specialized state" from the next game in which the lottery is won, or the system may be configured so that the player may enter (or transition to) a "specialized premonition state" or "add-on specialized state" when the AT counter value reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 1 or 0), or the system may be configured so that the player may enter (or transition to) a "specialized premonition state" or "add-on specialized state" after a predetermined number of games have been played since the game in which the lottery was won. In addition, when transitioning to the "addition specialized state", it is not necessary to go through the "specialized precursor state", and for example, it may be configured to transition directly from the "AT state" to the "addition specialized state". If the answer is Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the condition device related to the game is a specialized transition role (a small role that can execute a lottery to acquire the right to transition to the "addition specialized state", in this example, watermelon B). If the answer is Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a specialized state transition lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2). Next, in step 1434, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the executed specialized state transition lottery was won. If the answer is Yes in step 1434, then in step 1435, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be a "specialized premonition state" and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1431, then in step 1436, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, it is the final game of the AT). If the answer is Yes in step 1436, then in step 1437, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a continuation lottery that has a predetermined probability of winning (in this example, 2/3). Next, in step 1438, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the executed continuation lottery has been won. If the answer is Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be "AT in progress" and proceeds to step 1444-1 (the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter to satisfy the AT state transition condition). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be "state for revival possibility performance" and proceeds to step 1444-1. Note that, even if the answer is No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434 or step 1436, the process proceeds to step 1444-1. In this way, in the reel type gaming machine P, a continuation lottery is executed in the final game of the AT, and if the continuation lottery is won, the initial value of 50 games is set again in the AT counter M60. That is, if the number of AT games is not taken into consideration, the game is such that the AT of 50 games per set continues to loop at 2/3. The timing of the continuation lottery is not limited to the final game of the AT, and for example, the continuation lottery may be configured to be executed in the first game of the AT (the first game in which the "AT state" is newly established or the first game after the initial value is set in the AT counter M60). By configuring in this way, whether or not the next set (the AT related to the winning of the continuation lottery) will be executed (whether or not the AT will continue) has already been determined in the "AT state", so the effects during the AT can be made different between when the continuation lottery is won and when it is not won. For example, when the continuation lottery is won, the BGM can be changed (such as a song playing) in a situation where the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 or more (during the execution of the AT), or an effect that confirms that the continuation lottery has been won can be executed.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18. First, in step 1444-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state of the AT is a state for revival possibility presentation. If the answer is Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device for the game is a revival role (a role that can transition to the "AT in progress state" in the next game by winning in the "revival possibility presentation state", in other words, a role that can pull back the AT). Here, in the reel-type gaming machine P, the revival role is a role that includes any of watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry, and bonus roles (only BB role without setting difference, BB role with setting difference is not included), and when the condition device for the game becomes a revival role, it is said to win the revival lottery. If the answer is Yes in step 1444-2, then in step 1444-3, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be "AT in progress" and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter to satisfy the AT state transition condition. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1444-2, then in step 1444-4, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards to be "low probability state" and proceeds to step 1445. Note that, even if the answer is No in step 1441-1, then the game proceeds to step 1445. In this way, in the reel-type gaming machine P, even if the AT is the final game and the continuation lottery is not won, the game proceeds to the "resurrection possible or impossible performance state", and if the game can win the resurrection lottery in the "resurrection possible or impossible performance state", the game proceeds to the "AT in progress state" from the next game. In addition, the "state for revival possibility presentation" is a "favorable zone", but in the "AT in progress state", lotteries related to the AT (AT addition lotteries, continuation lotteries, etc.) are not executed, and the system is configured so that a revival lottery can be executed, and the manner in which lotteries related to the AT are executed differs between the "AT in progress state" and the "state for revival possibility presentation".

Next, in step 1445, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state of the AT from the next game onwards has not been determined. If the answer is Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the transition condition for the state of the AT has been met (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, this is met when the premonition game number of 10 games is consumed in the "specialized premonition state"). If the answer is Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, when the premonition game number is consumed in the "specialized premonition state", the "addition specialization state" is determined). Note that even if the answer is No in step 1445 or step 1446, the CPU C100 also proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a high probability counter value command (in this example, a command to the sub side, the current high probability counter value, in other words, a command related to the remaining number of games for which a high probability state is guaranteed), and proceeds to step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to the AT from the next game onwards is determined to be "playing inside advantageous BB". If the answer is Yes in step 1449-1, in step 1449-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high probability counter KHc to zero and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1450). Note that even if the answer is No in step 1499-1, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1450).

In the above explanation, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, and if a BB role (BB role with no setting difference) is won in a "low probability state", the AT transition lottery will not be won (and there will be no transition to an "AT in progress state"), whereas if a BB role (BB role with no setting difference) is won in a "high probability state", the AT transition lottery will be won (and there will be no transition to an "AT in progress state"). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if a condition device A, which is a specified condition device, is used as the AT lottery role and there are "high probability state A" and "high probability state B" as states related to the AT, which is an "advantageous zone", then if condition device A is won in "high probability state A", there is a 1/10 chance of winning the AT transition lottery, and if condition device A is won in "high probability state B", there is a 1/2 chance of winning the AT transition lottery. Furthermore, if the AT transition lottery is won, the AT state will transition to an "AT preparation state", which is a preparation state until transitioning to an "AT in progress state", and then, if a specified end condition is met (for example, 10 games have passed since transitioning to the "AT preparation state"), the state may be configured to transition to the "AT in progress state".

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process related to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 18. First, in step 1451, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current play area is a "favorable area". If the answer is Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the winning/replay winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, a command related to the winning/replay winning information related to the game). Next, in step 1454, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game is a role with push order (a condition device in which the role that wins differs depending on the push order, for example, Win-A1, etc.). If the answer is Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the instruction number (also called the push order number) in the game based on the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and stores the instruction number in a RAM address for storing the instruction number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the push order, and in this example, the main control board M determines it and transmits it to the sub-control board S (details will be described later). In addition, the sub-control board S can display the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. The instruction number is determined (not shown, but the instruction number is initialized based on clearing the instruction number) even when the push order navigation is not executed. When the push order guessing game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (e.g., AX) dedicated to the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (see FIG. 34 for the display image of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). Next, in step 1466, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets (for example, sets in the register area) the command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458, and proceeds to step 1472 (see FIG. 34 for the display image of the push order navigation display on the sub control board side). In this example, displaying the reel stop order that will give the player the highest profit on the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is referred to as push order navigation, displaying the push order navigation display, etc. In addition, in the slot machine P, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of "left → center → right" is configured to be displayed as "=1" on the push order display device D270, and is configured to be displayed as "=1" in both the push order bell and the push order replay. However, this is not limited to this, and the push order navigation of "left → center → right" may be displayed in a different manner on the push order display device D270 in a game related to the push order bell and in a game related to the push order replay. In other words, the number of types of display modes of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be configured to be the same as the number of types of winning and replay winning information.

Also, if the answer is No in step 1451 or step 1454, in step 1468, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a masking process on the winning/replay winning information of the game, and stores the masked information at a specified address in the RAM. Here, if the winning/replay winning information of the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the winning/replay winning information is recognized by an illegal act, the highly profitable push order (reel stop order) of the game will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the winning/replay winning information of the game is configured to be masked (a process for making the winning/replay winning information (especially the information related to the push order) secret) before being transmitted to the sub-control board S, so that the highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. Incidentally, as a method of mask processing in the reel type gaming machine P, multiple winning prize/replay winning information (winning prize/replay winning information having a similar role is suitable, for example, multiple winning prize/replay winning information that may stop and display a symbol combination that becomes a replay role in which the RT state is transitioned depending on the push order) is configured to be one performance group number (for example, winning prize/replay winning information 4 to 6 is set as performance group 4, etc.), and the performance group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S. Incidentally, the method of mask processing is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to provide new winning prize/replay winning information after mask processing after the provided winning prize/replay winning information (0 to 18 in this example). Also, in such a case, it is desirable to configure the existing winning/replay winning information to have multiple winning/replay winning information as one winning/replay winning information like the performance group number, and to provide winning/replay winning information after mask processing (for example, the winning/replay winning information 4 to 6 is the winning/replay winning information 19 (newly provided winning/replay winning information), which is the winning/replay winning information after mask processing). In addition, if it is determined that the game is one in which operation information (push order navigation) is notified based on the state of the AT in the main control board M, the winning/replay winning information is sent to the sub-control board S, and the performance group number is sent to the sub-control board S in a game in which operation information is not notified. In this configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be sent to the sub-control board S, or it may be configured not to be sent.

Next, in step 1470, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (e.g., sets in a register area) a command (a command to the sub side) related to the performance group number after executing the mask process, and proceeds to step 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (e.g., sets in a register area) a command (a command to the sub side) related to bonus winning information (whether or not a bonus has been won can be recognized on the sub side), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1550). Note that the reel type gaming machine P is configured to derive the winning/replay winning information and the bonus winning information from the winning number, and the derivation method will be described later. Also, as shown in the lower part of the figure, examples of push order navigation are configured as follows in the case of "AT in progress state": (1) if a fall replay role is included, the push order that does not stop and display the fall replay role is navigated, (2) if a bell (1 coin role or 11 coin role) is included, the push order that will give the largest number of coins is navigated, etc. In this way, in the reel type gaming machine P, when the play area is an "advantageous area", it is configured to be able to transmit winning/replay winning information (a number that can identify the type of winning role and the most advantageous push order for the player) and instruction number (a number that can identify the most advantageous push order for the player) to the sub-control board S, while when the play area is a "normal area", it is configured to transmit a performance group number (a number that can identify only the outline of the winning role) to the sub-control board S. That is, in the "advantageous zone", the winning information for the game, including winning information for winning and replay in which the game outcome and the player's profit differ depending on the push order, can be sent directly to the sub-control board S, whereas in a game zone that is not the "advantageous zone", the winning information for the game is not sent, and in the case of winning information for winning and replay in which the game outcome and the player's profit differ depending on the push order, a performance group number that conceals the information regarding the push order is sent to the sub-control board S.

When the play area is not a "profitable area", etc., the main control board M is configured to execute a mask process to determine the performance group number when sending the winning/replay winning information determined by the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and to send the performance group number to the sub-control board S. The performance group number is a number that is assigned to the winning/replay winning information related to winning roles that play similar roles (for example, replay roles that include a falling replay role, push order bell, etc.). By executing a mask process (a process that keeps the winning/replay winning information (especially information related to the push order) secret) on the winning/replay winning information related to the game before sending it to the sub-control board S, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the winning/replay winning information is recognized through fraudulent acts and a highly profitable push order (reel stop order) related to the game is recognized.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process related to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 18. First, in step 1552, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (decrement timer) is 0 or not. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a timer that measures the time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be guaranteed from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 to a new minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) and starts it. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information on the reel stop order and the push order related to the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information on the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data related to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the output request for the reel rotation start waiting time related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the reel control command related to the game and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1260). In other words, the processing of steps 1562 and 1564 makes it possible to send a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the reel will start rotating.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process related to the subroutine of step 3400 in FIG. 18. First, in step 3402, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current play area is an "advantageous area". The "advantageous area" is one of the play areas, and is a play area that is likely to be set in a play situation that is advantageous for the player, such as when the AT-related state is "AT in progress". If the answer is Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPU C100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the advantageous area remaining game number counter YKc-1 (a decrement counter that is set to an initial value of 1500, which is the maximum number of games that can be stayed in the "advantageous area", and can be subtracted every game during the period of the "advantageous area").

Next, in step 3408, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is "AT in progress". If the answer is Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value. Next, in step 3412, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT state is a high probability state. If the answer is Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high probability failure counter KHc, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1700). Note that even if the answer is No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the process proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1700). In this way, in the reel type gaming machine P, when the state related to the AT that can be displayed by the push order navigation is "AT in progress", the AT counter value is subtracted every game, but when it is "advantageous BB state", "game in advantageous BB", "specialized premonition state" or "addition specialization state", the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. In other words, when the "AT in progress state" is shifted to the "specialized premonition state" in a situation where the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains), it is configured to be able to transition (transition) from "AT in progress state" to "specialized premonition state" to "addition specialization state" while maintaining the AT counter value. Note that even if the state related to the AT is "AT in progress", if a winning number including a bonus role is determined in that game, it is possible not to subtract 1 from the AT counter value. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the display may be controlled so that the remaining AT game number displayed on the performance display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S is subtracted. For example, if a game is executed and a bonus is won when the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 is "30", the AT counter value will remain at "30", or will store "30 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery related to that game. However, upon operation of the start lever D50, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 may be displayed as "29", or "29 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery (note that the "α" obtained by the addition lottery may not be announced during the game, but may be announced in a specific game after the game (at the start of bonus play, during bonus play, at the end of bonus play, or in a game that meets specified conditions after the end of bonus play)). The number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 can be configured to be subtracted by one for each game even in "games in favorable BB", and the number of remaining AT games can be subtracted for each game until a performance suggesting a bonus confirmation (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) is output. By configuring in this way, when a bonus is won in a state where push order navigation such as "AT state" can be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately knowing that the bonus has been won. In other words, after the winning number including the bonus role is determined, a continuous performance over multiple games that stirs up whether or not the bonus has been won can be executed using the performance display device S40, etc., to increase the interest of the game. In addition, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 after the bonus game is finished can be controlled to display "30", or a value of "30" or more when the result of the AT addition lottery is won and the result of the addition is notified. In addition, when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 is "1", if a game is played and a bonus is won, the display related to the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 becomes "0", but while maintaining this state, a continuous performance spanning multiple games is executed to incite whether or not a bonus has been won, and if a game is played when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 is "1", a winning number (or winning information for winning a prize or replay, or a ball group number) that may be used to execute an AT addition lottery is won, and if the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games becomes "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 becomes "0". In addition, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing a continuous performance may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is large.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 18. First, in step 1702, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the RT state transition condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the reel-type gaming machine P, the RT state transition condition is configured to be satisfied by the execution of RAM clear (initialization of RAM), the stop display of replay (in this example, the stop display of replay 04), and the winning, start, and end of BB. If the answer is Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the RT state transition can be performed and the RT state from the next game onwards based on the satisfied RT state transition condition (see the RT state transition diagram in FIG. 28), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1750). Note that even if the answer is No in step 1702, the next process (processing of step 1750) is also proceeded to. In addition, in the slot machine P, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels have stopped, but when transitioning to "RT1", the transition timing may be when the lever is turned on. The timing of transitioning to the RT state (storing the RT number in RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram for a slot machine P. In a slot machine P, there are four RT states: "RT0" to "RT2" and "Type 1 BB-A, B, C", and the RT state transition occurs when the conditions indicated by the arrows in the diagram are met. Specific examples of RT state transitions include transition to "RT0" when the RT state is "RT1", RAM initialization is performed, or when replay 04 is displayed as stopped. When replay 04 is displayed as stopped, specifically, when "replay-D1" is won in a situation where the RT state is "RT1", if the left stop button is operated as the first stop, replays 01 to 03 are displayed as stopped, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if you win "Replay-D1" when the RT state is "RT1", and you operate the center stop button or right stop button as the first stop, Replay 04 will be displayed as stopped, and the RT state will transition from "RT1" to "RT0".

In addition, if the RT state is "RT0" or "RT1", and you win the BB role, but do not win the BB role in the game in which you won (the condition device related to Type 1 BB-A, B, C is activated), the RT state will transition to "RT2". In addition, if you win the BB role in "RT2" (Type 1 BB-A, B, C is activated), the state will transition to "Type 1 BB-A, B, C". In addition, if BB ends in "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" (the activation of Type 1 BB-A, B, C ends), the state will transition to "RT1". Furthermore, when the BB is won when the AT state is a "low probability state" and the BB ends, the RT state will transition to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player. However, since the AT state is a state in which push order navigation does not occur, when "Replay-D1 to D3" is won, if the reels are stopped in an incorrect push order (the first stop is one of three options: left button, middle button, and right button, and one of the three options is the correct push order, so replays other than Replay 04 are displayed as stopped, and two of the three options are incorrect push orders, so Replay 04 is displayed as stopped), the reels will be displayed as stopped, and the replay will transition from "RT1" to "RT0". Furthermore, if the AT state is a "high probability state", "AT state", "specialized precursor state" or "addition specialized state", BB is won, and when the BB ends, the RT state will transition to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player, and since the AT state is a state in which push order navigation occurs, even if "Replay-D1 to D3" is won, Replay 04 will navigate you to the correct push order that does not display a stop, so "RT1" can be maintained.

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process related to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 18. First, in step 1752, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT state transition condition is satisfied in the game. The AT state transition condition is satisfied, for example, when (1) the BB without setting difference won in the "high probability state" ends, (2) the continuation lottery is won, or (3) the revival lottery is won. If the answer is Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the AT initial game number (50 in this example, the number of games from which subtraction begins after transition to the "AT state") in the AT counter M60 in response to the new transition to the "AT precursor state", and proceeds to step 1756. If the answer is No in step 1752, the CPUC100 also proceeds to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is not a high probability state. If the answer is Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT state of the next game is a high probability state. If the answer is Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the number of high probability games (10 in this example) in the high probability counter and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3500). Note that even if the answer is No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the "high probability state" and transitioning to the "game in favorable BB", if the BB is won and the state transitions to the "favorable BB state", and the number of AT games is added in the "favorable BB state", when the BB ends and the state transitions from the "favorable BB state" to the "AT in progress state", the initial value set in the AT counter will exceed 50. Specifically, if the number of AT games is added by 30 in the "favorable BB state" and then the state transitions to the "AT in progress state", the AT counter will be set to 80 (initial value 50 + added 30). In this case, when a performance is performed to inform the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", it is desirable to inform the player that the initial number of AT games is 80 games at the start of the "AT state", but as another notification method, it is possible to consider a notification method in which, instead of performing a performance to inform the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", a performance is performed to inform the player that 30 games have been added during the AT (for example, immediately after the start of the "AT state" or when the number of remaining AT games in the performance display device S40 is small), after presenting the player with the initial value of 50 games at the start of the "AT state". By doing this, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the AT game number has been added in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games have been added, so that the interest in the addition performance that suddenly occurs for an unknown reason during the AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur) can be increased. In this example, the AT initial game number is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process for setting the AT initial game number is not limited to that of this example, and the AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT state transition control process of step 1400 described above. Also, the number of games (AT initial game number) set in the AT counter M60 is configured to be subtracted from the time when the game after the BB ends (the AT-related state becomes "AT in progress state") (subtraction does not start during the BB). Also, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the memory area of the RAM of the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram for a slot machine P. In a slot machine P, there are ten AT-related states, namely, "low probability state", "playing in normal BB", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT state", "specialized premonition state", "addition specialization state", "playing in favorable BB", "favorable BB state", and "state for displaying revival possibility". The AT-related state will change by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure. For example, if you win watermelon B in the "AT state" and win the specialized state transition lottery with a 1/2 chance of winning, you will transition to the "specialized premonition state". Also, if 10 games have passed (consumed) since the transition to the "specialized premonition state", it is configured to transition to the "addition specialization state". In addition, as for the game zone, the three AT-related states of "low probability state", "playing in normal BB", and "normal BB state" are set to the "normal zone", and the seven AT-related states of "high probability state", "AT state", "specialized premonition state", "add-on specialization state", "playing in favorable BB", "favorable BB state", and "state for displaying whether or not revival is possible" are set to the "favorable zone". In other words, even if the state of the seven ATs that are "favorable zones" has transitioned (shifted), if 1500 games have passed without being set to the "normal zone", the "favorable zone" will be forcibly ended and set to the "normal zone". In addition, when the push order navigation is displayed in the "AT state", "specialized premonition state", or "add-on specialization state", which are the notification game states, the game state is maintained even if replay 04 is stopped and displayed.

As mentioned above, in the "AT in progress state", if the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 and the continuation lottery is not won, the state will enter the "resurrection possible/possible presentation state". If the revival lottery is won in the "resurrection possible/possible presentation state", the state can return to the "AT in progress state" again. On the other hand, if the revival lottery is not won in the "resurrection possible/possible presentation state", the state will transition to the "low probability state", and the state will change from the "advantageous zone" to the "normal zone".

When a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "high probability state", the BB with no setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the state transitions to the "AT in progress state". Also, when a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "AT in progress state", the BB with no setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the state transitions to the "AT in progress state". Furthermore, when a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "revival possibility performance state", the BB with no setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the state transitions to the "AT in progress state" (to win the revival lottery). Furthermore, when a BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) is won in the "Revival possibility performance state", the BB with setting difference is activated, and the "Advantageous BB state" ends, if the BB with setting difference is the winning number associated with a single BB role (winning number 20), the state will enter a "low probability state" after the BB ends (because the BB with setting difference role will not trigger a win in the revival lottery), and if the BB with setting difference is a winning number that overlaps with a rare role (winning numbers 21-23), the state will enter an "AT in progress state" after the BB ends (because the rare role will trigger a win in the revival lottery).

In addition, if you are in a "favourable zone" and in a "high probability state", you will win a BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B), and when the BB with setting difference is activated and the "favourable BB state" ends, you will transition to a "high probability state".

In addition, the state related to the AT to which it transitions after the end of the "favorable BB state" is the "AT state", "specialized precursor state", or "add-on specialized state" which is the state related to the AT when the BB is won, after the end of a BB won during the AT ("AT state", "specialized precursor state", "add-on specialized state") (either a BB with a setting difference or a BB without a setting difference), and after the end of a BB without a setting difference won during a non-AT ("high probability state"), it transitions to the "AT state". In addition, after the end of a BB with a setting difference won during a non-AT ("high probability state"), it transitions to the "high probability state".

The state of the AT is not limited to the above-mentioned. For example, the AT lottery may be executed by winning a predetermined winning number in the "low probability state" or "high probability state", and the AT lottery may be switched to the "premonition state" by winning the AT lottery, and the state may be switched to the "AT in progress state" after 16 to 32 games. In such a case, the AT lottery may be executed by winning the predetermined condition device, and if the AT lottery is not won, the state may be switched to the "false premonition state" and the state may be switched to the "low probability state" or "high probability state" after 16 to 32 games. In addition, a "standby section" different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided as a game section. For example, in the case where the AT lottery is executed by winning "cherry", if a "BB + cherry" in which BB and cherry overlap is won and the AT lottery is won, the state inside the BB until the "BB" of "BB + cherry" wins may be configured as the "standby section". In this way, by providing a "standby section", in the case where the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won, and in the case where the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is won, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off during the period until the BB pattern combination is complete (until the advantageous section indicator is turned on), so that it is possible to provoke the player as to whether or not the AT lottery has been won. In addition, when the BB is won in the "addition specialization state", it may be configured so that the "addition specialization state" resumes after the BB ends, and in such a case, during the BB, the AT addition lottery is executed differently from the BB won in the "AT state" as the BB won in the "addition specialization state" (for example, it is easier to win the AT addition lottery than the BB won in the "AT state", and the number of games per AT game number addition is relatively large). In addition, if a BB is won in the "specialized precursor state", the state may be configured to transition to the "specialized add-on state" after the BB ends, and if configured in this way, the AT add-on lottery may be executed during the BB in the same way as for a BB won in the "specialized add-on state".

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game zone transition control process related to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 18. First, the reel type gaming machine P has a game zone as a zone related to the game state, and has two game zones, a "normal zone" that is relatively less profitable for the player, and a "profitable zone" that is relatively more profitable for the player. To explain the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the game zone related to the game is a "normal zone". If the answer is Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the game zone for the next game onwards to be the game zone corresponding to the current AT state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3508, in other words, if the game zone is a "favorable zone", in step 3514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 0 or not, in other words, whether the "favorable zone" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. If the answer is Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears all information related to the AT (thereby, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of games stayed in the "specialized premonition state" also becomes 0). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether any favorable zone end condition is not satisfied. Here, any favorable zone end condition is an end condition of the "favorable zone" other than when the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, for example, when the AT counter value becomes 0 or when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If the answer is No in step 3518, that is, if any favorable zone end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3515. In this way, in the reel-type gaming machine P, when the "favorable zone" ends and the "normal zone" is set from the next game onwards, all information related to the AT (information related to the number of AT continuation games, the number of AT remaining games, etc.) is cleared, so that the conditions for the "favorable zone" to be entered again in the "normal zone" thereafter will not be relaxed. Note that the information related to the AT that is cleared by the process of step 3515 (processing at the end of the favorable zone) includes the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1, a flag indicating the game state, etc. In addition, these pieces of information are also cleared by clearing the RAM when changing the setting, but while the RAM clearing at the time of changing the setting also clears information related to the "condition device related to the continuous operation device of the role (BB)", the "RT state", the "number of reserved sheets", etc., the process of step 3515 (processing at the end of the favorable zone) does not clear information related to the "condition device related to the continuous operation device of the role (BB)", the "RT state", the "number of reserved sheets", etc. In this way, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the settings and the clear range at the end of the "advantageous zone" (for example, when the processing of step 3515 is executed) are different. It is also possible to configure the RAM clear at the time of changing the settings to hold the "condition device related to the continuous operation device of the role (BB)" and the "RT state". In addition, the addresses of the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous zone" are continuous. By making the addresses of the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous zone" continuous in this way, it is possible to clear it by a simple process of specifying the top address to be cleared at the time of the clearing process and the range of addresses to be cleared. In addition, when the "advantageous zone" ends, a command to the effect that the "advantageous zone" has ended is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S receives this command, it is configured not to erase the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous zone" or information related to how many games have been played in the "AT state". However, when the RAM clear is executed at the time of changing the settings, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous zone" or information related to how many games have been played in the "AT state" on the sub-control board S side will also be erased.

When the "favorable zone" ends because the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, (1) if the current AT state is a "high probability state", the AT state in the next game will become a "low probability state", (2) if the current AT state is "playing in favorable BB", the AT state in the next game will become "playing in normal BB", (3) if the current AT state is a "favorable BB state", the AT state in the next game will become a "normal BB state", (4) if the current AT state is an "AT state", "specialized precursor state", "addition specialized state" or "state for revival possibility performance", the AT state in the next game will become a "low probability state" (because the information related to the AT is cleared).

Next, in step 3516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the play area for the next game onwards to the "normal area". Next, in step 3517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous area indicator YH because the "advantageous area" has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. Note that the advantageous area indicator YH is configured to be turned off when the "advantageous area" ends and is set to the "normal area", but the detailed timing of turning it off is not particularly limited, and for example, the advantageous area indicator YH may be configured to be turned off when a game medal is inserted for a game in which the "advantageous area" ends and becomes the "normal area". In other words, it is sufficient that the advantageous area indicator YH is configured to be turned off before the start lever D50 is operated, which allows the next game to start. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the play area for the next game onwards to be the "advantageous area", and proceeds to step 3528.

Next, in step 3528, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether it has been decided to set a new "favorable zone" in the next game (whether it has been decided to set the "favorable zone" from the "normal zone"). If the answer is Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value to the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set to the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed value (1500 in this example) that is common to all set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the favorable zone indicator YH and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1293). If the answer is No in step 3528, the CPU C100 also proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1293). In the above explanation, the lighting process of the advantageous zone indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous zone indicator YH is not limited to this, and the lighting timing of the advantageous zone indicator YH may be appropriately set in the period from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the new "advantageous zone" (the "normal zone" game) to the timing when it becomes possible to insert game medals in the game that will become the new "advantageous zone" (if the game before the new "advantageous zone" was a game related to replay, to the timing when the operation of the start lever in the game that will become the new "advantageous zone" becomes effective).

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing for the subroutine of step 1600 in reel-type gaming machine P. The processing of this subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and is configured to be executed periodically thereafter at a predetermined time interval (T in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of an interrupt (e.g., backing up data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking the input port of the power interruption detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power interruption is currently detected (in the current interrupt processing). If the answer is No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the power interruption processing described below. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (updating various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updating the storage area for each input port data in the RAM area). Here, input port data refers to information related to the detection of the settlement button D60, start lever D50, stop button D40, door switch D80, setting key switch M20, setting/reset button M30, power failure detection signal, input reception sensor D10s, first input sensor D20s, second input sensor D30s, first dispensing sensor H10s, second dispensing sensor H20s, etc. (i.e., the presence or absence of operation of these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at interrupt intervals T).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and switches the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag on and off according to the sampling results of each input port data (for example, if the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on for multiple samplings, it is possible to detect that the front door DU is open without being affected by noise by turning on the door switch flag). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel drive control process (processing related to the control of the drive of the reel M50, which will be described in detail later) for all reels (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether the counter value is greater than 0. If the answer is Yes in step 1612, then in step 1613, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. If the answer is No in step 1612, then proceeds to step 1614 as well. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, then the processing of steps 1612 and 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, etc. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M judges whether all error flags are off (not shown, but all error flags such as the inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted medal number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormality error flag, payout abnormality error flag, payout medal retention error flag, door switch flag, etc. are off). If the answer is Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (for example, in the register area) an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the fact that an error has not been detected) and proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (for example, in the register area) an error detection command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the fact that an error has been detected) and proceeds to step 1622. In step 1620, information on the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the on error flag is sent to the sub side. The error not detected command may be set only when the error is released from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag has been turned off), and the setting process of the information may not be executed when an error is not detected (step 1618 may not be performed). Furthermore, the error detection command may be set only when an error occurs from a state in which no error has occurred, or may be set when the type of error changes from a state in which a first error (e.g., an inserted medal retention error) to a second error (e.g., a paid medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (a command on the sub side) (for example, if a control command has been set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, the set control command is transmitted). Here, the commands transmitted to the sub control board S include a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the first stop), a command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the winning/replay winning information (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the display pattern is stopped ... timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the start lever There are commands such as those sent immediately after the bar operation (only during the favorable zone), those related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after the start lever operation), those related to the RT state (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts), those related to the state of the AT (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts), those related to the high security obstacle counter value command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), those related to the number of games remaining in the AT (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts, or immediately after the start lever operation), those related to the game zone (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts), etc. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the reel type gaming machine P to an external hall computer, etc.). Note that, as information related to errors output by the external signal, door opening error, input abnormality error, payout abnormality error, input reception sensor retention error, etc. are output, although not shown. The door open error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the insertion reception sensor retention error is configured to be an error when the insertion reception sensor detects retention of a game medal. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs output data of an LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, among a plurality of 7-segment LED units, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit is turned on, and a predetermined segment of the 7-segment is turned on) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the lighting mode of the LED (for example, changes the lighting color of the LED). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes software random number management processing (update processing of random number values managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area in which an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generating circuit). Next, in step 1634, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M judges whether the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is not set). Specifically, the abnormality flag bit is set when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value. If the answer is Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M judges whether the update status of the built-in random number is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the update status abnormality is not set). If the answer is Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes interrupt end processing and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1602). On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 1634 or step 1636, then at step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal random number error display (for example, sets an error number in a register area). Next, at step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the unrecoverable error processing described above.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the reel drive control process related to the subroutine of step 6100 in FIG. 32. Note that in this process, the process for one reel is illustrated, but it should be noted that processes corresponding to the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53 are executed. First, in step 6102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timing to start the reel spin start standby state (for example, the timing after execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. If the answer is Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel spin start standby state and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 6102, the process also proceeds to step 6106.

Next, in step 6106, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timing to start the reel acceleration state has been reached (the timing when the reel rotation start waiting state ends and the reel acceleration process begins to be executed, for example, the timing to execute the process of step 1260 in FIG. 18). If the answer is Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the reel acceleration process and proceeds to step 6112. Note that if the reel is stopped, this process will start the reel rotation. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 6106, the process also proceeds to step 6112.

Next, in step 6112, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel acceleration state. If the answer is Yes in step 6112, then in step 6114, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the end timing of the reel acceleration state has been reached (for example, the timing when all interrupt processes have been executed for the "interrupt execution count" in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 described below). If the answer is Yes in step 6114, then in step 6116, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a reel constant speed maintenance process and proceeds to step 6120. Note that if the answer is No in step 6112 or step 6114, the process also proceeds to step 6120.

Next, in step 6120, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel constant speed state. If the answer is Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the reel sensor has detected an index provided on the reel (the reel corresponding to the processing of this subroutine) since the reel constant speed state was reached (after the processing of step 6116 was executed). Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one index (it may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape on, for example, the peripheral side of the reel, and is used to detect whether the reel has passed a predetermined position or has made one rotation. Each index is detected by the reel sensor. The signal of the reel sensor is electrically connected to the main control board M. Then, when the reel sensor detects (turns off) an index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is configured to detect that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If the answer is Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 6122, in step 6124, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., the time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) has elapsed since the reel drive state became the reel constant speed state. If the answer is No in step 6124, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. In this way, in this example, it is configured to be possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed has become normally constant by the reel sensor detecting the index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. In this example, the predetermined time is the time required to execute 400 interrupt processes (configured so that 400 interrupt processes can rotate 400 steps), which is longer than the time required for the reel to rotate once (one revolution) when the reel rotation speed is constant (for example, one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, and the time required to execute 336 interrupt processes). By configuring in this way, no matter how far the distance between the index and the reel sensor is at the time when the reel drive state becomes constant speed (the distance from when the reel rotates until the index is detected by the reel sensor), if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor is configured to detect the index within the predetermined time (the time required to execute 400 interrupt processes) after the reel drive state becomes constant speed.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if the answer is Yes in step 6124, then in step 6126 the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6128, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a reel re-acceleration process and proceeds to processing in step 6130. Thus, in this example, if the reel sensor does not detect an index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes a reel constant speed state, the reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. Note that even if the answer is No in step 6120, the process proceeds to processing in step 6130. The reel re-acceleration process does not have to be the same process as the reel acceleration process described above, and the reel re-acceleration process and the reel acceleration process may differ in the combination of phases that excite the stepping motor and the number of times that interrupt processing is executed for each combination of excited phases.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel rotation stop processing related to the subroutine of step 6200 in FIG. 32. First, in step 6106, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timing to start the reel deceleration standby state has been reached (the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends; for example, it is determined that the timing to start the reel deceleration standby state has been reached by operating the stop button). If the answer is Yes in step 6130, then in step 6132 the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration standby state and proceeds to step 6134. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 6130, it also proceeds to step 6134.

Next, in step 6134, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel deceleration standby state. If the answer is Yes in step 6136, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timing to end the reel deceleration standby state (the timing to start executing the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If the answer is Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPU MC of the main control board M starts deceleration of the reel (reel deceleration process). Next, in step 6140, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel deceleration state and proceeds to processing of step 6142. Note that if the answer is No in step 6134 or step 6136, the processing also proceeds to processing of step 6142.

Next, in step 6142, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel deceleration state. If the answer is Yes in step 6142, then in step 6144, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the reel deceleration state end timing (the timing at which the execution of the reel deceleration process ends) has been reached. If the answer is Yes in step 6144, then in step 6146, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel stop state and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1612). Note that if the answer is No in step 6142 or step 6144, then the process also proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1612).

Next, the rotation operation of the reel M50 of the slot machine P will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 35. The slot machine P starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained thereafter (when the reel drive state becomes a reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, but there are cases where the rotation speed does not actually reach the constant speed). Then, when any of the stop buttons is operated, the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button is stopped. Here, the stepping motor is a four-phase stepping motor having four phases Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (it does not have to be a four-phase stepping motor), and the rotation control is performed by switching the phase to be excited and exciting the stepping motor in 1-2 phase. In other words, the stepping motor can be rotated in the forward direction by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of exciting phases). In the figure, the "Phase to be excited" column shows which of Φ0 to Φ3 is specified to be excited (details will be given later).

As shown in the "Reel Rotation Speed Image" in the upper part of the figure, the driving state from when the stepping motor starts to rotate until it stops is divided into six states, and the stepping motor is driven and controlled according to a driving pattern corresponding to each driving state. The driving states are "Reel Stop State", "Reel Start Rotation Standby State", "Reel Acceleration State", "Reel Constant Speed State", "Reel Deceleration Standby State", and "Reel Deceleration State". In the "Reel Rotation Speed Image", the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed, and the speed increases upward, while the horizontal axis is time, and time passes to the right. The example shown in the figure illustrates a case where no reel rotation failure occurs, and does not apply if the reel rotation failure occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or losing synchronism (the occurrence of a reel rotation failure will be described later).

"Reel stopped state" indicates the state in which the reel is stopped. When in the "reel stopped state", the reel is stationary and all four phases of the stepping motor are not excited.

Next, in the "reel stopped state", the start lever D50 is operated at the timing of (1) in the figure, and the reel drive state is updated to the "reel spin start standby state". Here, the "reel spin start standby state" refers to the state in which the reel is waiting to start accelerating the stepping motor (reel acceleration process) after the start lever D50 is operated. This standby period is the period from when the reel drive state changes from the "reel stopped state" to the "reel acceleration state". For example, the time is measured from when the reel drive state became the "reel acceleration state" in the previous game, and if the start lever D50 for the current game is operated before the minimum game time (approximately 4.1 seconds) has elapsed, the "reel spin start standby state" will be entered.

Next, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel spin start waiting state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerating from a stationary state to reach a constant speed. In this example, the acceleration state ends (the reel drive state is updated to the "reel constant speed state") when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times ("100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220", see the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the lower left of the figure). Next, at the timing of (3) in the figure, in other words, the timing when the "reel acceleration state" ends with one more timer interrupt process execution, the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed. Note that at this timing, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state". Next, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start waiting state" to the "reel acceleration state", and the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times, so that the reel drive state is updated to the "reel constant speed state". In this way, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state" for one timer interrupt process. In other words, the final excitation phase combination in the "reel acceleration state" is configured to execute the interrupt process only once, "φ3, φ0", which is the same excitation mode as the "reel constant speed state" in which the interrupt process is executed once for each excitation phase combination (if no reel rotation abnormality occurs). By configuring in this way, the acceleration process can be stably executed until the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed.

Here, the bottom part of the figure is a "step motor excitation image." The figure illustrates an example of a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel acceleration state," and a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel constant speed state." First, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel acceleration state" will be described in detail with reference to the bottom left part of the figure. Note that "exciting phase" refers to a combination of exciting phases, and "number of interrupt executions" refers to the number of times that the interrupt process is executed to cause excitation with that combination of exciting phases. In this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the step motor (stepping motor) is excited for 220 timer interrupt processes, and the step motor (stepping motor) is excited by executing interrupt processes as follows: (KA) 100 interrupt processes at "φ0" → (KB) 60 interrupt processes at "φ0, φ1" → (KC) 30 interrupt processes at "φ1" → (KD) 15 interrupt processes at "φ1, φ2" → (KE) 8 interrupt processes at "φ2" → (KF) 4 interrupt processes at "φ2, φ3" → (KG) 2 interrupt processes at "φ3" → (KH) 1 interrupt process at "φ3, φ0" (the number of interrupt processes is merely an example and may be changed without any problem). In this way, in this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the number of times that the interrupt process is executed is gradually decreased with one exciting phase combination.

Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "constant reel speed state" will be explained in detail with reference to the lower right part of the same figure. In this example, when the reel is in a constant speed state (when executing reel constant speed maintenance processing), (TA) interrupt processing once at "φ0" → (TB) interrupt processing once at "φ0, φ1" → (TC) interrupt processing once at "φ1" → (TD) interrupt processing once at "φ1, φ2" → (TE) interrupt processing once at "φ2" → (TF) interrupt processing once at "φ2, φ3" → (TG) interrupt processing once at "φ3" → (TH) interrupt processing once at "φ3, φ0" → (TA) interrupt processing once at "φ0" → (TB) interrupt processing once at "φ0, φ1" → ..., (TA) to (TG) are repeatedly executed one interrupt processing at a time to excite the step motor (stepping motor). Thus, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintenance process is being executed, the interrupt process is executed only once for each combination of excited phases.

Next, when the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state," the stop button corresponding to one of the reels is operated at the timing of (5) in the diagram, and the reel drive state is updated to the "reel deceleration standby state." Here, the "reel constant speed state" is a state in which the reel rotation speed is constant (a state in which the combination of excited phases is switched for each interrupt process), and the "reel deceleration standby state" refers to the state from when the stop button is operated by the player until the start of stop control (in the reel deceleration standby state, reel slippage occurs corresponding to the number of slipping frames). The duration of this drive state is determined based on the timing of the operation of the stop button.

Next, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and the reel begins to decelerate. When the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor continues to be excited for a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel; as an example, four-phase excitation is performed in which all four phases are excited. Then, after the predetermined time of excitation, at the timing of (7) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stopped state", and the reel comes to a stop.

As described above, the slot machine P is configured to update the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state again and execute the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation state of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) if the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state and the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. Therefore, when the reel drive state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, during the execution of the reel acceleration process, it is not determined whether the reel acceleration has been executed normally. Also, whether the reel acceleration has been executed normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether a reel rotation failure has occurred) is determined in the process of step 6124 (determined after a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel drive state was updated to the reel constant speed state), but if it is determined in the process of step 6124 that the reel sensor did not detect the index and therefore the reel is not at a constant speed (a reel rotation failure has occurred), the reel re-acceleration process is executed, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by configuring the reel acceleration process not to determine whether the reel acceleration has been performed normally during the reel acceleration process, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the reel acceleration process, if the reel rotation failure is resolved and the reel rotation speed can be made to reach a constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration process until the reel acceleration process is completed, the reel sensor detects an index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state, and the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed without executing the re-acceleration process, making it difficult for a situation to occur in which the player cannot play the game (cannot operate the stop button) due to the execution of the reel re-acceleration process. Also, by configuring the reel acceleration process not to execute the process of determining whether the reel acceleration has been performed normally during the reel acceleration process, the amount of data required for the process related to the reel rotation can be reduced. Note that, because of this configuration, if a reel rotation failure occurs while the reel type gaming machine P is executing the reel acceleration process, the following action will be taken.

<Effect 1>
The reel rotation starts → the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state → the reel acceleration process is executed → the execution of the reel acceleration process is completed → the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process → the reel rotation failure is detected → the reel re-acceleration process is executed. Note that the reel rotation failure refers to a case where the reel acceleration is not executed normally due to the reel rotation being hindered by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubs against the reel window D160, etc.), loss of synchronism occurring, etc. In this way, by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, the game can be progressed smoothly.

<Effect 2>
The reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state → the reel acceleration process is executed → a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process → the reel acceleration process is continued → the execution of the reel acceleration process is terminated → the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → a reel rotation failure is detected → the reel re-acceleration process is executed. In this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed when a reel rotation failure is detected thereafter, it is possible to smoothly proceed with the game. Also, as described above, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continued, and the execution of the reel acceleration process is terminated when the reel acceleration process is executed the same number of interrupts as when the reel rotation failure does not occur. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the reel rotation speed to easily reach a constant speed without executing the reel re-acceleration process when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the execution of the reel acceleration process is started.

<Effect 3>
The reel starts spinning → the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state → the reel acceleration process is executed → the power cut process is executed during the reel acceleration process → the power is restored from the power cut → the reel acceleration process is continued (the unprocessed reel acceleration process is executed) → the reel rotation failure occurs during the reel acceleration process → the reel acceleration process is continued (the unprocessed reel acceleration process is executed) → the execution of the reel acceleration process is completed → the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → the reel rotation failure is detected → the reel re-acceleration process is executed. In this way, even if the power cut process is executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continued after the power is restored, and the reel re-acceleration process is executed if the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state, thereby allowing the game to proceed smoothly. In addition, if a power cut process is executed while a reel acceleration process is being executed, the reel acceleration process is continued after the power is restored, and if the reel sensor detects an index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to a reel constant speed state, the reel re-acceleration process is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot continue playing (cannot operate the stop button) due to the reel re-acceleration process. Note that the power cut process is sometimes referred to as a power cut process.

<<Action after final stop button operation>>
The reel-type gaming machine P is configured so that when the final reel (the reel that spins to the end, also known as the third reel) stops after the final stop button (third stop button) is operated and a winning symbol combination is displayed, the payout of gaming medals can be executed; however, the action related to the payout of gaming medals may be configured as follows.

<Effect 1>
The game is a game in which a winning role has been won and the reels begin to spin → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a power outage occurs → the third reel moves (spins) to the stopped display position → power outage is detected → process when power is out is executed → power is restored → the reel displays a stopped pattern combination corresponding to the winning role → process related to the payout of game medals is executed It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game where a small combination such as the above-mentioned common bell, which can be won regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop button, is won, even if a power outage occurs in the game center immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of sliding frames is at its maximum), the movement (spin) to the planned stop position can be completed before the power outage is detected. Also, if the symbol combination (for example, a common bell) that constitutes a winning combination is displayed after the power is restored, the game medals can be paid out normally, making it difficult for the player to suffer any disadvantage.

<Effect 2>
The game is a winning combination and the reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → a pattern corresponding to the winning combination appears on the reel as viewed by the player Although the combination is not stopped, the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (this is the case when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game in which a bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is the winning role, is not stopped on the reels as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is executed normally by the processing inside the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → The process related to the payout of game medals is executed. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is not displayed on the reel from the player's perspective, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the winning role is won in the internal processing of the slot machine P and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is normally executed, the payout of game medals can be executed, and it is possible to configure in such a way that it is difficult for a player to suffer a disadvantage. Note that the timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and it is applicable to all cases where a reel rotation failure occurs during the period from when the second reel is displayed to when the process related to the payout of game medals is executed, and as a result, the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot be stopped at the expected stop position (it is also applicable to the action related to the reel rotation failure exemplified below). Note that the above action 2 illustrates an action in a game in which a winning role is won. That is, if no reel rotation failure occurs, the following action will occur (similar action may be configured for other actions in the case where no rotation failure or power outage occurs): The reels start spinning as a game in which a winning combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the player If you look, you will see that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed stopped on the reels, and the judgment process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → executes processing related to the payout of game medals.Note that the winning role in the actions described above and below may be a winning role that can be won regardless of the timing of operating the stop button in a winning game (for example, a common bell), or a winning role that may or may not be won depending on the timing of operating the stop button in a winning game (for example, watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry). In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined game state, when a reel rotation failure or power outage does not occur and a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, if a reel backlight (sometimes called a back lamp) is flashed (sometimes called a back lamp effect) corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is configured to be executed, the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination may also be executed when a reel rotation failure occurs in a game in which the predetermined winning combination is won in the predetermined game state and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed. In addition, in this action, an example is given of a case in which the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position, but this is not limited to this, and it may be applied to a case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position due to a reel rotation failure, or a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position due to a reel rotation failure (it can be applied to other actions as well).

<Effect 3>
The game is a winning combination and the reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the stable supply of power to the slot machine P is halted → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → power outage process is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the player When viewed from the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is not displayed on the reels, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game in which a bell role is a winning role, when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is the winning role, is not displayed on the reels as viewed from the player's perspective, but the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is executed normally by the processing within the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → The process related to the payout of game medals is executed. It may be configured to function as described above. Furthermore, the timing for detecting a power outage, the timing when a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the reel type gaming machine P is stopped, the timing for determining that the pattern combination is normal in the judgment process of step 1269, and the timing for power restoration are not limited to the above timings, and it is sufficient that the timing for detecting a power outage, the timing when a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the reel type gaming machine P is stopped, the timing for determining that the pattern combination is normal in the judgment process of step 1269, and the timing for power restoration exist during the period from when the second reel is displayed as stopped to when the process related to the payout of game medals is executed, and all of these are applicable to cases where the reel corresponding to the third stop button is unable to stop at the intended stop position due to a power outage (the same applies to actions including power outages exemplified below). By configuring in this way, even if a power outage occurs immediately before (or immediately after) the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role cannot be displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the internal processing of the slot machine P wins the winning role and accepts the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is normally executed, the payout of game medals (payout of game medals includes not only payout from the discharge port by driving the hopper, but also an increase in the display (number of credits) of the credit number display device) can be executed after the power is restored, and it is possible to configure in such a way that it is difficult for a player to suffer a disadvantage. Note that the timing at which the power supply to the slot machine P is stopped due to a power outage is sometimes referred to as the timing at which a power outage occurs. In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined game state, if there is no reel rotation failure or power outage, and a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect (sometimes called a back lamp effect) in which the reel backlight (sometimes called a back lamp) flashes. In addition, in a game in which the predetermined winning combination is won in the predetermined game state, if a power outage occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination may be executed. In addition, in this action, an example is given of a case in which the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot stop at the scheduled stop position, but this is not limited to this, and it may be applied to a case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop cannot stop at the scheduled stop position due to a power outage, or a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot stop at the scheduled stop position due to a power outage (it can be applied to other actions as well). In addition, "the supply of power to the reel-type gaming machine P has stopped" and "the stable supply of power to the reel-type gaming machine P has stopped" do not mean that the power supplied to the reel-type gaming machine P is zero, but may mean that the power supplied to the reel-type gaming machine P becomes less than the power supplied when the gaming machine is operating due to a power outage or the like, or the supply of power to the reel-type gaming machine P has been cut off, etc.

<Effect 4>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → The reel becomes a winning role as viewed by the player The corresponding symbol combination is displayed as stopped, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (this is the case when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game resulting in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → the payout of game medals is not executed. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, and a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role is displayed on the reel from the player's perspective, the internal processing of the slot machine P accepts the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the miss can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the miss is normally executed, the payout of game medals is not executed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed, and it is possible to make the slot machine P fair and to make the slot machine P not cause unintended disadvantages to the game center. It should be noted that the above action 4 is not limited to only misses, and can also be applied to, for example, a game in which a reel rotation failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a bell is displayed in a game in which a bell is not won (a game in which a replay role is won, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's perspective is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal, so a display judgment error (irrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not judged that a display judgment error has occurred).

<Effect 5>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining a constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the supply of power to the slot machine P is stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A power outage is detected → A process for when the power is out is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → Play From the player's perspective, the reels display a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (this is the case when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game which resulted in a loss, the reels do not display a symbol combination corresponding to a loss from the player's perspective, but the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is normally executed by the processing within the gaming machine which responds to the player's operation of the stop button) → power is restored → game medals are not paid out. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a loss, immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, the power-off process is executed, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the internal process of the slot machine P accepts the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be displayed, and when the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the payout of game medals is not executed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed, and it is possible to make the slot machine P fair and to make the slot machine P not cause unintended disadvantages to the game center. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 5 is not limited to only loss, and can also be applied to, for example, a game in which a reel rotation failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a bell is displayed in a game in which a bell is not won (a game in which a replay role is won, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's perspective is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal, so a display judgment error (irrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not judged that a display judgment error has occurred).

<Effect 6>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel shows as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel shows as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → A symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role (for example, a BB role) appears on the reel as viewed by the player. is displayed as a stopped symbol, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game in which a bonus role is not won and the game results in a loss, the reels display a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → the bonus does not start, and freezing at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this manner, even if in a game where the result of the role lottery is a miss, a reel spin failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed stopped on the reels as viewed by the player, the internal processing of the slot machine P determines it to be a miss, and the operation of the stop buttons corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to a miss can be displayed stopped, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a miss is executed normally, the bonus will not start even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed stopped, making it possible to make a slot machine P fair and to make a slot machine P that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the amusement facility. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 6 is not limited to misses, but can also be applied, for example, when a reel spin failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is stopped and displayed in a game in which a bonus role has not been won (not within a bonus) and the bonus role has not been won (a game in which a replay role has been won, a game in which a watermelon has been won, etc.). Note that the above-mentioned action 6 illustrates an example of an action in a game in which a bonus role has not been won. That is, when a reel spin failure does not occur, the following action will be taken (it can also be applied to other actions when a spin failure and power outage do not occur). The reels start to rotate→the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state→the constant speed state maintenance process is executed→the acceptance of the stop button is enabled→the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel→the first reel is displayed as stopped→the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel→the second reel is displayed as stopped→the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted)→the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state→the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player→the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the reel as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment process of step 1269→the bonus does not start to be executed, and the freezing at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if there is no reel rotation failure during the game in which the bonus role is won or during the bonus, the following action will occur. The reel starts to rotate → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated as a stop operation for the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to a position where it is expected to stop as seen by the player → a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed as stopped on the reel as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → the bonus starts to be executed, and a freeze is executed at the start of the bonus. Note that, in the above, a case where a freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is exemplified, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus role), there may be a bonus where a freeze is executed and a bonus where a freeze is not executed, and the execution of the freeze may be different depending on the game state in which the bonus role is won.

<Effect 7>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining a constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the supply of power to the slot machine P is stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A power outage is detected → A process for power outage is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed from the player → A bonus role (for example, a BB role) appears on the reel as viewed from the player. ) is displayed as a stopped symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game in which a bonus role is not won and the game results in a loss, a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as a stopped symbol combination on the reels as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → power is restored → bonus does not start, and freezing at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed stationarily on the reels as viewed by the player, the internal processing of the slot machine P determines that it is a miss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to a miss can be displayed stationarily, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a miss is normally executed, a bonus for game medals will not be started even if a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed stationarily, making it possible to make a slot machine P fair and to make a slot machine P that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the amusement facility. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 6 is not limited to misses, but can also be applied, for example, when a reel spin failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is stopped and displayed in a game where a bonus role is not won (not within a bonus) and the bonus role is not won (a game where a replay role is won, a game where a watermelon is won, etc.). Note that the above-mentioned action 6 illustrates an example of an action in a game where a bonus role is not won. That is, if a power outage does not occur, the following action will occur (it can also be applied to other actions if a spin failure and power outage do not occur). The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the reel as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → the bonus does not start to be executed, and the freezing at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel power supply has not been interrupted during the game in which the bonus role was won or during the bonus, the following action will occur. The reel starts to rotate → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated as a stop operation for the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to a position where it is expected to stop as seen by the player → a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed as stopped on the reel as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → the bonus starts to be executed, and a freeze is executed at the start of the bonus. Note that, in the above, a case where a freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is exemplified, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus role), there may be a bonus where a freeze is executed and a bonus where a freeze is not executed, and the execution of the freeze may be different depending on the game state in which the bonus role is won.

<Effect 8>
The reels start spinning as a game executed within the bonus or as a game in which a bonus role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the reel does not display a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role (for example, a BB role) as viewed by the player, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal → the bonus starts, and freezing at the start of the bonus is executed. By configuring in this manner, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus has been won or in a game in which a bonus role has been won, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting a stop operation of the third stop button and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed on the reels as viewed by the player, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is normally executed, the bonus can be started and the freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus can be executed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed. This configuration can be configured to prevent significant disadvantage to the player, such as a bonus not being started due to a reel rotation failure in a situation where the bonus should be started, and by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus, just as in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable,

<Effect 9>
The reels start spinning as a game executed during the bonus or as a game in which a bonus role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the slot machine P is stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the reel does not display a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role (for example, a BB role) as viewed by the player, but the determination processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → power is restored → the bonus starts, and freezing at the start of the bonus is executed. By configuring in this manner, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus has been won or in a game in which a bonus role has been won, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting a stop operation of the third stop button, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stationarily on the reels as viewed by the player, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role can be displayed stationarily, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is normally executed, the bonus can be started and the freeze executed at the start of the bonus can be executed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stationarily. This configuration can be configured to avoid causing a significant disadvantage to the player, such as a bonus not being started due to a power outage in a situation where the bonus should be started, and by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus, the player can proceed with the game without any discomfort, just as in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur.

<Effect 10>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel shows as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel shows as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → The reel stops with a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role as viewed by the player However, in the judgment process of step 1269, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game resulting in a loss, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is stopped and displayed on the reels as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → an automatic bet corresponding to the stopped display of the replay role is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, if a reel spin failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed stopped on the reels as viewed by the player, the internal processing of the slot machine P will result in a miss, and the operation of the stop buttons corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to a miss can be displayed stopped, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a miss is executed normally, an automatic bet will not be made even if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed stopped, and the replay lamp D290 will not be newly lit. In addition, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role that will cause the RT state to transition when stopped and displayed in the current RT state is displayed as stopped from the player's perspective, the internal processing of the reel type gaming machine P results in a miss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the miss can be stopped and displayed, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the miss is normally executed, the RT state will not transition (this is also applicable to the case where a symbol combination corresponding to a role that will cause the RT state to transition other than the replay role is stopped and displayed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a reel type gaming machine P that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above action 10 is not limited to only misses, and can be applied, for example, in a game in which the replay role is not won, when a reel rotation failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is stopped and displayed. That is, when a reel rotation failure does not occur, the following action will be taken (it is also applicable when a rotation failure and a power outage do not occur in other actions). The reels start spinning -> the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state -> constant speed state maintenance process is executed -> acceptance of the stop button is enabled -> the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel -> the first reel is displayed as stopped -> the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel -> the second reel is displayed as stopped -> the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) -> the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state -> the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player -> the reel displays a pattern combination corresponding to a miss as seen by the player, and the pattern combination is determined to be normal by the judgment process of step 1269 -> an automatic bet is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. In addition, the automatic bet means that the specified number of game medals (for example, 3 medals) that were bet in the game in which the replay role was won are automatically bet by the replay role being stopped and displayed, without the operation of the bet button (max bet button) or the insertion of game medals from the medal insertion slot. On the other hand, if there is no reel rotation failure in the game in which the replay role was won, the following action will occur. The reels start spinning -> the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state -> constant speed state maintenance processing is executed -> acceptance of the stop button is enabled -> the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel -> the first reel is displayed as stopped -> the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel -> the second reel is displayed as stopped -> the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) -> the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state -> the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player -> the reel displays a stopped pattern combination corresponding to a replay role as seen by the player, and the pattern combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 -> an automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit (if the replay role was won in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 remains lit).

<Effect 11>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining a constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the supply of power to the slot machine P is halted → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A power outage is detected → A process for when the power is cut off is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → As viewed by the player, the reel is not given a replay role The symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is displayed as stopped, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game resulting in a loss, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed as stopped on the reels as seen by the player, but the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → power is restored → an automatic bet corresponding to the stopped display of the replay role is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is displayed stopped on the reels as viewed by the player, the internal processing of the slot machine P results in a miss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the miss can be displayed stopped, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the miss is executed normally, an automatic bet will not be made even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is displayed stopped, and the replay lamp D290 will not be newly lit. In addition, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role that will cause the RT state to transition when stopped and displayed in the current RT state is displayed as stopped from the player's perspective, the internal processing of the reel type gaming machine P results in a loss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the RT state will not transition (this is also applicable to the case where a symbol combination corresponding to a role that will cause the RT state to transition other than the replay role is stopped and displayed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a reel type gaming machine P that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above action 11 is not limited to only losses, and can be applied, for example, in a game in which the replay role is not won, when a power outage occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is stopped and displayed. That is, when a power outage does not occur, the following action will be taken (it is also applicable when a rotation failure and a power outage do not occur in other actions). The reels start to rotate → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the reel displays a symbol combination corresponding to a miss as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → no automatic bet is made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. On the other hand, if no power outage occurs in a game in which a replay role is won, the following action will occur. The reels start spinning -> the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state -> constant speed state maintenance processing is executed -> acceptance of the stop button is enabled -> the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel -> the first reel is displayed as stopped -> the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel -> the second reel is displayed as stopped -> the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) -> the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state -> the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player -> the reel displays a stopped pattern combination corresponding to a replay role as seen by the player, and the pattern combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 -> an automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit (if the replay role was won in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 remains lit).

<Effect 12>
The reels start spinning as a game in which a replay has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the reel does not display a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role as viewed by the player, but the judgment processing of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal → an automatic bet corresponding to the stopped display of the replay role is made, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit.The above-mentioned operation may be configured to occur. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a replay, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed on the reels as viewed by the player, the replay has been won in the internal processing of the slot machine P, and the operation of the stop buttons corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is normally executed, an automatic bet will be made even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed, and the replay lamp D290 will be newly lit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a reel type gaming machine P that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and even if it is not possible to judge whether or not the re-play role has been won by visually checking the reels because the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play role is not displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the game situation by visually checking whether or not the automatic bet is executed and the lighting of the re-play lamp D290. Also, in action 12, if a re-play role that would cause the RT state to transition if displayed in the current RT state is won, the RT state will transition even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play role is not displayed in the stopped state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a reel type gaming machine P that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to make a reel type gaming machine P that is user-friendly.

<Effect 13>
The reels start spinning as a game in which a replay has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the slot machine P is stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the reel does not display a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role as stopped as viewed by the player, but the judgment processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → power is restored → an automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the replay role is made, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a replay, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed stopped on the reels as viewed by the player, the replay has been won in the internal processing of the slot machine P, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role can be displayed stopped, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is executed normally, an automatic bet will be made even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed stopped, and the replay lamp D290 will light up again. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a reel type gaming machine P that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and even if it is not possible to judge whether or not the re-play role has been won by visually checking the reels because the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play role is not displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the game situation by visually checking whether or not the automatic bet is executed and the lighting of the re-play lamp D290. Also, in action 13, if a re-play role that would cause the RT state to transition if displayed in the current RT state is won, the RT state will transition even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play role is not displayed in the stopped state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a reel type gaming machine P that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to make a reel type gaming machine P that is user-friendly.

<Effect 14>
The reels start spinning as a game in which a role that transitions to the RT state (sometimes referred to as an RT transition role) has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel appears stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → although the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed as stopped as viewed by the player, the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state transitions. It may be configured to operate as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which an RT transition role is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, if the RT transition role is won in the internal processing of the reel type gaming machine P, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is normally executed, the RT state will be transitioned even if the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a reel type gaming machine P that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and it is possible to progress the game according to the transition of the game state that the reel type gaming machine P originally has, and the manager of the game facility can operate the reel type gaming machine P with peace of mind. In addition, the RT transition role is a role that transitions to a different RT state from the predetermined RT state by stopping and displaying a symbol combination in the predetermined RT state, and whether or not it becomes an RT transition role may differ depending on the RT state you are in. That is, in RT state A, the predetermined role A may be an RT transition role, but in RT state B, the predetermined role A may not be an RT transition role, and in RT state A, the predetermined role A may be an RT transition role, but in RT state B, the predetermined role A may not be won.

<Effect 15>
The reels start spinning as a game in which a role that transitions to the RT state (sometimes referred to as an RT transition role) has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the reel type gaming machine P is stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (the third stop button operation) → update reel drive state to reel deceleration state → power outage detected → execute power outage processing → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed as stopped as viewed by the player, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state transition occurs (the RT state may transition after the power is restored, or the RT state may transition before the power is restored) It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which an RT transition role is won, immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, the power off processing is executed, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, if the RT transition role is won in the internal processing of the reel type gaming machine P, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is normally executed, the RT state will be transitioned even if the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a reel type gaming machine P that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and it is possible to progress the game according to the transition of the game state that the reel type gaming machine P originally has, and the manager of the game facility can operate the reel type gaming machine P with peace of mind.

<Effect 16>
The reels start spinning as a game in which a role that transitions to the RT state (sometimes called an RT transition role) has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed as stopped as viewed by the player, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment process of step 1269 → the RT state does not transition. It may be configured to operate as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the RT transition role is not won, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and a symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen by the player, the RT state will not be transitioned. By configuring in this way, for example, when a push order navigation is executed to prevent a transition to an RT state that is disadvantageous to the player during an AT state, even if the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation, and a symbol combination that causes a transition to the RT state (falls down) due to a reel rotation failure is apparently displayed, the RT state will not be transitioned, and a reel type gaming machine P that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player can be made, and the game can be progressed according to the transition of the game state that the reel type gaming machine P originally has, and the manager of the gaming facility can operate the reel type gaming machine P with peace of mind.

<Effect 17>
The reels start spinning as a game in which a role that transitions to the RT state (sometimes referred to as an RT transition role) has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the slot machine P is stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed as stopped as viewed by the player, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment processing of step 1269 → the RT state does not transition. It may be configured to operate as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the RT transition role has not been won, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is stopped and displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the RT state will not be transitioned. By configuring in this way, for example, when a push order navigation is executed to prevent the player from transitioning to the RT state that is disadvantageous to the player during the AT state, even if the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation, and a symbol combination that causes the RT state to transition (fall) due to a reel rotation failure is apparently displayed as stopped, the RT state will not be transitioned, and it is possible to make a reel type gaming machine P that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and it is possible to progress the game according to the transition of the game state that the reel type gaming machine P originally has, and the manager of the gaming facility can operate the reel type gaming machine P with peace of mind.

<Effect 18>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → a reel rotation failure occurs → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as viewed by the player → the ready sound is not output from the speaker, and
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → a reel rotation failure occurs → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the pay line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel moves to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the pay line on the first and second reels) → a ready-to-win sound is output from the speaker. The above-mentioned operation may be configured. Also, as an operation when no reel rotation failure occurs,
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → a ready sound is output from the speaker. Also,
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the ready sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to operate as described above. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol stops at the first and second stops; in other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the intended stop position in this example, the ready state sound will not be output if the bonus symbol was not intended to be in a ready state. Even if the apparent stopping position of the reel is not normal due to a reel rotation malfunction, the player can quickly detect that a reel rotation malfunction has occurred through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the role selection is a miss, a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the second stop button is pressed and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol does not stop at the first or second stop; in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not form a ready symbol, if the bonus symbol had stopped at the intended stop position in this example, a ready symbol sound will be output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to form a ready symbol. Even if the apparent stopping position of the reel is not normal due to a reel rotation malfunction, the output from the speaker allows the player to quickly notice that a reel rotation malfunction has occurred.

<Effect 19>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the slot machine P is stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → power outage is detected → power outage process is executed → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as viewed by the player → power is restored → the ready sound is not output from the speaker. Also,
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and power supply to the slot machine P is stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → power outage is detected → power outage process is executed → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed on the pay line of the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel moves to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed on the pay line of the first and second reels) → power is restored → a ready-to-win sound is output from the speaker. The above-mentioned operation may be configured. Also, as the operation when no power outage occurs,
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → a ready sound is output from the speaker. Also,
The reel starts spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the pay line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the ready sound is not output from the speaker. The above-mentioned operation may be configured. The timing for outputting the ready sound from the speaker may be before the end of the power-off process or after the power is restored after the power has been turned off. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol stops as the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the intended stop position in this example, the ready state sound will not be output if the bonus symbol was not intended to be in a ready state. Even if the apparent stopping position of the reel is not normal due to a reel rotation malfunction, the player can quickly detect that a reel rotation malfunction has occurred through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination is a miss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the second stop button is pressed, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol does not stop as the first stop or the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not reach a ready state, if the bonus symbol stops at the expected stop position in this example, a ready state sound is output, and even if the reel's apparent stop position is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect the occurrence of a reel rotation failure by the output from the speaker. Note that, in this action, an example is given of a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position, but it may also be a case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the first stop operation is performed).

<Action 20>
The reels start spinning as a game that is not within a bonus and has resulted in a loss → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → a reel rotation failure occurs → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as viewed by the player → the bonus confirmation ready sound is not output from the speaker, and
The reels start spinning during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → a reel rotation failure occurs → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the pay line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel moves to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the pay line on the first and second reels) → a bonus confirmation ready sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. Also, as an operation when a reel rotation failure does not occur,
The reels start spinning during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → a bonus confirmation ready sound is output from the speaker. Also,
The reel starts spinning as a game that is not in the bonus and has lost → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the pay line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is a tenpai sound that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting a predetermined bonus symbol are displayed as stopped (tenpai) on the pay line and the predetermined bonus symbol can be displayed as stopped. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss and the bonus is not in progress, a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol stops as the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the intended stop position in this example, but the bonus symbol was not intended to be in a ready state, the bonus confirmation ready state sound will not be output. Even if the apparent stopping position of the reel is not normal due to a reel rotation malfunction, the player can quickly detect that a reel rotation malfunction has occurred through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a bonus role or a game executed during a bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol does not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not form a ready state, if the bonus symbol stops at the expected stop position in this example, the bonus confirmation ready state sound is output, and even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation failure, the player can quickly notice that a reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Note that, in this action, an example is given of a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position, but it may also be a case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the first stop operation is executed).

<Action 21>
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the slot machine P is stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → power outage is detected → power outage process is executed → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as viewed by the player → power is restored → the ready sound is not output from the speaker. Also,
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and power supply to the slot machine P is stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → power outage is detected → power outage process is executed → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed on the pay line of the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel moves to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed on the pay line of the first and second reels) → power is restored → a ready-to-win sound is output from the speaker. The above-mentioned operation may be configured. Also, as the operation when no power outage occurs,
The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → a ready sound is output from the speaker. Also,
The reel starts spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the pay line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the ready sound is not output from the speaker. The above-mentioned operation may be configured. The timing for outputting the ready sound from the speaker may be before the end of the power-off process or after the power is restored after the power has been turned off. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role selection is a miss, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol stops as the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the intended stop position in this example, the ready state sound will not be output if the bonus symbol was not intended to be in a ready state. Even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to a power outage, the output from the speaker allows the player to quickly realize that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the power outage. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination is a miss, a power outage occurs immediately after the second stop button is pressed and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol does not stop as the first stop or the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not reach a ready state, if the bonus symbol stops at the expected stop position in this example, the ready state sound is output, and even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the power outage, the player can quickly detect that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the power outage by the output from the speaker. Note that, in this operation, an example is given of a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position, but it may also be a case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (the power outage processing is executed immediately after the first stop operation is executed).

<Action 22>
The reels start spinning as a game that is not within the bonus and has resulted in a loss → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the slot machine P is stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → a power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as viewed by the player → the bonus confirmation ready sound is not output from the speaker, and
The reels start spinning when the bonus is in progress or the bonus has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and power supply to the slot machine P is stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → power outage is detected → processing during power outage is executed → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the pay line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel moves to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the pay line on the first and second reels) → a bonus confirmation ready sound is output from the speaker. The above operation may be configured. Also, as the operation when no power outage occurs,
The reels start spinning during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → a bonus confirmation ready sound is output from the speaker. Also,
The reel starts spinning as a game that is not in the bonus and has lost → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the pay line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is a tenpai sound that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting a predetermined bonus symbol are displayed as stopped (tenpai) on the pay line and the predetermined bonus symbol can be displayed as stopped. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role selection is a miss and the game is not in the bonus state, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol stops as the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the intended stop position in this example, but the bonus symbol was not intended to be in a ready state, the bonus confirmation ready sound will not be output. Even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to a power outage, the player can quickly realize that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the power outage through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the role drawing is a bonus role or a game executed during a bonus, the power-off process occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol does not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not reach a ready position, if the bonus symbol is expected to reach a ready position when it stops at the expected stop position in this example, the bonus confirmation ready sound is output, and even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a power outage, the player can quickly notice that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the power outage by the output from the speaker. Note that, in this action, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position is exemplified, but the case where the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (the power-off process is executed immediately after the first stop operation is executed) may also be used.

<Effect 23>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reels start spinning as a game in which a specific replay role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the specific replay role is not displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp does not light up,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reels start spinning as a game in which the replay role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (rotate) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay role is displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp is turned on. Also, the action when the reel rotation failure does not occur is as follows:
If the number of credits is 1 or more, the reels start spinning as a game in which a specific replay role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the specific replay role is displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp does not light up,
The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels begin spinning as a game in which the re-play role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel appears stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the pattern combination corresponding to the specified re-play role is not displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp turns on It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which a replay has been won, even if a reel spin failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed, the MAX BET lamp does not light up, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed, so the player can quickly realize that the operation of the MAX BET button is invalid. Also, in a game in which a replay has not been won, even if a reel spin failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed, the MAX BET lamp lights up, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed, so the player can quickly realize that the operation of the MAX BET button is valid.

<Effect 24>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reels start spinning as a game in which a specific replay role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the slot machine P is stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the specific replay role is not displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp does not light up,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reels start spinning as a game in which the replay role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the slot machine P is stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a power outage is detected → processing during power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay role is displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp is turned on. Also, as an action when a power outage does not occur,
If the number of credits is 1 or more, the reels start spinning as a game in which a specific replay role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the specific replay role is displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp does not light up,
The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels begin spinning as a game in which the re-play role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel appears stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the pattern combination corresponding to the specified re-play role is not displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp turns on It may be configured to operate as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which a replay has been won, even if the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed as stopped, the MAX BET lamp does not light up, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed as stopped, so the player can quickly realize that the operation of the MAX BET button is invalid. Also, in a game in which a replay has not been won, even if the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed as stopped, the MAX BET lamp lights up, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed as stopped, so the player can quickly realize that the operation of the MAX BET button is valid.

<Effect 25>
A game in which a bonus is being executed and a winning combination has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player to satisfy the bonus end condition, the reel starts to rotate → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (rotate) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed as stopped → the bonus ends, and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. Also, the action when the reel rotation failure does not occur is as follows:
It may be configured to operate as described above in a game during which a bonus is being executed, in which a winning role has been won and a game medal corresponding to the winning role is awarded to the player, thereby satisfying the conditions for ending the bonus: the reels begin to spin → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed as stopped → the bonus ends and a freeze is executed when the bonus ends. By configuring in this manner, even if a winning combination is won in the final bonus game and a reel spin failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed, the bonus ends and a bonus end freeze is executed in the same way as if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination had been displayed, allowing the player to quickly realize that the bonus has ended normally, and a reel type gaming machine P can be provided that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable about the progress of the game.

<Effect 26>
A game during bonus execution, in which a winning combination has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player to satisfy the bonus end condition, the reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the slot machine P is stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a power outage is detected → processing during power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed as stopped → the bonus ends, and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. The above-mentioned operation may be configured to operate as follows. In addition, as an operation when a power outage does not occur,
It may be configured to operate as described above in a game during which a bonus is being executed, in which a winning role has been won and a game medal corresponding to the winning role is awarded to the player, thereby satisfying the conditions for ending the bonus: the reels begin to spin → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed as stopped → the bonus ends and a freeze is executed when the bonus ends. By configuring in this manner, when a winning combination is won in the final bonus game and the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and a bonus end freeze is executed in the same way as if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination were stopped and displayed, so that the player can quickly realize that the bonus has ended normally, and a reel-type gaming machine P can be provided that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable about the progress of the game.

In addition, from the configuration of the reel acceleration process in the reel type gaming machine P described above, if the execution period of the reel acceleration process when a reel rotation malfunction does not occur during execution of the reel acceleration process = A, if the execution period of the reel acceleration process until a reel rotation malfunction occurs when a reel rotation malfunction occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process = B, if the execution period of the reel acceleration process after a reel rotation malfunction occurs when a reel rotation malfunction occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process = C, then A = B + C is configured. Also, if the number of interrupt processing executions of the reel acceleration process when a reel rotation malfunction does not occur during execution of the reel acceleration process = D, if the number of interrupt processing executions of the reel acceleration process until a reel rotation malfunction occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process = E, if the number of interrupt processing executions of the reel acceleration process after a reel rotation malfunction occurs when a reel rotation malfunction occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process = F, then D = E + F is configured.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power-off processing related to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 32. First, in step 1902, the CPUC100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processing completed flag (for example, updates the power-off processing completed flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the top address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and sets error detection information based on the calculated checksum (for example, the lower byte of the calculated checksum, or its complement) in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process to wait for a reset.

Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of the push order display of a reel type gaming machine. The table in the figure shows the correspondence between the reel stop order indicated by the executed push order navigation and the instruction number (information related to the push order, which is determined by the main control board M and transmitted to the sub-control board S in this example). For example, the instruction number when announcing "middle → right → left" as the push order is "A5". Next, the left side of the figure illustrates an image displayed on the push order display device D270, the advantageous zone display device YH, and the performance display device S40 when the push order is "left → middle → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A1"). Here, the push order display device D270 in this example is a 7-segment display method and also serves as a payout number display device. Also, when a medal is paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, when the push sequence display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit number, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the display on the push sequence display device D270 is the number of medals to be paid out or the push sequence navigation display. Therefore, in order to distinguish whether the display is the number of medals to be paid out or the push sequence navigation display, the push sequence display device D270 is configured to display "=" on the left digit, such as "=1", so that when the display on the push sequence display device D270 is a two-digit number, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out, and when the display on the push sequence display device D270 is "=" on the left and a number on the right, it is a display of the push sequence navigation, and it is configured to prevent misunderstanding by the player. Furthermore, in the advantageous zone display device YH provided in the lower right of the push sequence display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current play zone is the "advantageous zone" is lit. At the same time, the display "40 games remaining" indicating the number of games remaining in the "advantageous zone" (or "AT state") is displayed on the performance display device S40. Also, the right side of the figure illustrates an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 when the push order is "middle → left → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A3"). In addition, since the current play area is the "advantageous area", the advantageous area indicator YH is lit, and the display "25 games remaining" indicating the number of games remaining in the "advantageous area" is displayed on the performance display device S40. Note that the segment display of the instruction number of the push order role (a condition device with a medal payout among condition devices in which the role displayed according to the reel stop order differs, for example, bell) and the push order replay role (a condition device related to the replay role among condition devices in which the role displayed according to the reel stop order differs) may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is not limited to 7 segments, and for example, an LED display may be used to light up multiple LEDs according to the lighting pattern corresponding to the instruction number to give an instruction. Note that the advantageous area indicator YH may be provided at the lower right of the credit number display device D200. In this case, it is preferable that the advantageous zone indicator YH is lit up until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player wants to stop playing, he or she will visually check the credit number display device D200 to see if there are any medals remaining. If there are medals remaining, the settlement button D60 is operated. In other words, by lighting up the indicator YH before the settlement button D60 becomes effective, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally quitting playing even though the player is in the "advantageous zone" from the next play, making the reel-type gaming machine P user-friendly.

In addition, the notification mode of the game zone in the advantageous zone indicator YH is not limited to this example, and may be configured to have a zone indicator similar to the advantageous zone indicator YH at the bottom right of both of the two 7-segment displays (two zone indicators). In such a configuration, when the left zone indicator is lit, it may be configured to notify that the current game zone is a "normal zone", and on the other hand, when the right zone indicator is lit, it may be configured to notify that the current game zone is an "advantageous zone". Furthermore, it may be configured to distinguish between the "normal zone" and the "advantageous zone" by the color or lighting mode when the zone indicator is lit (for example, "green" in the "normal zone" and "red" in the "advantageous zone", or to light up in the "normal zone" and "blink" in the "advantageous zone"). Furthermore, it may be configured to change the display mode of the zone indicator depending on "playing inside BB during AT", "BB state during AT", "AT precursor state", "AT state", etc. in the "advantageous zone". Furthermore, the current play area may be configured to be distinguishable as a "standby area" from a "normal area" and an "advantageous area." However, it is preferable to distinguish between the "normal area" and the "advantageous area" in an easy-to-distinguish manner, such as by using different area indicators, so that the player can easily recognize whether the current play area is an "advantageous area."

In addition, the display on the performance display device S40 showing the number of games remaining in the "advantageous zone" may be configured not to display the number of games remaining in the "advantageous zone" during, for example, the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparation" (not informing the player of the disadvantage of the number of games remaining in the "advantageous zone" being subtracted in a state where the player is relatively unprofitable). However, even in this configuration, it is preferable to light up the zone indicator to inform the player that he is in the "advantageous zone". At the same time, it is preferable to configure the zone indicator to be controlled by the main control board M, and to configure the zone indicator to be installed in a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

Next, the control process executed on the sub-control board S will be explained with reference to Figures 38 to 57.

<Sub-side program start processing>
First, Fig. 38 shows a subroutine for sub-side program start processing. This sub-side program start processing is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S prohibits interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initializing the CPU and RAM, and calculating the checksum.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the checksum value calculated when the power was turned on matches the checksum value calculated and stored when the power was turned off. If the answer is Yes in step 2008, in other words, if the judgment process in step 2008 determines that the two checksum values match, then in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the board has recovered from a state in which a power outage occurred during the execution of one command process, which will be described later, i.e., whether the board has fully recovered.

If the answer is Yes in step 2010, in other words if it is determined that a full recovery has occurred, in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows an interrupt and returns processing to the one command process that was being executed when the power outage occurred.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2008, in other words, if the judgment process in the above-mentioned step 2008 determines that the two checksum values do not match, then in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a RAM clear. After executing the process in step 2014, or if the answer is No in step 2010, the process transitions to the sub-main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, Fig. 39 shows a subroutine of the sub-main loop process. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in Fig. 38 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows an interrupt. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a command reception process. This command reception process is a process for receiving various commands sent from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process, which will be described later. This one command process is a process that is executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. The specific process will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined time, for example 16 ms, has elapsed, and if it determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed, it returns the process to step 2108. On the other hand, if it determines that the predetermined time has elapsed, it returns the process to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be changed as appropriate depending on the process.

<Sub-side power cut processing>
40 shows a subroutine illustrating sub-side power-off processing executed on the sub-control board S. The sub-side power-off processing is started when the sub-control board S detects a power outage.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If the answer is Yes in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calculates a checksum. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (such as the checksum calculation result and the address of the program that was being executed) and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether 500 ms have elapsed. If it is determined that 500 ms have elapsed, the power-off process is terminated. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the power has been restored. If the answer is Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of interruptions. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the watchdog timer and returns to the process that was being performed when the power was turned off. Note that if it is determined in the determination process of step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 Command Processing>
FIG. 41 shows a subroutine for one command process which is called and executed in the process of step 2250 in FIG.

Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is not the timing to operate the start lever. If the answer is No in step 2252, in other words, if it is determined that it is the timing to operate the start lever, then in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the process of determining the performance related to the start lever operation, which will be described later. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process of the start lever operation, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the timing to operate the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2254 whether it is not the timing to accept the first reel stop. If the answer is No in step 2254, in other words, if it is the timing to accept the first reel stop, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for processing at the time of acceptance of the first reel stop, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the timing to accept the first reel stop, then in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is not the timing to accept the second reel stop. If the answer is No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the timing to accept the second reel stop, then in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the second reel stop acceptance processing described below, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the timing to accept the second reel stop, then in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is not the timing to accept the third reel stop. If the answer is No in step 2262, in other words, if it is the timing to accept the third reel stop, then in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the process to determine the performance related to the third drum stop, which will be described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process to accept the third drum stop, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the timing to accept the stop of the third reel, then in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is the timing to stop the stop display pattern. If the answer is Yes in step 2266, in other words, if it is the timing to stop the stop display pattern, then in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a process at the time of the stop display pattern (not shown) and proceeds to step 7100. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the timing to stop the stop display pattern, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the menu screen display control process described below. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the standby screen display control process described below, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing the performance-related determination process at the time of operating the start lever, which is called and executed in the process of step 3000 in FIG. 41. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT state of the game is a "high probability state". If the answer is Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S checks the number of high probability games remaining at the present time (how many games are guaranteed to be in the high probability state) based on the high probability counter value command received from the main control board M. Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the battle performance execution determination process described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it has been determined that a battle performance will be executed in the game. If the answer is Yes in step 3006, then in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the current number of high-probability games, executes a stay stage transition lottery (a lottery to determine whether or not to change the stay stage), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). If the answer is No in step 3006, then proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3002, then in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT of the game is a "low probability state". If the answer is Yes in step 3010, then in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game, executes a stay stage transition lottery, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the state of the AT of the game is "AT in progress state". If the answer is Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the AT in progress performance determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the state of the AT of the game is "resurrection possible or not performance state". If the answer is Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the revival possible or not performance determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the preview performance and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state of the AT of the game, and the state of the AT of the next game, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). Note that the stay stage refers to the performance that is mainly the background performance displayed on the performance display device S40, and is configured so that one of the stay stages is always set. Note that if the stay stage is different, the tendency of various performances such as the background performance and preview performance will differ.

Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing the battle performance execution decision process that is called and executed in the process of step 3050 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of high-confidence games is 4 or more. If the answer is Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game is a BB role. If the answer is Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a battle performance execution lottery (a lottery to execute a battle performance (win) or not) that is won with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the battle performance execution lottery executed in step 3056 was won. If the answer is Yes in step 3058, then in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game to be a battle presentation (win) and proceeds to the next process (step 3006). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3058, then in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game to be a presentation other than a battle presentation and proceeds to the next process (step 3006). Here, the battle presentation is a continuous presentation executed over multiple games, and is configured so that winning the battle presentation, that is, the execution of the battle presentation (win), determines that the BB role has been won and that the AT lottery has been won. Note that the configuration of the battle presentation is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that the battle presentation (win) can be executed when the BB role has been won even if the AT lottery has not been won (the state transitions to a "low probability state" or "high probability state" after the BB ends).

Also, if the answer is No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the condition device related to the game is a rare role. Here, in this example, the rare roles are Winning-C (Cherry), Winning-D (Watermelon A), and Winning-E (Watermelon B), which are roles that can be won in combination with the BB role. That is, when the rare role is stopped and displayed, the player has hope that it will be won at the same time as the BB role. If the answer is Yes in step 3064, in step 3066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a fake battle performance execution lottery (a lottery to execute a battle performance (lose) or not) that is won with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3, which is a lower probability than the predetermined probability in step 3056). Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the fake battle performance execution lottery executed in step 3066 was won. If the answer is Yes in step 3068, then in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game to be a battle presentation (loss), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3006). If the answer is No in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, then in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game to be a presentation other than a battle presentation, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3006). Here, the battle presentation (loss) may be configured to be executed even in the "normal section".

In this way, when the number of high probability games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, for example, 4 or more, continuous effects such as battle effects can be executed across multiple games, whereas when the number of high probability games is less than a predetermined number, for example, less than 4, continuous effects such as battle effects are not executed. This prevents the advantageous zone indicator YH from turning off due to a transition to a "low probability state" (setting of a "normal zone") even in the middle of executing a continuous effect, and by executing a battle effect only when it is possible to ensure that the advantageous zone indicator YH will remain lit until the battle effect ends, the player's expectations of winning the BB are not diminished, making the reel-type gaming machine P user-friendly.

In addition, when a rare combination is won, consecutive effects such as a battle effect (defeat) can be executed, so the frequency of battle effects can be guaranteed and players can always play with a sense of anticipation.

Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. Note that the stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is only a partial excerpt. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 consists of three types of tables: a table used when the game is in a "low probability state", a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high probability games is 4 or more, and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high probability games is 3 or less.

The current stage determination table used when the game is in a "low probability state" prescribes the relationship between the current current stage, the state regarding the AT of the next game, the current current stage of the game, and the corresponding number of balls placed. When in a "low probability state", the current current stage consists of two presentation stages: the desert stage and the town stage, and the stages to transition to consist of four presentation stages: the desert stage, the town stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: "low probability state", "playing inside normal BB", and "high probability state".

When the current stage is the desert stage and the next game will transition to a "low probability state" or "play inside normal BB", the number of places is assigned from 0 to 979 if the desert stage is to be maintained in that game. Also, when the current stage is the desert stage and the next game will transition to a "low probability state" or "play inside normal BB", the number of places is assigned from 980 to 999 if the game will transition from the desert stage to the town stage.

Furthermore, if the current stage is the town stage and the game will transition to a "low probability state" or "play inside normal BB" in the next game, 0 to 19 are assigned as the number to be placed when the game will transition from the town stage to the desert stage. If the current stage is the town stage and the game will transition to a "low probability state" or "play inside normal BB" in the next game, 20 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed when the game will maintain the town stage.

In addition, if the current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the number to be placed if the desert stage is maintained in that game. If the current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 250 to 499 are assigned as the number to be placed if the game transitions from the desert stage to the town stage. If the current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as the number to be placed if the game transitions from the desert stage to the conference room stage. If the current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed if the game transitions from the desert stage to the cave stage.

When the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 is assigned as the number to be entered when transitioning from the town stage to the desert stage in that game. When the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 250 to 499 is assigned as the number to be entered when the town stage is maintained in that game. When the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 500 to 749 is assigned as the number to be entered when transitioning from the town stage to the conference room stage in that game. When the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "high probability state" in the next game, 750 to 999 is assigned as the number to be entered when transitioning from the town stage to the cave stage in that game.

The current stage determination table, which is used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high probability games is 4 or more, specifies the relationship between the current current stage, the current stage of the game, and the number of places. The current current stage and the stage to transition to consist of four types of production stages: the desert stage, the town stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage.

If the current current stage is the desert stage and the game remains at the desert stage, a value between 0 and 879 is assigned as the number to be placed. If the current current stage is the desert stage and the game transitions from the desert stage to the town stage, a value between 880 and 929 is assigned as the number to be placed. If the current current stage is the desert stage and the game transitions from the desert stage to the meeting room stage, a value between 930 and 959 is assigned as the number to be placed. If the current current stage is the desert stage and the game transitions from the desert stage to the cave stage, a value between 960 and 999 is assigned as the number to be placed.

When the current stage is the town stage and the game is to transition from the town stage to the desert stage, a value between 0 and 879 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the town stage and the game is to maintain the town stage, a value between 880 and 929 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the town stage and the game is to transition from the town stage to the conference room stage, a value between 930 and 959 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the town stage and the game is to transition from the town stage to the cave stage, a value between 960 and 999 is assigned as the number to be entered.

If the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is to transition from the conference room stage to the desert stage, a value between 0 and 49 is assigned as the number to be entered. If the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is to transition from the conference room stage to the town stage, a value between 50 and 99 is assigned as the number to be entered. If the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is to maintain the conference room stage, a value between 100 and 949 is assigned as the number to be entered. If the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is to transition from the conference room stage to the cave stage, a value between 950 and 999 is assigned as the number to be entered.

When the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to transition from the cave stage to the desert stage, a value between 0 and 49 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to transition from the cave stage to the town stage, a value between 50 and 99 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to transition from the cave stage to the conference room stage, a value between 100 and 199 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to remain in the cave stage, a value between 200 and 999 is assigned as the number to be entered.

The current stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of highly secured games is three or less prescribes the relationship between the current current stage, the state regarding the AT of the next game, the current current stage of the game, and the number of places. The current current stage and the stage to transition to consist of four types of presentation stages: the desert stage, the town stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: "high probability state," "playing inside an advantageous BB," and "low probability state."

When the current stage is the desert stage and the next game transitions to a "high probability state" or "playing in an advantageous BB", the number of places is assigned from 0 to 979 if the desert stage is to be maintained in that game. When the current stage is the desert stage and the next game transitions to a "high probability state" or "playing in an advantageous BB", the number of places is assigned from 980 to 999 if the next game transitions from the desert stage to the town stage.

When the current stage is the town stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "playing in an advantageous BB", 0 to 19 are assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the town stage to the desert stage in that game. When the current stage is the town stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "playing in an advantageous BB", 20 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed when the town stage is maintained in that game.

When the current stage is the conference room stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play inside an advantageous BB", 0 to 29 are assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the conference room stage to the desert stage in that game. When the current stage is the conference room stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play inside an advantageous BB", 30 to 59 are assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage in that game. When the current stage is the conference room stage and the next game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play inside an advantageous BB", 60 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed when the conference room stage is maintained in that game.

When the current stage is the cave stage and the game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play in an advantageous BB" in the next game, 0 to 29 are assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the cave stage to the desert stage in that game. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play in an advantageous BB" in the next game, 30 to 59 are assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the cave stage to the town stage in that game. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play in an advantageous BB" in the next game, 60 to 99 are assigned as the number to be placed when transitioning from the cave stage to the conference room stage in that game. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game will transition to a "high probability state" or "play in an advantageous BB" in the next game, 100 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed when the cave stage is maintained in that game.

If the current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to the player is 0 to 499 if the desert stage is to be maintained in that game. If the current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to the player is 500 to 999 if the game transitions from the desert stage to the town stage.

If the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to the player is 0 to 499 if the game transitions from the town stage to the desert stage. If the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to the player is 500 to 999 if the game remains in the town stage.

If the current stage is the conference room stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to transition from the conference room stage to the desert stage in that game is 0 to 499. If the current stage is the conference room stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to transition from the conference room stage to the town stage in that game is 500 to 999.

When the current stage is the cave stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to transition from the cave stage to the desert stage in that game is 0 to 499. When the current stage is the cave stage and there is a transition to a low probability state in the next game, the number assigned to transition from the cave stage to the town stage in that game is 500 to 999.

In this way, when in a "low probability state", two stages, the desert stage or the town stage, can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, when in a "high probability state", four stages, the desert stage, the town stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage, can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, while four stay stages can be selected in a "favorable zone", two stay stages can be selected in a "normal zone", and the two stay stages that can be selected in a "normal zone" can also be selected in a "favorable zone". By configuring in this way, even in a "normal zone" where there is no hope of winning the AT lottery, by selecting a stay stage that can become a stay stage in the "favorable zone", it is possible to proceed with the game without getting bored even in the "normal zone". In addition, when transitioning from a "high probability state" to a "low probability state", that is, when transitioning from an "favorable zone" to a "normal zone", by selecting a performance stage that is selected in the "normal zone" at the "favorable zone" stage, it is made difficult for the player to determine that the "favorable zone" is transitioning to the "normal zone", and the player can continue playing with a sense of expectation.

In addition, some of the presentation stages selected in the "normal section" may overlap with the presentation stages selected in the "favorable section" (there may be presentation stages that can be selected in the "normal section" but not in the "favorable section").

In addition, by differentiating the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-security obstacle games is 4 or more from the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-security obstacle games is 3 or less, and configuring it so that when the number of high-security obstacle games decreases (below 3 games), the player does not transition to a stay stage with higher expectations that is a "favorable zone" than the current stay stage (for example, from desert stage to conference room stage), it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed by entering the "normal zone" after a small number of games despite having transitioned to a stay stage with higher expectations. Furthermore, the stay stages are arranged in the order of "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" from those with the lowest expectations that are "favorable zones" (hard to select in "favorable zones").

The configuration of the stay stage is not limited to that in this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage may be configured to suggest the expectation of being in the "favorable zone", the expectation of winning the AT lottery, and the expectation of winning the BB. As an example, the stay stage may be configured to shift in a game in which the BB role or rare role is won (including the case where the AT lottery is won by the BB role and the case where the AT lottery is not executed due to winning a single rare role), and the expectation of winning the AT lottery may differ depending on the stay stage to which the shift is made, and the order of the expectation may be "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in descending order of expectation, or the expectation of winning the BB role may differ depending on the stay stage to which the shift is made, and the order of the expectation may be "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in descending order of expectation (for example, when the shift is made to the conference room stage, it is confirmed that the BB internal win or the AT lottery has been won, etc.).

Next, Figure 45 is a subroutine showing the AT performance determination process that is called and executed in the processing of step 3100 of Figure 42. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of games remaining in the AT is 3 or less. If the answer is Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether this is the final game of the AT. If the answer is Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the continuation lottery has been won. If the answer is Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation for the game to be an AT continuation prompting presentation (success) (the AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60, in other words, a presentation informing the player that the AT status of the next game will be "AT in progress") or an AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) (the AT continues and the initial value is not set in the AT counter M60, and the AT status of the next game will be "AT in progress" or "resurrection possibility presentation state"), and proceeds to step 3126. Here, if the continuation lottery is won, the ratio of the AT continuation prompting presentation (success) to the AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4 to 1. That is, in the slot machine P, even if the continuation lottery is won, the AT continuation prompting performance (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, the revival performance (success) will be executed in the next game corresponding to the first game of the next set, so that the player feels as if he or she won the revival lottery (in reality, the continuation lottery is won, and the control on the main control board M side is the same as when the AT continuation prompting performance (success) is executed). By configuring in this way, it is rare to win the revival lottery in the "revival possible or not performance state" {2320/65536 (in the case of setting 1) lotteries are won in one game}, but by configuring it so that the revival performance (success) can be executed even if the continuation performance is won, the rate at which the revival performance (success) is executed when the revival performance is executed can be increased, and the player can increase his or her expectations for the revival performance.

Also, if the answer is No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game to be an AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) and proceeds to step 3126. Also, if the answer is No in step 3104, in step 3112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game to be an AT end stage presentation and proceeds to step 3126. Also, if the answer is No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the next game in which the AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) was executed is the next game. If the answer is Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game to be a revival presentation (success) (a presentation mode similar to the revival presentation (success) executed in the "revival possibility presentation state", and in this process, a presentation related to the fact that the "AT in progress state" has continued), and proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3114, proceed to step 3126.

Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of AT games has been added in that game. If the answer is Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to that game to be an added presentation (a presentation that notifies the player that the number of remaining AT games has been added, such as "+50 GET"), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to that game to be an AT in-play presentation (a presentation executed during the AT, such as "AT in-play state"), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300).

Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine showing the revival possibility presentation decision process that is called and executed in the processing of step 3150 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the revival lottery has been won. If the answer is Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S decides that the presentation for the game will be a revival presentation (success) (a presentation style similar to the presentation executed in step 3116 described above, which is a presentation that notifies the player that the revival lottery has been won in the "revival possibility presentation state", and the next game will transition to the "AT in progress state", and the initial value will be set in the AT counter M60), and the next process (the processing of step 2300) will be executed. On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3152, at step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation for that game to be a revival presentation (failed) (a presentation that notifies the player that they did not win the revival lottery in the "revival possible or not presentation state", and the next game will transition to a "low probability state") and proceed to the next process (the process of step 2300).

As mentioned above, the "state for determining whether or not a revival is possible" is also an advantageous zone; that is, even if the player does not win the continuation lottery in the final game of the AT (the final game of the "AT in progress" state), which is an "advantageous zone", the "state for determining whether or not a revival is possible" is configured to be extended in the next game, the "state for determining whether or not a revival is possible". Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the revival effect will be successful just by checking whether or not the advantageous zone indicator YH is lit, and the player will have to pay attention to the result of the revival effect. Also, as mentioned above, the manner in which the lottery for the AT is executed differs between the "state in progress" and the "state for determining whether or not a revival is possible". That is, the manner in which the lottery for the AT is executed differs between the next game in which the player wins the continuation lottery in which a revival effect (success) is executed and the game in which the player wins the revival lottery in which a revival effect (success) is executed.

In addition, in the reel type gaming machine P, the next game after the AT state ends is switched to the "state for revival possibility performance" of one game, and the revival lottery is executed in the "state for revival possibility performance", so that both the game in which the revival performance (success) and the game in which the revival performance (failure) are executed are set to the "favorable zone", that is, the favorable zone indicator YH is configured to light up, preventing the player from determining whether the AT will end without checking the result of the performance. However, such a configuration may be configured as follows. (1) The state regarding the AT is set to the "AT state" even in the one game in which the revival lottery is executed, the revival flag is turned on in the one game in which the revival lottery is executed, and the revival flag is turned off in the game before the game in which the revival lottery is executed, thereby making a different lottery mode regarding the AT. (2) The revival lottery is not executed, and the control on the main control board M side is configured to determine whether the "AT state" will end depending on whether the continuation lottery is won, and the timing of execution of the continuation lottery is set to the game before the final game of the AT (one game before the final game of the AT, the first game of the set being executed, etc.). With such a configuration, a revival performance (success) and a revival performance (failure) can be executed as the performance on the sub-control board S side in the AT final game. As an example of the performance, "the game before the AT final game: AT continuation promotion performance (success) → AT final game: performance indicating that the AT of the next set will start", "the game before the AT final game: AT continuation promotion performance (continuation to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuation promotion performance (success)", "the game before the AT final game: AT continuation promotion performance (failure) → AT final game: revival performance (success)", "the game before the AT final game: AT continuation promotion performance (failure) → AT final game: revival performance (failure)" and the like may be configured to be executed. That is, the main control board M side determines whether the "AT in progress state" continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether the continuation lottery is won or not, and the sub-control board S side performance may be configured to execute the AT continuation promotion performance and the revival performance. (3) In a game in which a revival performance (success) is executed, a performance is executed in the same performance mode as the revival performance (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the revival performance (success) is notified from the predetermined timing, that is, the player is notified that the AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In such a configuration, the predetermined timing may be: (1) a bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) for a game in which a revival performance (success) is executed, which can be executed if a continuation lottery is won; (2) a start lever operation timing for a game in which a revival performance (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, a performance in the same performance mode as the revival performance (loss) is not executed; (3) a timing at which the stop button is pressed to become the first stop for a game in which a revival performance (success) is executed (a timing at which the first stop is turned on); (4) a timing at which the stop button is released after pressing the stop button to become the first stop for a game in which a revival performance (success) is executed (a timing at which the first stop is turned on to off); (5) a timing at which the second stop for a game in which a revival performance (success) is executed and The timing may be, for example, (1) the timing when the stop button which becomes the second stop in the game in which the revival performance (success) is executed is pressed (timing when the second stop is turned on), (2) the timing when the stop button which becomes the second stop in the game in which the revival performance (success) is pressed and then released (timing when the second stop is turned on → off), (3) the timing when the stop button which becomes the third stop in the game in which the revival performance (success) is executed is pressed (timing when the third stop is turned on), (4) the timing when the stop button which becomes the third stop in the game in which the revival performance (success) is executed is pressed and then released (timing when the third stop is turned on → off), or (5) the timing when the bet button is operated (timing when a game medal is inserted) in the game next to the game in which the revival performance (success) is executed, or (6) the timing when the stop button which becomes the second stop in the game in which the revival performance (success) is pressed and then released (timing when the second stop is turned on → off). Furthermore, if the timing among the various timings (1) to (10) above is determined by lottery, the advantageous zone indicator YH will continue to light up even if neither the continuation lottery nor the revival lottery is won after the timing when the stop button for the first stop is pressed, so the player can play with anticipation that the AT will continue until the timing when the stop button for the third stop is pressed and then released, or until the timing when the start lever is operated for the game following the game in which the revival performance is executed.

<Processing when starting lever is operated>
FIG. 47 shows a subroutine that is called and executed in the process of step 2300 in FIG. 41 and indicates the process to be executed when the start lever is operated.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT-related state is in the AT-in-progress state. If the answer is Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the AT-related state is in the AT-in-progress state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the AT-in-progress process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later, and transitions to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not in the AT state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is a specialized precursor state. If the answer is Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is a specialized precursor state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the specialized precursor process at start lever operation described below, and transitions to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not a "specialized precursor state", then in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is a "top-up specialized state". If the answer is Yes in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to the AT is a "top-up specialized state", then in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the top-up specialized processing upon start lever operation, which will be described later, and transitions to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not the "addition specialized state", in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is "playing inside an advantageous BB". If the answer is Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to the AT is "playing inside an advantageous BB", in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for processing inside an advantageous BB when the start lever is operated, and transitions to the next process (processing of step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not "playing inside an advantageous BB", in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the RT state is "RT1". If the answer is Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is "RT1", in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is without push order navigation (a state related to the AT in which push order navigation does not occur, such as "low probability state", "playing inside a normal BB", "normal BB state", etc.). If the answer is Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state related to the AT is without push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether an avoidance command has been received. As mentioned above, instead of being configured so that the sub-control board S receives a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, or a forward push avoidance command to execute effects related to push order navigation, when the AT addition lottery is won, the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S to inform the sub-control board S that the AT addition lottery has been won and related to the number of games to be added to the AT, and when the sub-control board S receives this command, the sub-control board S may determine the timing of execution of effects related to push order navigation and the presentation style.

If the answer is Yes in step 2312, in other words, if an avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image that avoids the establishment of the push order navigation display on the performance display device S40 in the first number display mode group, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2110). In this way, in the reel-type gaming machine P, when the number of games has passed from a situation in which "RT1" and "AT is in progress" and the AT counter value becomes 0, and the state transitions to "RT1" and "low probability state" (before replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if a reverse push white 7 replay or a forward push black 7 replay is won, the AT game number is not added, so the push order is configured to be navigated so that the white sevens or black sevens do not form a straight line. Also, if the number of games has passed from a "RT1" and "AT in progress" state and the AT counter value becomes 0, transitioning to "RT1" and a "low probability state" occurs, it is still considered to be an "advantageous zone" and push order navigation can occur in games in which the push order bell has been won, but the push order navigation may not occur in games in which the push order replay has been won.

If the answer is No at step 2308, No at step 2310, or No at step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a performance image and a background image based on the status of the AT at step 2316, and proceeds to the next process (the process at step 2110).

<Automatic transmission processing when start lever is operated>
Next, FIG. 48 shows a subroutine indicating processing during AT when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2350 in FIG.

Next, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information about the condition device related to the game, in step 2354, checks the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2356, checks the command related to the instruction number. In this way, in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, such as the "low probability state" (which also applies when the play area is the "normal area"), when transmitting a performance group number, it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. Furthermore, even in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, the main control board M transmits the performance group number in the same way as in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, and may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order based on the performance group number and the command related to the instruction number. For example, this can be applied when the push order navigation display when the push order bell is executed and the push order navigation display when the push order replay is configured to be displayed in the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by numbers, and the display color related to the numbers is the same). Also, when configured in this way, the effect display device S40 may be configured to display an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the push order navigation display when the push order navigation is executed, and different effect images may be displayed when the push order navigation related to the push order bell is executed and when the push order navigation related to the push order replay is executed.

Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is the push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the aforementioned WINNING-A1 to WINNING-A6.

If the answer is Yes in step 2358, in other words if the condition device for the game is a push order bell, then in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the six possible push orders for the push order bell in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, respectively. For example, if the push order bell, Winning-A1, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → middle → right", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum payout number, are displayed in a display mode surrounded by a circle.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not the push order bell, then in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is any one of replays D1 to D3.

If the answer is Yes in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device for the game is push order replay, then in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the three push order options for push order replay on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. Here, since there are three push order options, the information corresponds to the first stop button to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, if the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

If the answer is No in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device for the game is push order replay, then in step 2366 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. Here, forward push avoidance commands and reverse push avoidance commands are collectively referred to as avoidance commands. If the answer is Yes in step 2366, in other words, if an avoidance command has been received, then in step 2368 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding a winning combination in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as the push order navigation display.

Next, if the answer is No at step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of steps 2360, 2364, or 2368 described above, and then at step 2370, displays the background image during AT on the performance display device S40.

Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less. If the answer is Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of remaining AT games on the performance display device S40 in display mode B (a display mode that is less noticeable than display mode A described below).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received a push-in-order command. If the answer is Yes in step 2376, in other words if it has received a push-in-order command, in step 2378 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image that avoids a hit in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push-in-order navigation display.

If the answer is No in step 2376, or if the processing of step 2378 has been executed, then in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2380, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command has been received, then in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image that avoids the formation of a push order navigation display in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40.

If the answer is No in step 2380, or if the processing of step 2382 has been executed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2372, in other words if the number of games remaining in the AT is 4 or more, then in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of games remaining in the AT on the performance display device S40 in display mode A (a display mode that is more noticeable than the display mode B described above). Here, if the number is 4 or more, it is displayed in display mode A, and if the number is 3 or less, it is displayed in display mode B.

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a push-in-order command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2386, in other words if a push-in-order command has been received, then in step 2388 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → middle → right" as an arrow image on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display.

If the answer is No in step 2386, or if the processing of step 2388 has been executed, then in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2390, in other words, if a reverse push command has been received, then in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "right → middle → left" as an arrow image on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display.

In step 2390, if the answer is No, or if the processing of step 2392 is executed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S moves to the next processing (processing of step 2110). In this way, when the number of remaining AT games is small, in other words, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is displayed in display mode B, which is a display mode that is more noticeable than display mode A, even if a forward push instruction command or a reverse push instruction command is received, the performance of displaying "Aim for 7!" along with an arrow image is not executed, and the push order navigation is executed with the middle reel, in which the white seven and black seven are not displayed stopped on an invalid line, as the first stopped reel. By configuring in this way, when the number of remaining AT games is displayed in display mode B, which is a display mode that incites the player to know that the number of remaining AT games is small in a situation where the number of remaining AT games is small, the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B is not hindered by the display of the arrow image or "Aim for 7!". Similarly, even if the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 is small, and a continuous performance (for example, a battle performance) is executed to incite whether or not the "AT in progress state" (a state related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed) will continue, the visibility of the battle performance can be prevented by configuring the display device not to display an arrow image or "Aim for 7!" during the execution of the battle performance. Also, by configuring in this way, even if the number of remaining AT games on the performance display device S40 becomes 0 and the battle performance is defeated and the "AT in progress state" is displayed to end, if a forward push instruction command or a reverse push instruction command has been received during the battle performance, the number of AT added games based on the forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command (based on winning a forward push black 7 replay or a reverse push white 7 replay) is announced at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the display of the end of the "AT in progress state", that is, the number of AT games added is not announced in the game that won the AT addition lottery, but is announced at a later timing, which increases the interest of the game.

<Specialized premonition processing when operating the start lever>
FIG. 49 shows a subroutine for start lever operation special indication processing which is called and executed in the processing of step 2400 in FIG.

Next, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information about the condition device related to the game, in step 2404, checks the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2406, checks the command related to the instruction number. In this way, in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, such as "AT in progress", the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and when transmitting a performance group number in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, such as "low probability state" (which also applies when the play area is a "normal area"), it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. Furthermore, even in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, the main control board M transmits the performance group number in the same way as in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, and may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order based on the performance group number and the command related to the instruction number.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is the push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the aforementioned WINNING-A1 to WINNING-A6.

If the answer is Yes in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the six options of the push order bell in the second number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button to the left stop button D41, the center stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, respectively. For example, if the push order bell, Winning-A2, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "left → right → center" that can win the maximum payout number are displayed in a display mode surrounded by stars. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display the numbers suggesting the push order in different display mode groups, and for example, the first number display mode group may display the numbers in blue, and the second number display mode group may display the numbers in red.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not the push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2412 whether the condition device for the game is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is any one of replays D1 to D3.

If the answer is Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the three push orders for push order replay in the second number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. Here, since there are three push orders, the information corresponds to the first stop button as either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, if the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side of the center of the performance display device S40, if the first stop button is the middle stop button D42, the number "1" is displayed on the lower center of the performance display device S40, and if the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed near the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel that should be stopped on the performance display device S40.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not push order replay, then in step 2416 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a push order command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2416, in other words, if a push order command has been received, then in step 2418 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → middle → right" as an arrow image on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2416, in other words if the forward push command has not been received, then in step 2420 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2420, in other words if a reverse push command has been received, then in step 2422 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "right → middle → left" as a push order navigation display in the form of an arrow on the performance display device S40.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2420, in other words if a reverse push instruction command has not been received, then in step 2424 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as avoidance commands. If the answer is Yes in step 2424, in other words if an avoidance command has been received, then in step 2426 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image to avoid a winning combination in the second number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as the push order navigation display.

Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has executed the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or if the answer is No at step 2424, then at step S2428, it displays the background image during the AT on the performance display device S40, and at step S2430, it displays the number of games remaining in the AT in display mode A on the performance display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (the processing of step 2110).

<Specialized processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 50 shows a subroutine showing the start lever operation add-on specialization processing which is called and executed in the processing of step 2450 in FIG.

Next, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information about the condition device related to the game, in step 2454, checks the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2456, checks the command related to the instruction number. In this way, in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, such as "AT in progress", the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and when transmitting a performance group number in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, such as "low probability state" (this also applies when the play area is a "normal area"), it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. Furthermore, even in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, the main control board M transmits the performance group number in the same way as in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, and may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order based on the performance group number and the command related to the instruction number.

Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is the push order bell or the common bell. Here, the push order bell is any of the aforementioned WINNING-A1 to WINNING-A6 and WINNING-B.

If the answer is Yes in step 2458, in other words if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, then in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the six options for the push order bell on the performance display device S40 in the first number display mode group as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, respectively. For example, if the push order bell, Winning-A4, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order that can obtain the maximum payout number, "Right → Left → Middle", are displayed in a display mode surrounded by stars. The first and second number display mode groups described above may display numbers indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may display numbers in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device for the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is push order replay. Here, push order replay is any one of replays-D1 to D3.

If the answer is Yes in step 2462, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the three push orders for push order replay in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. Here, since there are three push orders, the information corresponds to the first stop button as either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, if the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side of the center of the performance display device S40, if the first stop button is the middle stop button D42, the number "1" is displayed on the lower center of the performance display device S40, and if the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed close to the stop switch that corresponds to the reel that should be stopped.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2462 described above, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not a push order replay, then in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received a push order command. If the answer is Yes in step 2466, in other words, if it has received a push order command, then in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → middle → right" as a push order navigation display in the form of an arrow image on the performance display device S40. In other words, since the push order is a push order, the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button are, in order, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, and the push order can be suggested by the image of an arrow pointing from left to right.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2466 described above, in other words if the forward push command has not been received, then in step 2470 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2470, in other words if a reverse push command has been received, then in step 2472 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "right → middle → left" as a push order navigation display in the form of an arrow image on the performance display device S40. In other words, since the push order is reverse push, the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button are, in order, the right stop button D43, middle stop button D42, and left stop button D41, and the push order can be suggested by the image of an arrow pointing from right to left.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2474, in other words, if the avoidance command has been received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image to avoid the formation of the button on the performance display device S40 in the first number display mode group as a push order navigation display. Here, the avoidance command collectively refers to both the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the processing of step 2476 is executed whether the forward push avoidance command or the reverse push avoidance command has been received. For example, if the forward push avoidance command has been received, in order to avoid the forward push "left → middle → right", the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the performance display device S40, and information as if the first stop button were the right stop button D43 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has executed the processing of steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476 described above, or if the answer is No at 2474, then at step 2480, it displays the background image during the AT on the performance display device S40, and at step 2482, it displays the number of games remaining in the AT in display mode A on the performance display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (the processing of step 2110).

<Internal processing of advantageous BB when starting lever is operated>
Next, FIG. 51 shows a subroutine that illustrates processing inside the advantageous BB when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2700 in FIG.

Next, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game, in step 2704, checks the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2706, checks the command related to the instruction number. In this way, in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, such as "AT in progress", the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and when transmitting a performance group number in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, such as "low probability state" (which also applies when the play area is "normal area"), it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. Furthermore, even in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, the main control board M transmits the performance group number in the same way as in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, and may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order based on the performance group number and the command related to the instruction number.

Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined number of games (5 games) have elapsed since the transition to play inside the advantageous BB. If the answer is Yes in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined number of games (5 games) have not elapsed since the transition to play inside the advantageous BB, then in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for that game is the push order bell or the common bell. Here, the push order bell is any of the aforementioned prize-winning-A1 to prize-winning-A6, or prize-winning-B.

If the answer is Yes in step 2710, in other words if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, then in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the six options for the push order bell in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, respectively. For example, if the push order bell, Winning-A4, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order that can obtain the maximum payout number, "Right → Left → Middle", are displayed in a display mode surrounded by stars. The first and second number display mode groups described above may display numbers indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may display numbers in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device for the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, then in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is any one of replays-D1 to D3.

If the answer is Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the three push orders for push order replay in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. Here, since there are three push orders, the information corresponds to the first stop button as either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, if the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct push order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side of the center of the performance display device S40, if the first stop button is the middle stop button D42, the number "1" is displayed on the lower center of the performance display device S40, and if the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed close to the stop switch that corresponds to the reel that should be stopped.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2714 described above, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not push order replay, then in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to 7 replay has been received. Here, the forward push instruction command, reverse push instruction command, forward push avoidance command, and reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as 7 replay commands. If the answer is Yes in step 2718, in other words, if a command related to 7 replay has been received, then in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image to avoid the occurrence as a push order navigation display on the performance display device S40 in the first number display mode group.

Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has executed the processing of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or if the answer is No at step 2718, then at step S2722, it displays the background image during the AT on the performance display device S40, and at step S2724, it displays the number of games remaining in the AT in display mode A on the performance display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (the processing of step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2708, in other words if a certain number of games (5 games) have passed since the transition to play inside the advantageous BB, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S will notify the user on the performance display device S40 that the BB has been won (the push order navigation is not displayed in this process), and transition to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing for the first body stop acceptance>
Next, FIG. 52 shows a subroutine that indicates the first drum stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2500 in FIG.

Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If the answer is Yes in step 2502, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stop button has been operated based on the correct push order as the first stop.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2504, in other words, if the stop button is operated based on the correct push order as the first stop, then in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the display related to the first stop in the push order navigation display, and transitions to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2504, in other words, if the stop button is not operated based on the correct push order for the first stop, then in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the push order navigation related to the forward push navigation or reverse push navigation is being displayed. Here, 7 replay is a general term for the forward push black 7 replay and the reverse push white 7 replay. If the answer is Yes in step 2508, then in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S darkens the push order navigation (it remains darkened during the game) and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2508, in other words if the push order navigation for 7 replays is not being displayed, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all push order navigation displays, executes a push order failure presentation, and transitions to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing for the second round of body stop acceptance>
Next, FIG. 53 shows a subroutine that indicates the second drum stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2550 in FIG.

Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If the answer is Yes in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. If the answer is Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, then in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stop button based on the correct push order has been operated as the second stop.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2556, in other words, if the stop button is operated based on the correct push order as the second stop, then in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the display related to the second stop in the push order navigation display, and transitions to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2556, in other words, if the stop button is not operated based on the correct push order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all push order navigation displays, executes a push order failure presentation, and transitions to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No at step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, or if the answer is No at step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, the process immediately proceeds to the next process (the process at step 2110).

<Third body stop performance related decision process>
Next, FIG. 54 shows a subroutine that illustrates the process of determining the performance-related aspects at the time of the third drum stop, which is called and executed in the process of step 3200 in FIG.

Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB role has won. If the answer is Yes in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role has won, then in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB role has won during non-AT ("low probability state" or "high probability state"). If the answer is Yes in step 3204, in other words, if the BB role has won during non-AT, then in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the non-AT BB start performance determination table, and determines and executes the BB start performance (the performance executed when the BB role wins) based on the AT state of the game and the BB role, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2600).

Next, if the answer is No in step 3204, in other words if the BB role was won during the AT ("AT state", "addition specialization state", "specialization preparation state" or "revival possibility performance state"), in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the AT BB start performance decision table, and determines and executes the BB start performance based on the AT-related state of the game and the BB role, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2600).

Next, if the answer is No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role is not won, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes an effect based on the effect executed in the game, and transitions to the next process (the process of step 2600).

The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown in the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of BB in a non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for specifying the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to the AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (allocation). There are two types of BB roles: BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There are two types of AT-related states: "Normal BB internal play" and "Advantageous BB internal play". There are three types of BB start effects: normal effect, high expectation effect, and premium effect. In addition, the expectation of transitioning to the "AT state" after the BB ends is configured to differ depending on the type of BB start effect in the BB won during non-AT, and the order from the lowest expectation is "normal effect → high expectation effect → premium effect".

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is normal BB internal play, the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "normal BB internal play", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "normal BB internal play", the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 0/256.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 0/256.

When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing in normal BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing in normal BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing in normal BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 0/256.

When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 67/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 157/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 32/256.

When in the "normal section", whether you win BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) or BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B), the premium effect will not be selected, and it is set so that the normal effect is more likely to be selected than the high expectation effect.

Even if you are in a favorable zone, if you win BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B), the premium effect will not be selected, and it is set so that the probability of selecting a normal effect is higher than the high expectation effect.

In the "favorable zone" when BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) is won, there is a possibility that a premium effect will be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate to the player that the premium effect has been selected and that the player has won BB with no setting difference, which means that the player will definitely move to the "AT in progress state" after the BB with no setting difference ends. In addition, it is set so that in the "favorable zone" when BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) is won, there is a higher possibility that a high expectation effect will be selected than a normal effect (the normal effect is less likely to be selected). In this way, the player can guess whether or not the AT will start after the BB ends by checking the BB start effect, and can feel a sense of anticipation for winning the AT. In addition, the allocation of the BB start effect for the BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) won in the "normal BB internal play" is the same as the allocation of the BB start effect for the BB without a setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) won in the "normal BB internal play". In addition, without being limited to this, the allocation of the BB start effect for the BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) won in the "normal BB internal play" may be different from the allocation of the BB start effect for the BB without a setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) won in the "normal BB internal play". By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the allocation to be different depending on whether it is a BB start effect for a BB with a setting difference or a BB start effect for a BB without a setting difference.

The AT BB start effect determination table shown in the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of the BB during the AT. The AT BB start effect determination table is also a table for specifying the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to the AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (allocation). There are two types of BB roles: BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There is one type of state related to the AT: "Playing inside advantageous BB". There are two types of BB start effects: an effect that can be added and an effect that cannot be added. The effect that can be added is an effect that suggests that an AT addition lottery can be executed during the execution of the BB, and the effect that cannot be added is an effect that suggests that an AT addition lottery will not be executed during the execution of the BB. For BBs that are won during the AT, there is no element of whether or not they will win the AT lottery, and whether or not an AT addition lottery will be executed may differ depending on the type of BB. In addition, during the AT, even in a BB with a setting difference where the AT addition lottery is not executed, game medals can be acquired, and after the BB ends, the player is in an AT that is advantageous to the player, so the BB that is executed is configured to clearly notify whether or not the AT addition lottery will be executed. Specific examples are described in detail below.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be an effect that can be added is 0/256, and an effect that can be added will not be executed. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be an effect that cannot be added is 256/256, and an effect that cannot be added will always be executed. When the BB role is BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be an effect that can be added is 256/256, and an effect that can be added will always be executed. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the AT status of the game is "Playing in favorable BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be an effect that cannot be added is 0/256, and an effect that cannot be added will not be executed.

<Processing for accepting the 3rd round of torso stop>
Next, FIG. 55 shows a subroutine that indicates the processing at the time of the acceptance of the third drum stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2600 in FIG.

Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If the answer is Yes in step 2602, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. If the answer is Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, then in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stop button based on the correct push order has been operated as the third stop.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2606, in other words, if the stop button is operated based on the correct push order as the third stop, then in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays "GET!" on the effect display device S40 as a successful push order effect. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2606, in other words, if the stop button is not operated based on the correct push order as the third stop, then in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not display "GET!" as a successful push order effect.

If the answer is No in step 2602, i.e., the push order navigation is not being displayed, if the answer is No in step 2604, i.e., the condition device for the game is not the push order bell, or if the processing of step 2608 or 2610 is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of games to be added to the AT (the command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of games remaining in the AT to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S determines whether the number of games to be added to the AT has been executed and the number of games to be added to the AT by calculating the difference from the command indicating the number of games remaining in the AT received last time, and may be configured to display the number of games to be added to the AT.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2612, in other words, if a command related to the number of AT games has been received from the main side, then in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT added games on the performance display device S40 and transitions to the next process (the processing of step 2110). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2612, in other words, if a command related to the number of AT games has not been received from the main side, then in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S transitions to the next process (the processing of step 2110) without displaying the number of AT added games on the performance display device S40. In addition, the number of games added to the AT can be notified as a method of (1) notifying the entire number of games added in the game, (2) notifying a portion of the number of games added in the game, and notifying the remaining number in a game after the game, or (3) notifying the number of games added in the game, but in a game after the game (for example, when 7 replays are won, when a common bell is won (when a role that is not normally added is won), after multiple games (continuous effects) are played, when the number of remaining games on the effect display device S40 becomes "0", or by operating the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 in the next game after the game in which the number of remaining games becomes "0").

In addition, if you win the common bell in the "addition specialized state", the number of AT addition games will not be displayed even if you stop the reel according to the push order navigation (AT addition lottery is not held with the common bell).

By configuring as described above, the slot machine P can be configured to appropriately notify the player of a period that is advantageous to the player in a slot machine P configured to light up the advantageous zone indicator YH in the "advantageous zone". In addition, by providing a "state for revival possibility presentation", when a continuation presentation is won and a revival presentation (success) is then executed, the advantageous zone indicator YH is lit because the state of the AT of the game in which the revival presentation (success) is executed is the "AT in progress state", while even when a continuation presentation is not won and a revival presentation (failure) is then executed, the advantageous zone indicator YH is lit by setting the state of the AT of the game in which the revival presentation (failure) is executed to the "state for revival possibility presentation" and setting the state of the AT to the "advantageous zone". By configuring it in this way, it is possible to configure it so that it is difficult to tell whether the revival performance will be successful or not by visually checking the advantageous zone indicator YH in a game in which a revival performance is being performed, and it is possible to ensure that the reel-type gaming machine P is highly entertaining, as it is configured to be able to properly notify the player of advantageous periods.

In this example, the system is configured so that if a BB role is won in the "high probability state", the AT lottery can be won, and the system is configured so that the state can transition to the "AT in progress state" after the BB ends, but the AT configuration is not limited to that of this example, and for example, the system can be configured so that a rare role such as a cherry can win the AT lottery (even roles other than the BB role can be won), and if the AT lottery is won, the AT state can transition to the "AT precursor state", and the system can transition to the "AT in progress state" by playing a predetermined number of games (e.g., 10 games) in the "AT precursor state".

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process related to the subroutine of step 7100 in FIG. 41. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu screen is not displayed on the performance display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the performance display device SG by pressing the sub-input button SB, etc., and is a screen on which the player can select from multiple items and check various settings and information about the reel-type gaming machine P. As an example of a method of selecting and deciding an item, the cross key SB2 (having four buttons: up button, down button, left button, and right button) is operated to move the cursor to the desired item, and the sub-input button SB is operated to decide the currently selected (cursor-positioned) item, and a screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed by deciding the selected item are menu screens. In addition, the menu screen may have multiple display formats; for example, the items selectable on the menu screen may differ depending on the game state, or the background image design may differ; in other words, even if there are such differences, they are all referred to as menu screens.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen>
Examples of items selectable on the menu screen are listed below. (1) Volume adjustment: The game machine P may be configured so that the player can adjust the volume output from the reel type gaming machine P. For example, the game machine may be configured so that a screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is displayed, and then the right button of the cross key SB2 is operated to increase the output volume, and the left button of the cross key SB2 is operated to decrease the output volume. (2) Light intensity adjustment: The game machine may be configured so that the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S, such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50), for example. The game machine may be configured so that a screen corresponding to the light intensity adjustment is displayed, and then the up button of the cross key SB2 is operated to increase the light intensity (brightness), and the down button of the cross key SB2 is operated to decrease the light intensity (brightness). (3) Character customization: The character that appears during the game (the main character, the voice of the push order navigation, the opponent character, the character that supports the game progress that is always displayed on the performance display device S40, etc.) may be configured to be selectable and changeable, and after displaying a screen corresponding to the character customization, the cursor is moved to the character to be selected with the cross key SB2, and the sub-input button SB is operated to confirm. (4) Reel arrangement table: The reel arrangement may be displayed on the screen corresponding to the reel arrangement table. (5) Payout table: The payout table (a list of symbol combinations that constitute a replay or a winning combination by stopping the display) may be displayed on the screen corresponding to the payout table. In addition, when the payout table is divided into multiple screens and displayed, for example, the payout table screen may be switched by the left button and the right button of the cross key SB2.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if the answer is Yes in step 7102, in step 7104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu screen is in a state in which it is possible to display the menu screen. Here, the menu screen displayable state is a state in which the menu screen is displayed when an operation that can display the menu screen, such as the operation of the sub-input button SB (which may be configured to display over time) is performed, and as a specific example, it may be configured as follows. (1) The menu screen may be displayed when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has passed since the game end timing (the timing when the third stop button is turned from on to off, the display determination timing, the timing of the completion of the payout based on the winning, the timing when a command related to the game end is set or sent to the sub-control board S side as the game end processing, the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the command related to the game end, etc.) without the game progressing (there is no new bet operation, there is no new automatic bet operation based on the stop display of the replay, there is no new operation of the start lever, there is no new start of the reel spinning, etc.) (until then, the menu screen is not displayed even if the sub-input button SB is operated). The betting operation includes both the betting by operating the bet button D220 and the betting by inserting a game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 (an automatic bet based on the stop display of the replay may also be included in the betting operation). (2-1) The menu screen may not be displayed during the execution of the game (when the game medal is bet, during the waiting period until the reel rotation starts, during the reel rotation). (2-2) The menu screen may be displayed during the execution of the game (when the game medal is bet, etc.). (3) The menu screen may not be displayed during the execution of a predetermined performance (when a performance that notifies whether or not a bonus has been won, when a continuous performance that is executed over a plurality of games, when a performance that notifies whether or not an AT game number addition lottery has been won, etc.). (4) The menu screen may not be displayed during the stop display of the replay role. Furthermore, to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, the sub input button SB (the LED provided inside the sub input button SB) may be configured to flash when the menu screen can be displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if the answer is Yes in step 7104, then in step 7106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. In this example, the operation to display the menu screen is the operation of the sub-input button SB, but the operation to display the menu screen may be changed, or multiple operations to display the menu screen may be configured. If the answer is Yes in step 7106, then in step 7108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the menu screen on the performance display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the game end timing to the transition to the standby screen described later) and clears the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer is timing). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the time it takes to transition from the menu screen to a standby screen described later, and the initial value is set when the menu screen begins to be displayed) to a predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example, which is longer than a predetermined time A described later) and starts the timer. Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the menu standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the menu standby timer is timing) and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 7200).

In addition, in step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu screen end condition has been satisfied. The menu screen end condition is a condition for terminating the display of the menu screen, in other words, a condition for switching the screen (image) displayed on the performance display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image), and specific examples of the condition that may be satisfied include the following: (1) It may be configured to be satisfied when a new bet operation is performed, a new start lever operation is performed, or a new reel spinning is started. (2) It may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined time (in this example, the predetermined time B of 300 seconds) has elapsed since the menu screen began to be displayed while the menu screen continues to be displayed. (3) A specific item on the menu screen may be selected and confirmed, and a specific operation may be performed on the screen corresponding to that specific item. For example, by placing the cursor on the volume adjustment item and operating the sub-input button SB, a screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is displayed, and after adjusting the desired volume by operating the cross key SB2, operating the sub-input button SB again, the volume is set to the selected volume, the display of the menu screen is terminated, and the screen before the menu screen was displayed (sometimes referred to as the normal screen) is displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if the answer is Yes at step 7114, then at step 7116 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays on the performance display device S40 the image that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed. As an example, if a screen showing the main character walking through a forest is displayed and the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-input button SB, when the display of the menu screen ends, the screen showing the main character walking through the forest will be displayed again. Next, at step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu wait timer and clears it to zero. Next, at step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu wait timer timing flag and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 7200).

If the answer is No in step 7114, then in step 7122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB2 has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 7122, then in step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets the menu standby timer to a predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example) and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 7200). Note that if the answer is No in step 7104, step 7106, or step 7122, then the next process (processing of step 7200) also proceeds. In this way, in the reel-type gaming machine P, if the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer is reset to the predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example), in other words, the measurement of the time until the standby screen is displayed is restarted from the beginning. In this example, two timers, a wait timer and a menu wait timer, are used as timers related to the display of the wait screen, but this is not limited thereto, and only one timer related to the display of the wait screen may be used. Specifically, only the wait timer may be used as the timer related to the display of the wait screen, and the above-mentioned predetermined time A (180 seconds) to be set in the wait timer and the predetermined time B (300 seconds) to be set in the menu wait timer may be set in the wait timer. As a specific example, the third stop button may be turned on and then off to set the wait timer to the predetermined time A (180 seconds), and then, when the sub input button SB is operated to start displaying the menu screen under a situation where the timer value of the wait timer is 100 seconds, the wait timer may be set to the predetermined time B (300 seconds).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process related to the subroutine of step 7200 in FIG. 41. First, in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby screen is hidden or not. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the performance display device SG when it is determined that no game has been played for a predetermined time (game is not progressing), and may include repeatedly playing moving images related to the story of the performance executed on the reel-type gaming machine P, displaying a message saying "Power saving", or displaying a logo mark related to the gaming machine manufacturer. In this example, while the above-mentioned menu screen requires an operation by the player as a condition for displaying the standby screen, the system is configured so that no operation by the player is required as a condition for displaying the standby screen.

If the answer is Yes in step 7202, then in step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer described later is timing) is off. If the answer is Yes in step 7204, then in step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the game end timing has been reached. In this process, the timing when the third stop button is turned from on to off is set as the game end timing. If the answer is Yes in step 7206, then in step 7208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a predetermined time A (180 seconds in this example, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above) to the standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the end of the game to the transition to the standby screen, and the initial value is set at the timing when the game ends) and starts the timer. Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the standby timer timing flag and proceeds to step 7212. In the above explanation, the condition for executing the processes of steps 7208 and 7210 is that the timing for ending the game has been reached. However, in addition to this, the condition may be that the image that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed has been displayed by operating the sub-input button SB on the menu screen (the display of the menu screen has ended).

Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the timer value of the wait timer has reached 0. If the answer is Yes in step 7212, in step 7214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a wait screen on the performance display device S40, and proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu wait timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu wait timer timing flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the wait timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the wait timer timing flag, and proceeds to step 7224. Note that if the answer is No in step 7206, the process also proceeds to step 7224.

Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu wait timer timing flag is on. If the answer is Yes in step 7224, in step 7226, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the timer value of the menu wait timer has become 0. If the answer is Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a wait screen on the performance display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu wait timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu wait timer timing flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the wait timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the wait timer timing flag and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). Furthermore, even if the answer is No at step 7224 or step 7226, the process proceeds to the next step (step 2110).

Also, if the answer is No in step 7204, in other words, if the standby timer timing flag is on, then in step 7238 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby timer timing end condition has not been met. Here, the standby timer timing end condition is a condition under which the standby timer timing ends and the timer value of the standby timer is cleared to zero, and includes a new bet operation, a new operation of the start lever, a new start of reel rotation, etc. If the answer is Yes in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7212, whereas if the answer is No in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7216.

Also, if the answer is No in step 7202, in step 7240, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby screen end condition has been satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the standby screen, and in this example, the standby screen end condition is a new bet operation, a new operation of the start lever, a new start of reel rotation, etc. In addition, the standby screen may be configured to be able to transition to a menu screen (display a menu screen), and for example, the menu screen may be displayed by operating the sub-input button SB when the standby screen is displayed. Next, in step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image that was displayed before the standby screen was displayed on the performance display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2110). As an example, when a screen showing the main character walking through the forest is displayed and the standby screen is displayed because the A game has not progressed for a predetermined time, the screen showing the main character walking through the forest will be displayed again by executing a bet operation.

<<Memory map configuration>>
First, referring to Figure 58, a detailed description will be given of the configuration of a portion of the memory map in the RAM (sometimes referred to as the first RAM) of the main control board M applicable to the reel type gaming machine P. The areas shown in the figure are used in the following order, from the highest address: (1) "setting value data": an area for data related to a number that manages the setting stage; (2) "external signal system data": an area for storing information related to external signal output; (3) "RAM checksum data": an area for storing data used in the checksum calculation process executed when the power is turned on, which stores data calculated from data stored in the RAM when the power is turned off, and stores information for calculating a specific value (for example, "0") in the checksum calculation process executed when the power is turned on; (4) "control command buffer": an area for storing command information to be sent to the sub-control board; (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer": an area for storing information used when the power is turned off and which stores data currently stored in the stack pointer when the power is turned off, and stores information to be stored in the stack pointer when the power is turned off; (6) "unused area": an area for storing areas not used for playing; and (7) "saved data 1 to saved data 8": a RAM into which the data to be saved is likely to be written to the maximum extent possible by design using a CALL command, a PUSH command, etc. In this configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but if an unexpected malfunction (such as an unexpected power outage) occurs, the stack pointer may point to an address higher than "7FF8H". In that case, the saved data may be stored beyond the area of "Saved Data 1 to Saved Data 8" that was reserved as the area for data to be saved in advance. In consideration of such a situation, it is preferable to configure the address (address close to "7FF8H") that the stack pointer may point to in the event of the unexpected malfunction to store data that does not affect the progress of the game (data with little effect). Specifically, by providing an address for storing "setting value data" at an address at least one address away from "Saved Data 1 to Saved Data 8" that was reserved as the area for data to be saved in advance, it is possible to provide a reel-type gaming machine P that does not cause any disadvantage not only to players but also to gaming facilities. In addition, in the figure, (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer" is data that is not used when the game is in progress after the power is restored, (4) "control command buffer" is data that is unlikely to affect the progress of the game even if it becomes impossible to send commands to the sub-control board S, (3) "RAM checksum data" is data that is not used when the game is in progress after the power is restored, and (2) "external signal system data" is data to be sent to the hall computer, so it is data that has little effect on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) "setting value data" is data related to setting values that affect the results of the game, so for example, if the setting value is changed to a low value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will be caused to the player. Furthermore, for example, if the setting value is changed to a high value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will be caused to the game center. As described above, (1) "setting value data" is important data for the normal progress of the game. For this reason, (1) "setting value data" is the most significant data (data stored in a high address) in (1) to (7) in the figure. In other words, the addresses between (1) "setting value data" and (7) "Saved Data 1 to Saved Data 8" store (2) "external signal system data", (3) "RAM checksum data", (4) "control command buffer", (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer", and (6) "unused area". By configuring in this way, even if a malfunction occurs in the reel type gaming machine P and the amount of data saved from the stack pointer to the RAM exceeds the design amount, the reel type gaming machine P can be configured to be less likely to have an abnormal state because it is provided with a RAM that is not used for playing. In addition, the order of addresses storing the five data items (2) "external signal system data", (3) "RAM checksum data", (4) "control command buffer", (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer", and (6) "unused area" can be changed without any problem. For example, the data items may be stored in the order of "(3) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (6)" from the upper address, or in the order of "(6) → (5) → (3) → (2) → (4)" from the upper address. In addition, the (6) "unused area" may not be provided. In addition, the data items stored in the RAM areas (2) to (5) above are data items that do not make it impossible to insert a game medal (no error occurs that makes it impossible to insert a game medal) even if the data items stored in the RAM areas are changed.

The area for storing the "set value data" shown in FIG. 58, in other words, the area (1) in FIG. 59, may be configured to store the following data: (A) Total score data: an area for storing data on the number of game values that plays a role similar to the total number of game medals that can be inserted in a medal-less reel-type gaming machine that does not use actual game medals (when the total score data is stored in the area (1) in FIG. 59, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to have 2 bytes) (B) Minimum play time: data for counting the minimum play time for one play (the counter value is subtracted for each interrupt process) (the minimum play time for one play is 4.1 seconds) (C) Number of coins acquired counter when BB is activated: B A counter for determining whether the condition (number of coins paid out) for B to end has been met (the counter value is subtracted in accordance with the value of the gaming value given to the player) (D) Counter for the number of coins acquired during MB operation: A counter for determining whether the condition (number of coins paid out) for MB to end has been met (the counter value is subtracted in accordance with the value of the gaming value given to the player) Note that the above (A) to (D) and the "setting value data" may be configured to be stored in multiple locations (stored in different addresses), or only one of them may be stored. In addition, when multiple data are configured to be stored, it is preferable to configure the multiple data to be stored in addresses higher than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59 (providing an area for storing them). By configuring in this way, a gaming machine that does not cause disadvantages to players or gaming facilities can be provided. Furthermore, if the address is higher than at least the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is designed to be "7FF8H", but if an unexpected malfunction (such as an unexpected power outage) occurs, the stack pointer may end up pointing to an address higher than "7FF8H". However, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause any disadvantage to players or gaming facilities.

<<<<<Performance display device SH>>>>
In addition, the reel type gaming machine P is provided with a performance display device SH that displays the operating status of the reel type gaming machine P, such as the ratio of game features, and this performance display device SH will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 59 shows an example of a display of a performance display device SH applicable to a reel-type gaming machine P. The performance display device SH is formed with four-digit segments arranged in a horizontal row, with the top two digits (the two digits on the left) being the identification segment SH10 and the bottom two digits (the two digits on the right) being the ratio segment SH20. The identification segment SH10 is configured to display information that identifies the currently displayed item, and the ratio segment SH20 is configured to display numerical information corresponding to the currently displayed item. In addition, a dot point SH30 is provided at the bottom right of the bottom digit (the digit on the right) of the identification segment SH10, and the presence or absence of the dot point SH30 makes it easy to distinguish between the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20. It is not necessary to provide the dot point SH30.

<<<<Installation location>>>
The performance display device SH may be installed directly on the main control board M. If so configured, it is desirable to install it in a position where visibility is not obstructed by stickers or the like attached to the main board case M40 that covers the main control board M.

<<<Display items>>>
Examples of items to be displayed on the performance display device SH include the following items.
(a) = Cumulative favorable zone ratio "Cumulative favorable zone ratio" is the ratio of the cumulative number of times played in the favorable zone to the total number of times played (cumulative number of times played), and can be calculated by "Cumulative number of times played in the favorable zone ÷ Total number of times played × 100 (%)". As an example, when the game progresses as "start of game machine operation → normal zone A → favorable zone A → normal zone B → favorable zone B", it can be calculated by "(number of times played in favorable zone A + number of times played in favorable zone B) ÷ (number of times played in normal zone A + number of times played in favorable zone A + number of times played in normal zone B + number of times played in favorable zone B) × 100 (%)".

In addition, "cumulative total" refers to the cumulative total from the start of measurement for display on the performance display device SH to the execution of calculations for the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH, such as from the start of operation of the slot machine P in the gaming facility to the execution of calculations for the items to be displayed on the most recent performance display device SH, or from a specified measurement start timing to the execution of calculations for the items to be displayed on the most recent performance display device SH.

(b) = Continuous feature ratio for 6000 games The "continuous feature ratio" is the ratio of the total number of payouts when the first type special feature is activated to the total number of payouts, and the "continuous feature ratio for 6000 games" can be calculated by "the number of payouts when the first type special feature is activated during 6000 games ÷ the total number of payouts during 6000 games × 100 (%)". As an example, if the number of payouts of game medals when the first type special feature is activated during 6000 games is 6000, and the number of payouts due to other triggers is 8000, it is calculated as "6000 ÷ (6000 + 8000) × 100 ≒ 42.9 (%)". Note that "6000 games" refers to the 6000 games prior to the most recent calculation of the continuous feature ratio.

(c) = Ratio of features over 6,000 games. The "ratio of features" is the ratio of the sum of the number of payout coins paid out by special features and normal features to the total number of payout coins, and the "ratio of features over 6,000 games" can be calculated as "(number of payout coins when a first type special feature is activated during 6,000 games + number of payout coins when a second type special feature is activated during 6,000 games + number of payout coins when a normal feature is activated during 6,000 games) ÷ total number of payout coins during 6,000 games × 100 (%)." As an example, if the number of game medals paid out when the first type special feature is activated during 6000 games is 5000, the number of game medals paid out when the second type special feature is activated during 6000 games is 3000, and the number of medals paid out due to other triggers during 6000 games is 8000, the calculation is "(5000+3000)÷(5000+3000+8000)×100=50(%)". Note that "6000 games" refers to the 6000 games prior to the most recent calculation of the feature ratio.

(d) = Cumulative consecutive feature ratio The "cumulative consecutive feature ratio" can be calculated by "the cumulative number of payouts when the first type special feature is activated ÷ the cumulative total number of payouts × 100 (%)". As an example, if the cumulative number of payouts of game medals when the first type special feature is activated is 600,000, and the number of payouts due to other triggers is 800,000, it is calculated as "600,000 ÷ (600,000 + 800,000) × 100 ≒ 42.9 (%)".

(e) = Accumulative feature ratio The "accumulated feature ratio" can be calculated as "(accumulated number of payouts when the first type special feature is activated + accumulated number of payouts when the second type special feature is activated + accumulated number of payouts when the normal feature is activated) ÷ accumulated total number of payouts × 100 (%)". As an example, if the accumulated number of payouts of game medals when the first type special feature is activated is 500,000, the accumulated number of payouts of game medals when the second type special feature is activated is 300,000, and the accumulated number of payouts due to other triggers is 800,000, it is calculated as "(500,000 + 300,000) ÷ (500,000 + 300,000 + 800,000) × 100 = 50 (%)".

In addition, "7U" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative advantageous zone ratio is displayed, "6Y" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the consecutive feature ratio over 6000 games is displayed, "7Y" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the feature ratio over 6000 games is displayed, "6A" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative consecutive feature ratio is displayed, and "7A" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative feature ratio is displayed.

In FIG. 59, the cumulative advantageous zone ratio is displayed as (a), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cumulative instruction-included feature ratio may be displayed as (a). Here, the cumulative instruction-included feature ratio is a ratio that can be calculated by {cumulative payout number in a game in which the push order navigation (sometimes called instruction) on the main control board M is executed + cumulative payout number by the feature} ÷ total cumulative payout number × 100 (%), and whether the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or the cumulative instruction-included feature ratio is displayed on the performance display device SH can be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the reel type gaming machine P.

In addition, in a game in which push order navigation is executed, if the player performs the stop operation in a push order different from the push order navigation and thus fewer game medals are paid out than the number of medals that would be paid out for a winning symbol combination if the player performed the stop operation according to the push order navigation, the number of medals that would be paid out for a winning symbol combination if the player performed the stop operation according to the push order navigation is calculated as the number of medals to be paid out in the game in which the push order navigation is executed.

<<<<Display mode>>>
The display mode of the performance display device SH may be configured as follows: The display is switched in the order of "(a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (e) → (a)..." approximately every 5 seconds. The interval at which the display is switched may be changed without any problem, and the display may be configured to be switched, for example, every 3 seconds. For non-applicable items, "- -" is displayed in the ratio segment. An example of a non-applicable item is the advantageous zone ratio in a slot machine P that does not have an advantageous zone. The ratio display numerical value {advantageous zone ratio (%), consecutive feature ratio (%), feature ratio (%), displayed in the ratio segment SH20} is displayed with the decimal point discarded (if it is 100%, it will be displayed as "99"). If the ratio display numerical value is an advantageous zone ratio of 70%, a consecutive feature ratio of 60%, or a feature ratio of 70% or more, the ratio segment SH20 will be displayed flashing. If the cumulative number of games is less than 400 games, the ratio display will display "00". If the cumulative number of games is less than 6000 games, the identification segment SH10 will be displayed flashing when the consecutive feature ratio for 6000 games and the feature ratio for 6000 games are displayed flashing (including non-applicable items (for example, in a reel-type gaming machine P that does not have an advantageous zone, since there is no advantageous zone ratio, the advantageous zone ratio is a non-applicable item)). If the cumulative number of games is less than 175,000 games, the identification segment will be displayed flashing when displaying the cumulative advantageous zone ratio. In addition, if the cumulative number of games is less than 17,500 games, the identification segment is displayed flashing when the cumulative consecutive feature ratio and the cumulative feature ratio are displayed (including the case of a reel-type gaming machine P that does not have consecutive features). That is, the cumulative number of games is configured to be measurable for 175,000 games or more in order to display the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, and the cumulative number of games is configured to be measurable for 17,500 games or more in order to display the cumulative consecutive feature ratio and the cumulative feature ratio.

The performance display device SH is also configured to display the above-mentioned information (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e). The configuration for performing the calculation, display, and other processing of the information related to (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) on the main control board (CPU MC of the main control board M) is described in detail below.

<<<Memory map>>>
First, an example of the memory map of the main control chip C will be described with reference to FIG. 60. The memory map shows an address space from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Among these, the space from "0000H" to "27FFH" is assigned to the built-in ROM C110, the space from "2800H" to "28FFH" is assigned to the register area built into each circuit in the main control chip C, the space from "F000H" to "F2FFH" is assigned to the built-in RAM C120, and the space from "FDD0H" to "FDFBH" is assigned to the XCS decode area (an area that executes decoding to interpret a given machine language as an internal expression). By making the CPU C100 execute an instruction to access these addresses, it is possible to execute access to the corresponding hardware.

The built-in ROM C110 has a first ROM area which is an area that mainly controls the progress of the game, and a second ROM area which is an area that mainly controls processes that differ from the normal progress of the game, such as error-related processes. The first ROM area is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "1FFFH", and the second ROM area is allocated to the space from "2000H" to "27FFH". The first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area (in other words, the data capacity present in the first ROM area and accessed by the CPU C100 is configured to be larger than the data capacity present in the second ROM area and accessed by the CPU C100).

The first ROM area also has a first control area in which program code (a set of instruction codes for the CPUC100) is stored, a first data area in which program data used by the program (read by the CPUC100's processing based on this program code) is stored, an area in which various identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) is stored, and a program management area in which various settings used when operating the main control chip C (operation settings for the random number generation circuit C140, operation settings for the watchdog timer C222, etc.) are stored. Note that the figure shows a memory map image of the first ROM area, but the number of bytes in each area and the presence or absence of unused areas are merely examples.

The second ROM area has a second control area in which program code (a set of instruction codes for CPUC100) is stored, and a second data area in which program data used by the program (read by CPUC100 processing based on this program code) is stored, and the second control area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first control area (in other words, the program code capacity present in the second control area and accessed by CPUC100 is smaller than the program code capacity present in the first control area and accessed by CPUC100), and the second data area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first data area (in other words, the program data capacity present in the second data area and accessed by CPUC100 is smaller than the program data capacity present in the first data area and accessed by CPUC100).

On the other hand, the built-in RAMC 120 has a first RAM area which is an area for storing information mainly based on the progress of the game, a second RAM area which is an area for storing information mainly based on processing that differs from the normal progress of the game, such as error-related information, and a stack area which is used when the program needs to store data internally, and the first RAM area is allocated to the space from "F000H" to "F1FFH", the second RAM area is allocated to the space from "F200H" to "F2C9H", and the stack area is allocated to the space from "F2CAH" to "F2FFH" (however, the number of bytes in each area is merely an example).

The first RAM area has a first working area which is a working area for temporarily storing information related to the progress of the game, and the second RAM area has a second working area which is a working area for temporarily storing information related to errors, etc., and a checksum area which is a working area for detecting errors in the information temporarily stored in the first RAM area and the second RAM area. The first RAM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second RAM area. In the reel type gaming machine P, only the second RAM area has a checksum area (the first RAM area does not have one), and the checksum area is configured to manage the checksums of both the first RAM area and the second RAM area (the total of the information temporarily stored in both). In the reel type gaming machine P, as described later, when calculating the checksum, the unused area is also included in the calculation, but this is not limited to this, and the checksum may be calculated for the area excluding the unused area (the first working area and the second working area). Furthermore, the method of error detection is not limited to a checksum check, and other methods (such as a parity check) may be used. In such cases, the checksum area becomes an area for storing information for error detection (such as a parity bit) required when using these methods.

The address of the area in which various identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) is stored can be after the address of the built-in RAM without any problem. In addition, the address of the unused area can be changed without any problem, but it is preferable to provide an unused area between the first data area and the second control area (the address between them). That is, in the case of a memory map configuration as shown in FIG. 60, the program code present in the first control area and accessed by the CPUC 100 and the program code present in the second control area and accessed by the CPUC 100 are arranged separately on the memory map (with non-contiguous addresses), and since there is an unused area between them, the arrangement positions of both program codes can be visually clearly separated on the program source code or dump list (the same can be said when there is an unused area between them).

Here, in order to prevent programs that have been modified through fraudulent activities from being written into the ROM mounted on the main control board M, it is preferable to configure the ROM so that it does not have any unused areas (unfilled areas) (for example, by filling all unused areas with 0s and writing used areas to lower addresses, etc.). In addition, in order to prevent data that is not normally referenced from being referenced due to noise or fraudulent activities, it is preferable to configure the first control area and the first data area so that they do not have any unused data (for example, data referenced in a reel-type gaming machine P with different specifications, data used only for testing during the development stage, etc.). In addition, it is preferable to configure the first control area, the first data area, the second control area, the second data area, the first working area, and the second working area so that they use areas that are filled to lower addresses and do not have any unused areas within the areas (addresses within the areas) (for example, the first control area, which is in the range of "0000H" to "0FA7H", does not have "0010H" to "0050H" as an unused area). In this example, all bits in the unused area are set to "0", and any bit in the area other than the unused area is set to "1" (not "0").

In particular, the reel type gaming machine P is configured to perform the processing in the second ROM/RAM area when the main control board (CPU MC of the main control board M) executes the calculation processing of the information to be displayed on the performance display device SH, or the display processing of the information to be displayed on the performance display device SH. The details of the processing performed in the second ROM/RAM area are explained below.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>>
61 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process related to the subroutine of step 1600. The process of this subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the process of step 1040 or step 1104, and is configured to be executed periodically thereafter at a predetermined time interval (T in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of an interrupt (e.g., backing up data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking the input port of the power interruption detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power interruption is currently detected (in the current interrupt processing). If the answer is No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the power interruption processing described below. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (updating various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updating the storage area for each input port data in the RAM area). Here, input port data refers to information related to the detection of the settlement button D60, start lever D50, stop button D40, door switch D80, setting key switch M20, setting/reset button M30, power failure detection signal, input reception sensor D10s, first input sensor D20s, second input sensor D30s, first dispensing sensor H10s, second dispensing sensor H20s, etc. (i.e., the presence or absence of operation of these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at interrupt intervals T).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and switches the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag on and off according to the sampling results of each input port data (for example, if the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on for multiple samplings, it is possible to detect that the front door DU is open without being affected by noise by turning on the door switch flag). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel drive control process (processing related to the control of the drive of the reel M50, which will be described in detail later) for all reels (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether the counter value is greater than 0. If the answer is Yes in step 1612, then in step 1613, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. If the answer is No in step 1612, then proceeds to step 1614 as well. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, then the processing of steps 1612 and 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, etc. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M judges whether all error flags are off (not shown, but all error flags such as the inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted medal number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormality error flag, payout abnormality error flag, payout medal retention error flag, door switch flag, etc. are off). If the answer is Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (for example, in the register area) an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the fact that an error has not been detected) and proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (for example, in the register area) an error detection command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the fact that an error has been detected) and proceeds to step 1622. In step 1620, information on the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the on error flag is sent to the sub side. The error not detected command may be set only when the error is released from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag has been turned off), and the setting process of the information may not be executed when an error is not detected (step 1618 may not be performed). Furthermore, the error detection command may be set only when an error occurs from a state in which no error has occurred, or may be set when the type of error changes from a state in which a first error (e.g., an inserted medal retention error) to a second error (e.g., a paid medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (a command on the sub side) (for example, if a control command has been set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, the set control command is transmitted). Here, the commands transmitted to the sub control board S include a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the first stop), a command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the third stop), a command related to the winning/replay winning information (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the display pattern is stopped ... timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the timing of the stop display pattern (transmitted immediately after the start lever There are commands such as those sent immediately after the bar operation (only during the favorable zone), those related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after the start lever operation), those related to the RT state (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts), those related to the state of the AT (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts), those related to the high security obstacle counter value command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), those related to the number of games remaining in the AT (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts, or immediately after the start lever operation), those related to the game zone (sent between the time when all reels stop and the time when the next game starts), etc. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the reel type gaming machine P to an external hall computer, etc.). Note that, as information related to errors output by the external signal, door opening error, input abnormality error, payout abnormality error, input reception sensor retention error, etc. are output, although not shown. The door open error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the insertion reception sensor retention error is configured to be an error when the insertion reception sensor detects retention of a game medal. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs output data of an LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, among a plurality of 7-segment LED units, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit is turned on, and a predetermined segment of the 7-segment is turned on) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the lighting mode of the LED (for example, changes the lighting color of the LED). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes software random number management processing (update processing of random number values managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set if an abnormality occurs in the random number generating circuit). Next, in step 1634, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether an abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is not set). Specifically, the abnormality flag bit is set when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value. If the answer is Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the update status of the built-in random number is normal (whether an abnormality flag bit indicating the update status abnormality is not set).

If the answer is Yes in step 1636, then in step 1637 (13), the CPU MC of the main control board M calls the count upper limit check process of the second ROM/RAM area as processing in the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>>
Although not shown, when processing in the second ROM/RAM area is called, the CPU MC of the main control board M first saves the stack pointer and switches the stack area, and sets up the second stack area for use. Next, the CPU MC of the main control board M saves the register values used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area to the second stack area. Next, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes processing to create and output a signal for external output from the first RAM area and register values used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area.

Then, as shown in the figure, in step 1637-1 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M performs a count upper limit check process to check whether the counter value of the counter related to the total number of games played up to now (sometimes referred to as the total game number counter) and the counter value of the counter related to the total number of game medals paid out up to now (sometimes referred to as the total payout counter) have reached a predetermined upper limit value. In detail, the count upper limit check process is performed, for example, based on the data of the count upper limit flag calculated based on the calculation process for a predetermined number of repetitions at the address of the total payout counter and the address of the total game number counter set in a predetermined register (HL register) in the second ROM/RAM area. The data of the number of repetitions and the count upper limit flag can be stored, for example, in the B register or C register as an unused area.

Next, in step 1637-2 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M counts the total number of games played up to the present. In detail, the CPU MC counts the number of games played by adding the additional value (set to 1 in this case) stored in the A register, which serves as an unused area, to the address of the total number of games played counter set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area, and updates the result of the addition as data at the address set in the specified register.

Next, in step 1637-3 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M counts the number of times the game has been played in the advantageous zone up to now. The number of times the game has been played in the advantageous zone is the cumulative number of times the game has been played in the advantageous zone. In detail, the counting process of the number of times the game has been played in the advantageous zone is as follows: first, if the bit relating to the flag indicating that the zone is advantageous is "1" among the data stored in the address of the play zone flag set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area, the address of the advantageous zone play counter is set in a DE register, for example. Then, the process of adding data is executed in the same manner as in step 1637-2 (13th), and the addition result is updated as the data at the address set in the specified register.

Next, in step 1637-4 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M counts the cumulative number of payouts up to now and the number of payouts over 6000 games. The number of payouts is the total number of payouts regardless of the timing of the payout of the game medals. In detail, the CPU MC of the main control board M counts the cumulative number of payouts up to now and the number of payouts over 6000 games. In step 1637-1 (13th), if the bit related to the flag of the data stored in the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register is not "0", the address of the total payout counter (the counter for the cumulative number of payouts and the counter for the number of payouts over 6000 games) is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Then, the data stored in the payout number buffer is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Then, the CPU MC executes the process of adding data (adding the number of payouts in this case) in the same manner as in step 1637-2 (13th), and updates the data at the address set in the specified register with the result of the addition.

Next, in step 1637-5 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M counts the cumulative number of payouts of the reel up to now and the number of payouts of the reel during 6000 games. The details of the counting process of the number of payouts of the reel are as follows: first, data of the reel operation status flag is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. A specified logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is not "0", it is determined that the reel is in operation. Then, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored in the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", the address of the reel payout counter (counter for the cumulative number of payouts of the reel and counter for the number of payouts of the reel during 6000 games) is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Then, the data stored in the reel payout number buffer is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Then, similar to step 1637-2 (13th), a process of adding data (here, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed, and the result of the addition is updated as the data at the address set in a specified register. Note that the "gimmicks" in this process refer to the first type special gimmick, the second type special gimmick, and the normal gimmick.

Next, in step 1637-6 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M counts the cumulative number of consecutive payouts up to now and the number of consecutive payouts for 6000 games. The details of the counting process for the number of consecutive payouts are as follows: first, the data of the RB operation status flag is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. A specified logical operation is then performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is not "0", it is determined that the RB is in operation. Then, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored in the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", the address of the consecutive payout counter (counter for the cumulative number of consecutive payouts for consecutive payouts and counter for the number of consecutive payouts for 6000 games) is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Then, the data stored in the consecutive payout number buffer is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Then, similar to step 1637-2 (13th), a process of adding data (here, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed, and the result of the addition is updated as the data at the address set in a specified register. Note that the "continuous reel" in this process is the first type special reel (sometimes called RB).

Next, in step 1637-7 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M performs a ratio calculation process. Note that the ratio here refers to the following: (1-1) Accumulative ratio of advantageous zones: Number of times played in advantageous zones ÷ Total number of times played × 100 (%) (1-2) Accumulative ratio of devices with instructions: {Number of payouts in games in which push order navigation (sometimes called instructions) on the main control board M is executed + Number of payouts by devices} ÷ Total number of payouts × 100 (%) (2) Accumulative ratio of consecutive devices: Accumulative number of payouts during operation of the first type special device ÷ Total number of payouts × 100 (%) (3) Accumulative ratio of devices: (Cumulative number of payouts during operation of the first type special device + Cumulative number of payouts during operation of the second type special device + Cumulative number of payouts during operation of the normal device) ÷ Total number of payouts × 100 (%) (4) Accumulative ratio of devices over 6,000 games: Number of payouts during 6000 games during operation of the first type special feature ÷ total number of payouts during 6000 games × 100 (%) (5) Feature ratio during 6000 games: (number of payouts during 6000 games during operation of the first type special feature + number of payouts during 6000 games during operation of the second type special feature + number of payouts during 6000 games during operation of the normal feature) ÷ total number of payouts during 6000 games × 100 (%) The above (1-1) to (5) are the targets of ratio calculation in the slot machine P. Note that, in the advantageous zone ratio of (1-1) and the instructed feature ratio of (1-2), the ratio calculation process is performed for each game, and in (2) to (5), the ratio calculation process is performed for every 400 games, but for example, in (2) to (5), the ratio calculation process may also be performed for each game. As mentioned above, either (1-1) or (1-2) above can be calculated and displayed according to the specifications of the reel-type gaming machine P.

Figure 62 shows the flow of the subroutine for the ratio calculation process by the CPU MC of the main control board M in step 1637-7 (13th). First, in step 1637-7-1 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the number of ratio calculations in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Next, in step 1637-7-2 (13th), the data set in the specified register in step 1637-7-1 (13th) (the data here is data relating to the calculation number of the favorable zone ratio) is acquired. Next, a specified comparison operation is performed on the data acquired in step 1637-7-3 (13th) to determine whether or not it is a calculation number related to the calculation of the favorable zone ratio. If it is determined in step 1637-7-3 (13th) that the calculation number is not related to the advantageous zone ratio (determined as No), then in step 1637-7-4 (13th), the data (e.g., 2 bytes) stored in the 400 game counter is set in a specified register, and it is determined whether the value of the data at this time is "0" or not. If the value of the data is "0", in other words, if the number of games at this time is a multiple of 400 games (determined as Yes), then in step 1637-7-5 (13th), the address data of the ratio calculation address table stored in advance in the second ROM is set in a specified register. Then, in step 1637-7-6 (13th), a specified calculation process is performed to calculate the ratio for the set address data.

Then, in step 1637-7-7 (13th), the data obtained by the calculation process is set in the same register in which the data obtained in step 1637-7-2 (13th) was set. Then, in step 1637-7-8 (13th), it is determined whether the ratio is 100% or not based on the data obtained by the calculation process, and if the ratio is 100%, in step 1637-7-9 (13th), data for displaying the ratio as 99% is set in a specified register (for example, it may be the same register in which the data obtained in step 1637-7-2 (13th) was set) as described above (because the ratio segment SH20 is two digits). Then, in step 1637-7-10 (13th), the obtained ratio data is saved in the HL register and the process moves to the next step.

If the answer is Yes at step 1637-7-3 (13th), the process moves to step 1637-7-5 (13th), if the answer is No at step 1637-7-4 (13th), the process moves to step 1637-7-9 (13th), and if the answer is No at step 1637-7-8 (13th), the process moves to step 1637-7-10 (13th).

Next, in step 1637-8 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a ratio display process. Figure 63 is a flowchart of the subroutine of the ratio display process by the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1637-8 (13th). First, in step 1637-8-1 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the ratio display number in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. At this time, it is assumed that the data of the LED display counter is stored in, for example, the D register. Next, in step 1637-8-2 (13th), it is determined based on the data stored in the D register whether a display request for 1000 digits in the performance display device SH has been received. If it is determined that a display request for 1000 digits in the performance display device SH has not been received, then in step 1637-8-3 (13th), it is determined based on the data stored in the D register whether a display request for 100 digits in the performance display device SH has been received. If it is determined that a request to display 100 digits on the performance display device SH has not been received, then in step 1637-8-4 (13th), the data stored in the D register is obtained and a specified calculation process is performed. Next, in step 1637-8-5 (13th), it is determined based on the data stored in the D register whether a request to display 1 digit on the performance display device SH has been received. If it is determined that a request to display 1 digit on the performance display device SH has not been received, in step 1637-8-6 (13th), a logical operation is performed on the data stored in the register in which the ratio display number is set (for example, an operation such as swapping the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits).

Next, in step 1637-8-7 (13th), the address of the ratio display segment data table is set in a specific register (for example, the HL register). Next, in step 1637-8-8 (13th), a specified calculation process is performed on the data stored in the HL register, and the data obtained by the calculation is obtained. Next, in step 1637-8-9 (13th), data related to the blink request flag that has been stored in advance is stored in a specified register, and the process moves to the next step.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart in FIG. 61, next, in step 1637-9 (13th), the main control board M returns to the source of the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>>
Next, in step 1638, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes interrupt end processing and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1602). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an internal random number error display (for example, sets an error number in a register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the unrecoverable error processing described above.

In the above explanation, a configuration having a performance display device SH was described in detail, but the configuration of the performance display device SH that can be applied to this example is not particularly limited. Therefore, the configuration of the performance display device SH that can be applied to this example will be described in detail below as a modified example.

First, Figure 64 shows an example of the display of the performance display device SH in a modified example. In this figure, only the differences from the performance display device SH described above will be described in detail.

<Display mode>
The display mode of the performance display device SH shown in FIG. 64 is configured as follows.

Display items are (a) cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative indicated feature ratio, (b) consecutive feature ratio over 6000 games, (c) feature ratio over 6000 games, (d) cumulative consecutive feature ratio, (e) cumulative feature ratio, and (f) cumulative feature etc. state ratio.

In the performance display device SH, after the power is turned on to the reel type gaming machine P, the display is switched in the order of "(a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (e) → (f) → (a)..." for about 5 seconds each. If a power failure occurs in the middle of a lighting pattern, the following configuration may be used. Here, a case where a power failure occurs 2 seconds after the lighting pattern (c) is reached will be illustrated as an example. (1) Lighting starts from the beginning of display item (a) (2) Lighting starts from the beginning of display item (c) (3) Lighting resumes 2 seconds after display item (c) The above configuration may be used.
In addition, when configured as in (2) or (3) above, when the RAM is cleared (when the setting change mode is ended), the display item (a) may be configured to start lighting from the beginning.

The cumulative number of plays may be the number of plays since the power was turned on, the number of plays since the RAM was cleared, the number of plays since the machine was shipped from the factory, or the number of plays backed up in a specified RAM area.

(f) = Cumulative ratio of the state of the devices, etc. The "cumulative ratio of the state of the devices, etc." can be calculated as "(cumulative number of times played when the first type special device is activated + cumulative number of times played when the second type special device is activated + cumulative number of times played when the normal device is activated + cumulative number of times played when the first type special device is not activated when the first type device continuous operation device is activated + cumulative number of times played when the second type special device is not activated when the second type device continuous operation device is activated) ÷ cumulative total number of times played × 100 (%)." As an example, if the cumulative number of games played when the first type special feature is activated is 300 games, the cumulative number of games played when the second type special feature is activated is 100 games, the cumulative number of games played when the normal feature is activated is 100 games, the cumulative number of games played when the first type special feature is not activated when the first type feature continuous activation device is activated is 200 games, the cumulative number of games played when the second type special feature is not activated when the second type feature continuous activation device is activated is 50 games, and the cumulative total number of games played is 30,000 games, then the calculation is (300 + 100 + 100 + 200 + 50) ÷ (30,000) × 100 = 2.5 (%).

When calculating the cumulative ratio of the state of the above-mentioned features, if the reel type gaming machine P does not have a second-class special feature as part of its specifications, the cumulative number of games played when the second-class special feature is activated and the cumulative number of games played when the second-class special feature is not activated when the second-class feature continuous operation device is activated are not used, and the calculation is made as follows: "(Cumulative number of games played when the first-class special feature is activated + cumulative number of games played when the normal feature is activated + cumulative number of games played when the first-class special feature is not activated when the first-class feature continuous operation device is activated) ÷ cumulative total number of games played × 100 (%)". In this way, when calculating the display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH, the display items are calculated without using elements that are not included in the specifications of the reel type gaming machine P (the same applies to display items other than the cumulative ratio of the state of the features, etc.).

As mentioned above, games played inside BB or RB (such as RT2 in FIG. 28) are not counted (the number of games played is not counted) as the numerator for calculating the cumulative ratio of the state of the game devices, etc. (the cumulative number of games played when the first type special game device is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the second type special game device is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the normal game device is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the first type special game device is not activated when the first type game device continuous activation device is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the second type special game device is not activated when the second type game device continuous activation device is activated).

In addition, when the memory area storing the total number of plays, which is the denominator information used when calculating the display items, is the upper limit value (for example, if the memory area is 3 bytes, it is "FFFFFF (H)"), and the update process is "+1" and the digits overflow, the total number of plays may be configured not to be updated from the next game onwards. In such a configuration, the numerator information, the cumulative number of plays when the first type special device is activated, may be configured not to be updated, or "1" may be stored in the memory area storing information that the total number of plays has overflowed. In addition, the memory area storing the total number of plays may be configured to manage whether the display in the performance display device SH is turned on or blinked (the memory area used for lighting/blinking management may be used together with the memory area used for calculating the display items). In addition, the configuration regarding the overflow is not limited to only the memory area storing the total number of plays, and can be applied to any information used when calculating the display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH.

The "5H" ("5H.") displayed in the identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative ratio of the status of reels, etc. is being displayed.

In addition, in the performance display device SH shown in Figure 64, if the ratio display value is 50% or more of the cumulative reel state ratio, the ratio segment SH20 will be displayed flashing.

As mentioned above, the display item (a) may be configured to display either the cumulative favorable zone ratio or the cumulative command-included feature ratio, and when the cumulative favorable zone ratio is to be displayed, "7P" ("7P.") is displayed in the identification segment SH10, and when the cumulative command-included feature ratio is to be displayed, "7U" ("7U.") is displayed in the identification segment SH10.

In addition, the processing related to the performance display monitor SH shown in FIG. 64 may be configured to be executed as processing in the second ROM/RAM area. When configured in this way, the ratio calculation processing of step 1637-7 (13th) will be executed as processing in the second ROM/RAM area. Also, as mentioned above, when calculating the "cumulative reel etc. state ratio", it is calculated as "(cumulative number of times played when the first type special reel is activated + cumulative number of times played when the second type special reel is activated + cumulative number of times played when the normal reel is activated + cumulative number of times played when the first type special reel is not activated when the first type reel continuous activation device is activated + cumulative number of times played when the second type special reel is not activated when the second type reel continuous activation device is activated) ÷ cumulative total number of times played × 100 (%)". The numerator, "the cumulative number of times played when the first type special feature is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the second type special feature is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the normal feature is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the first type special feature is not activated when the first type feature continuous activation device is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the second type special feature is not activated when the second type feature continuous activation device is activated," and the "cumulative total number of times played" used as the denominator are stored in the second RAM area.

Here, during the period from when the power is turned on and the checksum is referenced and the power off recovery data is determined to be normal (e.g., after the processing of steps 1016 and 1028 in FIG. 13 is executed) until the power off processing is executed and the checksum is calculated (e.g., before the processing of step 1906 in FIG. 36 is executed) (in other words, during the period when play can be performed, during the period when play is being performed, during the setting change mode period, or during the setting confirmation mode period), noise occurs, causing the numerator data used in calculating the "accumulated ratio of device status, etc.", in other words, the "accumulated number of times played when the first type special device is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the second type special device is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the normal device is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the first type special device is not activated when the first type continuous device is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the second type continuous device is activated" stored in the second RAM area to be in a normal state. Even if an abnormality occurs in one or more pieces of information of "the number of times played when the second type special feature is not in operation" and the value is changed, so that the numerator "the cumulative number of times played when the first type special feature is in operation + the cumulative number of times played when the second type special feature is in operation + the cumulative number of times played when the normal feature is in operation + the cumulative number of times played when the first type special feature is not in operation when the first type feature continuous operation device is in operation + the cumulative number of times played when the second type special feature is not in operation when the second type feature continuous operation device is in operation" becomes a larger value than the denominator "the cumulative total number of times played," the second ROM/RAM area is processed to perform a calculation on the "cumulative feature, etc. state ratio," and a display process {for example, the ratio display process of step 1637-8 (thirteenth)} on the performance display monitor SH is executed based on the result of the calculation process (the same process as when no noise is generated is executed). The "accumulated ratio of the state of the reels, etc." is merely an example, and the accumulated ratio of the advantageous zone, the accumulated ratio of the reels with instructions, the ratio of consecutive reels for 6000 games, the ratio of reels for 6000 games, the accumulated ratio of consecutive reels, and the accumulated ratio of reels may be configured to have the same effect as the "accumulated ratio of the state of the reels, etc." described above when noise occurs and the information used for the calculation stored in the second RAM area changes. In other words, during the period from when the power is turned on and the power-off recovery data is judged to be normal by referring to the checksum (for example, after the processing of steps 1016 and 1028 in FIG. 13 is executed) until the checksum is calculated by executing the power-off processing (for example, before the processing of step 1906 in FIG. 36 is executed) (in other words, during the period when the game can be played, the period when the game is being played, the period in the setting change mode, and the period in the setting confirmation mode), the judgment as to whether the numerator value is greater than the denominator value (error check processing) is not executed. With this configuration, even if the numerator value becomes larger than the denominator value due to noise or other factors while playing near closing time, the game can continue without causing any disadvantage to the player due to the error.

In addition, during the period from when the power-off process is executed to calculate the checksum (for example, after the process of step 1906 in FIG. 36 is executed) until the power is turned on and the checksum is referenced to determine whether the power-off recovery data is normal (for example, before the processes of steps 1016 and 1028 in FIG. 13 are executed) (in other words, during the period when the power is off), if an abnormality occurs in one or more pieces of information in the numerator data or denominator data used to calculate the "cumulative reels, etc. state ratio" and the value is changed due to the occurrence of noise, (1) if the result of the determination in step 1016 is No, an unrecoverable error occurs, and if the result of the determination in step 1028 is No, the RAM is initialized including the information used for the calculation stored in the second RAM area, or (2) if the result of the determination in step 1016 is No, an unrecoverable error occurs, and if the result of the determination in step 1028 is No, the RAM is initialized without including the information used for the calculation stored in the second RAM area.

The configuration related to the action when the above noise occurs has been described in detail as an example for calculating the "cumulative role status ratio", but the configuration related to the action when noise occurs that can be applied to this example is not limited to only the case of calculating the "cumulative role status ratio", but can also be applied to the case of calculating the "cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio", "successive role ratio for 6000 games", "role ratio for 6000 games", "cumulative consecutive role ratio", and "cumulative role ratio".

Note that, although FIG. 64 details the configuration related to the display in the performance display device SH, the configuration shown in FIG. 64 can also be applied to a reel-type gaming machine P that does not have a performance display device SH. More specifically, a reel-type gaming machine P that does not have a performance display device SH may be configured to perform calculations of the display items and transmit the calculation results from the reel-type gaming machine P to an external device, as shown in FIG. 64, or may be configured to measure (count) information used to calculate the display items and transmit the measurement results (count results) from the reel-type gaming machine P to an external device (calculation is performed outside the gaming machine).

The above describes the reel type gaming machine P that uses gaming medals, but in this embodiment, the reel type gaming machine P is a medal-less reel type gaming machine (sometimes called an enclosed reel type gaming machine) that is configured so that it is possible to play using digitized pseudo gaming media without the need to insert and pay out actual gaming medals as described above. This medal-less reel type gaming machine generally differs from the reel type gaming machine P in that it does not have any medal insertion port D170, medal tray D230, medal selector DS, hopper H40, medal payout device H, medal auxiliary tank HS, etc., and is capable of communicating with a rental machine, which will be described later. In this case, since there is no need to insert and pay out actual gaming medals, it is possible to improve the effectiveness of preventing unauthorized access to the gaming machine (for example, by not having an opening for inserting or paying out gaming medals, and by integrating the front door and the rear box, the gap into which foreign objects can be inserted is sealed), and to reduce the risk of using unauthorized gaming medals, thereby improving security against fraudulent acts (so-called cheating). Note that instead of having the credit and credit number display device D200, the payout control board H (sometimes referred to as a gaming value control board, gaming value control means, medal number control board, or medal number control means) may perform the total score increase/decrease process, and the total score display device (sometimes referred to as a medal number display device) may perform the display process.

In addition, it can be configured to have "scores" as pseudo game media used to play games on a medal-less reel game machine, which correspond to the actual game medals used in a general reel game machine P. The "scores" are also called "score information," "points held," "points held information," "game value," "game value information," and "game medals." Physically real game medals can be handled directly by the player. In contrast, in a medal-less reel game machine, the player can play the game without directly handling actual game medals. The scores are not actual game medals, but pseudo game media that are digitized so that the CPU of the main control board or the like can perform calculations. In addition, the "total score" is all the scores that can be inserted into a medal-less reel game machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general reel game machine P that uses actual game medals. In addition, when the configuration of the reel type gaming machine P described above is applied to this embodiment, there is no problem in treating what is referred to as "game medals" in this specification as "scores," "score information," "points owned," "points owned information," "game value," "game value information," etc., and there is no problem in referring to them as "scores," "score information," "points owned," "points owned information," "game value," and "game value information" as appropriate. Furthermore, there is no problem in not having "credits," and instead replacing the credit number display device with the total score display device.

<<<<Function block diagram of medal-less reel-type gaming machine>>>
First, Fig. 65 is a functional block diagram applicable to the medal-less reel type gaming machine of this embodiment. In the figure, a hardware interface illustrating a physical connection by a cable and a software interface illustrating a command transmission mode are illustrated. In the following, the medal-less reel type gaming machine may be referred to as a "medal-less gaming machine" or simply as a "gaming machine".

<<Inside the gaming machine>>
The gaming machine includes a main control board that controls the progress of the game, a payout control board that controls the points, and a connection terminal board that can transmit and receive information to and from the outside of the gaming machine. Although not shown, the gaming machine may also include an external terminal board for outputting external signals to the outside of the gaming machine.

<Main control board>
The main control board of this embodiment has the same configuration as the main control board M described above, and this main control board is stored in a main control board case (not shown). After storing the main control board, this main control board case is sealed by a sealing member such as welding, crimping, or a one-way pin (a pin that cannot be removed after being inserted in one direction into a pin hole in the board case) so that it is difficult to open (so that it cannot be opened unless it is destroyed, etc.). In other words, the main control board case can be said to be an enclosure case that encloses the main control board. A backup power supply is provided outside the enclosure case, and this backup power supply is connected to the main control board (in other words, the backup power supply for the main control board is provided only outside the main control board case that encloses the main control board). In the event of a power outage, power is supplied from the backup power supply to the main control board, so that the information in the RAM of the main control board that electrically holds information is maintained. In this way, by providing the backup power supply for the main control board only outside the enclosed case, even if an unauthorized program is written to the RAM of the main control board, the data in the RAM of the main control board can be easily erased by disconnecting the main control board from the backup power supply (by unplugging the harness connecting the main control board to the backup power supply) (information cannot be maintained due to the lack of backup power supply). As a result, even if an unauthorized act such as writing an unauthorized program to the RAM of the main control board occurs, the unauthorized act can be easily rendered meaningless. The backup power supply for the sub-control board may also be provided only outside the sub-control board case that houses (encloses) the sub-control board, and even in this case, the same effect can be achieved.

When the 1 bet button is operated in an enabled state, a 1 coin insertion switch signal is sent to the main control board, which is a signal to bet 1 point. If a 1 coin insertion switch signal is sent to the main control board when 1 point has already been bet, the number of bets becomes 2 points. When the 3 bet button (sometimes called the max bet button) is operated in an enabled state, a 3 coin insertion switch signal is sent to the main control board, which is a signal to bet 3 points. The specified number of points for the gaming machine in the figure is 3 points. When the settlement button is operated in an enabled state, a settlement button signal is sent to the main control board to settle the bet points to the player. The bet points are sent to the payout control board, which will be described later, and the payout control board adds the points as the settlement of the points (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as settlement to the payout control board or settlement to the payout control board), and the settled points are added to the total score display device and displayed.

The main control board also transmits data on the number of coins inserted, which is information related to the display of the points bet, to the number of coins inserted display device, thereby displaying the points bet on the number of coins inserted display device. When a winning combination is stopped and displayed (a win is won), the main control board transmits data on the number of winnings, which is information related to the display of the number of winnings, to the number of winnings display device, thereby displaying the points to be awarded on the number of winnings display device. As an example of the display mode, if the points to be awarded are 8 points, the points to be awarded may be displayed directly, such as "0 → 8", or the points to be awarded in stages, such as "0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 8" (the "0" in the above example may be hidden).

Although not shown, the main control board may be configured to transmit to the external terminal board a medal insertion signal, which is a signal indicating that points have been bet (inserted), an operating status signal indicating the status of the game (e.g., whether or not a bonus is in progress), a door opening signal indicating the opening of the front door, and a security signal indicating the occurrence of an error.

The main control board is configured to be able to receive control commands from the payout control board via serial communication, and the main control board is configured to be able to transmit control commands to the payout control board via parallel communication. Here, the control commands are commands related to the progress of the game, such as commands related to the payout of points, commands related to the settlement of points, input request commands for requesting the input of points, commands regarding the number of electromagnetic medals related to the points stored in the gaming machine, and payout receipt result response commands. The payout control board is also configured to be able to transmit a playable signal, which is a command indicating that the game can currently proceed, to the main control board. Note that transmission and reception between the main control board and the payout control board may be performed via serial communication.

As described above, the main control board has a first ROM area which is an area that mainly controls the progress of the game, and a second ROM area which is an area that mainly controls processes that are different from the normal progress of the game, such as error-related processes, processes for realizing operations related to gaming machine testing, and calculation processes for various information to be displayed on the role ratio monitor (see FIG. 60). The main control board also executes main loop processing and timer interrupt processing that is started every interrupt period T1 (e.g., 2.235 ms). The first control area of the first ROM of this main control board stores a first program for initializing serial communication with the payout control board, and the second control area of the second ROM stores a second program for initializing serial communication with the test IF board (hereinafter, these first and second programs may be collectively referred to as "communication programs").

The main control board and the dispensing control board each have four communication ports for serial communication, and these communication ports are connected by a bus or the like to form communication paths (channels) between the main control board and the dispensing control board. That is, on the main control board, the serial communication port has four channels, channels 0 to 3. On these channels, the main control board's communication program allows the initial setting of serial communication to be either "send only," "receive only," or "send and receive," and serial communication can be executed by the communication program.

In this embodiment, on channel 0, it is possible to set whether to use either "send" or "receive" or both, on channel 1, it is possible to set whether to use only "send", on channel 2, it is possible to set whether to use only "send", and on channel 3, it is possible to set whether to use only "send".

In this embodiment, channel 0 is initially set by the first program to be capable of "reception only," and channel 2 is initially set by the second program to be capable of "transmission only," while channels 1 and 3 are unused channels. It is possible to change as appropriate which channels 0 to 3 are assigned to "transmission only," "reception only," and "transmission and reception" (which initial settings are used), and it is also possible to set as appropriate which channels are unused. It is also possible to provide unused channels, or not provide them. It is also possible to set "transmission and reception" by the first program on channel 0, which is initially set to "reception only" (in this case, it is desirable to initially set channel 2 to "transmission only"). Furthermore, the use of channels 0 to 3 can be set as appropriate, and for example, channel 2 can be used to transmit test signals.

When communication on channel 0 is executed, which is initially set in this way, it is executed by a program for executing communication stored in the first control area, and when communication on channel 2 is executed, it is executed by a program for executing communication stored in the second control area. Note that this program for executing communication may be common to channel 0 and channel 2, or may be a program corresponding to each. Furthermore, there are no particular limitations on which control area this type of program for executing communication is stored in, for example, the program for executing communication on channel 2 is stored in the first control area.

In this way, even though the initial setting for "transmission and reception" is possible for channel 0, it is set to only allow "reception" (not "transmission"), and channel 2 is set to only allow "transmission" as per the initial setting, so that the program for executing communication that executes communication does not need to switch between transmission and reception, and communication control can be simplified. Also, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud, it is preferable to set the initial settings for channels 0 to 4 to "transmission only" or "reception only" rather than "transmission and reception", while it is possible to assume that "transmission only" will be switched to "reception only" or to "transmission and reception" due to future specification changes, etc., but in this embodiment, one channel is set to "transmission only" and the other to "transmission and reception", and if a situation arises in which "transmission" is required on channel 0, for example, it is possible to simply have the first program execute "transmission" on channel 0. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraud while reducing the effort required for changing the initial settings. Furthermore, the initial setting of channel 2 is performed by a second program stored in a second control area of the second ROM area, which is an area that mainly controls processes that differ from the normal progress of the game, such as those related to errors, and the initial setting of channel 0 is performed by a first program stored in a first control area of the first ROM area, which is an area that mainly controls the progress of the game. This makes it possible to clearly separate the area for processes related to the progress of the game (processes related to communication) from the area that controls processes that differ from the normal progress of the game, and makes it easy to verify the legitimacy of the second program that performs the initial setting of channel 2, such as whether it is operating normally.

In addition, the information that was previously transmitted from the payout control board to the external terminal board via the connection terminal board may be transmitted directly to the outside of the gaming machine without using the external terminal board. In this case, the number of parts can be reduced, the configuration can be simplified, and signal degradation can be prevented to enable proper communication. The information transmitted to the external terminal board includes the medal insertion signal, medal payout signal, operating status, door open signal, and security signal.

<Dispensing control board>
The payout control board is connected to the main control board so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The payout control board is also electrically connected to a total score display device, a counting button, and a total score clear switch (also called a RAM clear switch). When the counting button is operated in an enabled state, a counting button signal, which is a signal indicating that a counting operation has been performed, is transmitted to the payout control board. The payout control board is also configured to be able to transmit game medal number data, which is information related to the display of the current total score possessed by the player, to the total score display device, and to display the total score on the total score display device. When the counting button is operated to perform score counting, if there is a bet score, the bet score is not counted, and only the total score is counted. When the counting button is operated to perform score counting, only a part of the scores stored in the payout control board may be counted, or all of the scores may be counted. Furthermore, when an error occurs that makes it impossible to play on the medalless gaming machine, or when the machine is not connected to a lending machine, the operation of the counting button can be disabled to prevent the counting process from being performed. In this way, the points can be added or subtracted at the appropriate timing, and doubts about the correct calculation results can be avoided. Note that even if an error occurs that makes it impossible to execute a game, the counting button may be enabled so that the counting process can be executed.

The payout control board is equipped with a CPU similar to that of the main control means, and executes a main loop process and a timer interrupt process that is started every period T2 (for example, 1 ms, with the relationship of interrupt period T1 > interrupt period T2) that is shorter than the interrupt period T1 (for example, 2.235 ms as described above) of the main control board described above. The timer interrupt process executes input port reading process, command reception process, loan notification reception process, gaming machine information management process, counting control process, loan control process, LED display process, ratio display preparation process, etc. The input port reading process executes a process of creating level data and rising data to detect the operation input of the counting button (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "counting switch") or the RAM clear switch. It also executes a process of checking the power failure detection signal and saving the power failure detection flag. The command reception process executes a process of subtracting the number of balls inserted from the total score when an insertion request command is received from the main control board, and adds the number of balls inserted from the total score when an adjustment request command is received from the main control board. The loan notification reception process executes a process for receiving a loan notification from the loan machine. The gaming machine information management process updates various timer values and sets various flags (for example, gaming machine performance information flags and gaming machine installation information flags) depending on the results of updating the various timer values. The counting control process sends a counting notification to the rental machine and updates the counting serial number when the counting switch is operated. The lending control process checks the lending serial number when a lending notification is received from the rental machine and sends the lending receipt result to the rental machine. The LED display process controls the lighting of the total score display device. The ratio display preparation process executes calculations to display the ratio on the performance display device. The main loop process executes power cut processing (power cut processing) when a power cut is detected.

Next, the power cut period in the dispensing control board will be explained in comparison with the power cut period in the main control board. In the main control board, the period from the occurrence of the power cut (for example, from when the power is turned off and the voltage starts to drop, etc.) until the power cut is detected (or may be until the power cut process is executed) is K1, and in the dispensing control board, the period from the occurrence of the power cut (for example, from when the power is turned off and the voltage starts to drop, etc.) until the power cut is detected (or may be until the power cut process is executed) is K2, so that the period K1 < period K2. In other words, in the main control board, the power cut process is executed after the period K1, which is shorter than the period K2 of the dispensing control board, has elapsed since the occurrence of the power cut, while in the dispensing control board, the power cut process is executed after the period K2, which is longer than the period K1 of the main control board, has elapsed since the occurrence of the power cut.

For example, in the main control board, the voltage continues to drop after a power outage occurs, and if the voltage that falls below the power outage detection level is detected twice in succession by timer interrupt processing, it is determined that a power outage has occurred (power outage is detected), and in the dispensing control board, the voltage continues to drop after a power outage occurs, and if the voltage that falls below the power outage detection level is detected seven consecutive times in timer interrupt processing, it is determined that a power outage has occurred, so that the period K1 < K2 can be set. In this example, if the interrupt period T1 of the main control board is 2.235 ms as described above, the time required for two timer interrupt processes in the main control board is 4.470 ms. On the other hand, if the interrupt period T2 of the dispensing control board is 1 ms as described above, the time required for seven timer interrupt processes in the dispensing control board is 7 ms, which is longer than the period K1. Since the period K1 of the main control board is 4.470, if you want to make period K1 < period K2, five timer interrupt processes (5 ms) are sufficient before determining that the power has been cut off in the dispensing control board. However, in this example, taking into account situations where the cycle may be shifted due to noise, the number is set to seven, with two more to allow for a 2 ms margin.

In other words, if the number of timer interrupt processes until it is determined that the main control board has been powered off is N, and the number of timer interrupt processes until it is determined that the dispensing control board has been powered off is M, then it is sufficient to have the following relationship: "Main control board interrupt period T1 x N (2 times as mentioned above) = period K1" < "Dispensing control board interrupt period T2 x M (7 times as mentioned above) = period K2". In addition, the number of timer interrupts M of the dispensing control board may be a value at a stage where it is longer than period K1 (equivalent to the above-mentioned 5 times (5 ms)), or, if there is a margin as mentioned above, it may be a value obtained by adding α times from the stage where it is longer than period K1 (the above-mentioned 7 ms).

In this way, by making the period K2 from when a power outage occurs by the dispensing control board to when the power outage is detected longer than the period K1 from when a power outage occurs by the main control board to when the power outage is detected, it is possible to configure the dispensing control board so that at the time when the main control board performs power outage processing due to detection of a power outage, the dispensing control board has not performed power outage processing (the dispensing control board is able to receive commands in a situation where the main control board has sent all commands to the dispensing control board in the event of a power outage), and it is possible to prevent the dispensing control board from missing various commands sent from the main control board in the event of a power outage.

In this embodiment, the number of timer interrupts N until it is determined that the power has been cut off in the main control board and the number of timer interrupts M until it is determined that the power has been cut off in the dispensing control board are adjusted so that period K1 < period K2, but this is not limited to this, and other methods such as adjusting the timer interrupt periods T1 and T2 can also be used. In short, even if the power has been completely cut off in the main control board and the main control board has stopped functioning, it is sufficient that the power of the dispensing control board is not completely cut off and the dispensing control board is still functioning, and the dispensing control board can receive commands from the main control board and perform processing related to these commands.

Next, the processing start time (main program start time) after power is applied to the dispensing control board will be explained, in comparison with the processing start time after power is applied to the main control board. The main program executed on the main control board starts from a processing start time (time) a predetermined time after the power supply voltage becomes constant. Execution of this main program executes the main control board START processing (power-on processing) shown in FIG. 13 above. Meanwhile, the main program executed on the dispensing control board also starts from a processing start time a specific time after the power supply voltage becomes constant, just like the main control board, although this is not shown, and the power-on processing of the dispensing control board is executed.

In this embodiment, the main control board outputs predetermined information such as the chip ID number (see Figure 67) described below to the payout control board at a predetermined timing after power is turned on (including after power is restored), and the payout control board that receives this chip ID number outputs gaming machine installation information including this chip ID number to the lending machine (external) (see Figure 71, etc. This will also be described later).

Here, if the processing start time of the dispensing control board is th, this processing start time th is set to be shorter than the processing start time ta of the main control board (processing start time th of the dispensing control board < processing start time ta of the main control board). In other words, the main program of the main control board is operated after the main program of the dispensing control board is operated, and the execution of the main program is delayed from the main program of the dispensing control board.

By configuring it in this way, when the main control board is up and running (the main program of the main control board has started to run), the dispensing control board is already up and running (the main program of the dispensing control board is running), so the dispensing control board can reliably receive information from the main control board, preventing information from the main control board from being missed. As a result, the dispensing control board can reliably obtain the above-mentioned specified information from the main control board, stabilizing communication. On the other hand, if the dispensing control board has not yet started up when the main control board has started up, the dispensing control board cannot receive information from the main control board, and there is a risk that this information cannot be obtained reliably.

In this embodiment, the processing start time ta of the main control board is set to be greater than the processing start time th of the dispensing control board, but what is important is that the main control board does not transmit information to the dispensing control board under circumstances where the dispensing control board cannot receive information from the main control board. Therefore, for example, even if the main control board starts up before the dispensing control board, the main control board may send information after the dispensing control board starts up (no information may be sent if the dispensing control board is not up and running).

In addition, after the main control board transmits the chip ID number to the payout control board, when the payout control board receives the chip ID number, it may transmit a command to the main control board indicating that the chip ID number has been received. With this configuration, the main control board can determine that the transmitted chip ID number has reached the payout control board, so it can grasp the situation more reliably, and if the main control board does not receive a command indicating that the chip ID number has been received within a specified period (within a specified time after the main control board transmits the chip ID number to the payout control board), it may consider transmitting the chip ID number again as a retry process, or stopping the progress of the game as an error process. Note that instead of transmitting a command indicating that the chip ID number has been received to the main control board, the payout control board may transmit the chip ID number directly to the main control board as well, thereby determining that the chip ID number has been received by the main control board.

Next, the time required for the dispensing control board to complete the initial settings due to power being supplied after the power-off process is executed will be compared with the time required for the main control board to complete the initial settings due to power being supplied after the power-off process is executed. Here, "power being supplied after the power-off process is executed" means that after the power-off is detected by two timer interrupt processes in the case of the main control board (seven timer interrupt processes in the case of the dispensing control board), power is supplied before the power is completely turned off (before the supply voltage becomes 0) and the drive voltage is restored. In this case, the power is not turned off (there is no need to turn the power on manually), and if the time spent looping through the state (waiting for reset state) of the final reset waiting process (see, for example, step 1914 in FIG. 36) of the power-off process exceeds a predetermined time, the program is automatically executed from the beginning (see, for example, step 1000 in FIG. 13).

As described above, in the main control board, after a power outage occurs, it is determined that there has been a power outage through two timer interrupt processes. However, if the power is restored after these two timer interrupt processes (for example, if it is determined that there has been a power outage through two timer interrupt processes, and it is then determined that the final reset wait process (also called an infinite loop process) of the power outage process has not ended even after a predetermined time has elapsed), the main control board START (power on) process shown in FIG. 13 is executed, and the timer interrupt initial settings of step S1002 in FIG. 13 are performed. On the other hand, in the dispensing control board, after a power outage occurs, it is determined that there has been a power outage through seven timer interrupt processes. However, similar to the main control board, if the power is restored after these seven timer interrupts, the timer interrupt initial settings are performed.

Here, when power is interrupted, the latest timings for the main control board and the dispensing control board to perform initial settings, etc. are the above-mentioned periods K1 and K2, respectively, with period K1 (e.g., 4.470 ms) < period K2 (e.g., 7 ms). In this case, if the main control board immediately performs initial settings, etc. after period K1, and the dispensing control board immediately performs initial settings, etc. after period K2, as described above, this dispensing control board will not be able to receive information, etc. from the main control board, and there is a risk that this information will not be obtained reliably.

For this reason, in this embodiment, the main control board has a predetermined fixed time (e.g., 2883.54 ms) set as the security mode when power is turned on, and the dispensing control board has no security mode when power is turned on, or has a specific fixed time that is shorter than the predetermined fixed time set. As a result, if power is supplied after a power outage before the power is completely turned off, the processing start time of the main control board is set to be later than the processing start time of the dispensing control board after power is supplied. That is, the main control board resets itself at a predetermined timing after determining that the power has been cut off, and then goes into security mode for the above-mentioned predetermined fixed time before executing the main control board START (power on) processing shown in FIG. 13, while the dispensing control board resets itself at a predetermined timing after determining that the power has been cut off, and then starts from the start of the program without going into security mode for the above-mentioned predetermined fixed time (or after going into security mode for a specific fixed time that is shorter than the fixed time). Therefore, the time to determine that a power has been cut off after a power cut occurs is shorter for the main control board than for the dispensing control board (although the main control board determines that a power has been cut off after a power cut occurs sooner than the dispensing board), but the time to start the program after power is supplied is shorter for the dispensing control board than for the main control board (the dispensing control board starts the program after power is supplied sooner than the main control board).

By configuring it in this way, when the main control board starts up after a power outage (the main program of the main control board starts to run after a power outage, or the initial settings by the main control board after a power outage are completed), the dispensing control board is already up and running (the main program of the dispensing control board is running after a power outage, or the initial settings by the dispensing control board after a power outage are completed). Therefore, even if there is a power outage, the dispensing control board can reliably receive information from the main control board, preventing information from being lost after a power outage. As a result, the dispensing control board can reliably obtain the above-mentioned specified information from the main control board after a power outage, stabilizing communication.

The main control board sets a watchdog timer when it detects a power outage, and the watchdog timer continues to be updated by being supplied with power after the power outage process is executed. When the watchdog timer reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output by an external interrupt, and the main control board is initialized when it receives the reset signal. During this initialization, it is possible to adjust the timing of the program start on the main control board by starting user mode (the mode in which the gaming machine's program starts) via security mode. Also, the payout control board is the same as the main control board until it is initialized by the watchdog timer, and by not starting security mode after initialization, it is possible to start up earlier than the main control board.

In this embodiment, the payout control board is provided with a first storage area for storing the points (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "total points") stored in the payout control board, a second control area for storing the total points to be erased later when the total points stored in the first storage area are erased (cleared), and a RAM clear switch (all not shown). By operating the RAM clear switch once (specifically, if the RAM clear switch is a push-button, pressing the button once, etc.), the total points stored in the first storage area of the payout control board are erased (cleared). At the time of this erasure, the total points stored in the first storage area are stored in the second storage area. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch is operated, the payout control board stores the total points stored in the first storage area in the second storage area, and then performs a process of erasing the total points in the first storage area.

In addition, only the total score is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch; other data is not cleared. For example, if 3 is stored as the number of bets and 1000 is stored as the total score, operating the RAM clear switch will clear only the total score of 1000, and not the number of bets of 3. Note that in this embodiment, the range that is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch is limited to the total score described above, but it goes without saying that the clear range can be set appropriately depending on the specifications, etc.

The total score stored in this second storage area is preserved until the power is turned off or the settings are changed. In other words, the total score stored in the second storage area is erased by either the power off process when the power is turned off, or the power off recovery process when the power is restored from the power off, or by clearing the RAM when the settings are changed as described above. Therefore, even after the total score has been erased from the first storage area by the RAM clear switch, the hall staff can open the staff menu and select a menu such as "Confirm total score" from that menu to confirm the total score. In this way, by providing a second storage area for later confirmation of the erased total score, the total score erased from the first storage area can be confirmed even after the total score stored in the first storage area has been erased by operating the RAM clear switch, thereby improving security.

In this embodiment, in order to check the total score at a later time, the total score stored in the first memory area is stored in the second memory area by operating the RAM clear switch. However, if there is no need to check the total score at a later time, it is also possible to simply erase the total score stored in the first memory area by operating the RAM clear switch. In this case, there is no need to provide a second memory area, which can reduce the program capacity.

In this embodiment, the total score is erased by operating the RAM clear switch once, but this is not limited to this. For example, the total score may be erased by continuing to operate the RAM clear switch for a certain period of time (e.g., 5 seconds, etc.) (for example, if the RAM clear switch is a push button, the push button may be pressed for a certain period of time (so-called long press)). The total score may also be erased by turning off or restoring the power while the RAM clear switch is being operated. By adopting an operation mode that is a little more time-consuming than operating the RAM clear switch once, such as long pressing of the RAM clear switch, turning off and restoring the power while operating the RAM clear switch, or turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch, it is not possible to easily erase the total score, and this makes it possible to prevent unintentional erasure of the total score due to erroneous operation of the RAM clear switch during maintenance.

In this embodiment, the total score display device described above is configured to display a score equivalent to the total number of game medals in a reel-type game machine P that uses game medals, including the game medals electrically stored in the storage device (the game medals displayed on the credit number display device D200) and the game medals paid out to the outside of the game machine, such as the medal tray D230, but this is not limited to this, and the total score display device and the storage device may be used together. When configured in this way, the total score display device will display a score equivalent to the number of game medals paid out to the outside of the game machine, such as the medal tray D230, in a game machine that uses game medals.

<<Rental Machine Operation Unit>>
The components provided in the lending machine operation section provided outside the medal-less reel type gaming machine will be described in detail below. When the replay switch is operated in an active state, a replay switch signal, which is a signal indicating that the replay switch has been operated, is transmitted to the lending machine. By transmitting the replay switch signal to the lending machine, the points related to the replay in which the player plays using the points accumulated in the previous game (for example, the points electrically accumulated in the membership card) are accumulated in the gaming machine (for example, stored in the memory area of the payout control board). In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, 50 points) of points is accumulated in the gaming machine by operating the replay switch once, if the points accumulated in the previous game by the player are less than the predetermined number (for example, less than 50 points), (1) the replay switch signal is not transmitted to the lending machine, (2) the points are not accumulated (added) to the gaming machine, or (3) the points less than the predetermined number are accumulated (added) to the gaming machine.

In addition, when the loan button is operated in an enabled state, a loan button signal, which is a signal used when storing the loaned points in the loan machine, is sent to the loan machine. When the loan button signal is sent to the gaming machine, the points are transferred from the card in which the points purchased by the player on that day are stored to the gaming machine. In addition, when a predetermined number (e.g., 50 points) of points are stored in the gaming machine by operating the loan button once, if the points stored in the card are less than the predetermined number (e.g., less than 50 points), the following may be configured: (1) the loan button signal is not sent to the loan machine, (2) the points are not stored (added) in the gaming machine, or (3) the points less than the predetermined number are stored (added) in the gaming machine. In addition, when the return switch is operated in an enabled state, the card in which the points purchased by the player on that day are stored is returned to the player (the remaining points that have not been loaned are stored). The game machine may also be configured so that a player can change the points that are stored in the game machine by operating the loan button once.

The lending machine also transmits remaining points data, which is information related to the display of the points stored in the card purchased on the day, to the remaining points display device, so that the points (sometimes referred to as remaining points) stored in the card purchased on the day are displayed on the remaining points display device (when the card purchased on the day is inserted in the lending machine). When the points can be lent out (the points can be transferred to the gaming machine), the lending machine transmits a lendable LED signal to the lendable LED, so that the lendable LED becomes available for lending (for example, lit), and the player can recognize that the card is available for lending. The available status may be lit and the unavailable status may be turned off, or the available status may be lit in green and the unavailable status may be lit in red. As an example of whether or not a card is available for lending, the card may be configured to be available for lending when points are stored in the member card inserted in the lending machine or the card purchased on the day (a predetermined number of points or more are stored).

If communication between the gaming machine and the rental machine is not possible, it is preferable to not allow the game to proceed, for the sake of score management. For example, the game can be prevented from proceeding by not accepting operation of the start lever or bet button.

<<Rental Machines>>
Also, the following are configured to be transmitted from the lending machine to the hall computer: ball-out performance information, which is various information related to balls from the gaming machine; a medal insertion signal, which is a signal indicating that points have been bet (inserted); a medal payout signal, which is a signal indicating that points are paid out (given to the player); an operation state, which is a signal indicating the status of the game (for example, whether or not a bonus is being played); a door opening signal, which is a signal indicating the opening of the front door; and a security signal, which is a signal indicating the occurrence of an error. Also, the lending machine is configured to transmit gaming machine information such as information on the maximum number of difference coins (sometimes called MY) on the day (one of the gaming machine performance information), gaming machine installation information to be described later, and hall control/fraud monitoring information (also called HC/fraud monitoring information) to the management computer, each company center, and gaming machine information center. Note that, when playing by purchasing points rather than lending them, the "lend machine" can be replaced with the "purchasing machine" (also called the dedicated unit in either case), and the "lending of points to the gaming machine" can be replaced with the "transfer of points to the gaming machine".

As shown in the figure, the main control board, payout control board, connection terminal board on the gaming machine side, connection terminal board on the lending machine side, SC board, hall computer, management computer, each company center, and gaming machine information center are connected by connection cables. That is, in this embodiment, the gaming machine system is composed of the medal-less reel type gaming machine, the lending machine connected to the medal-less reel type gaming machine so as to be able to communicate with it, the hall computer that receives the output of information from the lending machine, the management computer, each computer of each company center, and the computer of the gaming machine information center. The components of this gaming machine system may be, for example, a gaming machine and a lending machine, or may be a gaming machine, a lending machine, and a hall computer, and the combination can be set appropriately, but it is desirable that the components of this gaming system include at least a gaming machine and a lending machine. Here,
The communication mode between the connection terminal board on the gaming machine side and the connection terminal board on the lending machine side will be described in detail using Figure 66.

Figure 66 shows an example of the communication contents of a connection cable used for communication between the connection terminal board on the gaming machine side and the connection terminal board on the lending machine side. The connector of the connection cable is composed of nine pins, (1) pin 1 is used as an insulating GND (pin for isolating from GND) for signals transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). (2) pin 2 is used as a GND (sometimes called ground) for the transmission signal transmitted using pin 6 for signals transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). (3) pin 3 is used as a GND for the reception signal transmitted using pin 7 for signals transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). (4) pin 4 is used as a connection confirmation signal to confirm that the lending machine is connected to the gaming machine (payout control board) for signals transmitted from the payout control board side (gaming machine side) to the lending machine. (5) Pin 5 is used as an insulating GND (pin for isolating from GND) for a signal transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board (gaming machine side). (6) Pin 6 is used as a signal (transmitting signal) transmitted from the payout control board (gaming machine) to the SC board (lend machine) for a signal transmitted from the payout control board (gaming machine side) to the lending machine. (7) Pin 7 is used as a signal (receiving signal) received by the payout control board (gaming machine) from the SC board (lend machine) for a signal transmitted from the SC board (lend machine) to the payout control board (gaming machine). (8) Pin 8 is used as an insulating 5V (pin for isolating from other 5V) for a signal transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board (gaming machine side). (9) Pin 9 is used as an insulating 5V (pin for isolating from other 5V) for a signal transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board (gaming machine side). Note that pins 6 and 2 are twisted (the cables are twisted together), and pins 7 and 3 are twisted (the cables are twisted together).

In this example, the signal sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine is sent from pin 6, in other words, all the multiple types of signals that can be sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine are sent from pin 6, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to have a transmission line for each type of signal that can be sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine.

In this example, the signal sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine is sent from pin 7, in other words, all of the multiple types of signals that can be sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine are sent from pin 7, but this is not limited to this, and the system may be configured to have a transmission line for each type of signal that can be sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 67 illustrates the contents of the gaming machine information notification command (sometimes referred to as gaming machine information notification). The gaming machine information notification command is a command sent from the gaming machine to the lender machine as a transmission signal sent using pin 6 of the communication cable described above in FIG. 66.

The command length of the gaming machine information notification command is variable and may differ depending on the command contents, but is composed of multiple bytes. The transmission direction is a command sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and is composed of the command length, command type, serial number, gaming machine type information, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, and checksum, and is more specifically composed as follows. The command length of No. 1 is 1 byte of data that is 0xXX to 0xYY (X and Y are arbitrary numbers). The command type of No. 2 is 1 byte of data that is 0x01. The serial number of No. 3 is 1 byte of data that is 0x00 to 0xFF. The gaming machine type information of No. 4 is information indicating the type of gaming machine and is 1 byte of data. The gaming information type of No. 5 is 1 byte of data that is 0x00 gaming machine performance information, 0x01 gaming machine installation information, and 0x02HC fraud monitoring information (HC is hall computer). The sixth gaming machine information is either gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or HC/fraud monitoring information, and is 40 or 42 bytes of data, in other words, 2 bytes or more of data. The seventh checksum is 1 byte of data.
The serial number may be referred to as a serial number.

In addition, with regard to the command length for item 1 above, if gaming machine performance information or HC/fraud monitoring information, which is 40 bytes, is sent as gaming machine information, the total command length will be "0x2E", and if gaming machine installation information, which is 42 bytes, is sent as gaming machine information, the total command length will be "0x30".

The gaming machine type information in No. 4 above is composed of a code, gaming machine, group name, and management medium. A specific example is 0x01: slot machine, group A, gaming medal 0x02: slot machine, group B, gaming medal.

In addition, the gaming machine information in No. 6 above is configured to transmit one type of content corresponding to the gaming machine information type in No. 5 above. For example, if No. 5 above is gaming machine performance information, then No. 6 above will transmit information on the gaming status, etc. as the gaming machine performance information content. In addition, the gaming machine installation information content includes the manufacturer code of the main control board CPU (main control chip), the manufacturer code of the payout control board CPU (payout control chip), product code, chip ID number, etc., and the HC/fraud monitoring information content includes IN/OUT information, gaming status, etc.

The contents of the gaming machine performance information may be, for example, display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH ("cumulative device status ratio", "cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative device with instruction ratio", "consecutive device ratio for 6000 games", "device ratio for 6000 games", "cumulative consecutive device ratio", "cumulative device ratio") and information used to calculate the display items (sometimes referred to as elements, for example, the cumulative number of games played when the first type special device is activated, the total number of games played, etc.) that may be configured to be transmittable to the outside of the gaming machine as gaming machine performance information.

Next, we will summarize the gaming machine information in item 6 above, which is gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and HC/fraud monitoring information. First, among the gaming machine information in item 6 above, the contents of the gaming machine performance information include the following (1) to (12).

(1) Total number of bets (also called total number of points, the total number of points bet)
This total number is information on the cumulative number of points bet after the power is turned on (total number of gaming media (gaming value) inserted), and is accumulated (updated) regardless of whether or not the advantageous zone is in effect. In addition, in the case of a replay, in other words, the points automatically inserted in the replay are not included in the points bet (hereinafter, simply referred to as "replays not included"). Furthermore, since this total number is the cumulative number (accumulated number) of points bet after the power is turned on, it will become "0" when a power outage occurs and the power is turned on again. Note that this total number is not affected by power outages and power ons, and may be accumulated unless there is a RAM clear, etc.

(2) Total number of payouts (also called total number of points awarded)
This total payout number is information on the total number of points awarded after the power is turned on, and is accumulated regardless of whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone. Furthermore, this total payout number does not include replays. Furthermore, since this total payout number is the cumulative number of points awarded after the power is turned on, it will be "0" when the power is turned on after a power outage. Furthermore, this total payout number is not affected by power outages and power ons, and may be accumulated unless there is a RAM clear, etc.

(3) MY (largest difference in points)
This MY is based on the lowest score after power-on, and is the maximum increase in score from this standard, in other words, the maximum difference between the lowest score and the highest score after power-on, and is accumulated regardless of whether it is in an advantageous zone or not. In addition, since this MY is also the maximum difference after power-on, it becomes "0" when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs. This MY is also not affected by power outages and power-on, and may be accumulated as long as there is no RAM clear or the like. In this embodiment, when outputting this MY, an MY calculation counter (not shown) that stores real-time values in all game zones after power-on including normal zones and advantageous zones, and an output MY counter (not shown) that stores the maximum value of this MY calculation counter and is the MY value output to the outside are used. In other words, in this embodiment, in addition to the advantageous zone MY counter, which is a counter that can count the maximum difference in the number of sheets in one advantageous zone, an MY calculation counter and an output MY calculation counter are provided. These MY calculation counters and output MY calculation counters will be described later.

(4) Total number of payouts (total points awarded by the reels)
This total number of payouts is information on the cumulative number of points awarded by normal reels and other reels (such as the above-mentioned SB, RB, CB, etc.) after the power is turned on, and is accumulated (updated) regardless of whether it is in a favorable zone or not. In addition, this total number of payouts becomes "0" when a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards. This total number of payouts is also not affected by power outages and power ons, and may be accumulated unless there is a RAM clear or the like.

(5) Total number of consecutive payouts (total points awarded by RB)
This total number of consecutive payouts is information on the cumulative number of points awarded by the above-mentioned RB (also called consecutive features, including RB operation during BB) after the power is turned on, and is accumulated (updated) regardless of whether or not it is in a favorable zone. In addition, this total number of consecutive payouts becomes "0" when a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards. This total number of consecutive payouts is also not affected by power outages and power ons, and may be accumulated unless there is a RAM clear, etc.

(6) Reel ratio (the cumulative reel ratio displayed on the performance display device SH)
As explained in the above "(c) = Ratio of features for 6000 games", this ratio is a ratio (proportion) showing how much of the points awarded by features (including normal features such as SB and special features such as RB and CB) account for in the total cumulative payout number (which may be the cumulative total after RAM clear (cold start) or the cumulative total for a specified period), and is updated regardless of whether it is in a favorable zone or not. For example, if the total payout number is 100 and the points awarded by features are 60, the ratio of features is 60 (%). Furthermore, this ratio of features may be the ratio of features for a predetermined number of games (number of games played) (for example, 6000 games can be applied as the predetermined number of games played, as described above, or alternatively, 400 times, 17500 times, etc., and any other suitable value can be applied). In this case, if the number of games played is less than the predetermined number of games played, "FFh" is output to the lending machine as information to that effect.

(7) Successive feature ratio (the cumulative consecutive feature ratio displayed on the performance display device SH)
As explained in the above "(d) = cumulative consecutive feature ratio", this consecutive feature ratio is a ratio indicating the percentage of the points awarded by the consecutive feature (RB) out of the cumulative total payout number (which may be the cumulative total after RAM clear (cold start) or the cumulative total for a specified period), and is updated regardless of whether it is in an advantageous zone or not. This consecutive feature ratio may also be the consecutive feature ratio for a specified number of games (for example, as described above, the specified number of games may be 6000 games, or alternatively, 400 times, 17500 times, etc., and any appropriate value may be applied). In this case, if the number of games is less than the specified number, "FFh" is output to the lending machine as information to that effect.

(8) Favorable zone ratio (the cumulative favorable zone ratio displayed on the performance display device SH)
As explained above in "(a) = cumulative favorable zone ratio," this favorable zone ratio is a ratio indicating the percentage of the number of games that have been in the favorable zone out of the cumulative number of games (which may be the cumulative total after RAM clear (cold start) or the cumulative total for a specified period). For example, if the cumulative number of games is 100 and the number of games that have been in the favorable zone is 90, the favorable zone ratio is 90. If the predetermined specified number of games has not been reached, "FFh" is output to the lending machine as information 1 to that effect. Also, in the case of a gaming machine that does not have an instruction function, "FFh" is output to the lending machine as information 2 to that effect.

(9) Indication-included reel ratio (the cumulative indication-included reel ratio displayed on the performance display device SH)
As explained above, this instruction-included role ratio is a ratio indicating the percentage of the points provided by the above-mentioned (6) role and the points provided by the AT (instruction function) out of the total cumulative payout number (which may be the cumulative total after RAM clear (cold start) or the cumulative total for a predetermined period). This instruction-included role ratio may also be the instruction-included role ratio for a predetermined prescribed number of games (for example, 6000 games as described above can be applied as the predetermined prescribed number of games, or alternatively, 400 times, 17500 times, etc., and any appropriate value can be applied). In this case, if the number of games is less than the predetermined prescribed number, "FFh" is output to the lending machine as information 1 to that effect. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that does not have an instruction function as a role concept, "FFh" is output to the lending machine as information 2 to that effect.

(10) Status ratio of reels, etc. (cumulative status ratio of reels, etc. displayed on the performance display device SH)
As explained above in "(f) = cumulative reel state ratio", this reel state ratio is a ratio that indicates the percentage of the cumulative number of games (which may be the cumulative total after RAM clear (cold start) or the cumulative total for a specified period) that is accounted for by the number of games played when the reel continuous operation device is in operation (during Type 1 BB, during Type 2 BB), and is updated regardless of whether or not it is in an advantageous zone. If the specified number of games has not been reached, this reel state ratio is set to output "FFh" to the lending machine as information to that effect.

(11) Number of games (number of times played)
This number of games is the cumulative number of games since the power was turned on, and is updated regardless of whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone. Since this number of games is the cumulative number of games since the power was turned on, if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on again, it will be "0." This number of games is accumulated (updated) regardless of whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone. Note that this number of games is not affected by power outages and power ons, and may be accumulated as long as there is no RAM clear, etc.

(12) Others (reserve, reservation 1, reservation 2)
As gaming machine performance information, in addition to the above (1) to (11), for example, a reserve for when it is desired to output information other than the above (1) to (11) (if this reserve is not used, information to that effect is output), reservation 1 for use when outputting the maximum MY calculated by the lending machine to the outside, and reservation 2 for use when outputting the number of games calculated by the lending machine to the outside may be output.

<MY calculation counter and output MY counter>
Here, the above-mentioned MY calculation counter (game value storage means) and output counter (output storage means) will be explained. The MY calculation counter is provided on the main control board, and is a counter capable of counting (storing) the difference number of all game sections after power-on, including the normal section and the advantageous section, and the output MY counter is provided on the main control board, and is a counter that counts (stores) the maximum difference number output as "MY", which is one of the gaming machine performance information, among the gaming machine information number 6 output to the outside.

The MY calculation counter counts the difference in the entire game period from when the power is turned on (after the power is turned on) to when the power is turned off (after the power is turned off) by updating its value according to the investment points (number of investment values) and the awarded points (number of awarded values). For example, if the MY calculation counter value is 10, 3 points are invested, and 10 awarded points are obtained, the difference in the game is 7 points (10 awarded points - 3 investment points), so the MY calculation counter value is updated to 17 (10 points, but 7 points were added, resulting in a total of 17 points). In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of a replay in which automatic investment is performed, the payout for the game in which the replay is won is set to 0, and the investment points for the next game in which the replay is won are set to 0 (automatic investment due to replay is set to 0 points). That is, in a game in which a replay is won (the game prior to that game is considered to be a non-replay), the input points for that game are 3 and the awarded points are 0, but if a bell with an awarded point of 11 points is won in the next game, the input points are calculated as 0 and the awarded points as 11. Note that in a replay, the awarded points for the game in which a replay is won may be set to 3, and the input points for the next game in which a replay is won may be set to 3 (the same number of points as the number of inputs in the game in which a replay is won).

This MY calculation counter is also designed to count the difference in the game at a predetermined timing after the game ends (for example, the timing when the last stop button is released, the timing when the payout of points due to winning is completed, the timing when the processing of the game ends after the last stop button is released, or other appropriate timing can be applied). The maximum value that this MY calculation counter can take is, for example, if MY as gaming machine information is 3 bytes of data, counting is possible within this 3-byte range (256 cubed), but in this embodiment, in order to allow some leeway in the data, a smaller value (for example, 917490) is set as the upper limit, and no further updates are made when this upper limit is reached. In this way, MY as gaming machine information to be output to the outside can be transmitted reliably.

The MY calculation counter is also corrected to 0 when the value calculated based on the input points and the awarded points is negative. For example, when the MY calculation counter value is 0, if 3 points are input and there is a miss (if the awarded points are 0), the counter will read -3, but the MY calculation counter will count to 0 when the counter reaches the negative value of -3. In this way, if the MY calculation counter is 0 and 3 points are input and 11 points are awarded, the MY calculation counter will count the difference, 7.

The output MY counter counts (stores) the maximum value of the points awarded, and when the value of the MY calculation counter becomes greater than the value of the output MY counter, the value of the output MY counter is updated to the value of the MY calculation counter at that time. In other words, at a predetermined timing after the game ends, the MY calculation counter counts the value (difference) related to the game, and if this value is greater than the value stored in the output MY counter at this time, the stored value of the output MY counter is updated to that value.

These MY calculation counters and output MY calculation counters are each configured to initialize their respective counter values to 0 when the power is turned on. In other words, these MY calculation counters and output MY calculation counters calculate the difference numbers regardless of whether they are in a normal zone or an advantageous zone, and these counters are configured to be initialized when the power is turned on. Note that the timing for initializing these counters is not limited to when the power is turned on, and may be any timing from when the power is turned off to a specified timing after the power is turned on, such as when the power is turned off, or in other words, any timing before the values of these counters are updated.

In addition, compared to these MY calculation counters and output MY counters, the above-mentioned advantageous zone MY counter is a counter that can count the maximum difference in the number of coins in one advantageous zone (for example, if the lowest score is -10 and the highest score is 30 in an advantageous zone of 100 games, the difference between -10 and 30, which is 40, becomes the value of the advantageous zone MY counter), so it is not initialized by turning the power on or off (except for turning off the power due to a setting change), but is initialized at any time between the end of the advantageous zone, passing through the normal zone, and the start of the next advantageous zone. It is also initialized during the initialization process when the setting is changed. In addition to this advantageous zone MY counter, a counter that counts the maximum difference in a specified play zone in the normal zone and advantageous zone (which may be between power on and power off, or may be the entire play zone regardless of power on or off) may be provided. This is the same for the other embodiments described above.

Next, a specific example of updating the values of the MY calculation counter and the output MY counter will be described with reference to the difference counter described above and the update of the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 in the embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 26, etc., with reference to the following (Table 1). For ease of explanation, this (Table 1) uses the period from 1 game to 17 games after power-on as an example, and illustrates that the period from 1 game to 17 games includes a mixture of normal zones and advantageous zones, and that the power was turned off at the 13th game and turned on (power was turned back on) at the 14th game.

In this table 1, the normal zone and the advantageous zone are described as the "game state", and "power OFF" in parentheses indicates that the power was turned off (power cut) after the game ended, and "power ON" indicates that the game was turned on. In table 1, "number of games" refers to the number of games, and each number in "number of games" corresponds to 1 game to 17 games. In the winning combinations in table 1, the replay is the replay shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 10 described in the above embodiment, and the bell is the "common bell" corresponding to the winning number 13 with the award (payout) of 11 points (11 coins) shown in FIG. 10, and is any one of the symbol combinations of winning 04 to winning 07 shown in FIG. 8. In table 1, "inserted points" refers to the inserted points (bet) in the game, and in table 1, all inserted points are 3 points (corresponding to the so-called maximum bet of 3 coins). In Table 1, "award points" refers to the number of points (the number of game values paid out) awarded in the game, and in Table 1, a miss is 0 points, and a bell is 11 points. In the case of a replay, the award points for the game in which the replay is won are 0 as described above, and the input points for the next game are 0. In Table 1, the A value is the value of the MY calculation counter, the B value is the value of the output MY counter, the C value is the value of the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1, the D value is the value of the advantageous zone MY counter (also called the difference number counter) that can count the difference number in an advantageous zone of 1, and the G number is the number of games. In the input points column, if the calculated value of the advantageous zone MY counter in the game is different from the MY calculation counter, the value is shown in parentheses. As mentioned above, the MY calculation counter and output MY counter operate regardless of whether the game is in a normal zone or an advantageous zone, but are initialized when the power is turned on/off (not affected by transitions between normal zones or advantageous zones, but affected by power on/off), whereas the advantageous zone remaining game counter and advantageous zone MY counter operate regardless of whether the power is on/off, but are initialized in a game in which a transition to an advantageous zone has been determined in a normal zone (not affected by power on/off, but affected by transitions between normal zones and advantageous zones).

In Table 1, in the initialization process after power is turned on, the MY calculation counter and the output MY counter are initialized to 0 (set to 0). In the first game started by operating the start lever after power is turned on, the winning combination is a miss, so the input points are 3 and the awarded points are 0, with the difference being -3, but the MY calculation counter is corrected to 0 and remains 0, and the output MY counter also remains 0. Meanwhile, since it is determined in the first game that there will be a transition to the advantageous zone, and the advantageous zone will start from the next game (the second game), the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is set to 1500, which is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone, and the advantageous zone MY counter is set to 0.

In the second game after the power is turned on, the winning role is a replay, and since the winning role in the previous game was a miss and a play is being made in this game, the input points are 3, the awarded points are 0, and the difference is -3, but the MY calculation counter is corrected to 0 and remains 0, and the output MY counter also remains 0. In addition, with regard to the advantageous zone MY counter, if the winning role in the game is a replay, the count does not increase or decrease (for convenience, this is written as "0" in parentheses in Table 1), and if it is not a replay, the counter increases or decreases according to the difference based on the input points and awarded points according to the winning role of the game, and since the winning role in this second game is a replay, the value of the advantageous zone MY counter remains 0. On the other hand, since this second game is the game that has moved to the advantageous zone (because it is the first game in the advantageous zone), the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 counts 1499.

In the third game after the power is turned on, the winning combination is a miss, but the winning combination in the previous game is a replay, and because an automatic replay occurs, the input points are 0, the awarded points are also 0, and the difference is 0. As a result, both the MY calculation counter and the output MY counter remain at 0. Also, in the favorable zone MY counter, the winning combination in this third game is a miss, and the input points in that game are 3 (see parentheses in Table 1) and the awarded points are 0, so the difference is -3, but it is corrected to 0 and remains 0. Meanwhile, in the favorable zone remaining games counter YKc-1, it is 1498 because it is the second game since entering the favorable zone.

In the fourth game after the power is turned on, the winning role is a bell, and since the winning role in the previous game was a miss and a bell is inserted in this game, the insertion points are 3 and the award points are 11, with the difference being 8. As a result, the MY calculation counter and the advantageous zone MY counter count 8 (8 is added to the value of 0 at the start of the fourth game), and since the value of 8 in the MY calculation counter is greater than the value of 0 in the output MY counter at the start of the fourth game, the output MY counter also counts 8, and this value of 8 is the value output to the outside as the MY of the gaming machine information. Meanwhile, the advantageous zone remaining game count counter YKc-1 is 1497 because it is the third game since entering the advantageous zone.

In the fifth game after the power is turned on, the winning role is a miss, and the winning role in the previous game was a bell, which was inserted in that game, so the insertion points are 3, the award points are 0, and the difference is -3. Therefore, the MY calculation counter and the advantageous zone MY counter count 5, which is the value at the start of the fifth game, 8, minus the difference of 3. Also, in the output MY counter, the value of 5 in the MY calculation counter is smaller than the value of the output MY counter at this time, 8, so it is not updated and remains at 8. Meanwhile, the advantageous zone remaining game count counter YKc-1 is 1496, as it is the fourth game since entering the advantageous zone.

In the sixth game after the power is turned on, the winning role is a replay, the winning role in the previous game was a miss, and a play is made in that game, so the input points are 3, the awarded points are 0, and the difference is -3. Therefore, the MY calculation counter counts 2, which is the value at the start of the sixth game, 5 minus the difference of 3. Since this value is smaller than the value of the output MY counter at this time, 8, the output MY counter is not updated and remains at 8. Also, since the winning role in that game is a replay, the count does not increase or decrease in the advantageous zone MY counter, and remains at 5, which is a different value from the MY calculation counter, which counts 2. In this way, in the advantageous zone MY counter, if the game is a replay, the count does not increase or decrease, while in the MY calculation counter, the input points change depending on whether the previous game was a replay or not, so the values of the MY calculation counter and advantageous zone MY counter may differ depending on whether or not there is a replay in consecutive games (in this example, in the case of the relationship between the fifth and sixth games). Meanwhile, the remaining game number counter YKc-1 for the advantageous zone is 1495 because it is the fifth game since entering the advantageous zone.

In the seventh game after the power is turned on, the winning combination is a miss, and the winning combination from the previous game is a replay, and automatic insertion is performed in this game, so the insertion points are 0, the grant points are 0, and the difference is 0. Therefore, the MY calculation counter and the advantageous zone MY counter remain at 2, which is the value at the start of the seventh game, and the output MY counter also remains at 8, which is the value at the start of the seventh game. In this way, if there are no grant points in the game after the replay, there is no change in the increase or decrease in the score in the MY calculation counter and the output MY counter. Also, in the advantageous zone MY counter, the winning combination in that game is a miss, the insertion points in that game are 3 (see parentheses in Table 1), the grant points are 0, and the difference is -3, so it becomes 2, which is 5, which is the value at the start of the seventh game, minus 3. Meanwhile, the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 1494, because it is the sixth game since entering the advantageous zone.

In the eighth game after the power is turned on, the winning role is a replay, the winning role in the previous game was a miss, and a play is made in this game, so the play points are 3, the awarded points are 0, and the difference is -3. Therefore, in the MY calculation counter, subtracting the difference of 3 from the value at the start of the eighth game, which is 2, results in a negative value of -1, so it is corrected to 0 and counted as 0. Since this value is smaller than the value of the output MY counter at this time, which is 8, the output MY counter is not updated and remains at 8. Also, in the advantageous zone MY counter, since the winning role in that game is a replay, the count does not increase or decrease and remains at 2. Meanwhile, the advantageous zone remaining game count counter YKc-1 is 1493 because it is the seventh game since entering the advantageous zone.

In the ninth game after the power is turned on, the winning role is a bell, and the winning role in the previous game was a replay, and since automatic insertion is performed in that game, the insertion points are 0 and the awarded points are 11, and the difference is 11. Therefore, the MY calculation counter counts 11, which is the value at the start of the ninth game, which is 0, plus 11. Here, in the fourth game after the power is turned on, the same bell as in the ninth game is won and 11 points are awarded, but the game before the fourth game is a loss other than a replay, and 3 points are inserted in the fourth game, so the difference is 8, but in the ninth game, the game before that is a replay, and 0 points are inserted in the ninth game, so the difference is 11. In this way, in games with awarded points, the difference changes (the value shifts) depending on whether the previous game was a replay or not. Furthermore, since the value of the MY calculation counter for the ninth game, 11, is greater than the value of the output MY counter, 8, at the start of the ninth game, the output MY counter is updated to 11 (11 is counted), and this value of 11 becomes the value that is output to the outside as the MY of the gaming machine information. Furthermore, in the advantageous zone MY counter, since the winning combination for that game was a bell, the input points were 3, the awarded points were 11, and the difference was 8, the value at the start of the ninth game was 2 plus 8, giving a value of 10. Meanwhile, the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 1492, since it is the seventh game since entering the advantageous zone.

In the 10th game after the power is turned on, the winning role is a miss, and the winning role in the previous game was a bell, and since a role has been inserted in that game, the insertion points are 3, the award points are 0, and the difference is -3. As a result, the MY calculation counter counts 8, which is the value at the start of the 10th game of 11 minus the difference of 3, and since this value is smaller than the value of the output MY counter at this time of 11, the output MY counter is not updated and remains at 11. Meanwhile, since the advantageous zone ends in that game, the advantageous zone remaining game count counter YKc-1, which counted 1492 at the start of that game, and the advantageous zone MY counter, which counted 11, are both reset to 0 by the initialization process after the end of that game. In this way, the advantageous zone MY counter is initialized at the end of the advantageous zone, but the MY calculation counter and the output MY counter are not initialized at the end of the advantageous zone, but are initialized when the power is turned on. Therefore, in this 10th game, the MY calculation counter and the output MY counter count 8 and 11, respectively, while the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 and the advantageous zone MY counter are 0. In this way, even if the end of the advantageous zone does not coincide with the turning off of the power, the value of the calculation MY counter and the value of the advantageous zone MY counter will differ, similar to the difference due to the presence or absence of replay in consecutive games described above (also see the values of the calculation MY counter and the advantageous zone MY counter in the 16th to 20th games). This difference is due to the fact that the zones targeted by each counter are different. By using two counters with different target zones in this way, it is possible to appropriately count the MY corresponding to each target zone (two types: MY in advantageous zone 1 and MY in the zone from power ON to OFF).

In the 11th game after the power is turned on, the winning combination is a miss, and the winning combination in the previous game was a miss, and a combination is made in that game, so the combination points are 3, the award points are 0, and the difference is -3. Therefore, the MY calculation counter counts 5, which is the value at the start of the 11th game, 8, minus the difference of 3, and since this value is smaller than the value of the output MY counter at this time, 11, the output MY counter remains at 11 without being updated. On the other hand, the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 and the advantageous zone MY counter are inactive because the advantageous zone ended in the previous game and transitioned to the normal zone, and it has not been decided that the advantageous zone will transition in that game either, and the next game is also in the normal zone. However, this is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 and the advantageous zone MY counter may also count in the normal zone and be initialized (reset to zero or set to an initial value) at the start of the advantageous zone.

In the 12th game after the power is turned on, the winning combination is a miss, and the winning combination in the previous game was a miss, and a combination is made in the current game, so the combination points are 3, the award points are 0, and the difference is -3. Therefore, the MY calculation counter counts 2, which is the value at the start of the 12th game, minus the difference of 3, and since this value is smaller than the value of the output MY counter at this time, 11, the output MY counter remains at 11 without being updated. Meanwhile, since it is decided to move to the advantageous zone in the current game and the advantageous zone will start from the next game, the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is set to 1500, and the advantageous zone MY counter is set to 0. Here, it is decided to move to the advantageous zone in the 12th game, and the next 14th game will be the advantageous zone again, and it will be the first game after the transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, but in order to distinguish it from the advantageous zone from the 2nd game to the 10th game, the 13th game and onwards will be called the "second advantageous zone".

In the 13th game after the power is turned on, the winning combination is a miss, and the winning combination in the previous game was a miss, and a combination is made in this game, so the combination points are 3, the award points are 0, and the difference is -3. Therefore, in the MY calculation counter, subtracting the difference of 3 from the value at the start of the 13th game, which is 2, results in a negative value of -1, so the counter is corrected to 0 and counts 0. Since this value is smaller than the value of the output MY counter at this time, which is 11, the output MY counter is not updated and remains at 11. Meanwhile, in the advantageous zone MY counter and the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1, the 13th game after the power is turned on is the first game of the second advantageous zone. In the first game of this second advantageous zone, the advantageous zone MY counter is corrected to 0 and remains at the initial value of 0 set in the previous game, because the value obtained by subtracting the difference is a negative value, and the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 1499.

In the 14th game after the power is turned on, the winning role is a bell, and the winning role in the previous game was a miss, and since a bell is inserted in this game, the insertion points are 3, the award points are 11, and the difference is 8. Therefore, the MY calculation counter counts 8, which is the value at the start of the 13th game, 0, plus the difference of 8, and since this value is smaller than the value of the output MY counter at this time, 11, the output MY counter is not updated and remains at 11. Meanwhile, in the favorable zone MY counter and the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1, the 14th game after the power is turned on is the second game in the second favorable zone. In the second game in this second favorable zone, the favorable zone MY counter counts 8, which is the value at the start of the second game in the second favorable zone, 0, plus the difference of 8, and the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 1498.

In the 15th game after the power is turned on, the winning role is a replay and the winning role in the previous game was a miss, and since a play is made in that game, the input points are 3, the awarded points are 0, and the difference is -3. Therefore, in the MY calculation counter, the value at the start of the 13th game is counted as 8 minus the difference of 3, resulting in a count of 5. Since this value is smaller than the value of the output MY counter at this time, 11, the output MY counter is not updated and remains at 11. Meanwhile, in the advantageous zone MY counter and the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1, the 15th game after the power is turned on is the third game in the second advantageous zone. In the third game in the second advantageous zone, the advantageous zone MY counter does not increase or decrease in count because the winning role in that game is a replay, and remains at 8, and the advantageous zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 1497. Here, in the 15th game after power-on, the power is turned off after the 15th game, so the counting of the MY calculation counter and the output counter ends at the 15th game. Also, the power is turned on again for the next 16th game, so the 16th game counts as one game after power-on for the MY calculation counter and the output MY counter, but to clearly distinguish between the first game after power-on and the 15th game, the 16th game and onwards will be referred to as "after the second power-on."

The 16th game is the first game after the second power-on, and the MY calculation counter and the output MY counter are initialized to 0 by this power-on. In the first game (14th game) after the second power-on, the winning combination is a miss, and the winning combination of the previous game is a replay, and automatic insertion is performed in this game, so the insertion points are 0, the grant points are 0, and the difference is 0, so both the MY calculation counter and the output MY counter remain set at 0. On the other hand, in the favorable zone MY counter, this 16th game is the fourth game in the second favorable zone. In this fourth game in the second favorable zone, in the favorable zone MY counter, the winning combination of the game is a miss, the insertion points in this game are 3, the grant points are 0, and the difference is -3, so the value at the start of the seventh game, 8, is subtracted by 3 to become 5, and the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 1496.

In the 17th game (the second game after the second power-on, the fifth game in the second favorable zone), the winning role is a bell, and the winning role in the previous game was a bell, and a slot is inserted in this game, so the insertion points are 3, the award points are 11, and the difference is 8. Therefore, the MY calculation counter counts 8, which is the value at the start of the second game after the second power-on, which is 0, plus the difference of 8, and since this value is greater than the value of the output MY counter at this time, which is 0, the value of the output MY counter is updated to 8. Meanwhile, the favorable zone MY counter is 13, which is the value at the start of the fifth game in the second favorable zone, which is 5, plus the difference of 8, and the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 1495.

In the 18th game (the third game after the second power-on, the sixth game in the second favorable zone), the winning role is a bell, and the winning role in the previous game was a bell, and a slot is inserted in that game, so the insertion points are 3, the award points are 11, and the difference is 8. Therefore, the MY calculation counter counts 16, which is the value at the start of the third game after the second power-on, which is 8, plus the difference of 8, and since this value is greater than the value of the output MY counter at this time, which is 8, the output MY counter is updated to 16. Meanwhile, the favorable zone MY counter is 21, which is the value at the start of the sixth game in the second favorable zone, which is 13, plus the difference of 8, and the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 1494.

In the 19th game (the fourth game after the second power-on, the seventh game in the second favorable zone), the winning role is a replay, the winning role from the previous game was a bell, and a play is made in that game, so the play points are 3, the awarded points are 0, and the difference is -3. Therefore, the MY calculation counter counts 13, which is the value at the start of the fourth game after the second power-on minus the difference of 3, and since this value is smaller than 16, the output MY counter value remains at 16. Meanwhile, in the favorable zone MY counter, since the winning role in that game is a replay, the count does not increase or decrease, remaining at 21, and the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 1493.

In the 20th game (the 5th game after the second power-on, the 8th game in the 2nd favorable zone), the winning combination was a miss and the winning combination from the previous game was a replay, and automatic insertion was performed in that game, so both the insertion points and the grant points are 0, and the difference is 0. Therefore, the values of the MY calculation counter and the output MY counter do not change, and they are 13 and 16, respectively, the same as the values at the start of the 19th game. In addition, in the favorable zone MY counter, the winning combination in that game was a miss, so the insertion points in that game were 3 and the grant points were 0, resulting in a difference of -3, so the value at the start of the 20th game, 21, is subtracted by 3 to become 18, and the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 1492.

In this embodiment, in order to output MY as gaming machine information, the counter is divided into an MY calculation counter and an output MY counter, so that an appropriate MY can be output. Also, by dividing the counter into an MY calculation counter and an output MY counter, even if the MY calculation counter stops functioning due to some factor, the output MY counter can output MY. Also, the MY calculation counter is corrected to 0 when it takes a negative value, in other words, when the score is the lowest, so that the difference can be appropriately counted only by this MY calculation counter without providing a separate counter that counts negative values. Furthermore, the MY calculation counter and the output MY counter are initialized to 0 when the power is turned on, so that the MY can be reliably output from when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off.

Of the gaming machine information listed above in number 6, the gaming machine installation information includes the following (1) to (3).

(1) Chip ID number (main control chip ID number/dispense control chip ID number)
This is an ID number for individually identifying each main control chip and each dispensing control chip. (2) Manufacturer code (main control chip manufacturer code, dispensing control chip manufacturer code)
This is a code indicating the manufacturer that is stored in the management area (a designated area of memory) of each main control chip and dispensing control chip to individually identify the manufacturer. If a dispensing control chip is not installed, a signal to that effect is output to the outside. (3) Product code (main control chip product code, dispensing control chip product code)
This is a product code stored in the management area (a designated area of memory) of each main control chip and dispensing control chip to identify each product. If a dispensing control chip is not installed, a signal to that effect is output to the outside.

Of the gaming machine information listed above in number 6, the contents of the HC/fraud monitoring information include the following (1) to (7).

(1) Total points The total points is the current total points displayed on the total points display device connected to the payout control board. This total point can be displayed from 0 to 16,383 points.

(2) Number of entries (number of entries)
The number of coins inserted indicates the gaming value (score) inserted. In other words, if three points are bet, information indicating +3 points is output to the outside, whereas if three points are bet and the three points are returned after settlement, information indicating -3 points is output to the outside. Also, this information is not treated as a HC signal output to the hall computer.

(3) Number of payouts (number of points awarded)
This payout number indicates the number of points awarded in response to the winning of a small win, and a signal of any of 0 to 15 points is output. In other words, if there is no win of a small win, information indicating 0 points is output, and if any of 1 to 15 points is awarded in response to the winning of a small win, information to that effect is output to the outside. In addition, this information is also not treated as the above-mentioned HC signal. Here, these "total points", "input number", and "payout number" have the following relationship. In other words, "total points" = last output ("total points" - "input number" + "payout number") + "lend points" lent from the lending machine received after the last output "total points" - "counted points" received after the last output "total points".

(4) Main control state 1 and main control state 2
Both the main control state 1 and the main control state 2 indicate information about the game state. The main control state 1 and the main control state 2 are each 1 byte of data, and a corresponding game state is assigned to each bit (bits 0 to 8) of this 1 byte of data. For example, RB is assigned to bit 0 of the main control state 1, BB is assigned to bit 1, and AT is assigned to bit 2, game state signals 1 to 4 are assigned to bits 3 to 6, respectively, and bit 7 is unused, and game state signals 5 to 7 are assigned to bits 0 to 2 of the main control state 2, respectively, and bits 3 to 7 are unused. For example, when the game state is RB, bit 0 becomes "1", and when it is not RB, bit 0 becomes "0", and the unused bits, bit 7 of the main control state 1 and bits 3 to 7 of the main control state 2, are always "0". In addition, game status signals 1 to 7 are signals for outputting game statuses other than RB, BB, and AT assigned to bits 0 to 2, and it is possible to appropriately assign game statuses such as RT status to game status signal 1, RT1 to game status signal 1, RT2 to game status signal 2, and so on.

(5) Game Machine Error State This game machine error state indicates information corresponding to an error occurring in the game machine. This game machine error state is 1 byte of data indicating an error code corresponding to each error, and among the bits (bits 0 to 8) of this 1 byte of data, bits 0 to 5 can be appropriately assigned, for example, the above-mentioned door open error, input abnormality error, payout abnormality error, etc. In addition, bit 6 is used as a signal to distinguish whether the error that occurred is on the payout control side (for example, bit 6 is "0") or the main control board side (for example, bit 6 is "1"), and bit 7 can be used as a signal to distinguish whether, when an error occurs, the lending machine side only notifies the error (for example, bit 7 is "0") or outputs the fact that an error has occurred to the HC in addition to the above error notification (for example, bit 7 is "1"). In addition, whether to output to the HC can be arbitrarily determined for each error. In addition, when no error occurs, bits 0 to 7 are set to "0".

(6) Gaming machine fraud 1 (main control)
Gaming machine fraud 1 indicates information on the state of the main control board and the detection of fraud, and this information is output directly from the lending machine to the hall computer. This gaming machine fraud 1 is one byte of data, and information on the state and the detection of fraud can be assigned to each bit (bits 0 to 8) of this one byte. For example, bit 0 can be assigned a setting change signal (bit 0 is "1" during the setting change (including the time until one game ends after the setting change is completed), and bit 0 is "0" in other states), and bit 1 can be assigned a setting confirmation signal (bit 1 is "1" during the setting confirmation, and bit 1 is "0" in other states). In this way, information on the state of the main control board can be assigned to bits 0 and 1.

In addition, when bit 0 is "1" (when the setting is being changed), bit 0 remains in the "1" state (the security signal continues to be output) from the time the setting is changed until the end of one game after the setting change. That is, in this embodiment, as described later, the gaming machine notifies the lending machine of gaming machine information including HC and fraud monitoring information every predetermined time X (for example, 300 ms), and this gaming machine information notification also includes setting change related information such as information that the setting is being changed, information that the setting is being confirmed, information that the setting change mode has ended, etc. For this reason, if the setting key (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the setting key switch) is turned ON/OFF within the predetermined time X (when a series of setting changes are made and ended), the above-mentioned setting change related information may not be output accurately. In this case, the lending machine cannot grasp that the setting has been changed in the gaming machine or that the power has been restored due to the setting change, etc., and this may cause problems such as inconsistencies in communication between the lending machine and the gaming machine. In contrast, in this embodiment, even after the setting is changed, the setting change flag remains on until one game is completed, and the setting change signal continues to be sent (output) from the gaming machine to the rental machine, thereby preventing problems such as inconsistencies in communication between the rental machine and the gaming machine.

Fraud detection signals 1 to 3 can be assigned to bits 2 to 4 of gaming machine fraud 1, respectively. For example, if an abnormal checksum after power-on is determined to be fraud caused by fraudulent activity, this can be assigned to fraud detection signal 1. In this way, information defined as fraud can be assigned to fraud detection signals 1 to 3 as appropriate (information defined as fraud may be assigned to all of fraud detection signals 1 to 3, or to only some of them). These bits 2 to 4 are set to "0" if they are in a normal state, and "1" if they are in an abnormal state.

The above-mentioned security signal can be assigned to bit 5 of gaming machine fraud 1. When any of bits 0 to 4 is "1" (when the setting is being changed (in setting change mode), when the setting is being confirmed, or when any of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is being output), bit 5 becomes "1". In this case, when any of bits 0 to 4 is "0" (when the setting is being changed, when the setting is being confirmed, or when none of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is being output), bit 5 becomes "0". When bit 0 is "1" (when the setting is being changed), bit 5 remains in the "1" state (the security signal continues to be output) from the time the setting is being changed until the end of one game after the setting is changed, thereby making it possible to prevent malfunctions such as inconsistencies in communication between the rental machine and the gaming machine. In addition, bits 6 and 7 of gaming machine fraud can be left unused, and these bits 6 and 7 are always "0".

(7) Gaming Machine Fraud 2 (Main Control or Payout Control) and Gaming Machine Fraud 3 (Main Control or Payout Control)
These gaming machine fraud 2 and gaming machine fraud 3 indicate information on the state of the main control board or the payout control board or the detection of fraud, and this information is output directly from the lending machine to the hall computer. The gaming machine fraud 2 and gaming machine fraud 3 are 1-byte data, and information on the state or the detection of fraud can be assigned to each bit (bits 0 to 8) of this 1 byte. For example, a setting door open signal can be assigned to bit 0. That is, in this embodiment, a setting door (not shown) that can be opened and closed is provided in a closed position that covers the setting key switch that changes the setting and an open position that opens it, and the setting door open signal indicates the state of this setting door (setting cover). Since the setting door should be open in order to change the setting, when the setting door is open, bit 0 is set to "0" indicating normal, and when the setting door is closed, bit 0 is set to "1" indicating abnormal.

Bit 1 of gaming machine fraud 2 can be assigned, for example, a door open signal. In order to change the settings, the front door (door) DU must be open, so when the front door DU is open, bit 1 becomes "0" indicating that it is normal, and when the front door DU is closed, bit 1 becomes "1" indicating that it is abnormal.

Bit 3 of gaming machine fraud 2 can be assigned, for example, a game value number clear detection, which indicates that the game value number (score number) has been cleared. That is, as described above, the medalless gaming machine is provided with a total score clear switch (not shown) (for example, it is preferable to provide it in a place where the player cannot touch, such as the payout control board described above), and when this total score clear switch is operated to clear the total score, bit 3 becomes "1" indicating that this has been cleared, and when the total score clear switch has not been operated and has not been cleared, or when the total score clear switch has been operated but the clearing condition (such as turning on the power while operating the total score clear switch) is not met, bit 3 becomes "0". In addition, after the total score clear switch is operated and bit 3 becomes "1", this state is maintained until one game is completed, so as to prevent malfunctions such as inconsistencies in communication between the rental machine and the gaming machine.

On the other hand, bits 2, 4 to 7 other than bits 0, 1, and 3 of the gaming machine fraud 2 described above can be unused, and bits 0 to 7 of the gaming machine fraud 3 (all bits of the gaming machine fraud 3) can also be unused (hereinafter, bits 2, 4 to 7 of the gaming machine fraud 2 and bits 0 to 7 of the gaming machine fraud 3 are sometimes simply referred to as "unused bits"). Therefore, these unused bits are always "0". In this embodiment, if at least one of the unused bits is "1" (if gaming machine installation information with at least one "1" is output to the lending machine), the SC board of the lending machine performs a process to prohibit the lending operation, and the lending operation is not performed even if the lending switch (not shown) provided on the lending machine is operated. In other words, in this gaming machine system having a gaming machine and a lending machine, if the unused bit is "1", lending by the lending machine is prohibited.

In this way, if an unused bit that should always be "0" is set to "1", the lending operation by the lending machine is prohibited, so even if there is a fraudulent act such as writing a fraudulent program or data, lending can be prevented, and it is possible to prevent fraudsters from enjoying the benefits of fraud. In addition, since lending is prohibited when an unused bit becomes "1", it is possible to make it difficult to write a fraudulent program or data to an unused area, so this type of fraud can be prevented. Furthermore, in gaming machine fraud 2, bits 0 and 1, which are consecutive, are used bits, and bit 3, which is skipped, is used bit. By making the used bits discontinuous, it is difficult to tell which bits are used bits and which are unused bits, so it is difficult to perform a fraudulent act such as writing a fraudulent program or data to an unused bit, and it is possible to prevent this type of fraud.

In this embodiment, if the unused bit is "1", lending by the lending machine is prohibited, but this is not limited to the above. If the unused bit is "1", counting by the gaming machine may be prohibited by not performing counting even if the counting switch of the gaming machine is operated. Even in this case, the same effect as when lending is prohibited is obtained. Also, in this embodiment, the unused bits are bits 2, 4 to 7 of gaming machine fraud 2 as described above,
Although bits 0 to 7 of gaming machine fraud 3 are applied, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this and which bits are to be unused bits can be set appropriately.

In addition, in this embodiment, a medal-less reel type gaming machine is used as an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine that uses gaming balls instead of a medal-less reel type gaming machine. Specifically, the gaming machine can be applied to a so-called sealed type pachinko gaming machine (managed gaming machine) in which the gaming balls are sealed inside the pachinko gaming machine and made into an internal circulation type, so that the pachinko gaming machine can be managed individually instead of in an island management system. This sealed-in pachinko gaming machine has multiple winning ports into which gaming balls fired toward the gaming area can win prizes, and into which prize balls can be obtained when the gaming balls enter (examples of the winning ports include a start winning port which, when a ball enters, obtains a predetermined random number and a win/lose lottery (win/lose determination) is conducted and a variable display is initiated, a general winning port which only pays out prize balls, and a big winning port which, in the event of a jackpot, remains open until a predetermined time has elapsed or a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the big prize port), an information display unit (performance display unit) which performs performances such as predetermined variable patterns according to the win/lose lottery results and notifies the player of predetermined information, a main control unit which controls the progress of the game, and a launching unit which launches gaming balls into the gaming area by the player's operation, etc.

The contents of gaming machine fraud 2 in this sealed-in pachinko gaming machine include, for example, illegal radio wave detection, which indicates that illegal radio waves have been detected, a ball entry sensor detects a gaming ball that has entered a winning slot but the discharge detection sensor fails to detect the discharge of the gaming ball, or a winning ball abnormality 1 detection, which indicates that the discharge detection sensor detects a gaming ball when the ball entry sensor does not detect a gaming ball, and an abnormality in the number of prize balls corresponding to a winning slot (for example, when a gaming ball enters a winning slot corresponding to six prize balls but ten prize balls are paid out). These include winning ball abnormality 2 detection, which indicates that a small ball smaller than the normal size has been detected, small ball detection, which indicates that a small ball smaller than the normal size has been detected, and iron ball detection, which detects that the game ball is an iron ball or the like that is affected by a magnet (in sealed pachinko machines, the game balls do not scatter outside the machine, so there is no need to turn the scattered game balls into iron balls so that the hall staff can easily collect them with a magnet, so it is assumed that game balls made of a non-magnetic material such as brass are used. In this case, there is no need to carry out so-called magnetic sensors or fraud prevention measures such as stopping the firing of balls in response to the detection of a magnetic sensor.) It goes without saying that the above-mentioned winning ball abnormality 1 detection and winning ball abnormality 2 detection are only examples, and it is possible to replace them with other abnormality detections.

In this sealed pachinko machine, for example, the illegal radio wave detection is assigned to bit 2 of machine illegality 2, the winning ball abnormality 1 detection is assigned to bit 4, and the winning ball abnormality 2 detection is assigned to bit 5, the small ball detection is assigned to bit 0 of machine illegality 3, and the iron ball detection is assigned to bit 1, while bits 0, 1, 3, 6, and 7 of machine illegality 2 and bits 2 to 7 of machine illegality 3 are assigned as unused bits. Even in this case, if the unused bit becomes "1", the rental machine of the sealed pachinko machine (which constitutes the gaming machine system together with the pachinko machine) may be prohibited from lending it. Even in this case, the same effect as in the case of the medalless reel type gaming machine is achieved. It goes without saying that even in this sealed pachinko machine, it is possible to appropriately set what is assigned to which bit of machine illegality 2 and 3.

The HC/fraud monitoring information may be configured to transmit error information, and in such a case, it may be configured as follows. (1) Error information related to the main control board and error information related to the dispensing control board are separated and transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. As a specific example, HC/fraud monitoring information including 1 byte of error information related to the main control board and 1 byte of error information related to the dispensing control board is configured to be transmitted. (2) Recoverable error information related to the main control board and non-recoverable error information related to the main control board are separated and transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. As a specific example, HC/fraud monitoring information including 1 byte of recoverable error information related to the main control board and 1 byte of non-recoverable error information related to the main control board is configured to be transmitted. (3) Recoverable error information related to the main control board, non-recoverable error information related to the main control board, and error information related to the dispensing control board are separated and transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. As a specific example, the HC/fraud monitoring information can be configured to be transmitted, including 1 byte of recoverable error information on the main control board, 1 byte of unrecoverable error information on the main control board, and 1 byte of error information on the dispensing control board.

Here, a recoverable error is an error that automatically recovers when a predetermined time has elapsed since the error occurred, or an error that can be recovered by operating the setting/reset button M30, and examples of such errors include the above-mentioned door open error, abnormal insertion error, and abnormal payout error, which may occur when the gaming machine is used normally. The above-mentioned unrecoverable errors are errors that cannot be recovered from even by operating the setting/reset switch M30 (and, naturally, do not recover automatically), and can only be recovered from by changing settings or initializing with the setting/reset button M30, and examples of such errors include errors that are likely to have occurred due to fraudulent activity, such as an error that occurs when the checksum after power is turned on is abnormal (an error that is unlikely to occur when the gaming machine is used normally). It is possible to set which errors are recoverable and which are unrecoverable as appropriate; essentially, it is sufficient if errors are classified as recoverable and unrecoverable by the setting/reset button M30; however, it is preferable to classify naturally occurring minor errors that can normally occur as recoverable errors, and to classify serious errors that are likely to have occurred due to fraudulent activity and occur less frequently than recoverable errors as unrecoverable errors. In this embodiment, the setting/reset button M30 also serves as a RAM clear switch (sometimes called a RAM clear switch) for clearing the RAM, but a dedicated RAM clear switch may be provided in addition to the setting/reset button M30.

In this embodiment, when a recoverable error occurs, counting operation (counting process) is possible by operating the counting switch (counting button) provided on the gaming machine, but when an irrecoverable error occurs, counting operation by operating the counting switch is impossible. Specifically, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the main control board of the gaming machine executes a process to prohibit counting process, so that counting by the counting switch is impossible, even if the counting switch is operated and a signal to that effect is received. In other words, in the gaming machine, the period from the occurrence of an irrecoverable error to its release is a counting impossible period (which can also be said to be a prohibited period in which counting is prohibited), and the other period is a counting possible period. In this example, the main control board that receives a signal from the counting switch prohibits counting process, but instead of this, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the operation of the counting switch itself may be invalidated (so that even if the counting switch is operated, a signal resulting from the operation is not sent to the main control board).

In this way, while counting using the counting switch is possible for recoverable errors that can normally occur, counting using the counting switch is not possible for unrecoverable errors, which occur less frequently than recoverable errors, allowing the countable period to be longer than the uncountable period (ensuring a situation where counting is possible as much as possible), while making counting using the counting switch impossible in situations where there is a high probability of fraudulent activity occurring, thereby combating fraudulent activity. Also, because counting using the counting switch is not possible, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity such as attempting to obtain fraudulent benefits by counting using the counting switch, for example.

In this embodiment, if an irrecoverable error occurs, counting using the counting switch is disabled, but this is not limited to the above. If an irrecoverable error occurs, the rental machine may be prohibited from performing a rental operation (rental process).

In addition, the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment is configured to have a payout control board, but this is not limited to this, and the machine may not have a payout control board, and the configuration performed by the payout control board in this example may be configured to be executable by the main control board.

As shown in the figure, the checksum of the gaming machine information notification command is 1 byte, and when calculating the checksum of the gaming machine information notification command, it is calculated from the command length, command type, serial number, gaming machine type information, gaming information type, and gaming machine information, but the gaming machine information is 2 bytes or more of data. For example, when transmitting gaming machine performance information as gaming machine information, the gaming machine performance information is 40 bytes of data, but the checksum of the gaming machine information notification command is calculated using 40 pieces of 1 byte data obtained by dividing the 1st byte to the 40th byte, as well as the command length, command type, serial number, and gaming machine information type, which are 1 byte of data. By configuring in this way, the checksum can be configured as 1 byte even if the command contains 2 bytes or more of data.

Next, Figure 68 illustrates the contents of the counting notification command (sometimes called a counting notification). The counting notification command is a command sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine as a transmission signal sent using pin 6 of the communication cable described above in Figure 66, and is a command that can be sent based on the operation of the counting button.

The count notification command has a command length of 7 bytes, and is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and is composed of the command length, command type, count serial number, count points, count cumulative points, and checksum, and is more specifically composed as follows: The command length of No. 1 is 1 byte of data, which is 0x07. The command type of No. 2 is 1 byte of data, which is 0x02. The count serial number of No. 3 is 1 byte of data, which is 0x00 to 0xFF. The count points of No. 4 are 1 byte of data, which is 0x00 to 0x32. The count cumulative points of No. 5 are 2 byte of data, which is 0x00 to 0xFFFF. The checksum of No. 6 is 1 byte of data.
The counting serial number may be referred to as a counting serial number, and may be collectively referred to as a serial number together with a serial number and a loan serial number.

As shown in the figure, the checksum of the count notification command is 1 byte, and when calculating the checksum of the count notification command, it is calculated from the command length, command type, count serial number, count score, and count cumulative score, but the count cumulative score is 2 bytes or more of data. For example, the count cumulative score is 2 bytes of data, but the checksum of the count notification command is calculated using 1 byte of data obtained by dividing the first byte and the second byte into two, and the command length, command type, count serial number, and count score, which are 1 byte of data. By configuring it in this way, even if the command contains 2 bytes or more of data, the checksum can be configured as 1 byte. The count cumulative score has an upper limit of 65535.

Next, Figure 69 illustrates the contents of the loan notification command (sometimes called a loan notification). The loan notification command is a command that the gaming machine receives from the loaner machine as a receiving signal sent using pin 7 of the communication cable described above in Figure 66, and is a command that can be sent based on the operation of the loan button.

The command length of the loan notification command is 5 bytes, and the transmission direction is a command sent from the loaner machine to the gaming machine, and it is composed of the command length, command type, loan serial number, loan points, and checksum, and is more specifically composed as follows: The command length of No. 1 is 1 byte of data that is 0x05. The command type of No. 2 is 1 byte of data that is 0x13. The loan serial number of No. 3 is 1 byte of data that is 0x00 to 0xFF. The loan points of No. 4 is 1 byte of data that is 0x00 to 0xFF. The checksum of No. 5 is 1 byte of data.
The above-mentioned loan serial number may be referred to as a loan serial number, and may be collectively referred to as a serial number together with a serial number or a counting serial number.

Next, Figure 70 illustrates the contents of the loan receipt result response command (sometimes referred to as the loan receipt result response). The loan receipt result response command is a command sent from the gaming machine to the loan machine as a transmission signal sent using pin 6 of the communication cable described above in Figure 66.

The command length of the loan receipt result response command is 5 bytes, and the transmission direction is from the gaming machine to the loaner machine. It is composed of the command length, command type, loan serial number, loan point receipt result, and checksum, and is more specifically composed as follows. The command length of No. 1 is 1 byte of data that is 0x05. The command type of No. 2 is 1 byte of data that is 0x13. The loan serial number of No. 3 is 1 byte of data that is 0x00 to 0xFF. The loan point receipt result of No. 4 is 1 byte of data that is 0x00: normal, 0x01: abnormal (other values are judged to be abnormal). The checksum of No. 5 is 1 byte of data.

Next, Figure 71 shows the flow for gaming machine information notification. This figure illustrates the transmission and reception of information between the gaming machine side and the lending machine side. This figure also illustrates the case where HC and fraud monitoring information is sent as a gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side.

First, the gaming machine is powered on, and a gaming machine information notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine at a predetermined timing. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification immediately after powering on is 0. After that, about 100 ms later, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The counting serial number in the counting notification immediately after powering on is 0. After that, within 170 ms, a loan notification is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine. The loan serial number in the loan notification immediately after powering on is 0. After that, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The loan serial number in the loan receipt result response immediately after powering on is 0. After that, at a timing when more than 20 ms have passed and about 300 ms after the timing of sending the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is 1.

In this way, in this example, the gaming machine information notification is configured so that the serial number is 0 the first time the power is turned on, and thereafter is incremented by one for each command sent, as follows: "0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 255". Similarly, the counting serial number is 0 the first time the power is turned on, and thereafter is incremented by one for each command sent, as follows: "0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 255". Similarly, the loan serial number is 0 the first time the power is turned on, and thereafter is incremented by one for each command sent (each time a loan notification is sent), as follows: "0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 255".

After that, a gaming machine information notification is sent approximately every 300 ms, and a gaming machine information notification with a serial number of 255 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. After that, counting notifications, lending notifications, and lending receipt result responses are sent and received, and approximately 300 ms after a gaming machine information notification with a serial number of 255 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine, but the serial number is configured to be 1. In other words, the serial number is 0 only immediately after the power is turned on, and thereafter it is configured to progress as follows: "1 → 2 → ... → 255 → 1 → 2 → ...".

Although not shown, gaming machine installation information is transmitted from the gaming machine to the lender machine every 60 seconds as gaming machine information notification, and gaming machine performance information is transmitted from the gaming machine to the lender machine every 180 seconds. If the timing of transmission of gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or HC/fraud monitoring information overlaps, priorities are set and only commands with higher priorities are transmitted. An example of the priorities, from highest to lowest, is "gaming machine installation information → gaming machine performance information → HC/fraud monitoring information."

In this way, in this example, a serial number is provided for the gaming machine information notification, and the configuration is such that the consistency of commands can be achieved using this serial number (for example, if the serial number of the gaming machine information notification following a gaming machine information notification with serial number 5 is not 6, it can be determined that there is an abnormality). The serial number is configured to be stored in a specified memory area of the gaming machine.

When transmitting a serial number, the system is configured to perform a special addition process on the previously transmitted serial number (the serial number stored in a specified memory area) and transmit the result. (1) When the previous serial number is N (N is a value less than 255), the result of the special addition process is "N+1". (2) When the previous serial number is M (M is the maximum value, 255 in this example), the result of the special addition process is "1". The system is configured as in (1) and (2). By configuring in this way, when a serial number of 0 is transmitted, a device outside the gaming machine can also recognize that the gaming machine has been turned off, and it can be configured to detect fraud early.

Here, the special addition process will be described in detail. First, the conventional general addition process will be described in detail. In the case of N=100, (A1) when a normal addition process of adding "+1" to "100(D)" is performed, the result is "101(D)". (A2) Also, when a normal addition process of adding "+1" to "255(D)" corresponding to M is performed, a carry occurs and the result is "0(D)". On the other hand, when a special addition process is performed, (B1) when a special addition process of adding "+1" to "100(D)" is performed, the result is "101(D)". (B2) Also, when a special addition process of adding "+1" to "255(D)" corresponding to M is performed, a carry occurs by first performing a normal addition process of adding "+1", the result is "0(D)", and the carry causes the carry flag to become 1. The special addition process in this example is configured so that when the carry flag becomes 1, the calculation result is an arbitrary value of "1(D)", so when the special addition process of "+1" is performed on "255(D)", which corresponds to M, the calculation result becomes "1(D)".

In this example, the special addition process is configured so that when the carry flag becomes 1, the calculation result becomes an arbitrary value of "1 (D)", but the arbitrary value can be changed without any problems, and may be configured to become "100 (D)".

Note that the serial number, counting serial number, and loan serial number in this example may be 2-byte information, and even in such a configuration, (1) when the previous serial number is N (N is a value less than 65535), the result of executing the special addition process is "N+1". (2) when the previous serial number is M (M is the maximum value, which is 65535 in this example), the result of executing the special addition process is "1".

Note that while we have detailed the serial numbers related to gaming machine information notifications here, the same applies to the counting serial numbers related to counting notifications and the loan serial numbers related to loan notifications.

The timing for executing the special addition process described above may be any timing between after the gaming machine information notification is sent and before the next gaming machine information notification is sent. In other words, the special addition process is configured to be executed after the serial number is sent in order to update the next serial number.

In addition, when the memory area for storing the serial number related to the gaming machine information notification is the first memory area and the memory area for storing the counting serial number related to the counting notification is the second memory area, the first memory area and the second memory area may be configured to be continuous. In addition, when the memory area for storing the loan serial number related to the loan notification is configured to be possessed by the gaming machine side and the memory area for storing the loan serial number related to the loan notification is configured to be the third memory area, the first memory area and the third memory area may be configured to be continuous, or the second memory area and the third memory area may be configured to be continuous. In addition, when the power is turned on again after being turned off, as described above, the processing may be configured to execute a process to reset the serial number stored in the first memory area, the counting serial number stored in the second memory area, and the loan serial number stored in the third memory area to zero (if the gaming machine does not have a third memory area, the processing may be configured to execute a process to reset the first memory area and the second memory area to zero).

For example, if the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area are configured to have consecutive addresses, and the serial number is "F1A0", the counting serial number is "F1A1", and the loan serial number is "F1A2", when the power is turned from off to on and a process is executed to clear the serial number, counting serial number, and loan serial number to 0, the address corresponding to the serial number, "F1A0", is specified to execute the zero clear, and then the process of similarly clearing the next address to 0 is repeated twice, thereby clearing the serial number, counting serial number, and loan serial number to 0, and the data capacity required for the program can be reduced compared to when the addresses of the serial number, counting serial number, and loan serial number are specified and cleared to 0.

In addition, the information on the performance display device may be configured to be transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (rental machine, SC board) as a gaming machine information notification. In such a configuration, the information on the performance display device may be transmitted as gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or HC/fraud monitoring information among the gaming machine information notifications. The information on the performance display device may be configured as follows. (1) The display items described above in FIG. 64 and the like (accumulated advantageous zone ratio, accumulated indicated role ratio, continuous role ratio for 6000 games, role ratio for 6000 games, accumulated continuous role ratio, accumulated role ratio, accumulated role etc. state ratio) are transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine. That is, the display items are calculated within the gaming machine, and the calculation results are transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine. (2) The elements for displaying the display items described above in FIG. 64 and the like (elements used for calculation such as the accumulated number of games played when the first type special role is activated) are transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine. That is, the display items are not calculated within the gaming machine but are transmitted and are calculated outside the gaming machine (for example, on the SC board). (3) The display items (accumulated advantageous zone ratio, accumulated indicated feature ratio, consecutive feature ratio for 6000 games, feature ratio for 6000 games, accumulated consecutive feature ratio, accumulated feature ratio, accumulated feature etc. state ratio) described above in FIG. 64 and the like and elements for displaying the display items (elements used for calculation such as the accumulated number of games played when the first type special feature is activated) are transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine.

As mentioned above, the gaming machine is configured to be able to send a gaming machine information notification to the outside at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 300 ms). When the gaming machine information notification is sent to the outside, a counting notification is then sent. However, if the gaming machine information notification cannot be sent to the outside due to the influence of noise or the like, no counting notification is sent after that. Also, when configured in this way, if the gaming machine information notification cannot be sent to the outside due to the influence of noise or the like, the total score is not added after that based on the operation of the lending button.

Also, the gaming machine may be configured so that the IN/OUT information can be transmitted outside the gaming machine as a gaming machine information notification. In such a case, the IN/OUT information is transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information among the gaming machine information notifications, but may also be transmitted as gaming machine performance information or as gaming machine installation information. The configuration of the IN/OUT information may be as follows. In addition, since the following (1) to (3) are explained using a replay as an example, both the input points and the awarded points are 0 points, but it goes without saying that, for example, if the previous game was not a replay and the current game was a loss, the input points will be 3 points and the awarded points will be 0 points, and if the previous game was not a replay and the current game was a bell, the input points will be 3 points and the awarded points will be 11 points. (1) At a timing after the start lever operation for the next game in which a symbol combination related to a replay is stopped is accepted, the gaming machine sends to the outside a gaming machine information notification indicating that the game is a game in which a symbol combination related to a replay is stopped (sometimes referred to as replay operation status information), IN information of the input points (0 points) for that game, and OUT information of the awarded points (0 points) for the previous game in which a symbol combination related to a replay is stopped (sometimes referred to as replay operation status information). (2) At a timing after a symbol combination related to a replay is stopped, the gaming machine sends to the outside a gaming machine information notification indicating that the game is a game in which a symbol combination related to a replay is stopped and The OUT information of the awarded points (0 points) for that game is transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside, and then, after the operation of the start lever is accepted, the IN information of the input points (0 points) for that game is transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside as a gaming machine information notification. (3) After the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed, the OUT information of the awarded points (0 points) is transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside as a gaming machine information notification, and, after the operation of the start lever for the next game in which the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed, the IN information of the input points (0 points) is transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside as a gaming machine information notification.

Next, FIG. 72 shows the flow of the rental notification command. This figure illustrates a configuration that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this embodiment for sending and receiving information between the gaming machine and the rental machine.

<A: Configuration 1 in which the lending button can be enabled while the reels are spinning>
A certain game is executed, and the reels start to rotate. After that, the rental button of the rental machine is turned from OFF to ON while the reels are rotating. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points. As described above, the "total score" is all the scores that can be inserted into the medal-less reel type gaming machine, and is data managed by the payout control board, but may be managed by the main control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of gaming medals placed on the medal tray of the reel type gaming machine P that uses actual gaming medals. When the configuration of the medal-less reel type gaming machine is applied to the above-mentioned embodiment, there is no problem in treating what is called "game medals" in this specification as "scores", "score information", "points held", "points held information", "game value", "game value information", etc., and there is no problem in calling them as "scores", "score information", "points held", "points held information", "game value", and "game value information" as appropriate. There is no problem in calling them as "credits". The stored total score is configured to be displayed on the total score display device.

After that, a gaming machine information notification containing information on total score = 30, which is serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and about 100 ms later, a counting notification containing information on counting score = 0 and cumulative counting score = 0, which is counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and within 170 ms thereafter, a loan notification containing information on loan score = 50, which is loan serial number p, is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine. After that, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan score receipt result is normal, which is loan serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan score of 50 points is added to the total score, making the total score 30 + 50 = 80 points (the total score display device also displays 80 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numbers or the same numbers. After that, when 20 ms or more have passed and approximately 300 ms has passed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, another gaming machine information notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1.

<B: Configuration 2 in which the lending button can be enabled while the reels are spinning>
A certain game is executed and the reels start to spin. After that, while the reels are spinning, the rental button of the rental machine is turned from OFF to ON. The total points stored in the gaming machine are 9980 points.

After that, a gaming machine information notification containing information on total score = 9980, which is serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and about 100 ms later, a counting notification containing information on counting points = 0 and cumulative counting points = 0, which is counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and within 170 ms thereafter, a loan notification containing information on loan points = 50, which is loan serial number p, is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine. After that, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is abnormal, which is loan serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan points of 50 are not added to the total score, and the total score remains at 9980 points (the display on the total score display device also remains at 9980 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numbers or the same numbers. After that, when 20 ms or more have passed and approximately 300 ms has passed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, another gaming machine information notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1.

The configurations A and B above allow points to be lent out by operating the lending button even while the reels are spinning, but the upper limit of the total points in the medal-less reel-type gaming machine of this embodiment is 9999, and in cases where the upper limit is not exceeded even when 50 points, which are points added based on the operation of the lending button, are added as in A above, 50 points are lent out and added to the total points (30 + 50 = 80), whereas in cases where the upper limit of the total points is exceeded when 50 points, which are points added based on the operation of the lending button, are added as in B above, 50 points are not lent out (not added), and the total points remain at 9980.

By configuring as in A and B above, it is possible to configure the system so that the points can be loaned out even while the reels are spinning, so that the next game can be played as smoothly as possible, and it is also possible to configure the system so that the total points do not exceed the upper limit.

In the figure, an example is shown of a configuration in which the lending of points is not performed if the total score exceeds the upper limit when 50 points are added based on the operation of the lending button, but this is not limited to this, and the system may be configured to not lend points (no lending is performed even if the lending button is operated) if the total score reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 9950).

The predetermined value for the total score mentioned above, in other words, the maximum upper limit of the total score that can be counted by the payout control board, is 9950 as an example, but this maximum upper limit is not limited to this. In other words, the capacity of the memory area required to store this 9950 is 2 bytes, but within this 2-byte range, an appropriate value such as 16383 can be set. Furthermore, it goes without saying that the number of digits that the total score display device can display can be set appropriately according to the specifications, such as 4 digits for 9950, 5 digits for 16383, etc.

Here, when three points (the specified number) have been bet on a medal-less reel-type gaming machine, and the replay switch or loan button is operated as described above, the specified number of points are transferred to the gaming machine (a new loan has occurred, etc.), resulting in a state in which the specified number of points have been bet and the maximum upper limit value described above (9950, 16383, etc.) is displayed. In this case, the sum of the points bet and the points stored in the payout control board exceeds the maximum upper limit value that the payout control board can count, so even if the settlement button described above is operated, the points bet as a result of this operation will not be added to the points stored in the payout control board (will not be settled). The same is true for gaming machines where 1 point or 2 points have been bet on; in short, if the payout button or the like is operated while a bet has been made and the total points managed by the payout control board reach the maximum upper limit (9950, 16383, etc.), it is not possible to settle by operating the settlement button (adding to the total points) or to proceed with the game by operating the start switch (because winning would exceed the upper limit) (note that even in this situation where game progress is not possible, operation of the counting switch (counting button) is valid). In this case, in order to proceed with the game, it is necessary to subtract the total points by operating the counting operation, so a notification is issued to encourage operation of the counting switch by images from the performance display device S40 or sound from the speaker, etc.

When a bet has been placed, the start switch may be enabled to allow the game to proceed. In this case, if a win occurs as a result of the game and the maximum upper limit is exceeded, the game may be stopped as an error before being added to the total score.

In addition, a predetermined timing before the maximum upper limit is reached (if the upper limit is 16383, the timing when it reaches 16300) can be set as a pre-upper limit, and when this is reached, a notification can be issued to notify the user that counting will continue in order to prevent the maximum upper limit from being reached.

The following patterns are possible for this pre-upper limit (predetermined timing). In the following patterns, the specified number is A (e.g., 3), the current total score is B (e.g., any value between 0 and 16383), the maximum score (hereinafter referred to as "transfer score") that is transferred (lent) from the lending machine to the gaming machine with one operation of the lending button is C (e.g., 50), the maximum upper limit of the total score is D (e.g., 16383), and the maximum score for winning is E (e.g., 15).
(Pattern 1)
When a specified number of points A has been bet, a new loan is made by operating the replay switch or loan button as described above, resulting in a state in which the total points reach the maximum upper limit D and the specified number has been bet, as follows. That is, when there is a current total point B before the bet, a bet of the specified number A is made, the total point after the bet becomes "total point B - specified number A", and then a new loan is made, the total point after this new loan becomes "total point B - specified number A + transition point C", and the total point with this new loan is equal to or greater than the maximum upper limit D of the total points, the above-mentioned settlement is not performed. This is shown below as formula (1).
B-A+C≧D Equation (1)

Here, if the current total score B before the bet satisfies the following formula (2), it does not mean that the total score has reached the maximum upper limit value D and the specified number A has been bet, but if the following formula (3) is satisfied, it can be said that the total score has reached the maximum upper limit value D and the specified number A has been bet.
B < D - C + A ... Equation (2)
B≧D−C+A Equation (3)

Specifically, if the specified number A is 3, the transition score C is 50 (note that this 50 is 1000 yen if 20 yen is used to lend one point), and the maximum upper limit D is 16383 as mentioned above, then the result is "Maximum upper limit D 16383 - Transition score C 50 + Specified number A 3 = 16336". In this case, if the current total score B is less than this "16336" (if formula (2) is satisfied), the specified number A + current total score B will not exceed the maximum upper limit D of the total score even if transition score C is added after betting the specified number A, but if the current total score B is equal to or greater than this "16336" (if formula (3) is satisfied), the specified number A + current total score B will exceed the maximum upper limit D of the total score if transition score C is added after betting the specified number A.

Therefore, in the case of pattern 1, the value before the current total score B satisfies the above formula (3) is set as the pre-upper limit, and when this pre-upper limit is reached, a notification is issued to encourage the operation of the counting switch. Specifically, when the current total score B reaches the above-mentioned "16336", in order to satisfy the above-mentioned formula (3), the pre-upper limit is set to a value less than the above-mentioned "16336", for example, "16335", which is one less than the above-mentioned "16336", or, in the sense of having some leeway, the pre-upper limit is set to a value "16321", which is 15 less than the above-mentioned "16336", or "16386", which is 50 less than the above-mentioned "16336", and a notification is issued to encourage the operation of the counting switch. In this way, the pre-upper limit can be set arbitrarily from among the values less than the above-mentioned "16336". Here, since the current total score B when the pre-limit has been reached has not yet reached the maximum limit D, it goes without saying that settlement will be carried out by pressing the settlement button (the same applies to pattern 2 described below). In this way, by adopting pattern 1 as the pre-limit, it is possible to prevent problems such as settlement not being carried out due to a new loan or the game being unable to progress, and it is possible to provide a smooth gameplay.

In addition, if the current total score B exceeds the pre-upper limit even once, and then a bet operation is performed and the current total score B falls below the pre-upper limit, the notification encouraging the player to operate the counting switch may be terminated, or the notification encouraging the player to operate the counting switch may be continued. In this case, even if the current total score B falls below the pre-upper limit due to a bet operation, it will still be in a state where it will immediately reach the pre-upper limit (a state where the pre-upper limit will be exceeded if a counting operation or lending operation is performed even once), so continuing the notification encouraging the player to operate the counting switch is more effective at encouraging the player to operate the counting switch. Even if the notification encouraging the player to operate the counting switch is terminated, it may decrease depending on the subsequent play, so the annoyance caused by the notification can be reduced.

(Pattern 2)
When a player wins a total number of points as a result of playing a game, if the added points from the winnings exceed the maximum upper limit D, the player cannot add any more points. In other words, if the following formula (5) is satisfied, the player cannot add any more points from the winnings that exceed the maximum upper limit D.
B + E>D ... Equation (5)

Here, if the current total score B before winning satisfies the following formula (6), the total score will not exceed the maximum upper limit value D, and if the following formula (7) is satisfied, the total score will exceed the maximum upper limit value D.
B≦D−E Equation (6)
B>D-E...Equation (7)

Specifically, if the maximum score E for winning is 15 and the maximum upper limit D is the above-mentioned 16383, then "maximum upper limit D of 16383 - maximum score for winning 15 = 16368". In this case, if the current total score B before winning is less than this "16368" (if formula (6) is satisfied), the total score will not exceed the maximum upper limit D, but if the current total score B before winning is more than this "16368" (in other words, "16369" or more) (if formula (7) is satisfied), the total score will exceed the maximum upper limit D.

Therefore, in the case of this pattern 2, the value before the current total score B before winning satisfies the above formula (6) is set as the pre-upper limit, and when this pre-upper limit is reached, a notification is made to encourage the operation of the counting switch. Specifically, when the current total score B before winning becomes the above-mentioned "16369", in order to satisfy the above-mentioned formula (7), a value less than the above-mentioned "16369" of the current total score B before winning is set as the pre-upper limit, for example, "16368", which is one less than the above-mentioned "16369", or a value that is 15 less than the above-mentioned "16369", "16354", or 50 less than the above-mentioned "16369", is set as the pre-upper limit to give a margin, and a notification is made to encourage the operation of the counting switch. In this way, the pre-upper limit can be set arbitrarily from among the values less than the above-mentioned "16369". In this way, by adopting Pattern 2 as the pre-limit value, it is possible to prevent problems such as the inability to count or settle accounts or the inability to progress in the game due to points obtained through winning, and to provide a smooth gameplay experience.

In the above embodiment, pattern 1 and pattern 2 show an example of when the current total score B reaches the pre-upper limit as the timing for making the notification, but if a loan is made during play (while the reels are spinning) and the current total score B reaches the pre-upper limit, the notification may be made after the game ends. In this case, the progress of the game will not be impeded. Furthermore, the timing for determining whether the pre-upper limit has been reached may be at any time, after one game ends, when a loan request is made, when counting or settlement is made, or a combination of these.

In this embodiment, in the case of the above-mentioned pattern 1, the performance display device S40 prompts the player to count by displaying a first display such as "The maximum number of total points that can be counted due to lending will be exceeded, so please count," and in the case of the above-mentioned pattern 2, the performance display device S40 prompts the player to count by displaying a second display such as "The maximum number of total points that can be counted due to winning will be exceeded, so please count," so that a notification that prompts the player to count is given according to each pattern. In this embodiment, once a notification that prompts the player to count has been given, even after the total points have fallen below the pre-upper limit as a result of the counting performed due to the notification, the notification that prompts the player to count may be continued even during play, for example, for a predetermined number of games thereafter, or until a predetermined operation (for example, a specific reset operation) is performed to cancel the notification that prompts the player to count. In this way, it is easier for hall staff and surrounding players to notice that a notification that prompts the player to count has been given, thereby improving security.

In addition, game sounds such as background music and sound effects during the notification to encourage counting are output as normal, but the game sound related to the notification to encourage counting (hereinafter referred to as "this game sound") may be louder than game sounds during the performance during the game (hereinafter referred to as "other game sounds"). In addition, this game sound may be the same volume as an error sound, which is generally louder than other game sounds, or it may be louder than the error sound. In addition, a sound (music) dedicated to this game sound may be prepared, and the output sound mode (tempo, melody, etc.) may be different from other performance sounds, or it may be a common mode with the error sound, or a different mode from the error sound, and appropriate changes are possible. A method of making this game sound louder can be realized by making the volume of this game sound louder than other game sounds, or by setting the volume of other game sounds to 0. In this way, by making the game sounds louder than those during normal performances, it becomes easier for hall staff and surrounding players to notice that a notification is being made encouraging them to count, thereby improving security.

In addition to patterns 1 and 2, a situation may also be considered in which the total score exceeds the maximum upper limit D due to a new loan made by operating the replay switch or loan button during play (for example, making new loans multiple times during play). In order to prevent this, a pre-upper limit similar to that of patterns 1 and 2 may be set, and when this pre-upper limit is reached during play, a notification may be made to encourage counting. In this case, the value of the pre-upper limit is not limited to the value of patterns 1 and 2 described above, and any value below the value α calculated from the maximum upper limit D - the maximum C of the transition score (a value that is below the maximum upper limit D even if a new loan of the maximum C occurs during play) may be set as the pre-upper limit. In this case, a notification such as the above-mentioned notification sound is made to encourage counting even during play. In this way, it is possible to suppress new loans being made indiscriminately during play, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the total score exceeds the maximum upper limit D due to a new loan during play. Alternatively, it is possible to configure the machine so that no new loans can be made while a game is in progress (specifically, the game machine could be configured so that the score is not added even if a new loan is made from the loan machine, or the replay switch and loan button mentioned above could be disabled while a game is in progress, etc.).

In this embodiment, the pre-upper limit for the counting notification is set in both patterns 1 and 2, but it is also possible to set the counting notification to be set only in either pattern 1 or 2. If only the counting notification is set at the specified timing, and the player does not notice it and borrows from the lending machine, it is possible to lend only the transferred points from the lending machine that do not exceed the maximum upper limit D, and invalidate the points that exceed it. Similarly, if only the counting notification is set at the specified timing, and the player does not notice it and plays the game and wins, it is possible to add only the points obtained by winning to the points that do not exceed the maximum upper limit D, and invalidate the points that exceed it.

In addition, in the patterns 1 and 2 of this embodiment, only the notification to prompt the player to count is given at the above-mentioned predetermined timing, but instead of this, it may be configured to stop the lending from the lending machine and not allow the game to proceed, or it may be configured to give a notification to prompt the player to count but not stop the lending from the lending machine or not allow the game to proceed. In the case where the notification to prompt the player to count but not stop the lending from the lending machine or not allow the game to proceed, if the player performs counting in accordance with the notification to prompt the player to count and the situation satisfies the above formula (2) or (6), the suspension of the lending from the lending machine may be lifted or the game may be allowed to proceed, or even if the situation satisfies the above formula (2) or (6), the suspension of the lending from the lending machine or the suspension of the game may be maintained until a predetermined reset operation or the like is performed. Also, in this embodiment, when the pre-upper limit is greater than the maximum upper limit D, settlement is possible by pressing the settlement button. However, instead, even when the pre-upper limit is reached, a notification to that effect may be displayed and the operation of the settlement button may be invalidated, stopping settlement by pressing the settlement button.

In addition, if the notification prompting counting is issued and lending from the lending machine is stopped or game progress is prevented, the notification prompting counting may be continued for a predetermined number of games thereafter, or until a predetermined operation to cancel the notification prompting counting (for example, performing a specific reset operation) is performed, as in the above embodiment, even after the suspension of lending from the lending machine is lifted or game progress is permitted. This provides the same action and effect as the above embodiment.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game cannot proceed by disabling the start switch operation, etc., but instead, the start switch may be enabled and the reels may rotate, but the stop operation may remain disabled, or at least one of the first and second stop buttons may be enabled, but the stop button for the final stop may be disabled. In short, in order to prevent a win from occurring, disabling the stop button for the final stop is the minimum necessary, so any operation part from the bet operation to the second stop operation in the game flow may be disabled, and there is no particular limit as to which operation is disabled. Here, as described in the above embodiment, it goes without saying that the operation to the counting switch remains enabled even in a situation in which the game cannot proceed, but instead, the operation to the counting switch may also be disabled in a situation in which the game cannot proceed.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the total score reaches the maximum upper limit value D after a specified number of bets have been made, the above-mentioned settlement cannot be made. However, in response to this, for example, a value obtained by subtracting a specified number from the maximum upper limit value D (specifically, for 9950, the specified number 3 is subtracted to 9947, and for 16383, the specified number 3 is subtracted to 16380, etc.) can be set as the upper limit value beyond which no more points will be loaned out or won, allowing settlement by operating the settlement button at any time.

In addition, in the same figure, the configuration is such that the loan points are not added to the total points, and the gaming machine sends a loan receipt result response containing information indicating that the loan point receipt result is abnormal, but this is not limited to this, and the lending machine may send information indicating that the loan points = 0 as a loan notification to be sent to the gaming machine. In other words, if the lending machine determines that the loan points can be added, the lending machine may send information indicating that the loan points = 50 as a loan notification to be sent to the gaming machine, and if the loan points are not to be added, the lending machine may send information indicating that the loan points = 0 as a loan notification to be sent to the gaming machine.

<C: Configuration 1 in which the lending button is not enabled while the reels are spinning>
A game is executed and the reels start to spin. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points.

After that, a gaming machine information notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine side, containing information on total score = 30 (serial number n) and information on the loan button not being operable (information indicating that operation of the loan button is invalid because the reels are spinning), and approximately 100 ms later, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine side, containing information on counting points = 0 and cumulative counting points = 0 (counting serial number m), and within 170 ms thereafter, a loan notification is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side, containing information on loan points = 0 (loan serial number p).

After that, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal, which is loan serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score remains at 30 (the total score display device also displays 30 points). Note that n, m, and p above may be different numbers or may be the same number.

After that, the rental button of the rental machine is turned from OFF to ON while the reels are rotating. After that, at a timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the transmission of the previous rental receipt result response and about 300 ms after the timing of the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification is again transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information of total score=30 and rental button operation impossible information (information that the operation of the rental button is invalid because the reels are rotating). After that, about 100 ms later, a counting notification including information of counting serial number m+1, counting points=0, and counting cumulative points=0 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and within 170 ms thereafter, a rental notification including information of rental serial number p+1 and rental points=0 is transmitted from the rental machine side to the gaming machine side. In this way, in configuration C, information indicating that the loan button cannot be operated is transmitted from the gaming machine to the lending machine, so that the loan points of 0 are transmitted from the lending machine to the gaming machine.

After that, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal, which is loan serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score remains at 30 (the total score display device also displays 30 points).

In this way, while the reels are spinning, a gaming machine information notification including information that the loan button cannot be operated (information indicating that operation of the loan button is invalid because the reels are spinning) is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, making it possible to clearly distinguish between the period during which play is in progress and the loan operation.

In addition, in the figure, the loan points are added to the total points based on the sending of the loan receipt result response, but it may also be configured to add the loan points to the total points based on the receiving of the loan notification.

<D: Configuration in which the bet button may be disabled during lending>
Next, FIG. 73 will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points, the bet button is enabled, and a gaming machine information notification including information of total score = 30, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine side, and about 100 ms later, a counting notification including information of counting score = 0 and counting cumulative score = 0, which is the counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine side, and within 170 ms thereafter, a lending notification including information of lending score = 0, which is the lending serial number p, is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10 ms, a lending receipt result response including information that the lending point receipt result is normal, which is the lending serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine side, and the total score remains 30 points (the display of the total score display device also remains 30 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical values.

After that, the rental button on the rental machine changes from OFF to ON. After that, more than 20 ms has passed since the previous rental receipt result response was sent, and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the rental machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1, and contains information on total score = 30. After that, approximately 100 ms later, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine, containing information on counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and cumulative counting points = 0, and within 170 ms thereafter, a rental notification is sent from the rental machine to the gaming machine, containing information on rental points = 50, and containing rental serial number p+1. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response with loan serial number p+1 is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, including information that the loan point receipt result is normal, and the loan points of 50 are added to the total score, making the total score 30 + 50 = 80 points (the total score display device also shows 80 points).

In this configuration, the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 200 ms) immediately after the total score is added. This is when 20 ms or more has passed since the previous loan receipt result response was sent, and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lender machine, and then, as a predetermined period of time has passed since the total score was added, the bet button is enabled again.

In this way, in the configuration of D, when an addition to the total score is performed by a lending operation, the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period of time. During the period when the bet button is disabled, the player may be notified that a loan of points is being performed. For example, the display of the total score display device may be configured to flash, or the total score display may be displayed to increase stepwise from 30 to 80. Also, a sound corresponding to the increase in the total score may be output on the sub-control board S side. Note that the predetermined period is not limited to 200 ms, and may be changed as appropriate. Note that the timing when the addition to the total score is performed by the lending operation and the predetermined period when the bet button is disabled may be configured to overlap, or may not overlap (the bet button is disabled immediately after the addition to the total score is performed by the lending operation).

In addition, in the figure, the loan points are added to the total score when the loan receipt result response is sent, but it may also be configured to add the loan points to the total score when the loan notification is received. Also, while it is configured to disable operation of the bet button for a predetermined period of time from the time the loan receipt result response is sent, it may also be configured to disable operation of the bet button for a predetermined period of time from the time the loan notification is received.

As described above, in the configuration of D, when the gaming machine receives a loan notification including a loan point value of 1 or more and the total points are added, the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period of time, whereas when the gaming machine receives a loan notification including information that the loan points are 0 and the total points are not added, the bet button is not disabled (the button does not go from enabled to disabled upon receipt of the loan notification). By configuring the device in this way, it is possible to prevent processes that affect the game, such as the process of adding to the total points and the betting process, from being executed in duplicate.

In the figure, a configuration in which the bet button is disabled for a specified time when points are lent is described in detail, but it is not limited to the bet button, and the start lever, insertion of a game medal, starting of reel spinning, etc. may also be configured to be disabled for a specified time when points are lent.

If the machine is being loaned out when the gaming machine information notification is sent, and the loan ends before the loan notification command is received, the system is configured to allow points to be added based on the loan operation.

<E: Configuration 1 regarding loan acceptance result response>
Next, FIG. 74 will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points, and the lending button is turned from off to on. After that, a gaming machine information notification including information on total score = 30, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and about 100 ms later, a counting notification including information on counting score = 0 and counting cumulative score = 0, which is the counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and within 170 ms thereafter, a lending notification including information on lending score = 50, which is the lending serial number 5, is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine. After that, within 10 ms, a lending receipt result response including information that the lending score receipt result is normal, which is the lending serial number 5, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the lending score of 50 points is added to the total score, and the total score becomes 30 + 50 = 80 points (the display on the total score display device also becomes 80 points). The above n and m may be different values or may be the same value.

After that, the rental button on the rental machine changes from OFF to ON. After that, more than 20 ms has passed since the previous rental receipt result response was sent, and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the rental machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1, and contains information on total score = 80. After that, approximately 100 ms later, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine, which contains information on counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and cumulative counting points = 0, and within 170 ms thereafter, a rental notification is sent from the rental machine to the gaming machine, which contains information on rental points = 50, and contains information on rental serial number 1. Within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is abnormal, resulting in loan serial number 1, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, the loan points are not added to the total score, and the total score remains at 80 points (the total score display device also displays 80 points). Thus, in the configuration of E, if a loan notification with loan serial number 5 is received and then the next loan notification is received, and the loan notification with loan serial number 1 is received due to noise or other factors, even though the loan notification should actually be number 6 (if a loan notification with a different loan serial number is received), a loan receipt result response indicating that there is an abnormality is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score is not added.

<F: Configuration 2 regarding loan acceptance result response>
The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points, and the lending button is turned off and then on. After that, a gaming machine information notification containing information on total score = 30, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and about 100 ms later, a counting notification containing information on counting score = 0 and counting cumulative score = 0, which is the counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and within 170 ms, a lending notification containing information on lending score = 50, which is the lending serial number 255, is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine. After that, within 10 ms, a lending receipt result response containing information that the lending score receipt result is normal, which is the lending serial number 255, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the lending score of 50 points is added to the total score, and the total score becomes 30 + 50 = 80 points (the display on the total score display device also becomes 80 points). Note that the above n and m may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value.

After that, the rental button on the rental machine changes from OFF to ON. After that, more than 20 ms has passed since the previous rental receipt result response was sent, and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the rental machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1, and contains information on total score = 80. After that, approximately 100 ms later, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine, which contains information on counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and cumulative counting points = 0, and within 170 ms thereafter, a rental notification is sent from the rental machine to the gaming machine, which contains information on rental points = 50, and contains information on rental serial number 1. Thereafter, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response including information that the loan point receipt result is normal, which is loan serial number 1, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan points of 50 are added to the total score, making the total score 80 + 50 = 130 points (the total score display device also displays 130 points). Thus, in the configuration of F, when a loan notification with loan serial number 255 is received and then the next loan notification is received, the loan serial number is 1, and in this example, the upper limit of the loan serial number is 255, and the number following 255 is 1, so that the next time after 255, a loan notification with the correct loan serial number, 1, is received, and so a loan receipt result response including information that the loan point receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. In this way, by cycling the rental serial number between 1 and 255, it is possible to ensure consistency between the gaming machine and the outside world without putting a strain on the capacity of the memory area that stores the rental serial numbers.

<A: Flow 1 for counting notification command>
Next, the flow of the counting notification in this example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 75. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 200 points, and a gaming machine information notification including information of total score = 200, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and then the counting button is turned off → on. After that, while the counting button is kept on, about 20 ms elapses, and the display of the total score display device is subtracted by 50, and becomes 200 → 150 (the display of the total score display device and the subtraction of the total score based on the operation of the counting button are sometimes referred to as being settled, settlement processing being executed, etc.). After that, about 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification including information of counting score = 50 and counting cumulative score = 50, which is the serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the counting score of 50 is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 150 points. The timing for subtracting the display of the total score display device and the timing for subtracting the stored total score may be simultaneous. The timing may be about 20 ms after the count button is turned from off to on, in other words, the timing when the count button is pressed and held down, or the timing when the count notification is sent.

Within 170 ms thereafter, a loan notification containing information that the loan points = 0 and which becomes the loan serial number p is sent from the loaner to the gaming machine. Within 10 ms thereafter, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan points receipt result is normal and which becomes the loan serial number p is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner, and the total score remains at 150 points (the total score display device also remains at 150 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value.

After that, the counting button remains on, and at a timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the transmission of the previous rental receipt result response and about 300 ms after the timing of the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information on total score = 150. After that, about 300 ms after the timing of the subtraction of the display on the total score display device, the display on the total score display device is subtracted by 50, and it becomes 150 → 100. After that, about 100 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification, a counting notification with counting serial number m+1 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, including information on counting points = 50 and counting cumulative points = 100, and the counting points of 50 are subtracted from the total score, making the total score 100.

Within 170 ms thereafter, a loan notification containing information that the loan points = 0 and the loan serial number becomes p+1 is sent from the loaner to the gaming machine. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal and the loan serial number becomes p+1 is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner, and the total score remains at 150 points (the display on the total score display device also remains at 150 points).

After that, the counting button turns from on to off, and at a timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous rental receipt result response was sent, and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+2, and contains information on total score=100. After that, approximately 300 ms after the previous subtraction timing of the total score display device, since the counting button was turned off, the display on the total score display device is not subtracted. After that, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification was sent, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, containing information on counting serial number m+2, counting points=0, and counting cumulative points=100, and the total score remains at 100 points.

Within 170 ms thereafter, a loan notification with loan serial number p+2 and information that loan points = 0 is sent from the loaner to the gaming machine. Within 10 ms thereafter, a loan receipt result response with loan serial number p+2 and information that the loan point receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner, and the total score remains at 100 (the total score display device also remains at 100). Then, more than 20 ms after the previous loan receipt result response was sent and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the loaner. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+3, and it contains information that the total score = 100.

<B: Flow 2 for Counting Notification Command>
The total score stored in the gaming machine is 200 points, and a gaming machine information notice containing the information of total score = 200, which becomes serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and then the counting button is turned from OFF to ON. After that, about 20 ms pass while the counting button is kept ON, and the display on the total score display device is decremented by 50, changing from 200 to 150. After that, the counting button is turned from ON to OFF, and about 100 ms after the gaming machine information notice is sent, a counting notice containing the information of counting score = 50 and accumulated counting score = 50, which becomes counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the counting score of 50 is subtracted from the total score, making the total score 150. In this way, in configuration B, even if the counting button is turned off → on after sending a gaming machine information notification, and then a long press of the counting button is detected (20 ms has passed since the counting button was turned off → on), and the counting button is turned on → off before sending the counting notification, a counting notification including information that counting points = 50 and cumulative counting points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine to the lender machine, and the counting points of 50 are subtracted from the total score, making the total score 150 points.

The timing of subtraction of the display of the total score display device and the timing of subtraction of the stored total score may be simultaneous. This timing may be approximately 20 ms after the counting button is turned from OFF to ON, in other words, the timing of detecting a long press of the counting button, or the timing of sending the counting notification. When configured in this way, the system will be configured as follows. (1) Even if the counting button is turned from OFF to ON after sending the gaming machine information notification, and then turned from ON to OFF before sending the counting notification, the total score and the display of the total score display device can be updated at the timing of detecting a long press of the counting button. (2) Even if the counting button is turned from OFF to ON after sending the gaming machine information notification, and then turned from ON to OFF before sending the counting notification, the total score and the display of the total score display device can be updated at the timing of sending the counting notification.

The total score display device may be configured to be able to both store the total score and display the total score. Even in this case, the total score and the display of the total score may be updated approximately 20 ms after the counting button is turned off and then on, in other words, when it detects that the counting button has been pressed and held down, or the total score and the display of the total score may be updated when a counting notification is sent.

Within 170 ms thereafter, a loan notification containing loan points = 0, which will be loan serial number p, is sent from the loaner to the gaming machine. Within 10 ms thereafter, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal, which will be loan serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner, and the total score remains at 150 points (the total score display device also remains at 150 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values or the same numerical values.

After that, more than 20 ms has passed since the previous rental receipt response was sent, and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, and a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1, and it contains information about the total score = 150.

By configuring it in this manner, even if the counting button is turned from Off to On after sending the gaming machine information notification, and then turned from On to Off before sending the counting notification, the display of the total score and total score display device can be updated, and the counting points and cumulative counting points can be sent outside the gaming machine via the counting notification.Even if the player appears to have stopped operating the counting button (released his/her hand) at the time when he/she recognizes that the settlement has been carried out, information can be accurately sent outside the gaming machine.

The counting button according to this embodiment may be configured as follows.
<Configuration 1> (1) When the counting button is operated continuously for a predetermined period of time while in an enabled state, the total score is subtracted and a counting notice including a predetermined number of counting points is sent. (2) The gaming machine sends a gaming machine information notice to the rental machine at predetermined intervals. (3) When the gaming machine information notice is sent, the counting notice is sent after the predetermined time has elapsed. (4) If the counting button is turned from on to off after sending the gaming machine information notice and before receiving the rental notice, the total score is subtracted at the next timing of sending the counting notice.

<Configuration 2> (1) When the counting button is operated continuously for a specified time while in an enabled state, the total score is subtracted and a counting notice containing a specified number of counting points is sent (2) The gaming machine sends a gaming machine information notice to the rental machine at specified intervals (3) When a gaming machine information notice is sent, a counting notice is sent after a specified time has elapsed (4) If the counting button is turned on and then off after sending the gaming machine information notice and before receiving the rental notice, the total score is not subtracted the next time the counting notice is sent

<Configuration 3> (1) When the counting button is operated continuously for a specified time while in an enabled state, the total score is subtracted and a counting notice containing a specified number of counting points is sent (2) The gaming machine sends a gaming machine information notice to the rental machine at specified intervals (3) When a gaming machine information notice is sent, a counting notice is sent after a specified time has elapsed (4) After sending the gaming machine information notice, even if the counting button is turned from off to on, the total score is not subtracted the next time a counting notice is sent

<Configuration 4> (1) When the counting button is enabled and operated continuously for a certain period of time, the total score is subtracted and a counting notification command including the counting score is sent. (2) If a power outage occurs while the counting button is on, and the power is restored afterwards with the counting button still pressed, the total score is not subtracted.

<Configuration 5> (1) When the counting button is operated continuously for a certain period of time while in an enabled state, the total score is subtracted and a counting notification command including the counting score is sent. (2) If the counting button is pressed during the wait (minimum time between plays timer value > 0), the reels start spinning, and if the counting button is kept pressed, the stop button cannot be operated. Also, the total score is not subtracted.

<Configuration 6>
During the above-mentioned spin start freeze or stop freeze, the settlement process based on the operation of the count button may be executed, or the settlement process based on the operation of the count button may not be executed. Note that during the above-mentioned spin start freeze or stop freeze, the addition of the total points based on the operation of the lending button may be executed, or the addition of the total points based on the operation of the lending button may not be executed.

<Configuration 7-1>
The system may be configured so that score settlement can be performed when the counting button is operated while the front door DU is open (when a door open error has occurred), and by configuring it in this way, the player or administrator can settle the scores at any time, regardless of whether the front door DU is open or not.
<Configuration 7-2>
The system may be configured so that score settlement is not performed when the counting button is operated while the front door DU is open (when a door open error has occurred).By configuring in this way, even if the front door DU is open and fraud has been committed inside the gaming machine, the system is configured so that score settlement is not performed, thereby preventing situations that are detrimental to the gaming facility.

<Configuration 8-1>
The system may be configured so that if the front door DU is opened (a door open error occurs) while the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held), score settlement can continue. By configuring in this way, the player or administrator can settle the scores at any time, regardless of whether the front door DU is open or not.

<Configuration 8-2>
The system may be configured so that if the front door DU is opened (a door open error occurs) while the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held), score settlement will not be performed.By configuring the system in this way, even if the front door DU is opened and fraud has been committed inside the gaming machine, score settlement will not be performed, thereby preventing situations that would be detrimental to the gaming facility.

<Configuration 9-1>
If a power outage occurs while the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held), and then the power is turned on again with the counting button still on (the counting button is pressed and held), the counting cumulative points in the first counting notification after the power is turned on will be 0, and the counting serial number will also be 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the counting cumulative points and other information related to the settlement after the power is turned on.
<Configuration 9-2>
If the power is cut off while the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held), the counting button is then turned off (the counting button is not operated), and the power is turned on again, the accumulated count points in the first counting notification after the power is turned on will be 0, and the counting serial number will also be 0. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to grasp the accumulated count points and other information related to the settlement after the power is turned on.

<Configuration 10>
The device may be configured so that settlement will not be performed even if the user starts operating (pressing) the counting button while the power is off and then turns on the power while the counting button is still pressed (while the counting button is being held down for a long time). In other words, when settlement is performed based on the operation of the counting button, the device may be configured so that settlement is performed by detecting the counting button turning from OFF to ON and then maintaining the counting button ON for a predetermined period of time or more (detecting a long press).

<<Door open error configuration>>
The door opening error detection apparatus according to the present embodiment may be configured as follows.

<Configuration 1>
Even when the front door DU is open (when a door open error occurs), the above-mentioned signal transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside (rented machine) and information transmitted from the outside (rented machine) and received by the gaming machine may be configured to be transmitted and received. More specifically, the transmission or reception of gaming machine information notification (information including HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine performance information, or gaming machine installation information), counting notification, rental notification, and rental receipt result response may be configured to be executable even when the front door DU is open (when a door open error occurs).

<Configuration 2>
In the case of an unrecoverable error (for example, an error that occurs when the checksum after power is turned on is abnormal), the above-mentioned signal sent from the gaming machine to the outside (rented machine) and information sent from the outside (rented machine) and received by the gaming machine may be configured not to be transmitted or received. More specifically, the transmission or reception of gaming machine information notification (information including HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine performance information, or gaming machine installation information), counting notification, rental notification, and rental receipt result response may be configured not to be executed when the front door DU is open (when a door open error occurs).

In this example, as described above, the interval for transmitting HC/fraud monitoring information from the gaming machine to the outside (rented machine) is set to 300 ms. In other words, the interval for transmitting gaming machine information notification from the gaming machine to the outside (rented machine) is set to 300 ms. Also, as described above in FIG. 35, when rotating the reel, the reel acceleration process is executed, and then the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, in other words, the reel acceleration state is switched to the reel constant speed state. As described above, one rotation (one lap) of the reel is 336 steps, and the execution interval of the interrupt process is about 2.23 ms. In the reel constant speed state, one step is rotated with one interrupt process, so the time required for the reel to rotate one lap in the reel constant speed state is 2.23 x 336 ≒ 749 ms. In this way, in this example, it is possible to transmit a gaming machine information notification from the gaming machine to the outside (rented machine) at least two or more times in the time it takes for the reel to rotate one revolution at a constant reel speed.By configuring it in this way, even if the gaming machine information notification transmitted from the gaming machine becomes abnormal due to noise or the like, it is possible to transmit a gaming machine information notification from the gaming machine at least one more time within the time it takes for the reel to rotate one revolution at a constant reel speed, so that the information transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine can be more accurate. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 35, the average reel rotation speed in the reel acceleration state is slower than the average reel rotation speed in the reel constant speed state. Therefore, the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution from the start of reel rotation to the reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state is longer than the 749 ms required for the reel to rotate one revolution in the reel constant speed state described above. Therefore, even if the gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine becomes abnormal due to noise or the like during the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution from the start of reel rotation to the reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state, the gaming machine information notification can be sent from the gaming machine at least one more time within the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution in the reel constant speed state, so the information sent to the outside of the gaming machine can be more accurate.

<<Rental communication error>>
Here, as explained in the configuration of E in Fig. 74, when a gaming machine receives a loan notification with loan serial number 5 and then receives the next loan notification, a loan serial number abnormality occurs in which the gaming machine receives a loan notification with loan serial number 1 even though the loan serial number should be 6. In this embodiment, as this type of loan communication abnormality, in addition to the above-mentioned loan serial number abnormality, loan communication abnormalities 1 to 6 are set, and these will be explained in order.

<Loan serial number abnormality>
As described above, in the loan notification notified from the loan machine to the payout control board of the gaming machine, if the loan serial number of the current loan notification is n, the loan serial number of the next loan notification is set to be n+1. Also, when the loan notification is notified from the loan machine to the payout control board together with the loan serial number, the main control board that receives this notification via the payout control board stores the notified loan serial number in the RAM of its CPU. In this state, when the next loan notification is made, the main control board compares the loan serial number of this current loan notification with the stored loan serial number, and if the loan serial number of this loan notification is a value of "+1" compared to the stored loan serial number, it is determined to be normal and the loan serial number of this loan notification is newly stored (updated). In this way, in this embodiment, the main control board is configured to update and store the serial number.

In this way, the main control board stores the loan serial number n of the previously received loan notification, and if the loan serial number of the currently received loan notification is n+1, it is determined to be normal, whereas if the loan serial number of the currently received loan notification is not n+1, it is determined to be an abnormality in the loan serial number. In this embodiment, when an abnormality in the loan serial number is detected, the main control board turns on a serial number abnormality flag indicating that there has been an abnormality in the loan serial number, and sends a serial number abnormality command to the dispensing control board and the sub-control board S indicating that there has been an abnormality in the serial number. The dispensing control board and the sub-control board S that receive this serial number abnormality command perform a process of turning on their respective serial number abnormality flags. When the serial number abnormality flag is on in the dispensing control board, as described above, the loan points related to this loan notification are not added to the total points (loaning is stopped). In addition, when the serial number abnormality flag is on in the sub-control board S, the performance display device S40 and speaker S20 controlled by the sub-control board S notify the user of the rental serial number abnormality, indicating that the rental serial number is inconsistent, by at least one of visual, auditory, and tactile means (for example, vibrating the sub-input button SB or a part of the gaming machine) (hereinafter, this is simply referred to as "rental serial number abnormality notification"). This rental serial number abnormality notification by the sub-control board S continues until it receives a normal rental serial number n+1 or receives rental serial number 0 (see FIG. 71) for the first rental notification after the power is turned on from off.

The above-mentioned processing may be performed on the dispensing control board instead of the main control board, in which case the processing will be as follows.

In the loan notification sent from the loan machine to the payout control board of the gaming machine, if the loan serial number of the current loan notification is n, the loan serial number of the next loan notification is set to be n+1. Also, when a loan notification is sent from the loan machine to the payout control board along with its loan serial number, the payout control board stores the notified loan serial number in the RAM of its CPU, etc. In this state, when the next loan notification is sent, the payout control board compares the loan serial number of this loan notification with the stored loan serial number, and if the loan serial number of this loan notification is "+1" compared to the stored loan serial number, it is determined to be normal and the loan serial number of this loan notification is newly stored (updated). In this way, the dispensing control board stores the loan serial number n of the previously received loan notification, and if the loan serial number of the currently received loan notification is n+1, it is determined to be normal, but if the loan serial number of the currently received loan notification is not n+1, it is determined to be an abnormality in the loan serial number.

In this embodiment, when the lending serial number is determined to be abnormal, the payout control board turns on the serial number abnormality flag indicating that there is an abnormality in the lending serial number and sends a serial number abnormality command indicating that there is an abnormality in the serial number to the main control board and the sub-control board S. The main control board and the sub-control board S that receive this serial number abnormality command perform the process of turning on their respective serial number abnormality flags. When the serial number abnormality flag is on in the payout control board, as described above, the lending points related to this lending notification are not added to the total score (lending is stopped). In addition, when the serial number abnormality flag is on in the sub-control board S, a lending serial number abnormality notification is made by the performance display device S40 and the speaker S20 controlled by the sub-control board S. This lending serial number abnormality notification by the sub-control board S continues until a normal lending serial number n+1 is received or until the lending serial number 0 (see FIG. 71) related to the first lending notification after the power is turned on from off is received. In addition, the configuration in which the functions of the main control board described above are replaced by a dispensing control board can also be used in the following embodiments.

Then, the main control board, which receives the normal loan serial number n+1 or loan serial number 0 via the payout control board, turns off the serial number abnormality flag and sends a serial number abnormality cancellation command to the payout control board and the sub-control board S to indicate that the abnormal state has been cancelled. The payout control board and the sub-control board S, which receive this serial number abnormality cancellation command, turn off their respective serial number abnormality flags, allowing the payout control board to add the loan points related to the normal loan serial number to the total score, and the sub-control board S performs a process to end the loan serial number abnormality notification that had been executed up until that point. Also, in this embodiment, while the loan serial number abnormality notification is being executed (while the loan serial number abnormal state continues), the gaming machine does not stop playing, and the gaming machine continues to play normally.

In this way, in a situation where a rental serial number abnormality occurs, there is no abnormality in the operation of the gaming machine itself, so by not stopping the operation of the gaming machine every time there is a communication abnormality between the gaming machine and the rental machine, such as a rental serial number abnormality, it is possible to provide the player with a smooth game. Note that this type of communication abnormality due to noise or the like may be normalized by the next or subsequent communication, so even if a rental serial number abnormality occurs, the operation of the rental machine may not be stopped, and in this case, by having the machine return to normal when a normal rental serial number is received, it is possible to provide the player with a smooth game. The same can be said about rental communication abnormalities 1 to 6.

In this embodiment, when a loan notification is received, if the loan serial number is not the previously received value +1, it is determined that the loan serial number is abnormal. However, the loan serial number may be set to a subtractive serial number rather than an additive serial number as in the above embodiment, for example by initially setting it to 100 and setting the next loan serial number to 99. In this case, if the loan serial number is not the previously received value -1, it may be determined that the loan serial number is abnormal. In short, a value that is arranged in sequence according to a specified rule is used as the loan serial number, and if the sequence is not in accordance with this specified rule, it is determined that the loan serial number is abnormal. This also applies to other configurations and embodiments that employ this type of serial number.

In addition, the above-mentioned RAM clear switch is configured to clear only the total score, but may also be configured to clear the abnormality flag. In this embodiment, the payout control board and the sub-control board S turn off their respective serial number abnormality flags to enable the total score to be added or to stop the lending serial number abnormality notification in synchronization with the off of the lending notification abnormality flag in the main control board, but this is not limited to this. Even if a serial number abnormality release command is sent from the main control board, the payout control board may, for example, maintain the serial number abnormality flag in an on state until the above-mentioned RAM clear switch is operated, so that the lending points in the lending notification are not added to the total score, and the sub-control board S may maintain the serial number abnormality flag in an on state for a predetermined time after receiving the serial number abnormality release command or continuously over multiple games to notify the lending serial number abnormality, or the sub-control board S may maintain the serial number abnormality flag in an on state until a command is received from the payout control board indicating that the RAM clear switch has been operated to erase the serial number, so that the lending serial number abnormality notification is continued. In short, the main control board, the dispensing control board, and the sub-control board S may be synchronized with the on/off of the loan sequence number abnormality flag of the main control board, or they may be unsynchronized and each may perform the necessary processing independently. The same can be said about loan communication abnormalities 1 to 6.

In addition, in this embodiment, a serial number abnormality command, which is a specific type of abnormal condition, is sent to the sub-control board S, but instead, abnormality information may simply be sent to the effect that some kind of abnormality exists, and the sub-control board S that receives this may notify the effect that some kind of abnormality exists. In this way, by not disclosing the detailed types of internal abnormalities to the outside, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from being informed of more internal information than necessary, thereby improving security. The same can be said for loan communication abnormalities 1 to 6.

In this embodiment, the notification of the abnormality of the loan number is notified by the performance display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S, but it is not limited to this, and may be notified by at least one of visual, auditory, and tactile means by devices controlled by the main control board (for example, a display (7-segment, etc.) that displays the number of the stopped pattern, as described above, the payout number display device D270, etc.) or devices controlled by the payout control board. In this case, the start or end of the abnormality notification controlled by the main control board and the start or end of the abnormality notification controlled by the payout control board or the sub-control board S may or may not be synchronized, and in the case of asynchronous, at least one of the main control board, the payout control board, and the sub-control board S may be asynchronous. Examples of such synchronous and asynchronous are, for example, the following patterns 1 to 3, but of course, they are not limited to these patterns 1 to 3.

(Pattern 1)
When the serial number abnormality flag is on in the main control board, if the gaming machine is in a non-play state (all reels are stopped and no bets have been made), notifications are issued simultaneously by the main control board, payout control board, and sub-control board S (the notifications from the main control board and sub-control board S are synchronized). In this way, in a non-play state where it is not necessary to see much of the effects from the effect display device S40, notifications can be issued simultaneously by the main control board, payout control board, and sub-control board, respectively, to reliably notify the user that an abnormality has occurred.

(Pattern 2)
When the serial number abnormality flag is on in the main control board, if the gaming machine is in a gaming state (a state where a bet has been made, or a state where at least one of the reels is spinning, etc.), in a situation where it is highly likely that some kind of performance is being performed in the performance display device S40 according to the winning role, an abnormality notification is performed by controlling the main control board and the payout control board, while the performance display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S performs a performance according to the winning role without any abnormality notification (the notifications by the main control board and the payout control board are synchronous, but the notification by the sub-control board S is asynchronous). Then, at a predetermined timing after the gaming state changes to a non-playing state (for example, it may be executed immediately when the non-playing state is entered, or it may be executed at any timing between the non-playing state and the bet), notifications are simultaneously performed by the main control board, the payout control board, and the sub-control board S, as in the above-mentioned pattern 1. In this way, during play, the performance display device S40, which notifies the player of information related to the game, does not issue any abnormality alerts, and the performance display device S40 only performs performances corresponding to the winning role. This makes it possible to issue abnormality alerts while preventing the performance by the performance display device S40 from being hindered, and prevents the player's interest in the game from being hindered by the abnormality alerts.

(Pattern 3)
When the serial number abnormality flag is on in the main control board, if the gaming machine is in a game state, the main control board, the payout control board, and the sub-control board S start to notify the player simultaneously (the main control board, the payout control board, and the sub-control board S are notified synchronously), but the performance display device S40 also executes a performance according to the winning combination at the same time. In this case, it is preferable that the performance display device S40 displays the occurrence of an abnormality in a corner of the display unit while performing a performance on the display unit so as not to interfere with the performance, so that the abnormality notification is less noticeable than the performance. In this way, it is possible to simultaneously notify the player that an abnormality has occurred while performing a performance by the performance display device S40.

In the above embodiment, for example, in the case of a door opening error, an error state such as a door opening error is cleared by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 and twisting it in a predetermined direction (e.g., counterclockwise) (these are collectively referred to as "error clearing operations"). However, for the above-mentioned loan notification abnormality, such an error clearing operation may be configured to clear the loan notification abnormality state, or such an error clearing operation may not clear the loan notification abnormality state. Whether or not the loan abnormality notification state is cleared by the error clearing operation can be set appropriately depending on the specifications of the gaming machine. Similarly, the loan notification abnormality may be treated as a recoverable error or an unrecoverable error, which can also be set appropriately depending on the specifications of the gaming machine. The same can be said about loan communication abnormalities 1 to 6 regarding whether or not the error is cleared by these error clearing operations and the handling of recoverable/unrecoverable errors.

<Rental communication error 1>
As shown in FIG. 71, when the gaming machine is powered on, the gaming machine transmits the first gaming machine information notification (specific output information) and the first counting notification (predetermined output information) to the lending machine, and then the lending machine transmits the first loan notification (predetermined reception information) to the gaming machine, and the loan serial number at this time is normally 0. However, due to noise or the like, the loan serial number in the first loan notification may be a loan serial number other than 0, such as 1. In this case, the main control board of the gaming machine that receives this serial number from the payout control board judges that a loan communication abnormality 1 has occurred. In other words, if the main control board has never received the loan serial number 0 after the gaming machine is powered on, it judges that a loan communication abnormality 1 has occurred.

When this loan communication abnormality 1 is determined, just as when the loan serial number abnormality described above is determined, the main control board turns on the abnormality 1 flag indicating that a loan communication abnormality 1 has occurred, and sends an abnormality 1 command from the main control board to the payout control board and the sub-control board S indicating that the above-mentioned loan communication abnormality 1 has occurred. The payout control board and the sub-control board S then receive this and turn on their respective abnormality 1 flags, prohibiting the addition to the total score as described above, and an announcement that a loan communication abnormality 1 has occurred is made by the performance display device S40, speaker S20, etc. (hereinafter this will be referred to simply as a "loan communication abnormality 1 announcement"). These prohibitions on adding to the total score and notifications of loan communication anomaly 1 continue until the dispensing control board receives loan serial number 0. When the main control board receives loan serial number 0 via the dispensing control board, it sends an anomaly 1 release command to the dispensing control board and sub-control board S to the effect that loan communication anomaly 1 has been released, which turns off the anomaly 1 flags on the dispensing control board and sub-control board S, terminating the prohibition on adding to the total score and the notification of loan communication anomaly 1 that had been in effect up until that point.

In the case of this loan communication abnormality 1, just as in the case of a loan serial number abnormality, while the loan communication abnormality 1 notification is being made, play on the gaming machine is not stopped, and play on the gaming machine continues as normal, achieving the same effect as when there is a loan serial number abnormality. Also, in this embodiment, as described above, loan serial number 0 is a loan serial number that is set only the first time after the power is turned on, and it also serves as a notification that the previous loan serial numbers will be reset. Therefore, by monitoring whether or not such a loan serial number 0 is present after the power is turned on, communication abnormalities after power is turned on can be detected early.

<Rental communication error 2>
Next, referring to Fig. 76, the lending communication abnormality 2 will be described. In Fig. 76, it is assumed that the gaming machine notifies the lending machine of gaming machine information every predetermined time X (for example, 300 ms), and within this predetermined time X, a counting notification is made from the gaming machine to the lending machine after a fixed time A (for example, 100 ms) from the gaming machine notifying the lending machine of gaming machine information, and within time B (for example, 170 ms) from this counting notification, the lending machine notifies the gaming machine of lending, and at approximately the same time, a lending receipt result response is made from the gaming machine to the lending machine (approximately 0 to 1 ms), and after a minimum time C (for example, 30 ms) or more has elapsed from the lending notification (lending receipt result response), in other words, after a predetermined time X from the previous gaming machine information notification, the current gaming machine information notification is made from the gaming machine to the lending machine.

Note that although the loan receipt result response does in fact take time to communicate, since it is sent at approximately the same time as the loan notification, this time will be treated as 0 ms and will be written as approximately 0 ms in Figures 76 to 78. Also, in Figure 76, in order to clarify the timeline and the distinction between each, and to aid in understanding the content, prefaces such as "previous," "this," and "next" are used, but if something is clear without these prefaces, it will be explained without them. Also, it goes without saying that "previous" can be read as "nth time," "this" as "n+1th time," and "next" as "n+2nd time." The same applies to Figures 77 and 78.

Here, in this embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 76, between the previous loan notification (loan receipt result response) and the current loan notification, at least the minimum time C until the current gaming machine information notification and the fixed time A from the current gaming machine information notification to the current counting notification are required. For this reason, the specification is such that the current loan notification cannot be received unless a minimum of the first time D (e.g., 30 ms of the minimum time C + 100 ms of the fixed time A = 130 ms), which is the sum of the minimum time C (e.g., 30 ms) and the fixed time A (e.g., 100 ms), has elapsed since the previous loan notification. Therefore, if the current loan notification is issued after the first time D has elapsed since the previous loan notification, it can be said that the state is normal. On the other hand, if the current loan notification is issued before the first time D has elapsed since the previous loan notification, it is an abnormal state, and in this case, the main control board is configured to determine that a loan communication abnormality 2 has occurred.

Specifically, the main control board has a loan notification timer area (not shown) that is an additive timer area in which the value increases by 1 each time from 0 to 1 to 2 starting from the loan notification. For example, when the loan notification timer area has a value of 10 stored therein and a timer interrupt process is started, the loan notification timer area is updated to 11 by adding 1. When the current loan notification is sent to the main control board via the payout control board, the main control board refers to the value clocked in the loan notification timer area, and if the value has not passed the first time D (first threshold value) since the previous loan notification, it is determined to be a loan communication abnormality 2, and if the first time D (first threshold value) has passed since the previous loan notification, it is not determined to be an abnormality because it is normal operation. In determining this loan communication abnormality 2, if the main control board has never received the loan serial number 0, loan communication abnormality 1 is given priority, and in this case, it is determined to be a loan communication abnormality 1. The same applies to rental communication abnormalities 3 to 6. Furthermore, regardless of whether the first time D (first threshold value) has passed since the previous rental notification was made or not, the timer value is set to 0 after the abnormality is determined and timing is restarted.

The above timer update process may also be performed on the dispensing control board instead of the main control board, in which case the process will be as follows.

If the current loan notification is made even though the first time D has not passed since the previous loan notification, this is an abnormal state, and in this case, the dispensing control board is configured to determine that a loan communication abnormality 2 has occurred. Specifically, the dispensing control board has a loan notification timer area, which is an additive timer area (not shown) that increases by 1 from 0 to 1 to 2 starting from the loan notification. When the previous loan notification is made, 0 is set in this loan notification timer area, the timing starts, and a determination is made as to whether or not the upper limit value, the second time G described below, has been reached. For example, when 10 is stored in the loan notification timer area, adding 1 to the loan notification timer area makes it 11. The dispensing control board refers to the value timed in the loan notification timer area, and if the first time D (first threshold value) has not passed since the previous loan notification was made, it is configured to determine that a loan communication abnormality 2 has occurred.

When determining this loan communication abnormality 2, if the dispensing control board has never received loan serial number 0, loan communication abnormality 1 is given priority, and in this case, loan communication abnormality 1 is determined. The same applies to loan communication abnormalities 3 to 6. Furthermore, regardless of whether the first time D (first threshold value) has passed since the previous loan notification or not, the timer value is set to 0 after the abnormality is determined and timing is restarted. Furthermore, the configuration related to timer updates when the function of the main control board described above is made into a dispensing control board can also be replaced in the following embodiments.

When this loan communication abnormality 2 is determined, in the same way as when the loan serial number abnormality described above is determined, the main control board turns on the abnormality 2 flag indicating that a loan communication abnormality 2 has occurred, and sends an abnormality 2 command from the main control board to the payout control board and the sub-control board S indicating that a loan communication abnormality 2 has occurred. On receiving this, the payout control board and the sub-control board S turn on their respective abnormality 2 flags, and as described above, they prohibit the addition to the total score, and an announcement is made by the performance display device S40, speaker S20, etc. that a loan communication abnormality 2 has occurred (hereinafter this will be simply referred to as a "loan communication abnormality 2 announcement"). These prohibitions on adding to the total score and notifications of error 2 in loan communication continue until loan serial number 0 is received or a normal loan notification is received after the first time D has elapsed since the last loan notification. When the main control board receives loan serial number 0 or a normal loan notification via the dispensing control board, it sends an error 2 release command to the dispensing control board and sub-control board S to the effect that error 2 in loan communication has been released, which turns off the error 2 flags on the dispensing control board and sub-control board S, terminating the prohibition on adding to the total score and the notification of error 2 in loan communication that had been in effect up until that point.

In the case of this loan communication abnormality 2, just as in the case of a loan serial number abnormality, while the loan communication abnormality 2 notification is being made, play on the gaming machine is not stopped and play on the gaming machine continues as normal, achieving the same effect as when there is a loan serial number abnormality. In addition, in this embodiment, since the first time D, which is the minimum time interval between the previous and current loan notifications, is monitored, it is possible to determine an abnormality when this minimum time interval has passed, and it is possible to detect communication abnormalities early after the loan notification.

<Rental communication error 3>
Next, loan communication abnormality 3 will be described with reference to Fig. 77. In Fig. 77, the predetermined time X (e.g., 300 ms), fixed time A (e.g., 100 ms), time B (e.g., 170 ms), time required for loan receipt result response (approximately 0 ms), and minimum time C (e.g., 30 ms) are the same as in Fig. 76.

In this embodiment, as described above, the loan notification only needs to be made within time B from the counting notification, in other words, within the time period in which the minimum time C can be secured from the counting notification (predetermined time X - fixed time A - minimum time C = time B), with the minimum notification time being approximately 0 ms (in this embodiment, this is treated as 0 ms, as with the above-mentioned loan receipt notification) when the counting notification is received and the notification is made immediately (approximately simultaneously with the counting notification), and the maximum notification time is when the notification is made time B after the counting notification is received (for example, 170 ms). In other words, the loan notification is made at any time between 0 ms and time B, and the time required from the previous loan notification to the current loan notification can be varied accordingly.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77, when the previous rental notification is made at the timing of the minimum notification time described above, the time required from the previous gaming machine information notification to the previous rental notification is the same as the fixed time A. Therefore, in the case of the timing of the minimum notification time described above, the time required from the previous rental notification to the current gaming machine information notification is the first maximum time E, which is the longest among all rental notification timings. This first maximum time E is a value obtained by subtracting the fixed time A (e.g., 100 ms) from the predetermined time X (e.g., 300 ms) (e.g., 300 ms of the predetermined time X - 100 ms of the fixed time A = 200 ms). In other words, this first maximum time E is the time required from the previous rental receipt result response to the current gaming machine information notification, and is greater than or equal to the minimum time C (e.g., 30 ms).

In addition, if the current loan notification is made at the timing of the maximum notification time described above, the time required from the current game information notification to the current loan notification (see the dashed line in FIG. 77) becomes the second maximum time F, which is the longest among all the timings of the loan notification. This second maximum time F is the sum of fixed time A and time B (fixed time A 100 ms + time B 170 ms = 270 ms). From another perspective, if the current loan notification is made at the timing of the maximum notification time described above, the time required from the current loan notification (loan receipt result response) to the next game information notification is the same as the minimum time C. Therefore, the second maximum time F can also be said to be the value obtained by subtracting the minimum time C (e.g., 30 ms) from the predetermined time X (e.g., 300 ms) (e.g., predetermined time X 300 ms - minimum time C 30 ms = 270 ms) (this is shown in FIG. 77).

Considering the above, the second time G, which is the maximum time required from the previous loan notification to the current loan notification, is the sum of the first maximum time E, which is the maximum time from the previous loan notification to the current gaming machine information notification, and the second maximum time F, which is the maximum time from the current gaming machine information notification to the current loan notification (for example, the first maximum time of 200 ms + the second maximum time of 270 ms = 470 ms). Therefore, when the main control board that has received the current loan notification via the payout control board refers to the above-mentioned loan notification timer area, if the value of this timer area is within the second time G from the previous loan notification, it can be said to be in a normal state, but if the second time G has passed, it can be said to be in an abnormal state, and in this case, the main control board is configured to determine that a loan communication abnormality 3 has occurred.

When this loan communication abnormality 3 is determined, just as when the loan serial number abnormality described above is determined, the main control board turns on the abnormality 3 flag indicating that a loan communication abnormality 3 has occurred, and sends an abnormality 3 command from the main control board to the payout control board and the sub-control board S indicating that a loan communication abnormality 3 has occurred. The payout control board and the sub-control board S then receive this and turn on their respective abnormality 3 flags, prohibiting the addition to the total score as described above, and an announcement that a loan communication abnormality 3 has occurred is made by the performance display device S40, speaker S20, etc. (hereinafter this will be referred to simply as a "loan communication abnormality 3 announcement"). These prohibitions on adding to the total score and the notification of a loan communication anomaly 3 continue until loan serial number 0 is received or a normal loan notification is received within the second time G from the previous loan notification. When the main control board receives loan serial number 0 or a normal loan notification via the dispensing control board, it sends an anomaly 3 release command to the dispensing control board and the sub-control board S to the effect that loan communication anomaly 3 has been released, which turns off the respective anomaly 3 flags on the dispensing control board and the sub-control board S, thereby terminating the prohibition on adding to the total score and the notification of a loan communication anomaly 3 that had been running up until that point.

In the case of this loan communication abnormality 3, just as in the case of a loan serial number abnormality, while the loan communication abnormality 3 notification is being made, play on the gaming machine is not stopped, and play on the gaming machine continues as normal, achieving the same effect as when there is a loan serial number abnormality. In addition, in this embodiment, since the second time G, which is the maximum time interval between the previous and current loan notifications, is monitored, if a loan notification is not made or the timing of the loan notification is abnormally delayed (loan notification after the second time G has passed), it can be immediately determined that there is a loan communication abnormality 3, and communication abnormalities in the maximum time interval between loan notifications can be discovered early.

<Rental communication error 4>
Next, referring to Fig. 76, the lending communication abnormality 4 will be described. In this embodiment, as described above, the gaming machine issues a counting notification to the lending machine after a fixed time A has elapsed since the gaming machine notified the lending machine of gaming machine information, and the lending machine issues a lending notification to the gaming machine after the counting notification is issued from the gaming machine. Therefore, if the lending machine issues a lending notification within the fixed time A after the gaming machine issues the gaming machine information notification, this is an abnormal state, and in this case, the main control board is configured to determine that lending communication abnormality 4 has occurred.

Specifically, the main control board has a gaming machine information notification timer area (not shown) that is an additive timer area whose value increases from 0 → 1 → 2 starting from the gaming machine information notification, and 0 is set in the gaming machine information notification timer area and measurement is continued until the upper limit of the specified time X is reached. For example, when 100 is stored in this timer area and 1 is added to become 111, this value is not the specified time X, so 111 is stored as it is. In other words, if the specified time X is not reached when 1 is added, the value is stored, and if the specified time X is reached, 0 is set again and timing continues until the specified time X is reached, circulating from 0 to the specified time X. That is, in the case of the additive method of this embodiment, the upper limit is the specified time X, which is the longest time (largest value) from the lending notification that is the starting point of the timing, and in a single timer area, it is possible to grasp multiple times (multiple thresholds) starting from the gaming machine information notification, including the specified time X, a shorter fixed time A (first threshold), and a second maximum time F (second threshold). Also, the gaming machine information notification is sent to the lending machine when the specified time X is reached or when it is set to 0.

When the current loan notification is sent to the main control board via the payout control board, the main control board refers to the value measured in the gaming machine information notification timer area, and if this value has not passed the fixed time A (if the loan notification is sent within the fixed time A), it determines that loan communication abnormality 4 has occurred. Note that the loan notification timer area and the gaming machine information notification timer area may be continuous or discontinuous areas, but from the standpoint of ease of management, it is preferable to place them in continuous areas.

When this loan communication abnormality 4 is determined, just as when a loan serial number abnormality is determined as described above, the main control board turns on the abnormality 4 flag indicating that a loan communication abnormality 4 has occurred, and sends an abnormality 4 command from the main control board to the payout control board and the sub-control board S indicating that a loan communication abnormality 4 has occurred. On receiving this, the payout control board and the sub-control board S turn on their respective abnormality 4 flags, and as described above, they prohibit the addition to the total score and an announcement is made by the performance display device S40, speaker S20, etc. that a loan communication abnormality 4 has occurred (hereinafter, this will be simply referred to as a "loan communication abnormality 4 announcement"). These prohibitions on adding to the total score and notifications of error 4 in loan communication continue until loan serial number 0 is received or a normal loan notification is received a fixed time A after the previous loan notification. When the main control board receives loan serial number 0 or a normal loan notification via the payout control board, it sends an error 4 release command to the payout control board and sub-control board S to the effect that error 4 in loan communication has been released, which turns off the respective error 4 flags on the sub-control board S and ends the prohibition on adding to the total score and the notification of error 4 in loan communication that had been running up until that point.

In the case of this rental communication abnormality 4, just as in the case of a rental serial number abnormality, while the rental communication abnormality 4 notification is being made, play on the gaming machine is not stopped, and play on the gaming machine continues as normal, achieving the same effect as when there is a rental serial number abnormality. In addition, in this embodiment, since a fixed time A from the gaming machine information notification is monitored, if the rental notification is made abnormally early (if the rental notification is made within the fixed time A), it can be immediately determined that there is a rental communication abnormality 4, and communication abnormalities after the gaming machine information notification can be detected early.

<Rental communication error 5>
Next, the lending communication abnormality 5 will be described with reference to Fig. 78. In Fig. 78, the predetermined time X (e.g., 300 ms), the fixed time A (e.g., 100 ms), the time B (e.g., 170 ms), the time required for the lending receipt result response (approximately 0 ms), and the minimum time C (e.g., 30 ms) are the same as in Fig. 76.

As explained in the above-mentioned loan communication abnormality 3, in the case of a loan notification, the longest time required from the gaming machine information notification to the loan notification is the above-mentioned second maximum time F. Therefore, when the main control board, which has received the loan notification via the payout control board, references the above-mentioned gaming machine information notification timer area, if the value of this timer area has not passed the second maximum time F, it can be said to be in a normal state, but if the second maximum time F has passed, it can be said to be in an abnormal state, in which case the main control board judges that a loan communication abnormality 5 has occurred.

When this loan communication abnormality 5 is determined, just as when a loan serial number abnormality is determined as described above, the main control board turns on the abnormality 5 flag indicating that a loan communication abnormality 5 has occurred, and sends an abnormality 5 command from the main control board to the payout control board and the sub-control board S indicating that a loan communication abnormality 5 has occurred. On receiving this, the payout control board and the sub-control board S each turn on their abnormality 5 flags, prohibiting the addition to the total score as described above, and an announcement that a loan communication abnormality 5 has occurred is made by the performance display device S40, speaker S20, etc. (hereinafter this will be simply referred to as a "loan communication abnormality 5 announcement"). These prohibitions on adding to the total score and the notification of a loan communication error 5 continue until loan serial number 0 is received or a normal loan notification is received within the second maximum time F from the previous loan notification. When the main control board receives loan serial number 0 or a normal loan notification via the dispensing control board, it sends an error 5 release command to the sub-control board S indicating that the loan communication error 5 has been released, and the error 5 flags on the dispensing control board and the sub-control board S are turned off, terminating the prohibition on adding to the total score and the notification of a loan communication error 5 that had been implemented up until that point.

In the case of this rental communication abnormality 5, as in the case of a rental serial number abnormality, while the rental communication abnormality 5 notification is being made, play on the gaming machine is not stopped, and play on the gaming machine continues as normal, achieving the same effect as when the rental serial number is abnormal. In addition, in this embodiment, since the second maximum time F from the gaming machine information notification to the rental notification is monitored, if the rental notification is not made or the timing of the rental notification is abnormally delayed (rental notification after the second maximum time F has elapsed from the gaming machine information notification), it can be immediately determined that there is a rental communication abnormality 5, allowing for early detection of communication abnormalities after the gaming machine information notification.

<Rental communication error 6>
Next, referring to FIG. 76, the lending communication abnormality 6 will be described. In this embodiment, as described above, the gaming machine information notification is performed every predetermined time X, and the lending notification is performed only once within this predetermined time X. Therefore, if there is no lending notification within this predetermined time X, or if the second lending notification is performed, it can be said that the state is abnormal. Specifically, in the main control board, the number of lending notifications received from the current gaming machine information notification to the next gaming machine information notification is counted by a lending notification counter (not shown), and when the next gaming machine information notification is performed (when the value of the gaming machine information notification timer area becomes the predetermined time X), the lending notification counter is referred to, and if this value is 1, it is determined to be normal, and if it is a value other than 1, such as 0 or 2, it is determined to be abnormal. In this case, the main control board is configured to determine that the lending communication abnormality 6 is occurring.

When this loan communication abnormality 6 is determined, in the same way as when a loan serial number abnormality is determined as described above, the main control board turns on abnormality flag 2, indicating that a loan communication abnormality 2 has occurred, and sends an abnormality 6 command from the main control board to the payout control board and the sub-control board S, indicating that a loan communication abnormality 6 has occurred. In response to this, the payout control board and the sub-control board S turn on their respective abnormality 26 flags, and as described above, they prohibit the addition to the total score and an announcement is made by the performance display device S40, speaker S20, etc. that a loan communication abnormality 6 has occurred (hereinafter, this will be simply referred to as a "loan communication abnormality 6 announcement"). These prohibitions on adding to the total score and notifications of error 6 in loan communication continue until loan serial number 0 is received or a new gaming machine information notification is made. When loan serial number 0 is received or a new gaming machine information notification is made, the main control board sends an error 6 release command to the payout control board and sub-control board S to indicate that the error 6 in loan communication has been released, turning off the error 6 flags on the payout control board and sub-control board S, and ending the prohibition on adding to the total score and the notification of error 6 in loan communication that had been made up until that point.

In other words, in this embodiment, in the case of loan communication abnormalities 2 to 5, the presence or absence of an abnormality is judged when a loan notification is made on the assumption that a loan notification will definitely be received (in other words, in the judgment of loan communication abnormalities 2 to 5, if a loan notification has never been made, it is not judged as an abnormality), but in the case of loan communication abnormalities 2 to 5 where a loan notification has never been made, it is judged as loan communication abnormality 6. In this way, when a loan notification has never been made, it is judged as loan communication abnormality 6 all at once, so that it is possible to omit the judgment for the case where a loan notification has never been made in the case of loan communication abnormalities 2 to 5, thereby reducing the control load.

In the case of this loan communication anomaly 6, just as in the case of a loan serial number anomaly, while the loan communication anomaly 6 notification is being made, play on the gaming machine is not stopped and play on the gaming machine continues as normal, achieving the same effect as when there is a loan serial number anomaly. Also, in this embodiment, since the number of loan notifications within a specified time X is monitored, if there are more than a specified number of loan notifications within the specified time X (one time in this embodiment), it can be immediately determined that there is a loan communication anomaly 6, allowing for early detection of communication anomalies within the specified time X.

<Multiple abnormality notifications>
In this embodiment, as described above, the rental serial number abnormality and rental communication abnormality 1 to 6 are set, and when each communication abnormality occurs, a corresponding notification is made. However, when multiple communication abnormalities occur, the following is performed. For example, when a rental communication abnormality 1 occurs in a situation where a rental serial number abnormality occurs and the serial number abnormality flag is on, the sub-control board S also turns on the abnormality 1 notification flag, and a rental serial number abnormality notification and a rental communication abnormality 1 notification are made. While these notifications are being made, as described above, the game by the gaming machine and the rental by the rental machine are not stopped, and the game by the gaming machine and the rental by the rental machine are performed as usual. In this state, for example, when only the rental serial number abnormality is resolved, the serial number abnormality notification flag is turned off, but the abnormality 1 notification flag remains on, so that the rental serial number abnormality notification ends, while the rental communication abnormality 1 notification continues.

In this way, if any of the rental serial number abnormalities and rental communication abnormalities 1 to 6 occur simultaneously, an alert will be sent for each abnormal condition that has occurred, and when the abnormality is resolved, only the alert for that abnormality will end. In this way, by sending an alert that corresponds to each abnormality that has occurred, it is easy to determine the type of abnormality that is currently occurring.

In this embodiment, a notification flag corresponding to each of the rental serial number abnormalities and rental communication abnormalities 1 to 6 is set (turned on), and while the notification flag is set, a notification corresponding to that flag is issued. Alternatively, the notification flag may be a single general notification flag, and if any of the rental serial number abnormalities or rental communication abnormalities 1 to 6 occurs, the general notification flag may remain on, and only when all abnormalities are cleared is the general notification flag turned off. In this case, only one notification flag is required, and the notification flag can be turned on and off based only on whether or not an abnormality has occurred, which reduces the program and data capacity required to execute this process.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the main control board detects an abnormality, play on the gaming machine is not stopped, and lending of the lending machine is not stopped, etc., until the abnormality is released. However, instead of this, for example, the operation of the gaming machine may be stopped, the operation of the lending machine may be stopped, or both the operation of the gaming machine and the lending machine may be stopped. In addition, when the operation of the gaming machine is stopped, normal play such as reel rotation by pressing the start lever D50, stopping of the reels by the stop switch, and awarding of points to the player for winning may be continued without being stopped, while at least a part of the control related to the interaction with the lending machine may be stopped, such as stopping only the control related to communication with the lending machine, such as the addition of points from the lending machine.

In short, when an abnormality occurs, all functions of the gaming machine or the rental machine may be stopped, or only a part of them (such as control related to the abnormality) may be stopped. These can be set appropriately according to the specifications of the gaming machine or the rental machine. Specifically, when an abnormality occurs, bets, counting, and settlements related to the abnormality in the communication between the gaming machine and the rental machine are invalidated, and new bet operations and counting operations are not possible, while bets made before the abnormality occurs are valid as they are, and operations of the start switch and stop switch that are not directly related to the abnormality described above may also be valid. In this case, if a bet has already been made before the abnormality occurs, the reels will rotate when the start switch D50 is pressed, and these rotating reels can be stopped by pressing the stop switch, and even if the reels are already rotating when the abnormality occurs, these reels can be stopped by pressing the stop switch, but new bets cannot be made thereafter. After the end of play related to the bets made before the occurrence of this abnormality, the bets are invalid, but the start switch and stop switch may remain valid, or, since bets cannot be made and there is essentially no point in making them valid, the start switch and stop switch may be set to invalid.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fixed time A (e.g., 100 ms), time B (e.g., 170 ms), minimum time C (e.g., 30 ms), and predetermined time X (e.g., 300 ms) are described with specific numbers in parentheses, but these times are not particularly limited to the numbers described in the above examples and can be changed as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine or rental machine, and it goes without saying that the above first and second times D, G, first maximum times E, F, etc. will also be changed accordingly.

In addition, in this embodiment, when there is a rental serial number abnormality or rental communication abnormality 1 to 6, a corresponding notification is issued, and when the conditions for canceling these abnormalities are met, the sub-control board S receives the corresponding cancellation command, which stops the notification. However, instead, the notification may be continued even if the conditions for canceling these abnormalities are met. In this case, the termination conditions for terminating the notification can be set as appropriate, for example, until the power is turned off, until multiple games have been played, until a predetermined time has passed since the conditions for canceling the abnormality were met, until a reset is performed due to a setting change, until the RAM of the sub-control board S is cleared, etc. In this way, even if the conditions for canceling the abnormality are met, a notification corresponding to the abnormality is still issued, so that it is possible to reliably notify that an abnormality has occurred.

<Modification: Abnormality determination by dispensing control means>
In addition, in this embodiment, the main control board judges the loan serial number abnormality and the loan communication abnormality 1 to 6, but instead, the dispensing control board may judge these. In this case, the dispensing control board may transmit the fact that the loan serial number abnormality or the loan communication abnormality 1 to 6 is one of them (a flag set in the dispensing control board corresponding to these) and commands corresponding to each abnormality to the main control board and the sub-control board S, and the main control board and the sub-control board S that receive these (note that the sub-control board S may receive commands, etc. via the main control board that receives the judgment contents and commands, etc. from the dispensing control board) may perform the above-mentioned various notification processing corresponding to this command.

In other words, information on the occurrence and release of various abnormalities is sent from the dispensing control board to the main control board and the sub-control board S, but even if the abnormality is released on the dispensing control board, at least one of the main control board and the sub-control board S may continue to report the abnormality, or when the abnormality is released on the dispensing control board, at least one of the main control board and the sub-control board S may cancel the abnormality report in synchronization with the release of the abnormality on the dispensing control board. Or, even if the abnormality is released on the dispensing control board, the main control board may continue to be in an abnormal state, and even if the sub-control board S receives information from the dispensing control board that the abnormality has been released, it may continue to report the abnormality until it receives a state from the main control board that the abnormality has been released. In this way, the dispensing control board, the main control board, and the sub-control board S may each independently perform processing corresponding to the information based on the state they receive.

In this case, the payout control board may directly have the above-mentioned loan notification timer area and game information notification timer area for performing abnormality determination, or the payout control board may be configured to be able to reference these timer areas provided on the main control board through communication with the main control board. In short, whether it is the main control board or the payout control board, it is sufficient that the entity performing the abnormality determination is able to reference the timer area. In this way, the payout control board, which directly receives loan notifications from the loan machine, can also perform abnormality determination, thereby reducing the processing burden on the main control board.

Here, in the specification where the dispensing control board judges various abnormalities and transmits information (commands) regarding these abnormalities to the main control board and the sub-control board S, the types of loan serial number abnormality and loan communication abnormality 1 to 6 are transmitted to the main control board, but rather than sending such detailed types to the sub-control board S, it is also possible to simply transmit abnormality information indicating that some abnormality has occurred, and the sub-control board S receiving this may notify the fact that some abnormality has occurred. Even in this case, as with the above, by not disclosing the types of detailed internal abnormalities to the outside, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from being informed of more internal information than necessary, thereby improving security. The same can be said about the above-mentioned embodiment in which the main control board judges various abnormalities.

<Modification: Decremental Timer>
In addition, in this embodiment, the lending notification timer area and the gaming machine information notification timer area use an additive timer, but a subtractive timer such as 10 → 9 → 8 may be used, and a modified version of this embodiment using this subtractive timer will be described below. In addition, in this modified version, a specification in which the payout control board judges various abnormalities will be used as an example, but it goes without saying that instead, the main control board may be used to judge various abnormalities.

The main control board is provided with a first timer area that times a predetermined time X (e.g., 300 ms) starting from the gaming machine information notification, a second timer area that times a fixed time A (e.g., 100 ms) starting from the gaming machine information notification, a third timer area that times a second maximum time F (e.g., 270 ms) starting from the gaming machine information notification, a fourth timer area that times a first time D (e.g., 130 ms) starting from the lending notification, and a fifth timer area that times a second time G (e.g., 470 ms) starting from the lending notification.

When the gaming machine notifies the lending machine of gaming machine information, the first timer area is set to a predetermined time X, the second timer area to a fixed time A, and the third timer area to a second maximum time F, and the values set in each timer area are subtracted by 1 for each timer interrupt process that is performed every 1 ms. The first timer area is subtracted from the predetermined time X to 0, but for example, if 200 is stored in the first timer area and 1 is subtracted to become 199, this value is not 0, so 199 is stored as is. In this way, if the value is not 0 when 1 is subtracted, the value is stored, and if the value is 0 when 1 is subtracted, a zero flag is set, and if the zero flag is set, the predetermined time X is set again. In this way, the predetermined time X to 0 is cycled.

In this embodiment, the timer is decremented by 1 for each timer interrupt, but if the timer interrupt occurs every 0.5 ms, for example, a predetermined value may be decremented for every predetermined number of timer interrupts, such as decrementing by 1 for every two timer interrupts. In other words, the timer interrupt period and the predetermined value for decrement can be set appropriately, and the number of timer interrupts for which decrement is performed can be set according to the period and the predetermined value for decrement.

The second and third timer areas also store a value that is not 0 when subtracting 1, but when subtracting 1 from 0, a carry flag is set, and if the carry flag is set, the result of the subtraction is set to 0. In this way, once it becomes 0, it will remain 0 until gaming machine information is notified again (the specified time X is stored in the first timer area). By configuring it in this way, the timer value will not exceed the upper limit, and there is no need to branch processing depending on the timer value, which is expected to simplify the program and reduce capacity.

When the lending machine issues a lending notification to the gaming machine, the third timer area is set to the second maximum time F, the fourth timer area is set to the first time D, and the fifth timer area is set to the second time G, and the values set in each timer area are subtracted by 1. These timer areas also store the value if it is not 0 when subtracting 1, but when subtracting 1 from 0, a carry flag is set, and if the carry flag is set, the result of the subtraction is set to 0. In this way, once it becomes 0, it will remain 0 until gaming machine information is notified again. By configuring it in this way, the timer value will not exceed the upper limit, and there is no need to branch the processing depending on the timer value, so it is expected that the program can be simplified and the capacity can be reduced. When gaming machine information is notified in this state, the second maximum time F, the first time D, and the second time G are set again, and the subtraction method of timing is started.

When the value of the first timer area becomes 0 (when the current gaming machine information notification has been sent after the previous gaming machine information notification), the payout control board refers to the value of the loan notification counter, and if this value is 1, it determines that the system is normal, and if it is any value other than 1, it determines that there is a loan communication abnormality 6.

In addition, when the dispensing control board receives a loan notification from the loan machine, it refers to the respective timer areas, and if the value of the second timer area is 0 (if the loan notification occurs after the fixed time A has elapsed), it judges it to be normal, and if the second timer area is not 0 (if the loan notification occurs within the fixed time A), it judges it to be a loan communication abnormality 4.

In addition, when the dispensing control board receives a loan notification from the loan machine, if the value of the third timer area is not 0 (if the loan notification occurs within the second maximum time), it determines that the board is normal, and if the value of the third timer area is 0 (if the loan notification occurs after the second maximum time has elapsed), it determines that a loan communication error 5 has occurred.

In addition, when the dispensing control board receives a loan notification from the loan machine while timing is being performed using the fourth timer area, if the value of the fourth timer area is 0 (if the loan notification is received after the first time D has elapsed), it determines that the board is normal, and if the value of the fourth timer area is not 0 (if the loan notification is received within the first time D), it determines that a loan communication abnormality 2 has occurred.

In addition, when the dispensing control board receives a loan notification from the loan machine while timing is being performed by the fifth timer area, if the value of the fifth timer area is not 0 (if the loan notification is received within the second time G), it determines that the system is normal, and if the value of the fifth timer area is 0 (if the loan notification is received after the second time G has elapsed), it determines that loan communication abnormality 3 has occurred. Even if a subtraction type is used as in this example, it achieves the same effect as the above-mentioned embodiment.

In this modified example, whether the second to fifth timer regions are abnormal or normal is determined based on whether the values are 0 or not. However, the second to fifth timer regions being non-zero or being 0 is, in other words, synonymous with the second to fifth timer regions being in operation (operating) and the second to fifth timer regions having stopped operating (not operating). Therefore, whether the second to fifth timer regions are abnormal or normal may be determined based on whether they are operating (synonymous with non-zero) or not operating (synonymous with 0).

In addition, in this modified example, the first to fifth timer regions are used, but instead, the following may be used. That is, as the starting point of the gaming machine information notification, there are only two timer regions: the first timer region that times the predetermined time X, and the third timer region that times the second maximum time F that is longer than the timer region 2 that times the fixed time A, and as the starting point of the loan notification, there is only one timer region: the fifth timer region that times the second time G that is longer than the fourth timer region that times the first time D, for a total of three timer regions.

In this case, in the third timer area, when a gaming machine information notification is made, the second maximum time F is set and timing is performed using a subtractive method. In this state, when a loan notification is received, the payout control board refers to the value in the third timer area, and if this value has passed the fixed time A and is not 0 (if the loan notification was made after the fixed time A had passed, or if the loan notification was made within the second maximum time), it determines that the value is normal; if this value is within the fixed time A and is not 0, it determines that a loan communication error 4 has occurred; and if this value has passed the fixed time and is 0 (if the loan notification was made after the second maximum time had passed), it determines that a loan communication error 5 has occurred.

In addition, in the fifth timer area, when a loan notification is made, the second time G is set and timing is performed using a subtractive method. In this state, when a loan notification is received from the loan machine, the dispensing control board refers to the value in the fifth timer area, and if this value has passed the first time D and is not 0 (if the loan notification is received after the first time D has passed, or if the loan notification is received within the second time G), it is determined to be normal, if this value is within the first time D and is not 0 (if the loan notification is received within the first time D), it is determined to be loan communication abnormality 2, and if this value has passed the first time D and is 0 (if the loan notification is received after the second time G has passed), it is determined to be loan communication abnormality 3.

<Relationship between various timer areas and power cut>
Here, in the gaming machine information notification timer area, the lending notification timer area, and the lending notification counter in the above-mentioned modified example, all of the timer areas are cleared when the power supply of the gaming machine is turned off and then the power supply is restored. The timing of this clearing may be either the above-mentioned power-off process or the power-restore process. In addition, the values of these timer areas and counters are cleared by the power supply being turned off, but for example, the value of the minimum game interval timer M70 that measures the wait time and the value of the timer that measures the freeze time, as described in the above-mentioned embodiment, are not cleared. In this way, the timer area related to the communication between the gaming machine and the lending machine that does not affect the progress of the game itself is cleared by the power supply being restored, while the timer related to the wait and freeze that affect the progress of the game of the gaming machine is not cleared, thereby preventing the progress of the game of the gaming machine from being hindered by the power supply being restored.

<<Setting Change Device Control Processing>>
Next, the setting change control process according to this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, if the setting key switch is determined to be ON in step 1014 of FIG. 13 (No in step 1014 of FIG. 13), a setting change flag indicating that the setting is being changed is turned on, and in the state in which the setting change flag is turned on, a setting change signal is transmitted (output) from the gaming machine to the lending machine (not shown). At this time, the sub-control board S controls the performance display device S40, the speaker S20, the setting display LED (not shown), etc. to notify the setting change, such as that the setting is being changed. In this embodiment, the setting change signal is transmitted, but instead of this, a security signal indicating that fraud detection, setting change, or setting confirmation is being performed may be transmitted, or the security signal and the setting change signal may be transmitted simultaneously, and in short, it is sufficient that a signal indicating that the setting is being changed is transmitted.

In the setting change device control process shown in FIG. 14, after executing the processes of steps 1100 to 1116, if the answer is Yes in step 1118, in other words, if the setting change process is completed, the main control board displays that the operation of the setting change device has ended, erases the display of the setting value (setting value data) on the setting display LED (not shown), and then executes a process to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the setting change mode is to be terminated (step 1120). At this point, the setting change in the gaming machine is completed, but in this embodiment, the above-mentioned setting change in progress flag is maintained in an on state until the next game is completed, and the setting change in progress signal continues to be transmitted (output) from the gaming machine to the lending machine. Then, when the first game is completed, the setting change in progress flag is turned off, and the output of the setting change in progress signal from the gaming machine to the lending machine is also terminated.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the setting change process is completed, the setting change flag is not immediately turned off and the transmission of the setting change signal is terminated, but rather the setting change flag is turned off and the transmission of the setting change signal is terminated after one game has ended after the setting change process is completed. Note that in this embodiment, the end of one game is when the score award (payout) is completed if the score award (payout) is involved, when various processes after all reels have stopped are completed if the score award (payout) is not involved, and in the case of a re-play, a predetermined timing before the automatic insertion operation due to this re-play is executed, but the timing of the end of one game is not limited to this and may be any timing between when all reels have stopped and before the insertion of the next game. This is the same in the other embodiments described above.

That is, in the reel type gaming machine P that directly uses gaming medals, communication with the rental machine is not performed, and only the control within the gaming machine is sufficient, so that the above-mentioned termination process can be performed immediately after the setting change is completed. On the other hand, in the medal-less reel type gaming machine that communicates with the rental machine as in this embodiment, gaming machine information notification including HC and fraud monitoring information is performed every predetermined time X (for example, 300 ms) as described above, and this gaming machine information notification also includes setting change related information such as information that the above-mentioned setting is being changed, information that the setting is being confirmed, information that the setting change mode has ended, etc. For this reason, if the setting key is turned ON/OFF within the predetermined time X (when a series of setting changes are made and ended), the above-mentioned setting change related information may not be output accurately. In this case, the rental machine cannot grasp that the setting has been changed in the gaming machine or that the power has been restored due to the setting change, etc., and this may cause problems such as inconsistencies in the communication between the rental machine and the gaming machine.

Therefore, in this embodiment, even after the setting is changed, the above-mentioned setting change flag is maintained in an on state until one game is completed, and the setting change signal continues to be sent (output) from the gaming machine to the lending machine. In this embodiment, the setting change signal is sent to the payout control board until one game is completed after the setting is changed, but since the setting change is completed in the gaming machine, the setting change signal is not sent to the sub-control board S (when the setting change is completed, the sending of the setting change signal to the sub-control board S is stopped), and the gaming machine does not notify that the setting is being changed by the control of the main control board and the sub-control board S. Note that instead of this, while the setting change signal is being sent from the main control board to the payout control board, a setting change signal may also be sent to the sub-control board S to notify (for example, a notification that the setting is being changed by the performance display device S40) by the control of the sub-control board S.

In addition, in this embodiment, the predetermined time X is set to be shorter than the shortest time Y required for one game. In other words, the shortest time Y required for one game is the time required when there is no wait (maximum approximately 4.1 seconds), the reels are stopped in succession, each reel stops without slipping, and there is no score awarding (payout) process or automatic insertion for replay, and a time shorter than this shortest time Y is set as the predetermined time X (specifically, for example, the above-mentioned 300 ms, i.e., 0.3 seconds, can be mentioned. It is practically impossible to finish one game within 0.3 seconds). In this way, information such as the fact that the gaming machine is changing the settings can be reliably transmitted to the rental machine, and malfunctions such as inconsistencies in communication between the rental machine and the gaming machine due to setting changes, etc. can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting change signal continues to be output to the rental machine until one game is completed, but if there is a power outage at this time, the setting change signal and the setting confirmation signal are output to the rental machine again after the power is restored. In other words, even if there is a power outage on the gaming machine side, the power is not cut off on the rental machine, in which case the setting change signal cannot be received from the gaming machine, but this setting change signal is designed not to be cleared even when the power is turned off or on, and by sending these signals again after the power is restored from the power outage, the rental machine can recognize that the setting is still being changed, etc., and this makes it possible to prevent malfunctions such as inconsistencies in communication between the rental machine and the gaming machine caused by a power outage on the gaming machine side.

If the power is turned off while the setting change signal is being output after the setting is changed and the setting key is turned on again, the game will switch back to the setting change mode. At this time, the setting change flag is overwritten from on to on, so that it is turned off once and then turned off again (for example, in a memory area for checking whether the setting is being changed, if 0 indicates that the setting is not being changed and 1 indicates that the setting is being changed, this 1 can be overwritten with 1 again). In addition, the timing of the power cut while the setting change signal is being output after the setting is changed can be after the setting is changed and before one game is played, or any time between when a bet is placed after the setting is changed and when the reels stop (for example, while the reels are spinning, etc.).

<Settings confirmation signal>
In addition, in this embodiment, if the setting key switch is turned on without turning off the power during the period from the end of the setting change to the end of one game, for example, after the setting change is completed and before one game is played, or after the bet is placed after the setting change is completed and before the reels stop, the device transitions to a setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting value. In this setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation flag is turned on in the main control board, and a setting confirmation signal is sent from the main control board to the payout control board and the sub-control board S. In this case, two signals, a setting change signal and a setting confirmation signal, are sent from the main control board to the payout control board and the sub-control board S. In this state, when the setting key switch is turned off, the setting confirmation ends, the setting confirmation flag is turned off, and the transmission of the setting confirmation signal also ends.

Here, in a state where two signals, a setting change signal and a setting confirmation signal, are being sent to the payout control board and the sub-control board S, the setting change has already been completed, but the setting confirmation is actually being performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in a state where such two signals, a setting change signal and a setting confirmation signal, are being sent to the payout control board and the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S is controlled to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed, for example by displaying a message indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the performance display device S40, but not to notify the player that the setting is being changed. In addition, when the setting confirmation is completed, the notification that the setting is being confirmed ends, and even if the setting change signal is being output, a standby screen or a normal performance screen is displayed. It goes without saying that the notification that the setting is being confirmed may also be performed by the control of at least one of the main control board and the payout control board. In this way, even if the setting change signal and the setting confirmation signal are output from the main control board, accurate internal information can be notified to the player by only notifying the player that the setting is actually being confirmed.

In this embodiment, the setting change related information is sent to the lending machine side every predetermined time X, but it is also possible to send the information (commands) accumulated every specific time Y to the lending machine side. In this case, even if the setting key switch is turned ON/OFF within the specific time Y, the information can be reliably output to the lending machine. This specific time Y may be the same as the predetermined time X, or it may be shorter than the predetermined time X. For example, it is possible to consider until the number of interrupts reaches 64 times (which corresponds to 64 ms since the timer interrupt process of the CPU of the dispensing control board starts every 1 ms).

In addition, in this embodiment, a setting change signal has been described as an example of the specified information that continues to be output until one game is completed, but this type of specified information may also be, for example, information indicating that a power outage has occurred, and is not particularly limited as long as it is information that should be reliably transmitted from the gaming machine to the rental machine. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the setting change signal is transmitted until the end of one game after the setting change, but instead, setting change-related information may be transmitted until the end of several games after the setting change is completed. In short, even after processing related to the specified information, such as after the setting change is completed, it is sufficient to continue outputting the information from the end of this processing until a specified timing, such as the end of several games.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting change signal continues to be output until one game is completed, but for example, after the setting change is completed, both the setting change signal and the setting confirmation signal may continue to be output until one game is completed. In this case, the performance display device S40, etc. may not provide any notification after the setting change is completed unless the setting is actually being changed or confirmed, or may provide a notification that these signals are being output. Also, while both signals are being output, if the device actually transitions to the setting confirmation mode, the performance display device S40 may provide a notification that the setting is being confirmed. In this way, by configuring the device to continue to output both the setting change signal and the setting confirmation signal until one game is completed after the setting change is completed, it is not necessary to selectively determine whether the setting is being changed or confirmed and send a signal, thereby reducing the control burden.

<<<Second embodiment>>>
Next, a second embodiment will be described, and in the description, the same symbols and wordings will be used for the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiment to omit or simplify the description. Note that all the configurations of the second embodiment can be applied to all the configurations in this specification, and all the configurations in this specification can be applied to the second embodiment.

The gaming machine in the second embodiment is a medal-less reel-type gaming machine.

<<Processing on the dispensing control board H side>>
First, Fig. 79 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing executed for the first time by the CPUC200 (sometimes called the payout control board CPU) of the payout control board H after the power is turned on (or at the time of system reset or user reset) in the medal-less reel type gaming machine in the second embodiment. Note that Figs. 79 to 90 all describe in detail the processing on the payout control board H side, and the configuration on the main control board M side and the configuration on the sub-control board S side in the second embodiment can be the same as that of the present embodiment described above.

First, after the power of the medal-less reel type gaming machine is turned on, in step 5001, the CPUC200 of the payout control board H allows access to the RAM of the payout control board H. Next, in step 5002, the CPUC200 of the payout control board H generates power return data. Next, in step 5004, the CPUC200 of the payout control board H determines whether the power was turned off normally or not. Details will be described later, but if the power off abnormality data set in step 5058 of FIG. 81 is set, the determination in step 5004 is No, and if the power off abnormality data is not set, the determination in step 5004 is Yes.

In this specification, the payout control board H is sometimes referred to as the medal count control board.

If the answer is Yes in step 5004, then in step 5006, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H acquires the RAM check data. Next, in step 5008, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether the RAM check data acquired in step 5006 is abnormal. If the answer is Yes in step 5008, then in step 5010, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H sets a RAM check abnormality and proceeds to step 5012.

Also, if the answer is No at step 5004 or No at step 5008, proceed to step 5012.

Next, in step 5012, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H sets the address at the time of the power recovery abnormality as the initialization address of the RAM. Note that the cases where the power is not turned off normally (sometimes referred to as the case where the power is turned off abnormally) and the case where the RAM check is abnormal are collectively referred to as the power recovery abnormality.

Next, in step 5014, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether the RAM check data is normal and whether the power off is normal. In other words, it determines whether there is an abnormality in the power recovery. If the answer is Yes in step 5014, in other words, if the power recovery is normal, in step 5016, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H sets the address when the power recovery is normal as the initialization address of the RAM, and proceeds to step 5018. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 5014, it also proceeds to step 5018.

Next, in step 5018, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H performs RAM initialization based on the set RAM initialization address.

In this way, in the second embodiment, if the power recovery is abnormal, RAM initialization is performed based on the address when the power recovery is abnormal that was set in step 5012, and if the power recovery is normal, RAM initialization is performed based on the address when the power recovery is normal, which is the address set in step 5016 that has been rewritten. Note that the range of RAM initialization based on the address when the power recovery is abnormal is larger than the range of RAM initialization based on the address when the power recovery is normal.

Next, in step 5020, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H saves the power recovery data. Next, in step 5022, the stack pointer is set and the process proceeds to step 5024 in FIG. 80.

Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing that is executed for the first time by the CPUC200 (sometimes called the payout control board CPU) of the payout control board H after the power is turned on (or when the system is reset or the user is reset) in the medal-less reel-type gaming machine of the second embodiment.

In step 5022 of FIG. 79, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H sets the stack pointer, and then in step 5024, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether there is a power recovery abnormality. If the answer is Yes in step 5024, in step 5026, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the medal count clear button is on (determines whether the power was turned on with the medal count clear button pressed).

The medal count clear button is an operating member for clearing the number of game medals (the number of game medals displayed on the total score display device, sometimes referred to as total score data or total score), and is configured so that when the reel-type gaming machine is turned on for the first time, the number of game medals is cleared if the medal count clear button is pressed (on). With this configuration, even if a player finishes playing at the end of the previous day's business with some game medals remaining, the gaming machine can be turned on with the medal count clear button pressed before the start of business on the current day, allowing the arcade to start business on the current day with the number of game medals at zero, ensuring fair playability.

If the answer is Yes in step 5026, then in step 5028 the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H clears the number of game medals (sets it to 0). Next, in step 5030, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H sets a predetermined value (60s in this example) in the medal count clear timer (decrement timer) and starts measuring the medal count clear timer, and proceeds to step 5032. Also, if the answer is No in step 5026, then proceeds to step 5032. The predetermined value of the medal count clear timer in step 5030 is sometimes referred to as the initial value.

In this way, in the second embodiment, when the power is turned on with the medal count clear button pressed, the number of game medals is cleared, a predetermined value (60s in this example) is set in the medal count clear timer, and the medal count clear timer starts measuring. When the medal count clear timer value becomes 0, a command for medal count clear is sent from the payout control board H to the main control board M, and a command for medal count clear is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S receives the command for medal count clear, and a notification for medal count clear is executed. Note that in the second embodiment, it takes about 30 seconds from when the reel type gaming machine is turned on until the sub-control board S completes the predetermined initial process (initial process executed when the power is turned on), so the medal count clear timer is set to 60 seconds, which is longer than 30 seconds.

The timer value set in the medal count clear timer may be changed, and may be configured to be set to a value that is longer than the difference between the time required for the sub-control board S side to complete the specified initial processing (initial processing executed when power is turned on) after the reel type gaming machine is powered on, and the time required for the payout control board H side to complete the specified initial processing (initial processing executed when power is turned on) after the reel type gaming machine is powered on.

The time required from when the reel type gaming machine is powered on until the specified initial processing executed when the power is turned on is completed may be, in order from shortest to longest, "main control board M → payout control board H → sub-control board S," or "payout control board H → main control board M → sub-control board S."

The difference between the time required for the predetermined initial processing on the payout control board H side (initial processing executed when power is turned on) to be completed after the reel type gaming machine is powered on and the time required for the predetermined initial processing on the main control board M side (initial processing executed when power is turned on) to be completed after the reel type gaming machine is powered on may be configured to be shorter than the difference between the time required for the predetermined initial processing on the sub-control board S side (initial processing executed when power is turned on) to be completed after the reel type gaming machine is powered on and the time required for the predetermined initial processing on the main control board M side (initial processing executed when power is turned on) to be completed after the reel type gaming machine is powered on.

Note that the medal count clear timer is cleared to zero by initializing the RAM in step 5018 (sometimes referred to as RAM clear), regardless of the initialization start address of the RAM. Therefore, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the medal count clear timer is measuring (when the medal count clear timer's timer value is greater than 0) and the power is then restored with the medal count clear button not pressed, the medal count clear timer is cleared to zero and the medal count clear timer is not set to the specified value. On the other hand, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the medal count clear timer is measuring (when the medal count clear timer's timer value is greater than 0) and the power is then restored with the medal count clear button pressed, the medal count clear timer is cleared to zero and the medal count clear timer is then reset to the specified value. Note that clearing to zero is sometimes referred to as clearing.

The medal count clear timer may be an increment timer. In this configuration, the initial value of the medal count clear timer is 0, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 60 seconds), a command to clear the medal count is sent from the payout control board H to the main control board M, and a command to clear the medal count is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S receives the command to clear the medal count, and an alert is issued regarding the medal count being cleared.

Although not shown, when the power is restored with the medal count clear button pressed, the medal count clear status is configured to be turned on. After the power is restored with the medal count clear button pressed, the medal count clear status is configured to be turned off when the first game ends (when the game end process for the first game is executed). In this specification, the medal count clear status being on may be referred to as a predetermined value (e.g., FFH, 01H, etc.) being stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM area) in which information related to the medal count clear status is stored, and the medal count clear status being off may be referred to as a predetermined value (e.g., FFH, 01H, etc.) not being stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM area) in which information related to the medal count clear status is stored, or a specific value (e.g., 00H, etc.) different from the predetermined value being stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM area) in which information related to the medal count clear status is stored.

In addition, even if the number of game medals is 0, if the power is restored with the medal count clear button pressed, step 5026 is configured to determine Yes. Therefore, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off when the number of game medals is 0, and then the power is restored with the medal count clear button pressed, the number of game medals is cleared and a predetermined value is set to the medal count clear timer.

In addition, after a predetermined value is set in the medal count clear timer, if the timer value becomes 0, information regarding medal count clearing may be sent to the rental machine, and for example, information regarding medal count clearing may be included in the HC/fraud monitoring information.

Next, in step 5032, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether the timer value of the power recovery abnormality timer (decrement timer) is not 0. If the answer is Yes in step 5032 or No in step 5024, in step 5034, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H sets the power recovery abnormality timer to a predetermined value (60 s in this example) and starts measuring the power recovery abnormality timer, and proceeds to step 5035. Also, if the answer is No in step 5032, proceeds to step 5035. The predetermined value of the power recovery abnormality timer in step 5034 is sometimes referred to as the initial value.

In this way, in the second embodiment, when the power is turned on and it is determined that the power return is abnormal, in other words, when it is determined that the RAM check is abnormal or the power off is abnormal, a predetermined value (60s in this example) is set in the power return abnormality timer and the measurement of the power return abnormality timer is started. When the timer value of the power return abnormality timer becomes 0, a command regarding the power return abnormality is transmitted from the payout control board H to the main control board M, and a command regarding the power return abnormality is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command regarding the power return abnormality, thereby executing a notification regarding the power return abnormality. In the second embodiment, it is configured to take about 30 seconds from when the power of the reel type gaming machine is turned on until the execution of a predetermined initial process (initial process executed when the power is turned on) on the sub-control board S is completed, so that 60 seconds, which is longer than the 30 seconds, is set in the power return abnormality timer.

In addition, if the power supply to the slot machine is cut off while the power recovery abnormality timer is being measured (when the timer value of the power recovery abnormality timer is > 0) and power-off processing is executed, the result of the processing in step 5032 when the power is subsequently restored is determined to be Yes, and the processing in step 5034 is configured to reset the power recovery abnormality timer to a predetermined value (60 s in this example).

The power recovery abnormality timer may be an increment timer. In this configuration, the initial value of the power recovery abnormality timer is 0, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 60 seconds), a command regarding the power recovery abnormality is sent from the dispensing control board H to the main control board M, and a command regarding the power recovery abnormality is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S receives the command regarding the power recovery abnormality, and an alert regarding the power recovery abnormality is issued.

In addition, after a predetermined value is set in the power recovery abnormality timer, if the timer value becomes 0, information related to the power recovery abnormality may be sent to the rental machine, and for example, information related to the power recovery abnormality may be included in the HC/fraud monitoring information. In addition, when information related to the power recovery abnormality is included in the HC/fraud monitoring information, the information may be different from the information related to the medal count clear described above (for example, set to a different digit).

By configuring it in this way, if the power supply to the slot machine is cut off while the medal count clear timer is timing, and then the power is restored without the medal count clear button being pressed, the medal count clear timer is initialized, so that no notification regarding the medal count clear is made during play immediately after the power is turned on, and the player is not confused. On the other hand, if the power supply to the slot machine is cut off while the power recovery abnormality timer is timing, and then the power is restored, the timer value of the power recovery abnormality timer is reset, so that notifications regarding the power recovery abnormality can continue even if the RAM is illegally cleared.

The medal-less reel-type gaming machine may also be configured as follows. (1) When the power supply to the reel-type gaming machine is cut off during the measurement of the power recovery abnormality timer (when the timer value of the power recovery abnormality timer is > 0), and the power-off process is executed, and then when the power is restored with the medal count clear button pressed, the medal count clear timer is not set to a predetermined value (60 s in this example), and the power recovery abnormality timer is set to a predetermined value (60 s in this example). (2) When the power supply to the reel-type gaming machine is cut off during the measurement of the power recovery abnormality timer (when the timer value of the power recovery abnormality timer is > 0), and the power-off process is executed, and then when the power is restored with the medal count clear button pressed, the medal count clear timer is set to a predetermined value (60 s in this example), and the power recovery abnormality timer is also set to a predetermined value (60 s in this example).

In addition, the specified value set for the medal count clear timer and the specified value set for the power recovery abnormality timer can be different values.

In addition, the notification mode on the sub-control board S side when the timer value of the medal count clear timer reaches 0 (sometimes referred to as a notification mode related to medal count clearing) and the notification mode on the sub-control board S side when the timer value of the power recovery abnormality timer reaches 0 (sometimes referred to as a notification response related to power recovery abnormality) may be different notification modes, and when configured in this manner, the notification mode related to the power recovery abnormality may be a more noticeable notification mode (highly visible notification mode) than the notification mode related to medal count clearing.

Next, in step 5035, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H saves the power status flag and the power interruption detection flag, and proceeds to step 5036. Note that in this specification, what is referred to as saving a flag may also be referred to as turning a flag on, and what is referred to as turning a flag on may also be referred to as saving a flag. Also, in this specification, information corresponding to an on flag is "1", and information corresponding to an off flag is "0", and in step 5035, "1" is saved in the memory area corresponding to the power status flag and the power interruption detection flag.

If the power is turned on normally, the power status flag and power off detection flag are turned on in step 5035. However, if fraudulent activity has been committed against the gaming machine, the power status flag and power off detection flag may not be turned on in step 5035. In this case, the power off abnormality data will be set in the power off processing described below.

Next, in step 5036, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H disables timer interrupts. Next, in step 5038, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H executes medal count control command reception processing (command reception processing on the payout control board H side). Next, in step 5040, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether or not a power outage has been detected.

If the answer is Yes in step 5040, then in step 5042, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H allows a timer interrupt, proceeds to step 5036, and repeats the processing of steps 5036 to 5042. If the answer is No in step 5040, then in step 5050, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H executes the power-off processing described below. Note that the repeated processing of steps 5036 to 5042 is sometimes referred to as the main loop processing.

Next, FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the power-off processing related to the subroutine of step 5050 in FIG. 80 in the second embodiment. First, in step 5052, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H clears and restarts the watchdog timer. Next, in step 5054, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H sets the power-off normal data.

Next, in step 5056, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether the power-on was abnormal. If the answer is Yes in step 5056, in step 5058, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H sets power-off abnormality data and proceeds to step 5060. If the answer is No in step 5056, the process proceeds to step 5060 without executing the process in step 5058.

Here, in step 5056, it is determined whether the power status flag and power off detection flag are on by the processing of step 5035 in FIG. 80, which was executed when the power was turned on before the current power off processing was executed, and if the power status flag and power off detection flag are not on, it is determined that the power on was abnormal, and power off abnormality data is set in step 5058. Also, if power off abnormality data is set in step 5058, when the power is subsequently restored, step 5004 in FIG. 79 will be determined as No, and step 5014 will be determined as No.

Next, in step 5060, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H saves the power status flag. In step 5060, the power status flag may be configured to be turned on, or a value obtained by exclusive-oring a value corresponding to the status of the power status flag when the processing of step 5060 is executed ("1" if the power status flag is on in step 5035 of FIG. 80, and "0" if it is not on) with "1", which is the value corresponding to the normal status of the power status flag, may be saved.

Next, in step 5062, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H saves the RAM check data. Next, in step 5064, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H prohibits access to the RAM and executes an infinite loop process to wait for a reset.

Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process in the second embodiment. The process of this subroutine is configured to start execution when a timer interrupt is started, and thereafter to be executed periodically at a predetermined time interval.

First, in step 5102, the CPUC200 of the payout control board H clears and restarts the watchdog timer. Next, in step 5104, the CPUC200 of the payout control board H sets "-3 to 15" as the range check data. The range check data is data used in the medal count check process in step 5150, which will be described in detail later. Next, in step 5150, the CPUC200 of the payout control board H executes the medal count check process, which will be described later. Note that the timer interrupt process is configured to execute the medal count check process in step 5150 twice, and this process may be referred to as the medal count check process after step 5104 or the first medal count check process. The timer interrupt process may also be referred to as the interrupt process.

Next, in step 5106, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H executes a read of the input port. Next, in step 5200, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H executes a game information management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 5300, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H executes a counting control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 5400, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H executes a loan notification receiving process, which will be described later.

Next, in step 5108, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H sets the range check data to "-50 to 50". Next, in step 5150, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H executes the game medal count check process described below. Note that the timer interrupt process is configured to execute the game medal count check process of step 5150 twice, and this process is sometimes referred to as the game medal count check process after step 5108 or the second game medal count check process.

Next, in step 5110, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H executes status control. In the status control of step 5110, processing is performed to set a signal for transmitting the status of the gaming machine, such as an error, to the main control board M, to set error display data, and to control the display of the performance display device SH.

Next, in step 5112, the CPUC200 of the payout control board H executes timer management processing and returns to the processing that was being executed immediately before execution of this interrupt processing. In the timer management processing in step 5112, update processing (such as subtraction processing) of various timers, including the medal count clear timer and the power recovery abnormality timer, is executed.

Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the game medal count check process related to the subroutine of step 5150 in FIG. 82 in the second embodiment. First, in step 5152, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H obtains the current game medal count. Next, in step 5154, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H calculates the game medal count change value.

Here, the change in the number of game medals is the change in the number of game medals from the previous game medal number check process to the current game medal number check process, and more specifically, is the value obtained by subtracting the number of game medals obtained in step 5152 in the previous game medal number check process from the number of game medals obtained in step 5152 in the current game medal number check process. If the current game medal number check process is the first game medal number check process (game medal number check process after step 5104), the change in the number of game medals from the second game medal number check process (game medal number check process after step 5108) to the first game medal number check process is calculated, and if the current game medal number check process is the second game medal number check process, the change in the number of game medals from the first game medal number check process to the second game medal number check process is calculated. In other words, if the current medal count check process is the first medal count check process, the change in medal count from the end of a timer interrupt process to the start of the next timer interrupt process (which may be referred to as the change in the main loop process (steps 5036 to 5042)) is calculated, and if the current medal count check process is the second medal count check process, the change in medal count from the start to the end of the timer interrupt process is calculated.

The gaming medal count change value may be referred to as the increase/decrease in the gaming medal count or the increase/decrease in the total gaming value. The first gaming medal count check process may be referred to as the first process, and the second gaming medal count check process may be referred to as the second process. The period from the first gaming medal count check process to the second gaming medal count check process may be from any timing during the execution of the first gaming medal count check process to any timing during the execution of the second gaming medal count check process, and the period from the second gaming medal count check process to the first gaming medal count check process may be from any timing during the execution of the second gaming medal count check process to any timing during the execution of the first gaming medal count check process.

Next, in step 5156, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the change in the number of game medals calculated in step 5154 is greater than the range check data. If the current game medal number check process is the first game medal number check process, the range check data is "-3 to 15" set in step 5104, and if the current game medal number check process is the second game medal number check process, the range check data is "-50 to 50" set in step 5108. If the answer is Yes in step 5156, in step 5158, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H sets a predetermined value (200 ms in this example) to the out-of-range increase/decrease timer (the out-of-range increase/decrease timer starts measuring) and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 5106 or step 5110). Also, if the answer is No at step 5156, the process proceeds to the next step (step 5106 or step 5110) without executing the process at step 5158.

The "-3 to 15" set in step 5104 may be referred to as the first range, and the "-50 to 50" set in step 5108 may be referred to as the second range. The out-of-range increase/decrease timer may be referred to as the specified timer.

In this way, in the second embodiment, when the medal count change value is greater than the range check data, in other words, when the medal count has changed beyond the normal range, a predetermined value is set in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer. By setting a predetermined value in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer, a command is sent to the main control board M to the effect that the medal count change value is abnormal. Furthermore, when the main control board M receives a command to the effect that the medal count change value is abnormal, it sends a command to the sub-control board S to the effect that the medal count change value is abnormal, and when the sub-control board S receives a command to the effect that the medal count change value is abnormal, it issues an alert (error alert) to the effect that the medal count change value is abnormal.

In the second embodiment, as described above, the out-of-range increase/decrease timer is configured to be set to a predetermined value of 200 ms. By configuring it in this way, even when multiple commands are sent from the payout control board H to the main control board M in a short period of time, it is possible to configure it so that a command indicating that the game medal count change value is abnormal can be sent from the payout control board H to the main control board M before the timer value of the out-of-range increase/decrease timer reaches 0. The predetermined value set for the out-of-range increase/decrease timer may be a value other than 200 ms, but by setting it to a value of 256 ms or less, for example, the capacity used for the timer can be reduced.

In addition, if the current medal count check process is the first medal count check process, the medal count change value from the processing of step 5152 in the second medal count check process to the processing of step 5152 in the first medal count check process, in other words, the medal count change value from the end of the timer interrupt process to the start of the next timer interrupt process, is checked, and the range check data is "-3 to 15", which is the increase or decrease in the medal count when the upper limit number of medals is bet, to "15", which is the increase or decrease in the medal count when the maximum number of medals is paid out. In this way, from the end of the timer interrupt process to the start of the next timer interrupt process, the number of medals bet, the number of medals to be settled, and the number of medals to be paid out, which are transmitted and received between the payout control board H and the main control board M, are monitored.

In addition, if the current medal count check process is the second medal count check process, the medal count change value from the processing of step 5152 in the first medal count check process to the processing of step 5152 in the second medal count check process, in other words, the medal count change value from the start to the end of the timer interrupt process, is checked, and the range check data is "-50 to 50", which is the range from "-50", which is the increase or decrease in the medal count (sometimes called the counted medal count) when counting is performed by pressing and holding the count button, to "50", which is the increase or decrease in the medal count (sometimes called the loaned medal count) when loaning is performed by operating the loan button. In this way, the number of loaned medals and the number of counted medals transmitted and received between the payout control board H and the loan machine are monitored from the start to the end of the timer interrupt process.

By configuring it in this way, the change in the number of game medals during the period when timer interrupt processing is not being executed from the end of timer interrupt processing to the start of the next timer interrupt processing, and the change in the number of game medals during the period when timer interrupt processing is being executed from the start to the end of timer interrupt processing, can be monitored, and if an abnormality is determined, an alert is issued on the sub-control board S side, making it possible to make the gaming machine resistant to fraud.

The range check data is not limited to the values in the second embodiment, and may be changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine. For example, the lower limit of the range check data in step 5104 may be the maximum number of bets multiplied by "-1", and the upper limit of the range check data in step 5104 may be the maximum number of payouts. The lower limit of the range check data in step 5108 may be the maximum number of counted medals when one count is performed multiplied by "-1", and the upper limit of the range check data in step 5108 may be the maximum number of lent medals when one lending is performed. The lower limit of the range check data in step 5104 may be the maximum number of bets multiplied by "-1" ("(maximum number of bets + 1) x (-1)"), and the upper limit of the range check data in step 5104 may be the maximum number of payouts plus "1". In addition, the lower limit of the range check data in step 5108 may be the maximum number of medals counted during one counting operation plus "1" multiplied by "-1" ("(maximum number of medals counted + 1) x (-1)"), and the upper limit of the range check data in step 5108 may be the maximum number of medals lent during one lending operation plus "1".

The lower limit of the range check data in step 5104 may be a value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation on the maximum number of bets (which may be referred to as a value based on the maximum number of bets or a value related to the maximum number of bets), and the upper limit of the range check data in step 5104 may be a value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation on the maximum number of payout coins (which may be referred to as a value based on the maximum number of payout coins or a value related to the maximum number of payout coins). In this way, the first game medal number check process in the timer interrupt process may be configured to use a value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation on the maximum number of bets and a value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation on the maximum number of payout coins (which may be the same calculation as the predetermined calculation on the maximum number of bets or a different calculation).

The lower limit of the range check data in step 5108 may be a value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation on the maximum number of counted medals during one counting run (which may be referred to as a value based on the maximum number of counted medals or a value related to the maximum number of counted medals), and the upper limit of the range check data in step 5108 may be a value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation on the maximum number of loaned medals during one loaning run (which may be referred to as a value based on the maximum number of loaned medals or a value related to the maximum number of loaned medals). In this way, the second game medal count check process in the timer interrupt process may be configured to use a value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation on the maximum number of counted medals during one counting run and a value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation on the maximum number of loaned medals during one loaning run (which may be the same calculation as the predetermined calculation on the maximum number of counted medals or a different calculation).

Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the gaming machine information management process related to the subroutine of step 5200 in FIG. 82 in the second embodiment. First, in step 5202, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H subtracts 1 from the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer. The gaming machine information notification timer is a timer that measures the timing for setting the gaming machine information notification that is sent to the lending machine every 300 ms as mentioned above.

Next, in step 5204, the CPUC200 of the payout control board H judges whether the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer before the update in step 5202 is not 0. If the answer is Yes in step 5204, in step 5206, the CPUC200 of the payout control board H judges whether the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer before the update in step 5202 is 1. If the answer is Yes in step 5206, in other words, if the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer becomes 0 by the processing of step 5202 and it is the set timing of the gaming machine information notification, in step 5208, the CPUC200 of the payout control board H sets a predetermined value (the transmission interval of the gaming machine information notification, in this example, 300 ms) to the gaming machine information notification timer. Note that the set timing of the gaming machine information notification may be referred to as the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification.

If the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer becomes 0 during the processing of step 5200, the gaming machine information notification is set in step 5226, step 5230, or step 5250.

If the answer is No at step 5204, the HC/fraud monitoring information setting process described below is executed at step 5250, and the process moves to the next process (the process at step 5300). Note that if the answer is No at step 5204, for example, the answer is No at step 5204 if the process at step 5200 is executed in a situation where the process at step 5208 has not been executed after the gaming machine is powered on.

Next, in step 5210, the response permission flag is turned off (cleared). Here, the response permission flag is a flag regarding permission to receive rental notifications from the rental machine, and is configured to be turned on in the HC/fraud monitoring information setting process described below, and turned off at the subsequent timing of setting the gaming machine information notification. In other words, the response permission flag is turned on if the determination is No in step 5204, step 5220, step 5222, or step 5224, and then the response permission flag is turned off if the determination is Yes in step 5206.

In addition, in this specification, the response permission flag being on may be referred to as a predetermined value (e.g., FFH, 01H, etc.) being stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM area) corresponding to the response permission flag, and the response permission flag being off may be referred to as a predetermined value (e.g., FFH, 01H, etc.) not being stored in the predetermined storage area (RAM area) corresponding to the response permission flag, or a specific value (e.g., 00H, etc.) different from the predetermined value being stored in the predetermined storage area (RAM area) corresponding to the response permission flag, and this is not limited to only the response permission flag, and may apply to the on/off of all flags in this specification.

The response permission flag may be referred to as a specified flag.

In this specification, turning off (clearing) a flag means changing the flag from on to off if the flag is on, and leaving the flag off if the flag is off. Also, if the flag is off as a result of executing this process, any process may be executed.

Next, in step 5212, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H turns off the communication error 1 flag. Next, in step 5214, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether the counter value of the loan notification reception counter is not 1. If the answer is Yes in step 5214, in step 5216, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H turns on the communication error 1 flag and proceeds to step 5218; on the other hand, if the answer is No in step 5214, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H proceeds to step 5218 without executing the processing of step 5216. Next, in step 5218, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H clears the loan notification reception counter.

The loan notification reception counter is a counter that is incremented by one when a loan notification is received from the loaner machine (the processing of step 5452 in FIG. 89 described later) and cleared at the timing for setting the gaming machine information notification (the processing of step 5218 in FIG. 84). Also, communication error 1 is an error related to a communication error between the payout control board H and the loaner machine, and is configured so that the communication error 1 flag is turned on when communication error 1 occurs, and is configured to determine that communication error 1 occurs (that communication error 1 has occurred) when the number of times a loan notification has been received since the previous gaming machine information notification was set is not 1 at the timing for setting the gaming machine information notification.

Next, in step 5220, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the state on the main control board M side has changed since the set timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. If the answer is Yes in step 5220, in step 5222, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the input information is 0 and the payout information is 0, in other words, whether there is no new bet and no new payout. If the answer is Yes in step 5222, in step 5224, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the time related to the gaming machine installation information has elapsed.

If the answer is Yes in step 5224, in step 5226, the CPUC200 of the payout control board H sets the gaming machine installation information as a gaming machine information notification, and proceeds to the next process (processing in step 5300).

Also, if the answer is No at step 5220 or step 5222, proceed to step 5250.

Also, if the answer is No at step 5224, then at step 5228 the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the time related to the gaming machine performance information has elapsed. If the answer is Yes at step 5228, then at step 5230 the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H sets the gaming machine performance information as a gaming machine information notification, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 5300). If the answer is No at step 5228, then proceeds to step 5250.

Also, if the answer is No in step 5206, in other words, if it is not the time to set the gaming machine information notification, the process proceeds to the next step (step 5300).

As mentioned above, the gaming machine information notification is configured to be set as any of HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information. HC/fraud monitoring information is configured to be set every 300 ms, gaming machine installation information every 60 s, and gaming machine performance information every 180 s. When multiple pieces of information are set, the information with the highest priority is set, and the information with the lowest priority is set at the set timing of the gaming machine information notification from the next time onwards.

In addition, gaming machine information notification may be referred to as specified information, HC/fraud monitoring information may be referred to as specified information, gaming machine installation information may be referred to as specified information, and gaming machine performance information may be referred to as specified information.

As shown in the figure, the information with the highest priority as a gaming machine information notification is HC/fraud monitoring information that includes gaming information, which corresponds to No in step 5220 and No in step 5222. The information with the second highest priority is gaming machine installation information, which corresponds to Yes in step 5224. The information with the third highest priority is gaming machine performance information, which corresponds to Yes in step 5228. Additionally, the information with the lowest priority as a gaming machine information notification is HC/fraud monitoring information that does not include gaming information, which corresponds to No in step 5228.

In addition, "time related to gaming machine installation information has elapsed" in step 5224 includes the timing for setting the gaming machine installation information every 60 seconds and the timing for setting the gaming machine information notification from the next time onwards when information with a higher priority than the gaming machine installation information is set at the timing for setting the gaming machine installation information.

In addition, "time related to gaming machine performance information has elapsed" in step 5228 includes the timing for setting the gaming machine performance information every 180 seconds and the timing for setting the gaming machine information notification from the next time onwards when information with a higher priority than the gaming machine performance information is set at the timing for setting the gaming machine performance information.

In the second embodiment, the process of step 5250 is configured to execute a process of turning on the response permission flag, but the process of steps 5226 and 5230 is configured not to execute a process of turning on the response permission flag. In other words, when HC/fraud monitoring information is set as the gaming machine information notification, the process of turning on the response permission flag is executed, but when gaming machine installation information or gaming machine performance information is set as the gaming machine information notification, the process of turning on the response permission flag is not executed. On the other hand, the process of turning off the response permission flag is executed in step 5210, so that it is configured to be executed when HC/fraud monitoring information is set, when gaming machine installation information is set, and when gaming machine performance information is set as the gaming machine information notification.

In addition, the processing of steps 5226 and 5230 may be configured to execute the process of turning on the response permission flag, or may be configured not to execute the process of turning on the response permission flag.

As described above, the gaming machine information notifications are prioritized in the following order from highest to lowest: "HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information → gaming machine installation information → gaming machine performance information → HC/fraud monitoring information not including gaming information." If the output timings of multiple gaming machine information notifications overlap, the gaming machine information notification with the highest priority is output, and any gaming machine information notifications (gaming machine installation information or gaming machine performance information) that are not output at that timing will be output at the output timing of the next gaming machine information notification, which is 300 ms later. If the output timings of multiple gaming machine information notifications also overlap at the output timing of the next gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification with the highest priority at that timing will be output, and any gaming machine information notifications that are not output at that timing will be output at the output timing of the gaming machine information notification after that, which is another 300 ms later.

A specific example of the output of gaming machine information notification may be configured as follows:

<Configuration 1>
At a first timing when the output timing of the HC/fraud monitoring information including the gaming information and the gaming machine installation information overlap, the HC/fraud monitoring information including the gaming information is output. Then, at a second timing 300 ms later, the output timing of the HC/fraud monitoring information not including the gaming information and the gaming machine installation information overlap, and the gaming machine installation information is output.

<Configuration 2>
At a first timing when the output timing of the HC/fraud monitoring information including the gaming information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information overlap, the HC/fraud monitoring information including the gaming information is output. Then, at a second timing 300 ms later, the output timing of the HC/fraud monitoring information not including the gaming information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information overlap, and the gaming machine installation information is output. Then, at a third timing 300 ms later, the output timing of the HC/fraud monitoring information not including the gaming information and the gaming machine performance information overlap, and the gaming machine performance information is output.

The content of the gaming machine information notification that is output at the second timing due to an overlap in output timing at the first timing may be the content corresponding to the first timing or the content corresponding to the second timing. In addition, the gaming machine installation information and gaming machine performance information may have content corresponding to the first timing, while HC/fraud monitoring information that does not include gaming information may have content corresponding to the second timing, and may differ depending on the type of gaming machine information notification.

In addition, the game information in the HC/fraud monitoring information including game information is the information indicating that the state on the main control board M side has changed as described above in step 5220, and the input information indicating that a bet has been made as described above in step 5222, or the payout information indicating that a payout has been made, and HC/fraud monitoring information including either of these pieces of information is considered to be HC/fraud monitoring information including game information.

The payout control board H also outputs a gaming machine information notification to the lending machine, and the lending machine is configured to output an external signal to the hall computer. Because of this configuration, if the priority of the HC/fraud monitoring information including the gaming information is lowered, for example, when a bonus such as BB ends, information regarding the payout in the bonus is planned to be output as the HC/fraud monitoring information including the gaming information, but because the output timing overlaps with other gaming machine information notifications, the output timing of the HC/fraud monitoring information including the gaming information is delayed, and there is a risk that it will be output to the hall computer as information regarding the payout in the normal gaming state after the bonus ends. In order to prevent such a situation, in the second embodiment, the HC/fraud monitoring information including the gaming information is set as the gaming machine information notification with the highest priority, so that accurate information regarding the gaming situation can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the HC/fraud monitoring information setting process related to the subroutine of step 5250 in FIG. 84 in the second embodiment. First, in step 5252, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H sets the HC/fraud monitoring information as a gaming machine information notification. If the answer is No in step 5220 or step 5224 in FIG. 84, the HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information is set in step 5252, and if the answer is No in step 5228 in FIG. 84, the HC/fraud monitoring information not including gaming information is set in step 5252.

Next, in step 5256, the CPUC200 of the dispensing control board H turns on the response permission flag and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 5300). As described above, the response permission flag is turned on in step 5256, and then the response permission flag is turned off in step 5210 of FIG. 84.

Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the counting control process related to the subroutine of step 5300 in FIG. 82 in the second embodiment. First, in step 5350, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H executes the counting button check process described below. Next, in step 5302, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether it is the timing to set the counting notification. In the second embodiment, the counting notification is configured to be set every 300 ms.

If the answer is Yes in step 5302, in step 5304, the CPUC200 of the payout control board H clears the number of medals counted. Next, in step 5306, the CPUC200 of the payout control board H determines whether the VL abnormality flag is off. Here, the VL abnormality flag is a flag that is turned on when the connection between the reel type gaming machine and the lending machine cannot be confirmed (when the VL connection signal is off). Although not shown, if the connection between the reel type gaming machine and the lending machine cannot be confirmed, the VL abnormality flag is turned on in the processing of step 5106 in FIG. 82. In addition, if a VL abnormality occurs, the game is stopped and the player is notified that the game has been stopped (for example, the performance display device S40 on the sub-control board S side is notified). In addition, when the VL connection signal is turned on, the VL abnormality may be released.

In addition, in this specification, the VL abnormality flag being on may be referred to as a predetermined value (e.g., FFH, 01H, etc.) being stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM area) corresponding to the VL abnormality flag, and the VL abnormality flag being off may be referred to as a predetermined value (e.g., FFH, 01H, etc.) not being stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM area) corresponding to the VL abnormality flag, or a specific value (e.g., 00H, etc.) different from the predetermined value being stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM area) corresponding to the VL abnormality flag, and this is not limited to only the VL abnormality flag, and may apply to the on/off of all flags in this specification.

If the answer is Yes in step 5306, then in step 5308 the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the number of game medals is not 0. If the answer is Yes in step 5308, then in step 5310 the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines and stores the number of counted medals based on the state of the count button. Here, the count button state refers to the state related to the operation status of the count button, and details will be described later. Note that if the number of counted medals is greater than the number of game medals, the number of game medals will be stored as the number of counted medals. As a specific example, if the number of counted medals based on the state of the count button is 50, but the number of game medals is 30, then 30 will be stored as the number of counted medals.

Although not shown, the counted medal count based on the count button state in a situation where the number of game medals is 50 or more is as follows: (1) When the count button state is 0: The counted medal count is 0 (2) When the count button state is 1: The counted medal count is 1 (3) When the count button state is 2: The counted medal count is 50 (4) When the count button state is 3: The counted medal count is 50 If the game medal count is less than the counted medal count above, the game medal count is saved as the counted medal count.

Next, in step 5312, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H subtracts the counted medal number stored in step 5310 from the number of game medals, and stores the game medal number after subtraction. Next, in step 5314, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H adds the counted medal number stored in step 5310 to the cumulative counted medal number, stores the cumulative counted medal number after the addition, and proceeds to step 5316. Here, the cumulative counted medal number is the cumulative number of counted medals since the power was turned on.

Also, if step 5306 or step 5308 is No, the process proceeds to step 5316. In this way, in the second embodiment, if the VL abnormality flag is on, or if the VL abnormality flag is off and the number of game medals is 0, counting (sometimes referred to as counting processing) is not performed. Note that even if the VL abnormality flag is on, if the VL abnormality flag is off and the number of game medals is 0, if the count button has not been operated, or if the counting processing cannot be performed, the process of adding 0 to the cumulative counted medal number may be performed as the process of step 5314.

The gaming machine information notification (HC/fraud monitoring information) includes information regarding the number of gaming medals, and the rental machine is configured to be able to detect abnormalities in the gaming machine by monitoring the number of gaming medals. Furthermore, if a VL abnormality occurs, the gaming machine will not output a gaming machine information notification (HC/fraud monitoring information) to the rental machine, and the rental machine will not be able to detect abnormalities in the gaming machine. Because of this configuration, if a VL abnormality occurs (if the VL abnormality flag is on), the main control board M is configured to enter an error state in which play is not possible (play is stopped). When play is not possible, the start lever cannot be accepted, the bet button cannot be accepted, and the settlement button cannot be accepted.

The configuration related to the VL abnormality may be as follows. Note that one of the following configurations may be applied, or a combination of multiple configurations may be applied. (1) Whether or not the VL connection signal is off is monitored by a predetermined process (which may be a timer interrupt process or a main loop process, for example, the process of step 5106 in FIG. 82). (2) If it is detected that the VL connection signal is off, an error state corresponding to the VL abnormality is entered, and a notice is given that play is impossible (for example, a notice is given by the performance display device S40, the speaker S20, the LED lamp S10, etc.). (3) The error state corresponding to the VL abnormality continues until it is detected that the VL connection signal is on (it may be released when it is detected that the VL connection signal is on, or it may be released when the power is subsequently turned off->on).

The VL connection signal may be generated by the connection terminal board described above.

Next, in step 5316, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H sets a counting notification. Next, in step 5318, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether the counting button state is 2 or greater (whether the counting button state is 2 or 3). If the answer is Yes in step 5318, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H sets the counting button state to 3 and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 5400). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 5318, in step 5322, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H clears the counting button state (sets it to 0) and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 5400). Also, if the answer is No in step 5302, the process proceeds to the next process (processing of step 5400).

If the count button state is 3 when step 5300 is executed, the count button state may be reset to 3 in step 5320, or the processing of step 5320 may not be executed.

Next, FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the count button check process related to the subroutine of step 5350 in FIG. 86 in the second embodiment. The process of step 5350 is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs. First, in step 5352, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H obtains the current count button state. Next, in step 5354, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether the count button state is not 1. Note that in the second embodiment, there are four count button states, 0 to 3, and one of 00H to 03H corresponding to the count button state is stored in a specified memory area (RAM area) in which information regarding the count button state is stored.

If the answer is Yes at step 5354, then in step 5356 the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether the count button state is not 2. If the answer is Yes at step 5356, in other words, if the count button state is 0 or 3, then in step 5358 the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether the count button is on. Note that the count button being on means that the count button sensor detects on (operation). If the answer is Yes at step 5358, then in step 5360 the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether the count button state is 0.

If the answer is No in step 5354, step 5356, or step 5360, in other words, if the count button state is 1 or 2, or if the count button is on and the count button state is 3, proceed to step 5376.

Next, in step 5362, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H adds a predetermined value (for example, a value equivalent to the execution interval of the timer interrupt process) to the timer value of the count button timer. Here, the count button timer is a timer for measuring the time that the count button is continuously on, and is an increment timer. Next, in step 5364, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether the timer value of the count button timer is 500 ms or more.

If the answer is Yes in step 5364, in step 5366, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H sets the counting button state to 2 and proceeds to step 5374.

Also, if the answer is No at step 5358, in other words if the count button is off, then at step 5368 the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H sets the count button state to 0. Next, at step 5370 the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether the timer value of the count button timer is not 0. If the answer is Yes at step 5370, then at step 5372 the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H sets the count button state to 1 and proceeds to step 5374. On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 5370, then the process proceeds to step 5374 without executing the processing at step 5372.

Next, in step 5374, the CPUC200 of the dispensing control board H saves the counting button state and proceeds to step 5376.

Next, in step 5376, the CPUC200 of the dispensing control board H clears the count button timer and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 5302). Also, if the answer is No in step 5364, the CPUC200 proceeds to the next process (the process of step 5302).

In this way, in the second embodiment, the count button state is determined by the operation status of the count button, and the number of counted medals is determined based on the count button state.

The count button state and counted medal count in the second embodiment are configured as follows. Note that when the count button state is set to 0, it is sometimes referred to as the count button state being 0. The same applies to count button states 1 to 3.

<Count button state = 1>
(1) After the count button is turned on, if the count button is turned off when the timer value of the count button timer is less than 500 ms, the count button state is set to 1 in step 5372. (2) After the count button state is set to 1, step 5354 becomes No and the count button state remains at 1 until the next count notification set timing (until step 5302 is determined to be Yes). (3) When the count button state is 1 and it is time to set the count notification (step 5302 is determined to be Yes), the count medal number is determined to be 1 (if the game medal number is 1 or more). (4) After that, in step 5322, the count button state is cleared (the count button state is set to 0).

<Count button state = 2>
(1) After the count button is turned on, when the timer value of the count button timer reaches 500 ms, the count button state is set to 2 in step 5366. (2) After the count button state is set to 2, the count button state remains 2 until the next count notification set timing (until the count button state is determined to be Yes in step 5302). (3) When the count button state is 2 and the count notification set timing (Yes in step 5302) arrives, the count medal number is determined to be 50 (if the game medal number is 50 or more). (4) After that, the count button state becomes Yes in step 5318, and the count button state is set to 3. (5) Even if the count button is turned off after the count button state is set to 2, the count button state remains 2 until the next count notification set timing.

<Count button state = 3>
(1) When the count button state is 2 and it is time to set the count notification (Yes in step 5302), the count button state is set to 3 in step 5320. (2) When the count button state is 3 and it is time to set the count notification (Yes in step 5302), the number of counted medals is determined to be 50 (if the number of game medals is 50 or more). (3) When the count button state is 3 and the count button is turned off, the count button state is cleared (the count button state is set to 0) in the processing of step 5368 in the next timer interrupt processing.

<Count button state = 0>
(1) When the count button state is 1 and it is time to set the count notification (Yes in step 5302), the count button state is cleared in step 5322 (the count button state is set to 0). (2) When the count button state is 3 and the count button is turned off, the count button state is cleared in the processing of step 5368 (the count button state is set to 0). (3) When the count button state is 0 and the count button remains off, the count button state is 0. (4) When the count button state is 0 and it is time to set the count notification (Yes in step 5302), counting is not performed (or the number of counted medals to be counted is 0).

As for the operation mode of the count button, the operation mode corresponding to count button state = 1 may be referred to as a short press, and the operation mode corresponding to count button state = 2 or 3 may be referred to as a long press. The count button being on continuously for 500 ms or more may be referred to as a long press, and the count button being on for measuring less than 500 ms and then turning off may be referred to as a short press.

As described above, in the second embodiment, there are count button state = 2 and count button state = 3 as count button states corresponding to a long press, and count button state = 2 corresponds to the first count (count of 50 sheets) in a long press, and count button state = 3 corresponds to the second and subsequent counts (count of 50 sheets) in a long press. With this configuration, counting is performed when the count button is turned on for 500 ms for the first long press, whereas counting is performed when the count button is turned on for 300 ms for the second and subsequent long presses. Also, if the count button is turned on for 500 ms or more in the first long press, counting of 50 sheets is performed at the set timing of the next count notification even if the count button is turned off, whereas counting is not performed at the set timing of the next count notification for the second and subsequent long presses if the count button is turned off before the set timing of the count notification.

By configuring it in this way, the first long press reliably executes counting based on the player's intention to execute counting, while the second and subsequent long presses prevent a situation in which counting is executed at the set timing of the count notification even if the player has stopped pressing the count button because they want to end the counting, making it possible to configure the counting process to be executed based on the player's intention.

In the second embodiment, the operation status of the counting button can be understood from the counting button state, but this is not limited to this, and the operation status of the counting button can also be understood from a flag corresponding to the counting button state.

The counting control process is included in the timer interrupt process, and is therefore executed at predetermined time intervals. The counting control process is sometimes referred to as counting process. The counting button state is sometimes referred to as the counting switch state, and setting the counting button state is sometimes referred to as the counting button state being stored. The number of counted medals, 50, which corresponds to counting button states 2 and 3, is sometimes referred to as the predetermined value.

Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the loan notification reception process related to the subroutine of step 5400 of FIG. 82 in the second embodiment. First, in step 5402, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the loan notification has been received normally. If the answer is Yes in step 5402, in step 5450, a communication abnormality check process described below is executed. Next, in step 5404, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the received loan notification is within the normal reception range. Here, the normal reception range refers to whether the timing at which the payout control board H receives the loan notification transmitted from the loan machine is within a normal range. As an example, the system may be configured to determine that the loan notification is within the normal reception range if the time elapsed from the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification is within the range of 100 ms to 250 ms.

If the answer is Yes at step 5404, execute the processing of step 5500 described below and proceed to the next processing (processing of step 5108).

Also, if the answer is No in step 5402 or step 5404, in step 5406, the CPUC200 of the dispensing control board H clears the loan notification receiving buffer and proceeds to the next process (processing in step 5108).

Next, FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the communication abnormality check process related to the subroutine of step 5450 of FIG. 88 in the second embodiment. First, in step 5452, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H adds 1 to the counter value of the loan notification reception counter. As described above, the loan notification reception counter is added to the counter value by the process of step 5452 in FIG. 89, which is executed after receiving the loan notification, and then cleared in step 5218 in FIG. 84, which is the set timing of the gaming machine information notification. In the second embodiment, the payout control board H is configured to receive the loan notification approximately every 300 ms, so that when the gaming machine and the loan machine are operating normally, the counter value of the loan notification reception counter is configured to transition as follows: "0 → 1 → 0 → 1 → 0...". Note that the maximum counter value of the loan notification reception counter is 2, and even if the addition process of step 5452 is executed when the counter value is 2, the counter value is configured to remain 2.

Next, in step 5454, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether the counter value of the loan notification reception counter is not 1. If the answer is Yes in step 5454, in step 5456, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H turns on the communication abnormality 2 flag and proceeds to step 5458. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 5454, the process proceeds to step 5458 without executing the processing of step 5456.

Next, in step 5458, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the reception range of the received loan notification is abnormal. As described above, the CPUC 200 is configured to determine that the reception range is abnormal if the timing at which the loan notification is received is not within a normal range. As an example, the CPUC 200 may be configured to determine that the reception range is abnormal if the loan notification is received when the time elapsed from the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification is outside the range of 100 ms to 250 ms.

If the answer is Yes in step 5458, then in step 5460, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H turns on the communication error 3 flag and proceeds to step 5462. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 5458, then the process proceeds to step 5462 without executing the process of step 5460.

Next, in step 5462, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the stored number of loaned medals is greater than 50. If the answer is Yes in step 5462, in step 5464, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H turns on the communication error 4 flag and proceeds to step 5466. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 5462, the process of step 5464 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 5466. Note that the number of loaned medals, 50, in step 5462 is the upper limit for the number of loaned medals in one loan process, and it can be changed without any problems. Note that the number of loaned medals is sometimes referred to as the loan number.

Next, in step 5466, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the stored number of loaned medals is not 0. If the answer is Yes in step 5466, in step 5468, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the response permission flag is off. If the answer is Yes in step 5468, in step 5470, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H turns on the communication error 5 flag and proceeds to step 5472. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 5468, the process proceeds to step 5472 without executing the processing of step 5470.

The process of turning on the communication anomaly 5 flag in step 5470 is sometimes referred to as specific anomaly processing or third anomaly processing.

Next, in step 5472, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the stored counted medal number is not 0. If the answer is Yes in step 5472, in step 5474, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H turns on the communication error 6 flag and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 5404). Also, if the answer is No in step 5466 or step 5472, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 5404).

The process of turning on the communication anomaly 6 flag in step 5474 is sometimes referred to as the fourth anomaly process.

As mentioned above, in the second embodiment, there are six types of communication abnormalities between the dispensing control board H and the dispenser machine, communication abnormality 1 through communication abnormality 6, and the communication abnormality flag (communication abnormality 1 flag through communication abnormality 6 flag) is turned on in response to the communication abnormality that has occurred. The contents of the communication abnormality are described in detail below.

<Communication Error 1>
At the set timing of the gaming machine information notification (while the gaming machine information management process is being executed), if the number of times a loan notification has been received since the previous set timing of the gaming machine information notification is not one (the counter value of the loan notification reception counter is not 1), the communication abnormality 1 flag is turned on.

<Communication Error 2>
At the time when the loan notification is received (while the communication abnormality check process is being executed), if the number of times a loan notification has been received since the set timing of the previous gaming machine information notification is not one (the counter value of the loan notification reception counter is not 1), the communication abnormality 2 flag is turned on.

<Communication Error 3>
If, at the time when the loan notification is received (while the communication abnormality check process is being executed), the time that has elapsed from the set timing of the previous gaming machine information notification to the time when the loan notification is received is not within the normal range (e.g., 100 to 250 ms), the communication abnormality 3 flag will be turned on.

<Communication Error 4>
If the number of stored loaned medals exceeds the upper limit (50 in this example) at the time the loan notification is received (while the communication abnormality check process is being executed), the communication abnormality 4 flag will be turned on.

<Communication Error 5>
If the number of stored loan medals is not 0 and the response permission flag is off at the time when the loan notification is received (during execution of the communication abnormality check process), the communication abnormality 5 flag is turned on. Note that the response permission flag is determined to be off in step 5468 when, for example, the loan notification is received outside the period from when the response permission flag is turned on in step 5256 in FIG. 85 until when the response permission flag is turned off in step 5210 in FIG. 84.

<Communication Error 6>
If the stored number of loaned medals is not 0 and the stored number of counted medals is not 0 at the time the loan notification is received (during execution of the communication error check process), the communication error 6 flag is turned on. Note that if the stored number of loaned medals is not 0 and the stored number of counted medals is not 0, the communication error 6 flag is turned on even if the response permission flag is on.

<Lending notification reception counter>
The lending notification reception counter is incremented by 1 when a lending notification is received from the lending machine (processing of step 5452 in FIG. 89) and cleared at the set timing of the gaming machine information notification (processing of step 5218 in FIG. 84). At step 5214 in FIG. 84, which is the set timing of the gaming machine information notification, and at step 5454 in FIG. 89, which is the reception timing of the lending notification, it is determined whether the counter value of the lending notification reception counter is normal or not, and if the counter value of the lending notification reception counter is not normal (not 1), an abnormality process according to each timing is executed (an error is set). More specifically, at step 5214 in FIG. 84, which is the set timing of the gaming machine information notification, if the counter value of the lending notification reception counter is not normal (not 1), communication abnormality 1 is set (communication abnormality 1 flag is turned on), and at step 5454 in FIG. 89, which is the reception timing of the lending notification, if the counter value of the lending notification reception counter is not normal (not 1), communication abnormality 2 is set (communication abnormality 2 flag is turned on).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine the occurrence of multiple types of abnormalities using a single counter, the loan notification reception counter, thereby reducing the program size and making processing more lightweight.

In addition, the system is configured to determine that any rental notification received outside the response permitted period is abnormal regardless of the content of the rental notification, making the gaming machine more resistant to fraud.

The loan notification reception counter may be referred to as a specified counter, the process of turning on the communication anomaly 1 flag in step 5216 of FIG. 84 may be referred to as the first anomaly process, and the process of turning on the communication anomaly 2 flag in step 5456 of FIG. 89 may be referred to as the second anomaly process.

Next, FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the loan control process related to the subroutine of step 5500 in FIG. 88 in the second embodiment. First, in step 5502, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the checksum of the received loan notification is normal. Note that the checksum determined in step 5502 may be the sum of the message length, command, loan serial number, and number of loaned medals in the loan notification.

If the answer is Yes in step 5502, then in step 5504, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H acquires the loan serial number stored in the gaming machine. Next, in step 5506, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H adds 1 to the loan serial number acquired in step 5504. Next, in step 5508, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the loan serial number calculated in step 5506 is not 0. If the answer is Yes in step 5508, the process proceeds to step 5510. Also, if the answer is No in step 5508, in other words, if the loan serial number calculated in step 5506 is 0, then the process proceeds to step 5506, and the processing of steps 5506 to 5508 is executed again.

In this way, in the second embodiment, after adding 1 to the loan serial number (updating the loan serial number) in step 5506, if the loan serial number is 0, the system is configured to add 1 to the loan serial number again in step 5506 (updating the loan serial number).

If the answer is Yes in step 5508, in step 5510, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H determines whether the loan serial number is normal. Here, in step 5510, it is configured to determine whether the loan serial number calculated in step 5506 matches the loan serial number in the received loan notification, and if they match, it is determined that the loan serial number is normal.

If the answer is Yes in step 5510, then in step 5512 the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the number of loaned medals is not 0. If the answer is Yes in step 5512, then in step 5514 the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the response permission flag is on. If the answer is Yes in step 5514, then in step 5516 the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the counted medal number is 0. If the answer is Yes in step 5516, then in step 5518 the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H determines whether the number of loaned medals is less than 51. In the second embodiment, the upper limit for the number of loaned medals is 50, and if the number of loaned medals is 51 or more, then it is determined that an abnormality has occurred because the upper limit has been exceeded.

If the answer is Yes in step 5518, in step 5520, the CPUC200 of the payout control board H determines whether the number of game medals is less than 15,000. Note that in the second embodiment, it is determined in step 5520 whether the number of game medals is less than 15,000, but the number of game medals may be a value other than 15,000.

If the answer is Yes in step 5520, then in step 5522, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H adds the number of loaned medals to the number of game medals. Next, in step 5524, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H saves the result of the addition in step 5522 as the number of game medals, and proceeds to step 5526. Also, if the answer is No in step 5512, then proceeds to step 5526.

Next, in step 5526, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H stores the loan serial number. Next, in step 5528, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H stores normal in the loan medal count reception result (stores a value corresponding to normal) and proceeds to step 5532. Also, if the answer is No in step 5502, step 5510, step 5514, step 5516, step 5518, or step 5520, in step 5530, the CPUC 200 of the payout control board H stores abnormal in the loan medal count reception result (stores a value corresponding to abnormal) and proceeds to step 5532.

Here, the loaned medal count receipt result is data included in the loaned medal count receipt result response sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, and is configured to store a value corresponding to normality or an abnormality.

The process of storing an abnormality in the loaned medal count receipt result in step 5530 is sometimes referred to as specified abnormality processing.

Next, in step 5532, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H sets a loan receipt result response. Next, in step 5534, the CPUC 200 of the dispensing control board H clears the loan notification receiving buffer and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 5108).

In this way, in the second embodiment, if a specific condition is met when a loan notification is received (or when a loan receipt result response is sent), it is determined that there is an abnormality, and the abnormality is saved in the loan medal count receipt result as a process to deal with the abnormality. An example of a specific condition for determining that there is an abnormality is configured as follows:

(1) If the loan serial number is not normal (the loan serial number calculated in step 5506 does not match the loan serial number in the received loan notification), an abnormality is stored in the loan medal count reception result regardless of the loan medal count. (2) If the loan medal count is not 0 and the response permission flag is off, an abnormality is stored in the loan medal count reception result. (3) If the loan medal count is not 0 and the response permission flag is on and the counted medal count is not 0, an abnormality is stored in the loan medal count reception result. (4) If the loan medal count is not 0 and the response permission flag is on and the counted medal count is 0 and the loan medal count is not less than 51, an abnormality is stored in the loan medal count reception result. (5) If the loan medal count is not 0 and the response permission flag is on and the counted medal count is 0 and the loan medal count is less than 51 and the game medal count is not less than 15,000, an abnormality is stored in the loan medal count reception result.

By configuring as described above, various abnormalities related to the lending of game medals can be detected, making the gaming machine more resistant to fraud. As an example, by configuring as described in (2) above, even if the contents of the lending notification are normal, if the lending notification is received during a period in which the response permission flag is off, it can be determined that there is an abnormality, making the gaming machine more resistant to fraud.

<Action on VL Abnormalities>
The medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment may be configured as follows with regard to an error. (1) In a situation where a specific error occurs on the main control board M side, the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid, the acceptance of a bet operation (for example, the acceptance of the max bet button) is invalid, and even if the setting key switch is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is not entered (the acceptance of an operation to enter the setting confirmation mode is invalid). (2) In a situation where a VL abnormality occurs, the acceptance of the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid, the acceptance of a bet operation is invalid, but when the setting key switch is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is entered (the acceptance of an operation to enter the setting confirmation mode is valid). Examples of the specified errors in (1) above include an input request communication error, which occurs when a request command regarding an input (bet) is sent from the main control board M to the payout control board H and the response command corresponding to the request command is not normal; a settlement request communication error, which occurs when a request command regarding a settlement is sent from the main control board M to the payout control board H and the response command corresponding to the request command is not normal; and a payout request communication error, which occurs when a request command regarding a payout is sent from the main control board M to the payout control board H and the response command corresponding to the request command is not normal.

By configuring it as described above, even if a VL abnormality occurs when the power to the medal-less reel-type gaming machine is turned on, the setting value can be checked immediately.

<Message transmission interval>
In the second embodiment, the gaming machine is configured to transmit multiple types of messages (sometimes called commands) to the lending machine, but there are cases where a single type of message is transmitted multiple times. In such cases, it is preferable to transmit the same type of message consecutively at intervals of less than a predetermined time (e.g., 3.9 ms). By configuring in this way, messages transmitted at intervals longer than the predetermined time can be easily identified as different types of messages.

The payout control board H may be referred to as a game value control board, a game value control means, a medal count control board, or a medal count control means. The power interruption recovery data may be referred to as power recovery data. The number of game medals may be referred to as a total game value number or a total score.

<Configuration regarding game stop>
As a configuration applicable to the second embodiment, a configuration may be made in which a game is stopped when a number of game medals that exceeds an expected number is awarded to a player during one business day at an amusement arcade. More specifically, the following configuration may be made. (1) The difference in number of medals obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted (sometimes referred to as IN) from the number of medals paid out (sometimes referred to as OUT) can be calculated for each game. (2) When the difference in number of medals exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 19,000), the game is stopped (sometimes referred to as a stop state). (3) When the power is turned on again, the difference in number of medals is cleared and the stop state is also released. (4) In the stop state, the operation of the bet button (e.g., the max bet button) and the start lever is invalid, and the sub-control board S notifies the player that the game is stopped (e.g., by the performance display device S40, the speaker S20, the LED lamp S10, etc.). (5) If the difference in the number of coins during a bonus such as BB (sometimes called a continuous bonus device) or RB (sometimes called a first type special bonus device) exceeds a specified number, the game will come to a halt after the ongoing bonus ends.

<Conditions for canceling the suspended state>
One or more of the following conditions can be applied as a condition for releasing the stalled state. (1) The stalled state is released when the power is turned on again. (2) The stalled state is released when the power is turned on again and the setting change mode is entered. (3) The stalled state is released when the power is turned on again and a specified RAM clear (which may include a RAM clear related to a RAM check abnormality) is performed. (4) The stalled state is released when a specified operation is performed on one or more specified operating members that can only be operated by the administrator. Note that when the stalled state is released, all information related to the stalled state is cleared.

<Action during BB>
The action when the difference number exceeds a predetermined number during BB may be configured as follows. (1) Even if the difference number exceeds a predetermined number during BB (when the consecutive operation device of the reel is operating) and not during RB (when the first type special reel is not operating), the game will be stopped after BB ends. (2) If the difference number exceeds a predetermined number during BB (when the consecutive operation device of the reel is operating) and RB (when the first type special reel is operating), the game will not be stopped even if the game is then during BB (when the consecutive operation device of the reel is operating) and not during RB (when the first type special reel is not operating), but will be stopped after BB ends.

The number of coins paid out is the number of coins paid out when a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, and the number of coins inserted is the number of coins bet and used to play the game. As a method for calculating the difference in the number of coins, a difference counter may be provided and the counter value of the difference counter may be set to the difference in the number of coins.

<Configuration of advantageous zones>
In the above-described embodiment, the advantageous zone is configured to end and enter the normal zone when the advantageous zone continues for the upper limit number of games, 1500 games, but the upper limit number of games may be changed, and may be set to 3000 games, for example. Also, the upper limit number of games does not need to be set, and in this case, the advantageous zone will not be forcibly ended by the number of continued games, and the advantageous zone can be configured to end only under any ending condition, which can broaden the scope of gaming machine design.

(summary)
Based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments, the following concepts can be extracted (listed): However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and these listed concepts may of course be combined or separated (superordinated), and concepts based on further configurations shown in the above embodiments may be added to these concepts.

There is a demand for a gaming machine that can transmit appropriate information outside the gaming machine or receive information from outside the gaming machine, and there is a demand for establishing a control process for transmitting appropriate information outside the gaming machine or receiving information from outside the gaming machine (Patent Publication No. 2017-182215).

A gaming machine having the following configuration can transmit appropriate information outside the gaming machine or receive information from outside the gaming machine, and can establish a control process for transmitting appropriate information outside the gaming machine or receiving information from outside the gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1) is
Reel and
Stop switch and
The start switch and
In a gaming machine having a memory means capable of storing a serial number,
The lottery result can be determined based on the operation of the start switch,
The gaming machine is configured to be capable of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine,
The predetermined information includes at least a serial number,
A special addition process for adding "1" to the value stored in the storage means can be executed;
When the special addition process is executed when N (N is a value less than 255) is stored in the storage means, "N+1" is stored in the storage means, and when the special addition process is executed when M (M is 255) is stored in the storage means, "1" is stored in the storage means.
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the power is turned on after being turned off, "0" is stored in the storage means.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A2) is
Reel and
Stop switch and
The start switch and
In a gaming machine having a memory means capable of storing a serial number,
The lottery result can be determined based on the operation of the start switch,
The gaming machine is configured to be capable of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine,
The predetermined information includes at least a serial number,
The serial number stored in the storage means can be updated after the predetermined information is output,
When the power is turned on after being turned off, "0" is stored in the storage means,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the power is on, the value stored in the memory means is cyclically updated from "1" to "M (M is an integer equal to or greater than 2)."

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3) is
Reel and
Stop switch and
In a gaming machine equipped with a start switch,
The lottery result can be determined based on the operation of the start switch,
The gaming machine is configured to be capable of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is configured to be capable of outputting specific information to the outside of the gaming machine,
The types of serial numbers include at least a serial number related to predetermined information and a serial number related to specific information,
The predetermined information includes at least a serial number related to the predetermined information,
The specific information includes at least a serial number relating to the specific information;
The device includes a first storage means for storing a serial number related to predetermined information, and a second storage means for storing a serial number related to specific information, the addresses of the first storage means and the second storage means being consecutive,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the power is turned on after being turned off, "0" is stored in the first storage means and "0" is stored in the second storage means.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4) is
Reel and
Stop switch and
In a gaming machine equipped with a start switch,
The lottery result can be determined based on the operation of the start switch,
The gaming machine is configured to be capable of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine,
The predetermined information includes at least information configured of X (X>1) bytes and checksum information,
The checksum information consists of one byte.
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when calculating checksum information, it is configured to divide information consisting of X bytes into 1-byte units and calculate the information.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A5) is
Reel and
Stop switch and
The start switch and
A gaming machine equipped with a total score display device,
The reel can be rotated based on the operation of the start switch,
When the reels are spinning,
if the points managed by the total point display device are less than a predetermined value, the points can be increased based on the received lending signal;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the points managed by the total point display device are equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the points cannot be added based on the received lending signal.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6) is
Reel and
Stop switch and
In a gaming machine equipped with a start switch,
The reel can be rotated based on the operation of the start switch,
In a predetermined situation where the reels are not spinning, the player is configured to be able to add points based on the received lending signal;
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured such that, while the reels are spinning, the player's own points cannot be added based on the received lending signal.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7) is
Reel and
Stop switch and
In a gaming machine equipped with a start switch,
The lottery result can be determined based on the operation of the start switch,
The device is configured to be capable of receiving a loan notification command from an external device,
The information included in the loan notification command includes at least loan number information,
Under a predetermined situation, when a lending notification command including "0" as the lending number information is received, a betting process based on a betting operation can be executed;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, under specified circumstances, when a loan notification command containing a value of "1" or greater as loan number information is received, bet processing based on a bet operation is not executed until a specified period of time has elapsed from the time of receipt.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8) is
Reel and
Stop switch and
The start switch and
A counting switch;
In a gaming machine equipped with a total score display device,
The lottery result can be determined based on the operation of the start switch,
Even if the operation of the counting switch is accepted between the output of the predetermined information to the outside and the output of the specific information to the outside, and the operation of the counting switch is not accepted thereafter, updating of the score displayed on the total score display device can be started;
This gaming machine is characterized in that the operation of a counting switch is accepted between the output of predetermined information to the outside and the output of specific information to the outside, and even if the operation of the counting switch is no longer accepted thereafter, specific information including counting information can be output to the outside.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9) is
Reel and
Stop switch and
The start switch and
In a gaming machine having a point management means for managing point information,
The reel can be rotated based on the operation of the start switch,
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be capable of transmitting a command including information on points held to an external device multiple times within the period from when the reel starts to rotate until the reel completes one revolution.

There was a demand for a gaming machine that could display necessary information on a performance display device without impeding the progress of the game (Patent Publication No. 2017-202185).

A gaming machine with the following configuration can be configured to display necessary information on the performance display device without impeding the progress of the game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10) is
Reel and
Stop switch and
In a gaming machine equipped with a start switch,
The lottery result can be determined based on the operation of the start switch,
A first storage means capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games in which a reel is in operation or a reel continuous operation device is in operation;
A second storage means capable of storing a value corresponding to a total number of games,
The device is configured to be able to calculate a ratio of a state of a reel, etc., based on a value corresponding to the number of games in which a reel is operating or a reel continuous operating device is operating and a value corresponding to the total number of games,
Under a predetermined condition in which the power is on, even if a value corresponding to the number of times a game has been played in which a role is in operation or a role continuous operation device is in operation, which is stored in the first storage means, is changed due to a predetermined abnormality and becomes a value larger than the value corresponding to the total number of times a game has been played, which is stored in the second storage means, the game can be continued;
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the power is turned off, if a value corresponding to the number of times a game has been played in which a reel or a reel continuous operating device has been operated, which is stored in a first storage means, is changed due to a predetermined abnormality and becomes a value greater than the value corresponding to the total number of times a game has been played, which is stored in a second storage means, then a predetermined error state is entered after the power is turned on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11) is
Reel and
Stop switch and
In a gaming machine equipped with a start switch,
The specific output information can be output to the outside at predetermined time intervals,
The device is configured to be capable of outputting predetermined output information to an outside device after outputting the specific output information and before a predetermined time has elapsed,
The device is configured to be capable of receiving predetermined reception information from an external device after outputting the predetermined output information and before a predetermined time has elapsed,
The device is configured to notify the user of an abnormality when a specific time has elapsed since the previous predetermined reception information was received and the current predetermined reception information has not been received.
This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific time is the sum of a first maximum time, which is the maximum time required from receiving the previous specified reception information to transmitting the current specified output information, and a second maximum time, which is the maximum time required from outputting the current specified output information to receiving the current specified reception information.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12) is
Reel and
Stop switch and
In a gaming machine equipped with a start switch,
The lottery result can be determined based on the operation of the start switch,
The device is configured to be capable of outputting predetermined output information to an external device,
The predetermined output information includes setting change information indicating that the setting is being changed,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the setting change in progress information can be continuously outputted even after the setting change is completed, until a predetermined timing after the setting change is completed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13) is
Reel and
Stop switch and
In a gaming machine equipped with a start switch,
The lottery result can be determined based on the operation of the start switch,
The device is configured to be capable of outputting predetermined information to the outside,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined information is configured to be capable of continuing to be output until a predetermined timing after the processing relating to the predetermined information is completed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14) is
a game value storage means capable of updating the game value storage means according to the number of game values inserted in one game and the number of game values granted to a player in one game;
an output storage means for storing a gaming value number to be output to the outside;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the value of the game value storage means becomes larger than the value of the output storage means, the value of the output storage means can be updated.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15) is
a game value storage means capable of updating the number of game values inserted in one game and the number of game values granted to a player in one game;
an output storage means for storing a gaming value number to be output to the outside;
When the value of the game value storage means becomes larger than the value of the output storage means, the value of the output storage means can be updated;
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the value of the game value storage means and the value of the output storage means can be initialized when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16) is
a game value storage means capable of updating the game value storage means according to the number of game values inserted in one game and the number of game values granted to a player in one game;
an output storage means for storing a gaming value number to be output to the outside;
When the value of the game value storage means becomes larger than the value of the output storage means, the value of the output storage means can be updated;
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the number of game values updated according to the number of game values inserted and the number of game values awarded becomes a negative value, "0" is stored in the game value storage means.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17) is
A main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
a game value number control means that is communicably connected to the main control means and controls the game value number;
The main control means is configured to execute a power-off process after a first period has elapsed since the power was turned off,
The game value control means is configured to execute a power-off process after a second period has elapsed since the power was turned off,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the first period is configured to be shorter than the second period.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18) is
A main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
a game value number control means connected to the main control means so as to be capable of communicating with each other and controlling the game value number;
The main control means is configured to be able to output predetermined information to the game value number control means at a predetermined timing after power is turned on,
The game value control means is configured to be capable of outputting at least predetermined information to the outside,
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the time when the main control means starts processing after power is turned on is longer than the time when the game value number control means starts processing after power is turned on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19) is
A main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
a game value number control means that is communicably connected to the main control means and controls the game value number;
The main control means and the game value control means are configured to start a process after power is turned on when the power is restored after determining that the power has been turned off,
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the time when the main control means starts processing after power is turned on is longer than the time when the game value number control means starts processing after power is turned on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20) is
A main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
a game value number control means that is communicably connected to the main control means and controls the game value number;
The main control means is
A plurality of communication paths including a predetermined communication path and a specific communication path to the game value number control means;
and a communication program for executing communication via the communication path,
The predetermined communication path is configured to be configurable for sending and receiving,
A specific communication path is configured so that only one of transmission and reception can be set,
The communication program is configured to set only one of transmission and reception during communication via a specified communication path in a gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21) is
A main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
a game value number control means that is communicably connected to the main control means and controls the game value number;
The main control means is
A plurality of communication paths including a predetermined communication path and a specific communication path to the game value number control means;
A first program stored in a first control area;
a second program stored in a second control area,
The predetermined communication path is configured to be configurable for sending and receiving,
A specific communication path is configured so that only one of transmission and reception can be set,
the first program is configured to set only one of transmission and reception in a predetermined communication path;
The second program is a gaming machine that is configured to set only one of transmission and reception on a specific communication path.

The gaming machine system according to this aspect (A22) is
A gaming machine;
A gaming machine system including a rental machine that is communicably connected to the gaming machine and that rents out gaming value,
A specific bit of the information used for communication between the gaming machine and the lending machine is configured to be an unused bit that is "0",
This gaming machine system is characterized in that it is configured so that the lending machine does not lend out gaming value when a specific bit is "1".

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A23) is
A game value number storage means for storing a game value number is provided,
In a gaming machine having a counting switch for counting the number of game values stored in a game value storage means,
When a recoverable error occurs, the counting switch is configured to enable counting.
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that counting by the counting switch is not possible when an unrecoverable error occurs.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A24) is
A main control board that controls the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine having an enclosure case in which a main control board is enclosed,
This gaming machine is characterized in that a backup power supply for the main control board is provided outside the enclosure case.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B1) is
A predetermined operating member;
and an internal drawing means;
The total gaming value number can be stored,
When the power supply is newly turned on while the predetermined operation member is being operated, the total game value number is cleared and the first timer is set to an initial value.
a power-off process is executed by detecting an event in which the supply of power is cut off while the first timer is timing, and then, when the power is newly turned on in a state in which the predetermined operating member is not operated, the first timer is cleared;
When it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred in the RAM after the power is newly turned on, the total game value number is cleared and the second timer is set to an initial value.
This gaming machine is characterized by being configured to detect an event in which the power supply is cut off while the second timer is timing, execute power-off processing, and then, when the power is turned on again, set the second timer to an initial value.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B2) is
An internal drawing means is provided,
An interrupt process that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals is executable,
The total gaming value number can be stored,
In the interrupt processing, at least a first processing including a processing related to an increase or decrease in the total game value number and a second processing including a processing related to an increase or decrease in the total game value number executed after the first processing can be executed;
In the first process, if the increase or decrease in the total number of game values during the period from the second process in the previous interrupt process to the first process in the current interrupt process is not within a first range, a predetermined value is set in a predetermined timer;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, in the second processing, if the increase or decrease in the total number of game values during the period from the first processing in the current interrupt processing to the second processing in the current interrupt processing is not within a second range, the specified value is set to the specified timer.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3) is
A counting switch;
and an internal drawing means;
The total gaming value number can be stored,
A part or all of the total number of game values can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.
A counting process that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals is executable,
The counting switch state, which is a state related to the operation status of the counting switch, is configured to be memorizable,
In the counting process, a game value number to be output to the outside of the gaming machine is determined based on the stored counting switch state,
When the counting switch is turned on for a predetermined period of time or more after the counting switch is turned on again, the second state is stored as the counting switch state.
Even if the counting switch is turned off again in a situation where the second state is stored as the counting switch state, the second state is configured to remain stored as the counting switch state until the next counting process is executed,
When a counting process is executed in a situation where the second state is stored as the counting switch state, a third state is stored as the counting switch state,
When the counting switch is newly turned off in a situation where the third state is stored as the counting switch state, the first state is stored as the counting switch state,
When the counting process is executed in a state where the second state is stored as the counting switch state, the number of game values to be output to the outside of the gaming machine can be determined to be a predetermined value,
When the counting process is executed in a state where the third state is stored as the counting switch state, the number of game values to be output to the outside of the gaming machine can be determined to be the predetermined value,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the counting process is executed in a situation where the first state is stored as the counting switch state, the number of game values to be output to the outside of the gaming machine is determined to be "0."

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4) is
An internal drawing means is provided,
The total gaming value number can be stored,
The information regarding the rental can be received from outside the gaming machine,
When information regarding a loan is received from outside the gaming machine, the number of loans included in the information regarding the loan can be added to the total gaming value number,
Predetermined information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine at predetermined time intervals;
A predetermined process for managing information to be output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed.
a predetermined flag is turned on after the predetermined information is output to the outside of the gaming machine;
The predetermined flag is turned off during the execution of the predetermined process,
When information regarding a rental is received from outside the gaming machine, if it is determined that the rental serial number included in the information regarding the rental is normal and the predetermined flag is off, a predetermined abnormality process is executed;
This gaming machine is characterized in that when information regarding loans is received from outside the gaming machine, if the number of loans contained in the information regarding the loans is not 0 and the specified flag is off, the gaming machine is configured to execute a specific abnormality processing.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B5) is
An internal drawing means is provided,
The total gaming value number can be stored,
A part or all of the total number of game values can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.
The information regarding the rental can be received from outside the gaming machine,
When information regarding a loan is received from outside the gaming machine, the number of loans included in the information regarding the loan can be added to the total gaming value number,
A predetermined counter is provided for counting the number of times information regarding lending is received from outside the gaming machine,
Predetermined information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine at predetermined time intervals;
A predetermined process for managing information to be output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed.
a predetermined flag is turned on after the predetermined information is output to the outside of the gaming machine;
The predetermined flag is turned off during the execution of the predetermined process,
a first abnormality process is executed when the counter value of the predetermined counter is not a predetermined value during the execution of the predetermined process,
a second abnormality process is executed when the counter value of the predetermined counter is not the predetermined value when information regarding lending is received from outside the gaming machine;
When information regarding lending is received from outside the gaming machine, if the number of lendings included in the information regarding the lending is not 0 and the predetermined flag is off, a third abnormality process is executed;
This gaming machine is characterized in that when information regarding a loan is received from outside the gaming machine, if the number of loans contained in the information regarding the loan is not 0, the specified flag is on, and a non-zero value is stored as the number of playing values to be output to the outside of the gaming machine, the gaming machine is configured to execute a fourth abnormality processing.

P Slot machine, DU Front door, D Door circuit board, D10s Insertion acceptance sensor, D20s First insertion sensor, D30s Second insertion sensor, D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button, D42 Center stop button, D43 Right stop button, D50 Start lever, D60 Settlement button, D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch, D90 Coin shooter, D100 Blocker, D130 Upper panel, D140 Lower panel, D150 Decorative lamp unit, D160 Reel window, D170 Coin insertion slot, D180 Start lamp, D290 Replay lamp, D300 Insertion possible lamp, D200 Number of credits display device, D210 Number of credits display lamp, D220 Bet button, D230 Coin tray, D240 Discharge port, D250 Special game status display device, D260 Keyhole, D270 Payout number display device (push sequence display device) D280 AT counter value display device M Main control board M20 Setting key switch, M30 Setting/reset button C Main control chip, M50 Reel M51 Left reel, M52 Center reel M53 Right reel, M60 AT counter M70 Minimum play interval timer S Sub-control board, S10 LED lamp S20 Speaker, S30 Reel backlight S40 Performance display device, SC Sub-control chip E Power supply board, E10 Power switch H Medal payout device, H10s First payout sensor H20s Second payout sensor, H40 Hopper H50 Disk, H50a Disk rotation shaft H60 Game medal outlet, H70 Release energizing means H80 Hopper motor S50 Bet button lamp, S60 Stop button lamp K Reel board, K10 Reel motor K20 Reel sensor IN Relay board, SB Sub input button KHc High security obstacle counter, YKc-1 Advantageous zone remaining game number counter HS Medal auxiliary tank, DE Full detection electrode M Main control board M40 Main board case CPU MC Microprocessor, SH Performance display device SH10 Identification segment, SH20 Ratio segment

Claims (1)

A predetermined operating member;
and an internal drawing means;
The total gaming value number can be stored,
When the power supply is newly turned on while the predetermined operation member is being operated, the total game value number is cleared and the first timer is set to an initial value.
a power-off process is executed by detecting an event in which the supply of power is cut off while the first timer is timing, and then, when the power is newly turned on in a state in which the predetermined operating member is not operated, the first timer is cleared;
When it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred in the RAM after the power is newly turned on, the total game value number is cleared and the second timer is set to an initial value.
A gaming machine characterized by being configured to detect an event in which the power supply is cut off while the second timer is timing, execute power-off processing, and then, when the power is turned on again, set an initial value to the second timer.

Images